HomeMy WebLinkAboutOrdinance 5789ORDINANCE NO. 5789
AN ORDINANCE TO REPEAL CHAPTER 171 STREETS AND SIDEWALKS
AND ENACT A REPLACEMENT CHAPTER 171, STREET AND
SIDEWALKS OF THE UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE
WHEREAS, it is proper and appropriate for the City Council to enact a Purpose section to
Chapter 171, Streets and Sidewalks and to better define and clarify "retaining wall'; and
WHEREAS, the Minimum Street Standards manual needed to be updated from its 1996 version
and be adopted as a technical supplement of the Street and Sidewalks Chapter; and
WHEREAS, certain technical criteria for street and sidewalk construction should be moved from
this chapter and placed with the newly adopted Minimum Street Standards manual.
NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF
FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS:
Section 1. That the City Council of the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas hereby repeals the existing
Chapter 171, Streets and Sidewalks and enacts a replacement Chapter 171, Streets and
Sidewalks along with the replacement Minimum Street Standards manual of the Unified
Development Code as attached as Exhibit A.
PASSED and APPROVED this 4`h day of August, 2015.
ATTEST:
SONDRA E. SMITH, City Clerl
-- City of Fayetteville, Arkansas 113 West Mountain Street
Fayetteville, AR 72701
_ 1 (479)575-9323
i,
Idq"> Text File
File Number: 2015-0326
Agenda Date: 8/4/2015 Version: 1 Status: Passed
In Control: City Council Meeting File Type: Ordinance
Agenda Number: C. 5
REPEAL CHAPTER 171 STREETS AND SIDEWALKS
AN ORDINANCE TO REPEAL CHAPTER 171 STREET AND SIDEWALKS AND ENACT A
REPLACEMENT CHAPTER 171, STREETS AND SIDEWALKS OF THE UNIFIED
DEVELOPMENT CODE
WHEREAS, it is proper and appropriate for the City Council to enact a Purpose section to Chapter
171, Streets and Sidewalks and to better define and clarify "retaining wall'; and
WHEREAS, the Minimum Street Standards manual needed to be updated from its 1996 version and be
adopted as a technical supplement of the Street and Sidewalks Chapter; and
WHEREAS, certain technical criteria for street and sidewalk construction should be moved from this
chapter and placed with the newly adopted Minimum Street Standards manual.
NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF
FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS:
Section 1. That the City Council of the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas hereby repeals the existing
Chapter 171, Streets and Sidewalks and enacts a replacement Chapter 171, Streets and Sidewalks
along with the replacement Minimum Street Standards manual of the Unified Development Code as
attached as Exhibit A.
City of Fayetteville, Arkansas Page 1 e Printed on 9129/2015
August 2015
Minimum Street Standards
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION
Chapter 1. General Provisions
Chapter 2. Submittal and Review Procedures
Chapter 3. Construction Plans Submittal Requirements
DESIGN
Chapter 4.
Street Design And Technical Criteria
Chapter 5.
Intersections
Chapter 6.
Pavement Structure and Materials
Chapter 7.
Traffic Control Devices
Chapter 8.
Pedestrian Facilities Design & Technical Criteria
Chapter 9.
On Street Bicycle Facilities Design & Technical
Criteria
Chapter 10.
Neighborhood Traffic Safety
CONSTRUCTION
Chapter 11. Street Inspection and Testing Procedures
Chapter 12. Acceptance/Warranty Procedures and Record
Drawings
M
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
1.1
AUTHORITY OF THIS DOCUMENT.........................................................3
1.2
INTENT AND PROVISIONS......................................................................3
1.2.1
Objectives of Street Standards.................................................................3
A. Minimum Standards...............................................................................3
B. Objectives..............................................................................................
3
1.3
RESOURCE STANDARDS.......................................................................4
A. List of Resource Standards for Reference.............................................4
1.4
AUTHORITY OF THE CITY ENGINEER...................................................5
1.5
ENFORCEMENT RESPONSIBILITY.........................................................5
1.6
AMENDMENTS AND REVISIONS TO STANDARDS...............................5
1.7
DEFINITIONS OF TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS..................................5
1.8
INTERPRETATION OF STANDARDS....................................................12
1.8.1
Governing Standards..............................................................................12
1.8.2
Prior Acceptance of Construction Plans...............................................12
1.9
VARIANCES AND APPEALS.................................................................12
1.9.1
Variances..................................................................................................12
1.9.2
Appeals.....................................................................................................13
1.10
WORK SCHEDULE.................................................................................13
1.11
UTILITY COORDINATION.......................................................................14
LIST OF TABLES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Tables
LIST OF FIGURES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Figures
M
Minimum Street Standards
"r —*
.+1s"
1-2
Ipsu
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
1.1
AUTHORITY OF THIS DOCUMENT.........................................................3
1.2
INTENT AND PROVISIONS......................................................................3
1.2.1
Objectives of Street Standards.................................................................3
A. Minimum Standards...............................................................................3
B. Objectives..............................................................................................
3
1.3
RESOURCE STANDARDS.......................................................................4
A. List of Resource Standards for Reference.............................................4
1.4
AUTHORITY OF THE CITY ENGINEER...................................................5
1.5
ENFORCEMENT RESPONSIBILITY.........................................................5
1.6
AMENDMENTS AND REVISIONS TO STANDARDS...............................5
1.7
DEFINITIONS OF TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS..................................5
1.8
INTERPRETATION OF STANDARDS....................................................12
1.8.1
Governing Standards..............................................................................12
1.8.2
Prior Acceptance of Construction Plans...............................................12
1.9
VARIANCES AND APPEALS.................................................................12
1.9.1
Variances..................................................................................................12
1.9.2
Appeals.....................................................................................................13
1.10
WORK SCHEDULE.................................................................................13
1.11
UTILITY COORDINATION.......................................................................14
LIST OF TABLES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Tables
LIST OF FIGURES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Figures
Chapter 1 — General Provisions
Ipsu
Minimum Street Standards
Chapter 1 — General Provisions
Ipsu
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 AUTHORITY OF THIS DOCUMENT
This document adopted as Exhibit A of Ordinance 5789 of the City of
Fayetteville, provides technical procedures and design standards to support
Chapter 171: Streets and Sidewalks and other applicable Chapters of the Title XV
Unified Development Code (UDC).
1.2 INTENT AND PROVISIONS
These Standards shall be required for all development projects within the
jurisdiction of the City of Fayetteville. The City's review and approval of any
plans, reports, or drawings or the City's inspection and approval of any
improvements constructed by the Developer in accordance with these Standards,
does not constitute a representation, warranty, or guarantee by the City that such
improvements are free from defects or will operate adequately for the purpose
intended. These Standards shall also be used as a guidance document for projects
to be constructed by the City, including construction by City crews.
The chapters and appendices that make up these standards pertain to planning,
design, approval, construction, inspection, testing, and documentation of street
improvements. The intent of this manual is to establish the minimum acceptable
standards.
These Standards are a supplement to the City of Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
Title XV Unified Development Code and other Ordinances. Where conflict
between these Standards and City Code exists, the Code shall govern.
1.2.1 Objectives of Street Standards
A. Minimum Standards
These Standards shall be the minimum standards necessary for design and
construction of all street improvements required for development projects
within the jurisdiction of the City of Fayetteville. Special situations as
determined by the City may require different facilities and/or standards. For
items not covered by these Standards, the City may require the use of resource
standards in Section 1.3 below.
B. Objectives
It is the objective of these Minimum Street Standards to address the following:
Chapter 1 — General Provisions
Ipsu
Minimum Street Standards
1. Public Safety and Convenience. To protect the public health, safety, and
welfare and to minimize public inconvenience resulting from construction
and maintenance activities within the public rights -of -way.
2. Maintaining Public Use. To assure that bicycle, pedestrian and vehicular
uses of rights -of -way are the primary uses thereof and that the rights -of -
way are properly maintained during construction and repair work in these
areas.
3. Standardizing Criteria. To protect the City's infrastructure investment by
establishing standardized design, materials, construction, and repair
criteria for all public improvements.
4. Optimizing Use. To optimize the use of the limited physical capacity of
public rights -of -way held by the City.
5. Protecting Private Property. To protect private property from damages that
could occur because of faulty design and construction of public
improvements upon public rights -of -way and easements.
6. Inspection. To provide criteria for inspection of public and private
improvements, by the City or Design Engineer's designated inspector, in
order to assure conformance with approved plan's uniformity, proper
construction techniques, and to ensure that acceptable materials are used
for the construction process of such public and/or private improvements.
1.3 RESOURCE STANDARDS
The following Resource Standards (the latest editions unless otherwise stated)
may be used as reference material when certain design or construction methods
and materials are not specifically addressed in these Standards and require
approval of the City Engineer.
A. List of Resource Standards for Reference
1. Arkansas State Highway and Transportation Department, Standard
Specifications for Highway Construction (Latest Edition unless otherwise
specified).
2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, A
Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets.
3. Institute of Traffic Engineers (ITE), Trip Generation Volumes 1 through 3.
4. Institute of Traffic Engineers (ITE), Designing Walkable Urban
Thoroughfares: A Context Sensitive Approach
5. Institute of Traffic Engineers, Highway Capacity Manual.
6. ASTM, American Society for Testing and Materials.
7. Federal Americans with Disabilities Act, (A.D.A.) Regulations.
8. U.S. Department of Transportation, Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices (M.U.T.C.D.)
-
Chapter 1 — General Provisions
Ipsu
Minimum Street Standards
9. Federal Highway Administration, Roundabouts: An Informational Guide.
10. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials,
Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities.
11. Standard Specifications for Transportations Materials and Methods of
Sampling and Testing and AASHTO Provisional Standards.
12. City of Fayetteville standard drawings, details and specifications when
available.
13. National Association of City Transportation Officials (NACTO) Urban
Bikeway Design Guide
1.4 AUTHORITY OF THE CITY ENGINEER
The City Engineer shall have the authority on behalf of the City to determine that
all design and construction is completed to a level that is equal to or exceeds the
requirements set forth in these Minimum Street Standards.
1.5 ENFORCEMENT RESPONSIBILITY
It shall be the duty of the City Engineer acting on behalf of the City of
Fayetteville to enforce the provisions of these Minimum Street Standards.
1.6 AMENDMENTS AND REVISIONS TO STANDARDS
These Standards may be periodically amended as necessary to provide additional
clarity or to reflect changes in policy or in construction or engineering practice.
Technical revisions shall consist of such additions, revisions, and corrections to
these Standards as may, in the judgment of the City Engineer, be necessary to
better conform to good engineering and/or construction standards and practice.
The City Engineer shall approve only those proposed technical revisions that are
consistent with all existing policies relevant to the revision and are consistent with
existing law. Technical revisions shall become effective when approved, in
writing, by the City Engineer.
1.7 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
When the following words, phrases, or abbreviations appear in these Standards,
they shall have the following definition and meaning. Where conflict between
these Standards and Chapter 151 :Definitions in the Unified Development Code
exists, the Code shall govern.
Chapter 1 — General Provisions
Ipsu
Minimum Street Standards
AASHTO — American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.
ABC — Aggregate Base Course.
Access Management — The concept of a public agency controlling the location of access
points in order to achieve the dual purposes of providing access to individual land uses
and limiting access on higher order streets in order to facilitate the smooth flow of traffic
with a limited amount of impedance.
ACI — American Concrete Institute.
ADH — Arkansas Department of Health
AHTD — Arkansas State Highway and Transportation Department
AISC — American Institute of Steel Construction.
Alley — A minor public way dedicated to public use for utility easements and vehicle
access to the back or the side of properties abutting a street.
ANSI — American National Standards Institute.
Applicant — The person or designated agent providing pertinent information for
preparation of permit, etc. This is often the Developer.
Approach Taper — A taper from the point where all approaching traffic must shift
laterally, to the point of the beginning bay taper.
APWA — American Public Works Association.
Arterials — A street or road of considerable continuity which serves or is intended to
serve as the principal traffic way between separated areas or districts which is the main
means of access to the primary street system or expressways.
ASA — American Standards Association.
ASTM — American Society for Testing and Materials.
ATSSA — American Traffic Safety Services Association.
Attached Sidewalk — Sidewalk that is adjoining the curb.
Bay Taper — A taper from the edge of the adjacent through traffic lane to the beginning
of the full width of the turn lane storage.
Bicycle Facilities — A general term denoting improvements and provisions made by
public agencies to accommodate or encourage bicycling, including parking facilities,
mapping of all bikeways, and shared roadways not specifically designated for bicycle
use.
Bicycle Lane (Bike Lane) — The portion of the shoulder or roadway that has been
designated by striping, signing, and pavement markings for the preferential or exclusive
use of bicyclists.
Bridge — Any structure conveying a roadway or path over a body of water or other
feature. Bridges shall be designed to carry a varying combination of loading, including
vehicular, bicycle, and/or pedestrian traffic.
Calendar Day — Each and every day shown on the calendar, beginning and ending at
midnight.
Chicanes — Offset curb extensions which change the path of vehicular travel from
straight to curvilinear.
Chapter 1 — General Provisions
Ipsu
Minimum Street Standards
City — The City of Fayetteville, Arkansas
CMP — Corrugated Metal Pipe.
Code — The latest official adopted ordinances, policies, codes, and/or regulations of the
City of Fayetteville.
Collector — A street which in addition to serving abutting properties, intercepts minor
streets, connects with community facilities and carries neighborhood traffic to the major
arterial street system.
Construction Costs — Generally, the cost of all right-of-way, earthwork, paving,
drainage, structures, signing and striping, traffic control, curb and gutter, sidewalk, and
utility work necessary to complete the required improvements.
Consultant Engineer — An Arkansas licensed professional engineer working on behalf
of the Developer.
Continuity — The continuous length of a roadway segment that is uninterrupted by 90
degree turns or controlled intersections.
Contract Documents — The executed contract agreement, approved plans, and technical
specifications, prepared by an Arkansas licensed professional engineer, for constructing a
facility.
Contractor — The person, firm, or organization to whom a construction contract is
awarded by the Developer or City. Agents, employees, workers, or designers employed
by the Contractor are also bound by the terms of the contract or permit.
Corner Sight Distance — The distance necessary for the driver of a motor vehicle
stopped at a stop sign on a Minor Street or driveway to see approaching vehicles,
pedestrians, and bicyclists along the intersecting major street and have sufficient space to
make any allowed move to cross the Major Street or merge with traffic on the Major
Street without causing vehicles, pedestrians, or bicyclists traveling at or near the design
speed on the major street to slow down. The controlling distance for design is the longest
distance, generally the distance necessary to merge with traffic.
Cross Slope — Slope of the pavement surface, excluding gutter, measured perpendicular
to the street centerline.
Days — Intended as calendar days and not working days unless stipulated as working
days.
Deceleration Lane — A right -turn lane or left turn lane lengthened to provide for safe
reduction of travel speed.
Departure Taper — A left -turn bay from the point where through traffic beyond the
intersection begins a lateral shift to the left to the point where the through lane is adjacent
and parallel to the centerline.
Design Speed — The speed determined for design which takes into account the physical
features of a street influencing vehicle operation; the maximum safe speed maintainable
on a specified section of street when conditions permit design features to govern. Design
speed is normally 5 to 10 mph higher than the posted speed limit to provide a factor of
safety and allow for other conditions or uses of the street that may affect vehicle
operation.
-
Chapter 1 — General Provisions
Ipsu
Minimum Street Standards
Designer — The person or company responsible for the creation and submission of
contract documents or construction plans for the purpose of one-time construction of a
facility. This person shall be an Arkansas licensed professional engineer.
Developer — Any person(s), parties, partnerships, or corporations, private or public,
engaging in activities described as development.
Development — Shall include, but shall not be limited to, the construction of a new
improvement, the construction of an addition to an existing improvement, or a parceling
which results in the need for access and utilities.
Driveway — A private access from a public or private roadway.
Driveway Approach — The portion of the driveway lying in the public right-of-way or
public access easement between the street gutter lip or roadway of a public street and the
right-of-way or public access easement line, for the full width of the access, including
both apron and side slopes.
Engineer of Record - The person or company responsible for the creation and
submission of contract documents or construction plans for the purpose of one-time
construction of a facility. This person shall be an Arkansas licensed professional
engineer.
FEMA — Federal Emergency Management Agency.
Fence — An artificially constructed barrier of wood, masonry, stone, wire, metal, or other
manufactured material, or combination of materials, erected to enclose, partition,
beautify, mark, or screen areas of real property.
FHWA — Federal Highway Administration, Department of Transportation.
Final Acceptance — The written notification from the City, after the City Engineer finds
the Warranty Period to be satisfactorily completed, that all public improvements are free
of defects and the City releases the Developer from future maintenance obligations.
FIRM — Flood Insurance Rate Map.
Franchise Agreement — An agreement between the City and certain private utility
companies, specifying terms and conditions for use of the City's public rights -of -way or
other public lands.
Frontage — The property line or lines of a lot which coincide with a right-of-way or other
public open space.
Greenspace — Area of right-of-way between the face of the curb and the sidewalk.
HMA — Hot Mix Asphalt
HHOD — Hillside Hilltop Overlay District
Improvements — All public or private improvements within City rights -of -way or
easements.
Initial Acceptance — This is the City's document and process, by which the City initially
accepts for ownership, maintenance, and warranty the public improvements identified in
the approved plans for a specific project.
Inspector — An authorized representative of the Design Engineer, assigned to make
inspections to assure work is completed in compliance with plans, standards and
specifications.
-
Chapter 1 — General Provisions
EJ
Ipsu
Minimum Street Standards
Intersection Nose — The radius or distance from the end of the storage bay to the near
edge of the cross -route exit lane for the left -turning vehicle. For left -turn bays the cross -
route exit reference is normally the centerline of an unchannelized 2 -way street or the far
edge of the median in a channelized street.
Intersection Sight Distance — Refer to Corner Sight Distance.
"Issued for Construction" Plans — Design plans that conform to these Standards and are
signed and stamped by the Designer, ready for distribution to the Contractor for
construction.
ITE - Institute of Transportation Engineers.
Landscaping — The area within the boundaries of a given lot which consists of planting
materials, including but not limited to trees, shrubs, ground covers, grass, flowers,
decorative rock, bark, mulch, and other similar materials.
Knuckle — A bulb or semi -circular extension of a curb on the outside edge of a street or
at an "L" turn to provide more street frontage for adjacent lots.
Lane Width — The width of a travel lane measured from the centerline of the lane
striping to the centerline of the parallel lane stripe, the face of curb, or to the lip of gutter,
whichever is applicable.
Lift — The maximum specified thickness of material that may be placed at one time.
Lip — Defines the outermost edge of the gutter pan.
Local Streets — All street facilities that are not in one of the higher systems. Their
primary purpose is to provide direct access to abutting lands and connections to the
higher classification streets.
Mini -Roundabout — Elevated circular islands placed in the center of a street intersection
to reduce vehicular travel speeds by requiring the motorist to travel in a counter
clockwise direction around the circular island.
MSP - Master Street Plan
MUTCD — Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.
Neckdowns — A narrowing of the roadway for traffic calming at intersections or mid -
block.
Neighborhood — A residential or commercial area defined by ordinance, resolution or
common understanding.
Opinion of Cost (Cost Estimate) — Unit costs, based on those approved by the City and
assigned to materials and related quantities.
Ordinance — A law established by the City Council.
OSHA — Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
P.C. — Point of curvature.
P.C.R. — Point of curb return.
Pedestrian Walkway — A public facility for pedestrian traffic either within the right-of-
way of the vehicular traffic roadway or within a public easement (e.g., public tunnels).
Permittee — The holder of a valid permit issued in accordance with these Standards or
other City related process.
-
Chapter 1 — General Provisions
Ipsu
Minimum Street Standards
Phasing Plan — A plan that defines improvements to be completed in specified parts over
a defined sequence.
P.I. — Point of intersection.
Plans — Construction plans signed by the City depicting public improvements to be
constructed for the project.
Pre -Construction Meeting — A meeting between the Designer and assigned agents and
the City to review proposed work necessary to construct the project, prior to proceeding
with the work. A meeting may be required for each project, at the City's discretion.
Professional Engineer (P.E.) — An Arkansas licensed professional engineer.
Professional Land Surveyor (P.L.S.) — An Arkansas licensed land surveyor.
Project — The public or private improvement(s) designated in the approved plans, which
are to be constructed in conformance with these Standards. The term "Project" includes
any and all public or private improvement projects whether development projects, private
utility projects, or capital improvement projects.
Project Supervisor — The person appointed by the Developer or Contractor for
management and control of the work on the project as performed by the Contractor and
Subcontractors.
Proposed Roadway Improvements — Those roadway improvements deemed necessary
due to the impact of the project development.
P.T. — Point of tangency.
Public Improvements — Those public -type facilities to include: pavement, curb and
gutter, sidewalk, pedestrian/bike paths, storm drain facilities with related appurtenances,
culverts, channels, bridges, water distribution or transmission facilities with related
appurtenances, sanitary sewer collection facilities with related appurtenances, water and
waste water treatment facilities, pavement markings, signage and striping, traffic signals
and related appurtenances, erosion control and right-of-way grading, or earth excavation
processes integral to construction of other public improvements listed herein.
Punch list, Initial or Final — A written list of work items, compiled by the Inspector,
which do not conform to these Standards, the plans or other associated City Codes that
govern the project.
Raised Crosswalk — A roadway crossing that slightly elevates the pedestrian crossing
surface above the general roadway surface. A raised crosswalk is a traffic calming
device.
Record Drawings — (Also As -Built Plans) Original design drawings updated by a
Professional Engineer depicting all modifications from the design that occurred during
construction.
Report — A bound document, the contents of which may contain certain necessary
analyses, surveys, tests, exhibits, and other pertinent data supporting the subject matter.
Right-of-way — (Also ROW or "public right-of-way.") The land opened, reserved or
dedicated for streets, sidewalks, drainage or other public purposes.
Roadway — The portion of the highway, arterial, collector, or local street, including
shoulders, intended for vehicle and/or bicycle use.
-
Chapter 1 — General Provisions
Eli
Ipsu
Minimum Street Standards
Roundabout — A circular street intersection used as a traffic control device in lieu of a
multi -way stop or a traffic signal.
Shall — A mandatory condition.
Shared Roadway — Any roadway upon which a bicycle lane is not designated and which
may be legally used by bicyclists regardless of whether such facility is specifically
designated as a bikeway.
Should — An advisory condition, recommended, but not required.
Sidewalks — Paved or otherwise improved area for pedestrian use.
Specifications — Construction specifications and standards adopted by the City.
Speed Tables - Elevated areas placed in the street roadway with the intent to slow
vehicular traffic. The geometrics of the speed table determine how fast it can be
navigated.
Stop Work Order (S.W.O.) — A written instruction/notice from the City, revoking the
Developer's and/or Contractor's rights to continue work on the project due to
nonconformance with these Standards.
Stopping Sight Distance — The distance required by the driver of a vehicle traveling at
the design speed to bring the vehicle to a stop after an object on the road becomes visible.
This distance is measured from the driver's eye, 3.5 feet above the pavement to the top of
an object 2 feet high on the pavement anywhere on the roadway.
Storage Length — The distance from the end of the bay taper to the nearest flow line
extension of the intersecting street.
Street — A strip of land intended primarily as a means of vehicular and pedestrian travel
which may also be used to provide space for sewers, public utilities, trees and sidewalks.
Streetscape — Pedestrian and landscape improvements in the right-of-way, generally
occurring between the curb and the right-of-way line. Streetscape generally includes
sidewalks, street trees, pedestrian lighting, fencing, furnishings, and landscaped areas,
including medians and irrigation.
Structure — Anything constructed or erected with a fixed location below, upon, or above
grade, including without limitation foundations, traffic signals, fences, retaining walls,
buildings, inlets, vaults, poles, bridges, and major drainage facilities.
Subcontractor — A person, other than the Contractor, supplying labor and materials, or
labor only, for the Project, and working for the Contractor or the City.
Substantial Completion — Major completion of all Work for the Project, prior to certain
inspection(s) or the creation of Punch lists.
Target Speed — The desired operating speed of a roadway.
TIS - Transportation Impact Study.
Trail — Any path used by pedestrians or bicyclists within a public right-of-way or
easement. This would include concrete, gravel, or natural surfaces.
U.D.C. —Unified Development Code
USGS — United States Geological Survey.
-
Chapter 1 — General Provisions
Eli
Ipsu
Minimum Street Standards
Variance — A grant of relief to a person from the requirements of these Standards. A
variance, therefore, permits construction in a manner otherwise prohibited by these
Standards.
Warranty Period — The period of time that the Developer or Contractor is responsible
for material and workmanship defects in the public improvements, until written
notification by the City of final acceptance of the public improvements.
Work — All construction activity, including materials, labor, supervision, and use of tools
and equipment necessary to complete the Project in full compliance with these Standards,
or approved Plans.
1.8 INTERPRETATION OF STANDARDS
In the interpretation and application of the provisions of these Minimum Street
Standards, the following principles apply:
1.8.1 Governing Standards
These Standards are a supplement to the City of Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
Title XV Unified Development Code and other Ordinances. Where conflict
between these Standards and City Code exists, the Code shall govern.
1.8.2 Prior Acceptance of Construction Plans
These Minimum Street Standards shall not modify or alter any street construction
plans that have been filed with and accepted by the City prior to the effective date
of the ordinance or resolution adopting these Standards. This exception shall be
subject to the conditions and limitations under which said plans were accepted by
the City Engineer.
1.9 VARIANCES AND APPEALS
1.9.1 Variances
Any design that does not conform to these Standards must be approved by the
City Engineer. Variances from these Standards will be considered
administratively on a case -by -case basis following a written request for a variance
prepared by a Professional Engineer and submitted to the City Engineer. If the
developer, contractor, or utility responsible to the City for public improvements
desires to design and construct such improvements in variance to criteria in these
standards, such variance(s) shall be identified in a written attachment to the initial
submittal of construction plans to the City Engineer. The design submitted for
review shall show the variance.
Chapter 1 — General Provisions
EP
Ipsu
Minimum Street Standards
To assist with their plan preparation, designers may submit variance requests,
along with sufficient documentation to support the variance, prior to formal
submittal of construction plans for informal advisory consideration. Such advisory
consideration shall not be binding on the City Engineer, but may help to guide the
requester in the preparation of plans.
The variance request(s) shall include the following:
a. Identifying Issue. Identification of the standard to be waived or varied
and why the standard is unfeasible or is not in the public interest.
b. Proposed Alternate Design. Identification of the proposed alternative
design or construction criteria.
c. Comparing to Standards. A thorough description of the variance
request including impact on capital and maintenance requirements,
costs, and how the new design compares to the standard.
d. Justification. The Professional Engineer must determine and state that
the variance will not be detrimental to the public health, safety and
welfare, will not reduce design life of the improvement nor cause the
City additional maintenance costs. The proposed plan (as varied) must
advance the public purpose of the standard sought to be varied equally
well or better than would compliance with such standard.
e. Approval or Denial of Variance. Based upon review of the plans and
additional information submitted, and an analysis of the criteria set
forth in this subsection the City Engineer may approve or deny the
variance request.
If the City Engineer approves the variance request, the plans will
continue to be reviewed and approved within the typical review
process.
If the City Engineer denies the variance request, the developer shall
subsequently submit revised plans in compliance with these Standards.
The City Engineer shall provide a written response outlining the basis
for all approvals or denials of variance requests.
1.9.2 Appeals
If a variance request is denied by the City Engineer, the Developer may appeal the
decision as outlined in Chapter 155, Appeals of the Unified Development Code.
1.10 WORK SCHEDULE
Normal working day hours are 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday
excluding City Holidays. No work requiring Public Works Inspector observation
may be conducted outside of these normal working hours without prior approval.
Chapter 1 — General Provisions
ER
Ipsu
Minimum Street Standards
Contractors shall follow the guidelines of Chapter 96, Noise Control, of the City
of Fayetteville Code of Ordinances. Noise from construction activities shall be
limited to no later than 11:00 p.m. every day and no earlier than 7:00 a.m. on all
days except Sundays when the time is extended to 9:00 a.m.
1.11 UTILITY COORDINATION
The Developer shall coordinate construction with affected private utility
companies and notify said utilities in accordance with their notification prior to
interruption of service or operation. Prior to construction, the Developer shall be
responsible to make special arrangements with private utilities for any relocation
necessary within the approved project and to coordinate such relocation activities
with adjacent affected property owners. The Developer shall be responsible to
notify said utilities of any damage to utility systems caused during construction.
All private utility installation within the City of Fayetteville Right of Way shall
follow all requirements of Section 171.06, Occupation of Streets and Highways
by Public Utilities of the City of Fayetteville Unified Development Code and the
AHTD Utility Accommodation Policy.
Chapter 1 — General Provisions
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 2— SUBMITTAL AND REVIEW PROCEDURES
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 General Submittal Criteria and Procedures
This chapter gives criteria and procedures for submitting engineering drawings as
required by these Minimum Street Standards. All other requirements for planning
and related submittals can be found in the City of Fayetteville Unified
Development Code.
2.1.2 Authorization/Certification
A. Designer's Signature
All documents, including plans and other submittals noted below, shall be
prepared, stamped, signed, and dated by a Professional Engineer registered in
the State of Arkansas.
B. Additional Requirements
The Designer should be aware that whenever unusual or serious problems are
anticipated or encountered for a proposed construction project, additional
information and analysis beyond the minimum requirements of these
specifications and criteria will be required.
C. Final Authorization
No plans are considered final and ready for construction until signed and
stamped by the Designer and signed by the City Engineer or designee. Refer
to Chapter 3, Construction Plan Submittal Requirements.
D. Construction Traffic Control Plans
Plans for traffic control during construction for the development project must
be accepted by the City prior to any issuance of grading permits for Collector
and Arterial streets and on lower classification streets when deemed necessary
by the City Engineer.
E. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans (SWPPP)
A Storm Water Pollution Prevention plan for the construction of the
development project must be accepted by the City and the Arkansas
Department of Environmental Quality (ADEQ), when required, prior to
issuance of the grading permit.
Chapter 2 — Submittal and Review Procedures
Minimum Street Standards
2.2 SUBMITTALS AND CONTENT
2.2.1 Public Improvement Construction Plans
Refer to Chapter 3, Construction Plan Submittal Requirements, for further
description and requirements.
2.2.2 Soils Investigation Report
Refer to Chapter 6, Pavement Design and Report, for the content and
requirements for the soils report.
2.2.3 Pavement Design Report
Refer to Chapter 6, Pavement Design and Report, for the content and
requirements for the pavement design report.
2.2.4 Work Area Traffic Control Plan
The plans shall be designed in accordance with MUTCD, Section VI.
2.2.5 Street Cross Sections
Typical and unique street cross sections shall be submitted for each street,
including the proposed width, treatment of curbs and gutters, sidewalk systems,
and bikeway systems where deviations are proposed from these Standards.
2.2.6 Drainage Report
The Developer is required to submit a drainage report in compliance with the City
of Fayetteville Drainage Criteria Manual.
2.2.7 Opinion of Costs
As a separate attachment to the Plans, an Opinion of Costs for all Public
Improvements will be required. The items shall be identified by unit price and
total cost for each item for each type of Project.
2.2.9 Record Drawings
Record Drawings shall follow the requirements set forth in Chapter 12,
Acceptance Procedures and Record Drawings/Warranty, and be signed,
stamped, and dated by the Professional Engineer. The Record Drawings shall be
prepared utilizing the original plans. They must show any deviations from the
approved plans. Record Drawings must be signed and stamped with the
Professional Engineer's statement that the changes have not changed the intent of
the approved plans.
Chapter 2 — Submittal and Review Procedures
Minimum Street Standards
2.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
2.3.1 Submittal Process
The submittal shall be complete with all necessary information included for
review of the project. The material shall include, but shall not be limited to the
Plans, Traffic Impact Study (where required), soils report, pavement design,
utility plans, erosion control plans, SWPPP, tree preservation plans where
required, and the Drainage Report.
The review and approval process for Construction Plans shall comply with the
following criteria:
A The Plans shall be submitted digitally in PDF format.
B All Construction Plans shall be submitted directly to the City's
Engineering Division.
C Upon completion of the Engineering Division review, the Design Engineer
will be notified that comments are available. These comments can be
given to the Design Engineer by e-mail, ftp, cd, or portable data storage
device.
D After the Design Engineer has addressed all review comments, the
Consultant Engineer shall re -submit in pdf format as stated above and
include a typed written response to each of the City's comments or
questions either on the plans or in a separate correspondence.
E The submittal process may be repeated until such time as the City deems
the plans to meet the City standards. At that time, the Design Engineer
will be contacted by the City with a request to submit the final plans both
in digital pdf format and four (4) hard copies as described in Chapter 3 of
these standards.
F Upon subsequent review and approval by the City the plans will be
stamped and signed by the City's review engineer. The Design Engineer
(or Developer) will be contacted to pick up the approved plans.
2.3.2 Construction Permits
A. A Grading and Drainage Permit must be issued before construction can
begin. In order to obtain a Grading and Drainage Permit, the following is
required:
1. Approved Construction Plans and Drainage Report.
2. Material submittals must be submitted with the City
standard checklist through the Engineer of Record and
approved prior to the preconstruction conferenct.
Chapter 2 — Submittal and Review Procedures
Minimum Street Standards
3. The Design Engineer shall schedule a pre -construction
conference with the City's Review Engineer, the City's
Public Works Inspector, and the contractor.
4. The Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and NOT, if
required, shall be submitted in PDF form to the City.
5. The erosion control measures and tree preservation fencing
shall be installed.
6. An Erosion Control performance bond shall be submitted
for projects over 5 acres.
7. A Public Infrastructure performance bond shall be
submitted when required.
8. Signed easements or written permission from owner for
off -site work.
B. Additional permits may be required by State and/or Federal agencies. All
permits required shall be obtained prior to construction. These permits
may include, but are not limited to AHD, ADEQ, US Army COE, and
AHTD.
Chapter 2 — Submittal and Review Procedures
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 3- CONSTRUCTION PLANS SUBMITTAL
REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
3.1 GENERAL..................................................................................................3
3.1.1 Plan Set....................................................................................................... 3
3.1.2 Horizontal and Vertical Datum..................................................................3
3.1.3 Expiration of Plan Set................................................................................3
3.2 GENERAL FORMATTING AND REQUIRED INFORMATION ..................3
3.2.1 Size of Plan Sheets....................................................................................3
3.2.2 Title Block...................................................................................................4
A. Required Information.............................................................................4
3.2.3 Incomplete Plans.......................................................................................4
3.2.4 Stamped Plans & Designer Statement.....................................................4
3.2.5 Scale...........................................................................................................4
A. General..................................................................................................4
B. Bar Scale and Other Options.................................................................5
C. Signing and Striping..............................................................................5
D. Key Map................................................................................................5
E. Vicinity Map...........................................................................................5
3.2.6 Dates........................................................................................................... 5
3.2.7 North Arrow................................................................................................5
3.2.8 Existing Facilities.......................................................................................5
3.2.9 Legend of Symbols....................................................................................5
3.2.10 Key Map....................................................................................................5
3.3 SHEET TITLE NAMES AND SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS ......................5
3.3.1 Cover Sheet................................................................................................6
A. General Construction Notes...................................................................6
B. Vicinity Map...........................................................................................6
C. Engineer/Owner Contacts......................................................................6
D. Index......................................................................................................6
E. Indemnification Statement.....................................................................6
F. Project Title............................................................................................6
G. Legend of Symbols................................................................................6
3.3.2 Grading and SWPPP..................................................................................7
3.3.3 Street Improvements.................................................................................7
A. Street Plan View....................................................................................7
B. Street Profile..........................................................................................8
Chapter 3 — Construction Plans
Submittal Requirements
Minimum Street Standards
C. Typical Street Section(s)........................................................................9
D. Cross-Sections......................................................................................9
E. Key Map...............................................................................................10
3.3.4 Street Improvements Details...................................................................10
3.3.5 Traffic Signing and Pavement Markings................................................10
A. Area Map.............................................................................................10
B. Road Segment Pages..........................................................................10
C. Signing Plan........................................................................................10
D. Striping Plan........................................................................................11
E. Traffic Control Plan..............................................................................11
LIST OF TABLES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Tables
LIST OF FIGURES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Figures
I -
Chapter 3 — Construction Plans
Submittal Requirements
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 3— CONSTRUCTION PLAN SUBMITTAL
REQUIREMENTS
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Plan Set
The submittal shall be complete with all necessary information included for
review of the project. The material shall include, but shall not be limited to the
Plans, Traffic Impact Study (where required), soils report, pavement design,
utility plans, erosion control plans, SWPPP, tree preservation plans where
required, and the Drainage Report.
3.1.2 Horizontal and Vertical Datum
The horizontal datum shall be NAD83, Arkansas State Plane, North Zone. The
units shall be U.S. Survey Foot.
The vertical datum shall be North American Vertical Datum of 1988 (NAVD88).
At least two horizontal control monuments shall be shown on each sheet. At least
one benchmark shall be shown on each sheet. A horizontal and vertical tie to at
least one City of Fayetteville GPS monument shall be made and the results
provided to the City Surveyor.
3.1.3 Expiration of Plan Set
Public improvement construction plans shall be valid for a period of one year
from the date of approval by the City Engineer unless construction has begun and
continual progress is made towards completion of the improvements. Refer to
section 166.20 of the Unified Development Code for time limits and the process
for time extensions.
3.2 GENERAL FORMATTING AND REQUIRED INFORMATION
The following information is provided for the Developer when determining Plan
format and design requirements required by the City. This information should be
considered the minimum information to be provided.
3.2.1 Size of Plan Sheets
All sheets in the construction plan set shall be either 22 inches x 34 inches or 11
inches x 17 inches..
I -
Chapter 3 — Construction Plans
Submittal Requirements
Minimum Street Standards
3.2.2 Title Block
A title block is required on every sheet submitted for review and acceptance. The
title block shall be located in the extreme lower right hand corner, the right side
margin, or along the bottom edge of the sheet. Provide an area 2" x 4" on each
sheet for the City to place a stamp of approval.
A. Required Information
The following information shall appear in title block on each sheet:
1. The subdivision or Development name and project number (if applicable).
2. The type of improvement (Grading, Site Plan, Utility Plan).
3. Designer's Name, address, including zip code, telephone number, e-mail
address, professional seal, company name and date.
4. Sheet number (consecutive, beginning with the cover sheet).
5. Revision block.
3.2.3 Incomplete Plans
Incomplete plan submittals or plans that do not have a sufficient level of detail
will not be reviewed. The Applicant shall be notified if the submitted plans are
incomplete. Partial plans may be submitted when appropriate. This may be
allowed on a case by case basis and must be authorized by the review engineer
prior to submittal.
3.2.4 Stamped Plans & Designer Statement
All sheets shall include the Designer's signature, stamp and date and shall be
stamped and signed in accordance with the rules and regulations established by
the Arkansas State Board of Licensure for Professional Engineers and
Professional Surveyors.
3.2.5 Scale
A. General
All scales listed below shall be based on a standard 22"x34" full scale
drawing.
All Plan and profile sheets:
1. Horizontal. 1 inch = 10, 20, 30, 40, or 50 feet.
2. Vertical. 1 inch = 5 or 10 feet.
3. Overall Plan. 1 inch = 100 feet.
4. Cross Sections. Vertical exaggeration ratio shall be a maximum of 5:1. 1:1
is preferred.
I -
Chapter 3 — Construction Plans
Submittal Requirements
Minimum Street Standards
B. Bar Scale and Other Options
Show bar scale. Other scales may be used upon City approval.
C. Signing and Striping
All signing and striping plans require a scale of 1 inch = 30 feet minimum.
D. Key Map
1 inch = 500 - 1,000 feet
E. Vicinity Map
1 inch = 1,000- 1,500 feet
3.2.6 Dates
All sheets shall have dates shown in the Title Block for both Plan preparations
and subsequent revisions. An electronic date shall appear on all electronic files to
be submitted. Final approved construction plans shall start the date sequence
again.
3.2.7 North Arrow
All design sheets shall have a north arrow oriented toward the top or right side of
applicable sheets.
3.2.8 Existing Facilities
Each sheet shall show all existing facilities in a ghosted or alternate line weight or
type.
3.2.9 Legend of Symbols
Each plan sheet shall include a legend that identifies the symbols pertaining to the
sheet unless an overall legend is provided for the entire plan set.
3.2.10 Key Map
For plan sets that include 3 or more plan and profile sheets, each Plan and profile
sheet shall provide a key map showing the location of the street being detailed.
3.3 SHEET TITLE NAMES AND SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
This section outlines the minimum required information to be included on specific
sheets of the Plan set. The following sheets are listed in the order they should
appear in the Plan set. Some sections of the Plan set may have more than one
sheet, but should be labeled alike.
I -
Chapter 3 — Construction Plans
Submittal Requirements
Minimum Street Standards
3.3.1 Cover Sheet
All sets of construction drawings shall include a cover sheet with the following
information provided:
A. General Construction Notes
General Notes may be shown on this sheet or as a separate sheet.
B. Vicinity Map
1. Information to Include. The vicinity map shall show the location and name
of all Arterial roadways within one mile of the proposed construction, and
all other roadways within 1/2 mile of the proposed construction. The
project area shall be indicated by shading.
2. Size. Minimum size of vicinity map shall be 10 inches x 10 inches and to a
scale of 1 inch = 1,000-1,500 feet.
C. Engineer/Owner Contacts
The name, address, e-mail address and phone number of the Developer
(owner) and Design Engineer shall be listed on the cover sheet.
D. Index
Each cover sheet shall include an index of all sheets within the Plan set.
E. Indemnification Statement
The indemnification statement shall be shown on the cover sheet. Annotate
the following on Cover Sheet only:
These plans have been reviewed by the City for concept only. The review does
not imply responsibility by the reviewing department, the City Engineer, or
the City for accuracy and correctness of the calculations. Furthermore, the
review does not imply that quantities of items on the plans are the final
quantities required. The review shall not be construed for any reason as
acceptance of financial responsibility by the City for additional quantities of
items shown that may be required during the construction phase.
F. Project Title
The project title shall be clearly shown.
G. Legend of Symbols
Provide City of Fayetteville standard symbols for all appurtenances related to
each type of facility. The standard legend may be expanded as necessary to fit
specific projects
I -
Chapter 3 — Construction Plans
Submittal Requirements
Minimum Street Standards
3.3.2 Grading and SWPPP
These Plan sheets shall be drawn at a legible scale (1"=10' to 1"=50') which will
clearly convey design and construction intent. All erosion control devices
(temporary and long term) shall be included, as well as revegetation methods with
specific notes. Plan must show grades of all drainage facilities. All grading plans
shall meet the requirements as described in Chapter 169 of the Unified
Development Code. The SWPPP shall meet all ADEQ requirements.
3.3.3 Street Improvements
The Plans shall include Plan and Profile views for each street (private or public)
proposed in the development. Cross-section sheets are required for all roadways.
All plans shall be produced at a scale that is completely legible for review and for
construction. In addition to the requirements set forth elsewhere in these
Minimum Street Standards, the following information shall be shown on all
Roadway plans submitted for review and approval:
A. Street Plan View
The plan view shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Existing and proposed Property and/or right-of-way lines, easements, and
adjacent property owners names and addresses. Type and dimension of
easement or tract is to be clearly labeled. Dimensions of Property and
right-of-way lines are to be marked.
2. Survey lines and stationing lines shall normally be based on centerline of
travel lanes; other profiles may be included but shall be referenced to
centerline stationing. Stationing in cul-de-sacs shall be on the centerline to
the center of the bulb with flowlines dimensioned within the bulb.
Survey lines and stationing lines shall deviate from centerline of street to
parallel the roadway for situations where two sides of a divided roadway
are not parallel.
3. Stationing shall read in ascending order in the direction of the north arrow
or to the right.
4. Roadways and Roadway names.
5. Existing utilities and structures (shown as phantom lines), including, but
not limited to:
a. Storm sewer and appurtenances.
b. Ditches or swales.
c. Bridges or culverts.
d. Fence lines and gates.
e. Water lines and appurtenances.
f. Sewer lines and appurtenances.
g. Curbs and gutters.
Chapter 3 — Construction Plans
Submittal Requirements
Minimum Street Standards
h. Pavement limits.
i. Telephone lines and appurtenances.
j. Electric lines, poles and appurtenances.
k. CATV lines and appurtenances.
1. Gas lines and appurtenances, etc.
m. Signs.
n. Guardrails.
o. Houses or other buildings.
p. Trees.
q. Driveways.
6. Critical elevation (flowline, invert of pipe, etc.) of all existing and
proposed utility or drainage structures.
7. Storm drainage flow direction arrows, particularly at intersections and all
high and low points.
8. Match lines, stations and consecutive sheet numbers, beginning with cover
sheet.
9. Station and elevation of all horizontal curves including PI, PC's, PT's,
etc.; high or low point and VPI/PVI of all vertical curves; existing and
proposed, centerline bearings, distances, and complete curve data.
10. Curb return radii, existing and proposed. Stations and elevations of all
curb returns at the gutter line; mid -point elevations and additional
locations as necessary, flowline-flowline intersection elevations,
corresponding centerline spot elevations and percent of grade from the
P.C.R. to flowline-flowline intersections of all crosspans.
11. Centerline stations of all intersecting roadways.
12. Survey tie lines to section corners or quarter corners, consistent with that
shown on the plat.
13. Intersections. Any roadway intersections shall include construction and
lane details for the new construction and existing facilities for a minimum
of 150 feet beyond the limits of construction.
14. Basis of plan view and profile elevations shall be the same, i.e., flowline
and flowline, top of curb and bottom of curb, etc.
15. Cul-de-sacs. High point and grades shown with percent arrows at critical
points (cross -slope and flow line).
16. Location of all proposed and existing sidewalk and/or trails.
17. Soil Boring Locations and CBR test locations (when available).
18. Location of all existing or proposed retaining walls.
B. Street Profile
Profiles shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. All streets shall be designed to show profile of center line.
I -
Chapter 3 — Construction Plans
Submittal Requirements
Minimum Street Standards
2. Original ground (dashed) and design grade (heavy, solid). Both grades are
to be plainly labeled for all centerline profiles.
3. Existing and design elevations shall be provided for the centerline.
4 Elevation and location of all utilities and storm sewer in the immediate
vicinity of the construction shall be shown on the profile. Separate left and
right profiles may be required for clarification when there are multiple
utility or storm sewer lines.
5. Station and elevation of all vertical grade breaks.
6. Distance and grade between VPI's.
7. Vertical curves, when necessary, with VPT, VPC, and VPT, high or low
point (if applicable) stations and elevations. All vertical curves shall be
labeled with length of curve (L) and K=L/A where A is the algebraic
difference in slopes, in percent.
8. Profiles for curb returns when requested.
9. Specify limits of typical sections and transitions.
10. Separate drainage profiles are required for off -site storm drainage.
C. Typical Street Section(s)
A typical street section shall be included in the Plans and shall show the
following:
1. Pavement section type, width and thickness
2. Cross slope and crown
3. Location of profile grade (crown, center line, curb line)
4 Curbs and/or ditches/swales
5. Existing and proposed grades
6. Right of way width
7. Sidewalks and/or trails, where required
8. Landscaping, if required
9. Stationing limits for the typical section
10. Street name and classification
11. Parking, where required
D. Cross -Sections
Roadway Cross -Sections. Roadway cross -sections shall be provided at
intervals deemed necessary by the City to effectively evaluate connection with
the existing facilities, (typically every 50 feet horizontally, at intersections,
transition points, driveways, storm sewer structures, etc...).
The cross -sections shall include the following:
1. Profile centerline including proposed and existing spot elevations,
2. Roadway width.
3. Right-of-way width.
4. Pavement cross slope.
I -
Chapter 3 — Construction Plans
Submittal Requirements
Minimum Street Standards
5. Pavement thickness.
6. Curbs and/or ditches/swales.
7. Proposed and existing drainage and utilities in the right of way (size,
material, elevation and location).
8. Street name.
E. Key Map
1. Clearly depict each sheet's relative position compared to the overall
project. The Roadway or area that the design pertains to will be shaded.
2. Minimum scale is 1 inch = 500 feet, showing the location and name of all
roadways within and adjacent to the proposed construction and all future
roadways. Scale should be indicated. The key map should be oriented
consistent with detail in the sheet, i.e., same north.
3.3.4 Street Improvements Details
All pertinent details related to street improvements shall be shown on a detail
sheet (or sheets) for the Project. Standard City of Fayetteville Detail Sheets shall
be included, along with standard AHTD detail sheets where work is planned with
AHTD right of way.
3.3.5 Traffic Signing and Pavement Markings
All permanent and temporary traffic signing and pavement markings shall be
shown on the signing and striping plan, with the existing and proposed street
system used as the base layout. Locations of signs and pavement markings shall
be indicated by station/offset, or other specific dimensions indicating exact
locations. This sheet shall also contain any construction or application notes, (e.g.,
application temperatures, surface cleaning methods to be used prior to application,
etc.).
A. Area Map
Separate signage and striping plans are to consist of an overall area map
noting all specific use areas, such as schools, parks, recreation centers, library,
commercial, industrial, fire zones, no -parking and designated parking.
B. Road Segment Pages
The pages following the area map are to be broken down into road segments,
for notation of signage and striping details.
C. Signing Plan
The permanent signing plan should:
1. Show the general longitudinal location of each sign (horizontal offset and
station).
I -
Chapter 3 — Construction Plans
Submittal Requirements
1
Minimum Street Standards
Specify the sign legend and sign type (from MUTCD).
Specify the sign size.
Detail post and base dimensions and installation plan (showing sleeves,
depth below surface, and materials used, according to City standards).
Specify the blank gauge of the sign.
Note the reflectorization provided.
D. Striping Plan
The striping plan must show:
1. Color and type.
2. Lane widths, taper lengths, storage lengths, etc.
3. Striping/skip interval.
4. Typical treatments for acceleration/deceleration lanes, turning lanes, and
crosswalks.
5. Type of material (thermoplastic).
6. Station and offset or dimensions to all angle points, symbol locations, and
line terminations.
7. Pedestrian crossings.
E. Traffic Control Plan
All temporary traffic control signage and striping for lane closures and detours
shall be shown. Controls must be designed to meet all MUTCD standards.
I -
Chapter 3 — Construction Plans
Submittal Requirements
Minimum Street Standards
Chapter 3 — Construction Plans
Submittal Requirements
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 4- STREET DESIGN AND TECHNICAL CRITERIA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
4.1 GENERAL..................................................................................................3
4.2 STREET LAYOUT REQUIREMENTS.......................................................3
4.2.1 Logical Placement and Extension............................................................3
4.2.2 Master Planned Arterial and Collector Streets........................................3
4.2.3 Local Streets..............................................................................................3
A. Neighborhood Traffic Safety and Traffic Calming..................................3
4.3 STREET CLASSIFICATIONS....................................................................4
4.4 GENERAL DESIGN ELEMENTS..............................................................4
4.4.1 Alignment...................................................................................................5
A. Horizontal Alignment..............................................................................5
B. Vertical Alignment..................................................................................6
C. Sight Distance.......................................................................................7
4.4.2 Cross Slope................................................................................................8
A. Minimum Cross Slope...........................................................................8
B. Maximum Allowable Cross Slope.........................................................9
C. Cross Slope for Street Modifications....................................................9
D. Cross Slope for Cul-de-Sacs................................................................9
4.4.3 Superelevation on Horizontal Curves......................................................9
A. Where Superelevation Is Permitted......................................................9
B. Run-Out................................................................................................9
4.4.4 Design Speed.............................................................................................9
4.4.5 Curb Return Radii......................................................................................9
4.5 MEDIANS.................................................................................................10
4.5.1 Turn Lane and Access.............................................................................10
4.5.2 Drainage...................................................................................................10
4.5.3 Nose..........................................................................................................10
4.5.4 Transitions................................................................................................10
4.5.5 Objects......................................................................................................10
4.6 NON -CONNECTIVE STREET ALIGNMENTS.........................................11
4.6.1 Cul-de-Sacs..............................................................................................11
A. Permitted Locations.........................................................................11
B. Minimum Radius.............................................................................11
4.6.2 Knuckle.....................................................................................................11
A. Permitted Locations............................................................................11
B. Permitted Lengths...............................................................................11
4.6.3 Dead -End Streets.....................................................................................11
Chapter 4 — Street Design and
Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
A. Temporary Dead -End Streets..............................................................11
B. Temporary Turnarounds.....................................................................11
C. Temporary Turnaround Easements....................................................11
4.7 DRAINAGE SYSTEMS............................................................................12
4.7.1 Drainage...................................................................................................12
4.7.2 Underdrains..............................................................................................12
A. Controlling Groundwater.....................................................................12
B. Protecting Right-of-way Improvements...............................................12
C. Design Criteria....................................................................................12
4.7.3 Sidewalk Underdrain...............................................................................12
4.7.4 Crosspans................................................................................................13
A. Basic Requirements............................................................................13
B. Dimensions and Depth........................................................................13
C. Minimum Grade..................................................................................13
4.7.5 Inlets.........................................................................................................13
4.7.6 Waterway Crossings................................................................................13
4.7.7 Roadside Ditches and Driveway Culverts..............................................13
A. Roadside Ditches................................................................................13
B. Driveway Culverts...............................................................................14
LIST OF TABLES
Table 4-1 Technical Design Criteria...................................................................4-4
Table 4-2 Centerline Arc Lengths.......................................................................4-5
Table 4-3 Stopping Sight Distance.....................................................................4-7
LIST OF FIGURES
Figures are Located at the End of the Chapter
Figure 4-1 Intersection Sight Distance (Sight Triangle) — No On -street Parking
Figure 4-1 a Intersection Sight Distance (Sight Triangle) — With On -street
Parking
Figure 4-2
Knuckle Detail
Figure 4-3
Cul-De-Sac Detail
Figure 4-4
Street Stubout
Figure 4-5
Temporary Turnaround
Figure 4-6
Street Intersection Approach
Chapter 4 — Street Design and
Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 4— STREET DESIGN AND TECHNICAL CRITERIA
4.1 GENERAL
This chapter defines layout criteria and other design criteria that shall be followed
for locating and designing all streets.
4.2 STREET LAYOUT REQUIREMENTS
The locations of Arterial and Collector streets shall be in accordance with the
current Master Street Plan. Other streets shall be located in accordance with all
other applicable street layout requirements.
4.2.1 Logical Placement and Extension
All streets shall have a logical relationship to the existing topography and to the
location of existing or platted streets within adjacent properties. Certain streets
within the project may need to be extended to the project boundary to provide for
the future extension of the street through adjacent properties.
4.2.2 Master Planned Arterial and Collector Streets
The Master Street Plan shows the approximate locations of all Arterial streets
and some Collector streets for the City and its Planning Area. The Master Street
Plan shall be used for establishing approximate locations of these streets. The City
Engineer shall hold approval authority for specific alignments for all Arterial and
Collector streets.
4.2.3 Local Streets
Layout of new Local streets not covered by the Master Street Plan shall meet the
needs of the specific development and satisfy all other specific requirements of
this chapter and the access management requirements of Chapter 166 of the
Unified Development Code. The City retains the authority for approval of the
overall street layout.
A. Neighborhood Traffic Safety and Traffic Calming
A major component in street layout is neighborhood traffic safety. This is an
essential transportation issue in the City of Fayetteville. Traffic calming is the
implementation of physical and perceptual techniques intended to slow or
divert traffic on existing or planned roadways. It is often a reactive approach
to minimize high speeds and volumes of vehicular traffic. Significant efforts
in traffic calming have been put forward on existing roadways and in the
development of new roadways to limit traffic speeds and traffic volumes in
I -
Chapter 4 — Street Design and
Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
neighborhoods and to provide for safer travel for all modes of transportation
including pedestrian, bicycle, and vehicular.
4.3 STREET CLASSIFICATIONS
Street cross sections shall meet the classifications as shown in the current City of
Fayetteville Master Street Plan.
4.4 GENERAL DESIGN ELEMENTS
All streets shall be designed in accordance with design speeds specified for each
street classification in Table 4-1. Where ranges are specified, the design speed
shall be determined by the City Engineer.
Table 4-1
Technical Design Criteria
Design Element
Arterial
Collector
Local
Alley
Principal
Minor
Overall Design Parameters
Design Speed (mph)
25-40
25-40
25-30
15-25
5-10
Target Speed (mph)*
25-40
25-40
25-30
15-25
5-10
Stopping Sight Distance
See Table 4-3
Horizontal Alignment
Minimum Centerline Radius (ft)
Design
Design
175
90
Maximum Super -Elevation %
4
4
4
n/a
Minimum Tangent between
Curves or at Intersections (ft)
100
100
100
30
n/a
Vertical Alignment
Maximum
Centerline Grade
Ordinary
8
8
8
10
10
Hilly
8
8
12**
15**
15
Minimum Center Line Grade (%)
.5
.5
.5
.5
.5
Minimum
K -values
Crest
50
50
30
20***
10
Sag
50
50
40
30***
20
Intersection Design
Minimum Sight Distance at
Intersections
See Figure
4-1 and 4-1a
* Through streets shall be designed to minimize excessive speeds. Traffic calming measures may be required
by the City Engineer when a street design creates conditions where target speeds are expected to be
exceeded due to horizontal and vertical alignment.
** These grades are allowed for a maximum distance of 300 feet.
*** In HHOD, K -values may be less than the minimum upon approval by the City Engineer.
I -
Chapter 4 — Street Design and
Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
4.4.1 Alignment
Horizontal and vertical street alignments should conform to existing land layout
plus the following criteria:
A. Horizontal Alignment
On Arterial and Collector roadways, curve radii and tangents shall be as large
as possible using the minimums only where necessary. All changes in
direction shall be made using standard curves. Traffic calming measures may
be required for relatively straight sections of local streets that encourage
excessive speeds.
Horizontal Curve Radii. The minimum allowable centerline radii for
horizontal curves shall be as designated in Table 4-1. For low speed, low
volume subdivision streets with 90 degree turns, it may be appropriate to
have a curve radius less than the minimum shown. These will be
evaluated on a case by case basis and may be approved by the City
Engineer. For these curves, a Knuckle design may be used to provide
additional lot frontage around the curve (See Figure 4-2). Reverse and
compound curves should be used only when a single radius curve will not
work. For driver safety, compound curves shall have a ratio no greater
than 1.5 where the value of the larger radius is divided by the smaller
radius.
Minimum Tangent Length
a. Intersection. Whenever a minor street intersects a street of higher
classification, a tangent length (measured from the nearest gutter
flowline of the intersected street to the point of curvature in the
intersecting street) shall be provided for a safe sight distance and safe
traffic operation. The minimum required tangent lengths indicated in
Table 4-1 apply to the minor leg(s) only. The angle of departure shall
not exceed 10 degrees for the length of tangent.
b. Reverse Curves. The tangent between reverse curves shall be no less
than the length shown in Table 4-1. If the curve radii are at least 50%
greater than the radii required by the design speed, the tangent sections
may not be required depending on grades and topography. If the
curves are superelevated, the superelevation transition lengths will
determine the minimum length of tangent between reverse curves.
Consistent Radii. All curves along a local street segment shall be designed
with radii that are approximately equal to provide consistency and
minimize unexpected difficult or quick maneuvers for the driver.
Curves with Small Deflection Angles (10° or less). To reduce the
appearance of kinks in the street, minimum lengths of curve shall be
designed with minimum arc lengths as shown in Table 4-2.
I -
Chapter 4 — Street Design and
Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
Table 4- 2
Centerline Arc Lengths
Street Classification
Minimum
Centerline Arc
Length (ft.)
Arterial
400
Collector
300
Local
200
5. Horizontal Curves on Vertical Curves. For driver safety, horizontal curves
shall not begin near the top of a crest vertical curve nor near the bottom of
a sag vertical curve.
6. Coefficient of Friction. The coefficient of friction shall conform to the
recommendations in Chapter 3 of the AASHTO "Green Book."
7. Joining Existing Improvements. Connection with existing streets shall be
made to match the existing alignment of the existing improvements, in
accordance with horizontal alignment criteria.
8. Lane Transitions. The lengths for the transition in the lane width or for the
addition or reduction of the number of travel lanes shall be designed in
accordance with AASHTO standards.
B. Vertical Alignment
Maximum and Minimum Grades for Streets. The maximum and minimum
grades for specific street classifications are shown in Table 4-1. The
centerline grade in the bulb of a cul-de-sac shall not exceed 3 percent (See
Figure 4-3).
Minimum Flowline Grades. Minimum flowline grades for gutters shall be
0.50 percent, except the bulb of cul-de-sacs where the minimum shall be
1.0 percent (See Figure 4-3).
Requirements for Using Vertical Curves. Vertical curves are required for
grade changes that exceed 1.0 percent. Both centerlines and the curb and
gutter flowlines shall be designed with vertical curves to meet AASHTO
requirements. A series of grade breaks may be used in lieu of a specified
vertical curve as long as the series of breaks meet the vertical curve
criteria in these Standards for the design speed. K -values for design shall
conform to Table 4-1. In sag curves on flow line, the minimum grade
requirement of 0.50 percent shall override the slope within the vertical
curve.
I -
Chapter 4 — Street Design and
Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
4. Joining Existing Improvements. Connection with existing streets shall be
made to match the existing grade of the existing streets, in accordance
with vertical alignment criteria. (Grade breaks shall not exceed allowable.)
5. Vertical Clearance. Vertical clearance above a roadway is a minimum of
16.5 feet. Clearance may be higher in AHTD right of way. AHTD
requirements will govern.
6. Intersection Approach Grades. Intersection approach grades are discussed
in Chapter 5, Intersections.
7. Off -Site Continuance of Grade and Ground Lines. To assure that future
street improvements will meet these Standards the future grade and ground
lines of all streets, except cul-de-sacs, shall be continued for 100 feet
beyond the proposed construction.
8. Master Residential Lot Grading Plan. Consideration should be given to the
earthwork associated with the individual lot grading for finished floor
elevations, driveway slopes, etc...
C. Sight Distance
Sight distance is the distance necessary for a vehicle operator to perform
expected functions and be able to do so without causing a hazard for the driver
or other vehicle operators for the specific design speed of the street. In no case
shall the distance be less than the stopping sight distance. This includes
visibility at intersections and higher volume driveways as well as around
curves and roadside encroachments.
1. Stopping Sight Distance for Vertical Crest Curves. Stopping sight distance
is calculated assuming the following:
Object height is 2 feet above road surface and viewer's height is 3.5
feet above road surface.
2. Stopping Sight Distance on Horizontal Curves. Where an object off the
pavement restricts sight distance, the minimum radius of curvature is
determined by the stopping sight distance. In no case shall the stopping
sight distance be less than as specified in Table 4-3. The sight distance
design procedure shall assume a 6 -foot high obstruction (as measured
from actual finished grade) exists at all property lines except in the sight
distance easements that may be required to preserve the needed sight
distance.
Stopping sight distance on horizontal curves is based upon lateral
clearance from the inner edge of pavement to sight obstruction, for various
radii of inner edge of pavement and design speeds. The position of the
driver's eye and the object sighted shall be assumed to be 6 ft. from the
inner edge of pavement, with the sight distance being measured along this
arc. Minimum stopping sight distances are given in Table 4-3.
I -
Chapter 4 — Street Design and
Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
Table 4-3
Stopping Sight Distance
Design Speed
(mph)
Stopping Sight
Distance (ft)
20
125
25
150
30
200
35
250
40
275
45
325
50
400
From AASHTO "Green Book"
(For Intersection Sight- Distance, see Figure 4-1.)
Corner Sight Distance. The comer sight distance provides for vehicles to
enter traffic and accelerate to the average running speed. Corner sight
distance shall be measured as shown in Figure 4-1.
Intersection Sight Distance Triangles. All sight -distance triangles must be
shown on the street plan/profile plans. All sight distances must be within
the public right-of-way or a sight distance easement. The easement shall
be dedicated to the City and be kept free of sight obstructions.
Sight Obstructions. Any object within the sight distance easement more
than 30 inches above the flow line elevation of the adjacent street shall
constitute a sight obstruction, and shall be removed or lowered. Such
objects include but are not limited to berms, buildings, parked vehicles on
private property, cut slopes, hedges, trees, bushes, utility cabinets or tall
crops. Mailbox clusters must be installed a minimum of 2 feet from back
of curb and not cause any sight obstruction. The City may limit parking to
protect visibility. The sight distance shall be measured to the centerline of
the closest through -lane in both directions. In no case shall any permanent
object encroach into the line -of -sight of any part of the sight distance
triangle.
4.4.2 Cross Slope
Cross slope on a pavement is provided to drain water from the street surface. The
design of cross slope shall consider driver comfort and safety.
A. Minimum Cross Slope
A minimum cross slope on all streets shall be 2.0 percent. Minimum cross
slope on reconstruction or overlays of existing roadways is 1.5 percent.
I -
Chapter 4 — Street Design and
Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
B. Maximum Allowable Cross Slope
Maximum allowable cross slope on all new construction shall be 3 percent.
Maximum allowable cross slope on any reconstruction or overlays of existing
roadways shall be 4 percent.
C. Cross Slope for Street Modifications
When widening an existing street or adding turn lanes to an existing street, the
resulting cross slope of the widened portion shall be within the limits stated
above and the new cross slope shall be no less than the existing cross slope.
However, if the cross slope of the existing street exceeds the Standards then
new curb and gutter shall be designed such that the existing pavement, when
overlaid, will result in a straight line cross slope grade that meets these
Standards. Alternatively, the existing pavement may be removed and
reprofiled to comply with these Standards.
D. Cross Slope for Cul-de-Sacs
Refer to Figure 4-6 for cul-de-sac bulb cross slopes.
4.4.3 Superelevation on Horizontal Curves
The purpose of superelevating a roadway is to maintain the riding comfort on
smaller than standard curves. Superelevation may only be used when other means
of design will not work and is subject to review and approval by the City
Engineer. The following criteria shall be followed:
A. Where Superelevation Is Permitted
Superelevation may be allowed for curves on Arterial and Collector streets in
order to reduce the minimum centerline radius. In no case shall superelevation
exceed 4.0 percent cross slope. Superelevation shall not be used to reduce
minimum radii on Local Streets.
B. Run -Out
When superelevation is used, the minimum run -out used entering and exiting
the superelevated portion shall be 100 feet.
4.4.4 Design Speed
Each roadway classification has a specific design speed. See Table 4-1.
4.4.5 Curb Return Radii
The required curb return radii are defined in Table 5-1, unless otherwise
approved or required by the City Engineer.
I -
Chapter 4 — Street Design and
Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
4.5 MEDIANS
4.5.1 Turn Lane and Access
The design of medians shall include the evaluation for needed turn lanes and
accesses. For the minimum requirements of turn lanes, refer to Chapter 5,
Intersections.
4.5.2 Drainage
Landscaped medians shall be provided with drainage facilities to handle sprinkler
runoff and nuisance flows. Sprinklers shall be designed to prevent spray onto the
pavement surface. A properly designed under drain system shall be required.
4.5.3 Nose
Vehicle tracking templates shall be used to determine the position of the median
nose so that vehicles do not track onto the median. The minimum radius for nose
curbs shall be 2 feet to back of curb. A Single Unit (SU) truck template should be
used for the design vehicle.
4.5.4 Transitions
The ends of medians shall transition into turn lanes with a minimum radius of 100
feet. A change of directions must be accomplished with the use of radii. Angle
points shall not be allowed. See Figure 5-10.
4.5.5 Objects
No permanent structures, including light poles, fire hydrants, etc., shall be placed
within 5 feet of the travel lane or in any location that would obstruct sight
distance except for structures as approved in these Standards. If a median
streetlight is placed within 5 feet of the travel lane, the light must be a breakaway
model.
I -
Chapter 4 — Street Design and
Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
4.6 NON -CONNECTIVE STREET ALIGNMENTS
4.6.1 Cul-de-Sacs
A. Permitted Locations.
Cul-de-sacs shall be used only where necessary. Cul-de-sacs are permitted
only on Local Streets in conformance with Chapter 166 of the U.D.C.
B. Minimum Radius
The cul-de-sac shall have a minimum radius of 50', or as required by the fire
code.
4.6.2 Knuckle
A. Permitted Locations
Knuckles may be permitted only on Local Streets that intersect Local Streets.
B. Permitted Lengths
Knuckles shall have a maximum radius as indicated in Figure 4-2.
4.6.3 Dead -End Streets
A. Temporary Dead -End Streets
Temporary dead-end streets will be permitted only on streets that have no
direct access from adjoining property. Additionally, a temporary dead-end
street shall be planned to extend into neighboring property during a later
development phase or project. The road must be fully constructed to the
property line. Refer to Figure 4-4.
B. Temporary Turnarounds
At locations where a temporary dead-end street exceeds 150 feet in length, a
temporary turnaround shall be constructed. Refer to Figure 4-5 for two layout
options.
C. Temporary Turnaround Easements
All temporary turnarounds shall be constructed within an access Easement or
street ROW. The Easement may be vacated by the City when the Easement is
no longer necessary.
I -
Chapter 4 — Street Design and
Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
4.7 DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
4.7.1 Drainage
Drainage system design shall be in accordance with current City of Fayetteville
Drainage Criteria Manual.
4.7.2 Underdrains
A. Controlling Groundwater
Under drains used for the purpose of controlling groundwater on private
property may be constructed within public right-of-way. The system shall be
private and must be maintained by viable private parties.
B. Protecting Right-of-way Improvements
Under drains constructed for the purpose of protecting public right-of-way
improvements may be installed only if other means are not possible. The City
shall own and maintain these systems.
C. Design Criteria
All Under drains covered by these Standards shall be designed to meet the
following criteria:
1. Positive Outfall: Demonstrate that under drain has positive outfall for
gravity drainage.
2. Groundwater Barriers: The system shall be designed such that clay cutoff
walls are provided at boundaries of the development to preclude hydraulic
communication with offsite utility trenches either upstream or
downstream.
3. Filter Fabric: The under drain trench shall be lined with a filter fabric
specifically selected in consideration of on -site soil conditions in order to
minimize the invasion of fine soil particles into the bedding gravel.
4.7.3 Sidewalk Underdrain
Storm water from concentrated points of discharge shall not be allowed to flow
over sidewalks, but shall drain to the roadway by use of a sidewalk underdrain or
other methods approved by the City Engineer.
A sidewalk underdrain shall not be located within a curb ramp, curb cut, or
driveway. Sidewalk underdrains shall only be allowed in special situations, on a
case -by -case basis, as determined by the City Engineer. Sidewalk underdrain
sections shall be constructed in accordance with Figure 4-7.
I -
Chapter 4 — Street Design and
Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
4.7.4 Crosspans
A. Basic Requirements
Crosspans for passing storm drainage flow across roadways shall be
constructed at intersections along streets that have a slope of one percent or
less. Crosspans shall be constructed as shown in Figure 4-6.
B. Dimensions and Depth
Crosspans shall be a minimum width of 2 feet and a 1 -inch typical depth
adjacent to all streets classifications.
C. Minimum Grade
Minimum grade on crosspans at flowline of pan shall be 0.5 percent.
4.7.5 Inlets
Refer to the Drainage Criteria Manual requirements for sizing of inlets. Inlets or
inlet depressions should not be located in the curb return or in the ADA ramp
location, but shall be located at or behind the tangent points of the curb returns.
Inlets located in a sidewalk shall be integrated with sidewalks. The inlet access
shall be flush with the sidewalk surface. No manholes, inlets, or other storm sewer
facilities are allowed within handicap access ramps.
4.7.6 Waterway Crossings
All waterway crossings beneath and/or within the public right-of-way shall be
designed to minimize maintenance requirements. The design shall maintain or
increase the water velocity through the structure to minimize silting or provide
other design elements to address this issue.
If the waterway crossing is designated as an area with a streamside protection
zone, all requirements of U.D.C. Chapter 168.12 shall be met.
4.7.7 Roadside Ditches and Driveway Culverts
A. Roadside Ditches
Any roadway sections developed without curbs (and with roadside drainage
ditches) must complete the ditch construction with the installation of sod or
other approved erosion control blanket within the ditch area. The profile grade
of the ditch shall be maintained at a minimum slope of one (1) percent and a
maximum slope of five (5) percent. A ditch profile grade greater than 5% may
be approved by the City Engineer if the ditch is permanently stabilized to
prevent erosion. The side slopes of the ditches shall be a 3:1 slope or less
with a 4' wide shoulder between the edge of pavement and the top of slope.
I -
Chapter 4 — Street Design and
Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
B. Driveway Culverts
The slope and capacity of any roadside ditches shall be maintained in any
areas that driveways cross the ditch. Each site is required to provide a pipe
culvert a minimum of eighteen (18) inches in diameter, calculated to meet
capacity and strength. The pipe shall be designed to have no less than twelve
(12) inches of cover over the pipe. At each end of the culvert, there shall be a
headwall or a flared end section installed. If a HDPE or CMP flared end
section is used, a min. 6" wide concrete band shall be constructed around the
exposed edges of the flared end section.
I -
Chapter 4 — Street Design and
Technical Criteria
(Vehicle Path)
PROPERTY LINE
OBSTRUCTION
MINOR STREET
OR ACCESS
*NOTE: Line of Sight must be within
R.O.W. or sight distance easement
(Vehicle Path)
c0'NJ MAJOR STREET
PROPERTY LINE
OBSTRUCTION
MAJOR STREET CORNER INTERSECTION
DESIGN SPEED
SIGHT DISTANCE
(MPH)
(FT.)*
55
1240
50
1030
45
830
40 -----------660
35
520
30
310
25 -----------260
20
210
15
210
1. Corner sight distance measured from a point on the minor road at 13 feet back from the
edge of the travel lane (flowline) and measured from a height of eye at 3.50 feet
on the minor road to a height of object at 3.5 feet on the major road.
2. At Local -Local street intersections only, the "D" distance shall be ten feet (10') and the
sight distance shall be measured to the centerline of the street.
3. For private driveway access to a public street, use 10 feet back from flowline (or shoulder
for gravel roads).
4. These values apply to passenger cars on 2 -lane roads only. Intersections and
access serving trucks or on multi -lane roadways requires separate analysis.
5. Adjustments may be required on a skewed intersection.
6. For local/local street intersection, the minimum sight distance allowed is the stopping sight
distance. See Table 4-3.
I ARKANSAS
ENGINEERING DIVISION
SIGHT DISTANCE AT INTERSECTIONS
(Unsignalized)
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
SIGHT DISTANCE (SIGHT TRIANGLE)
NO ON -STREET PARKING
2,, 2015
4-1
(Vehicle Path)
PROPERTY LINE
OBSTRUCTION
(Vehicle Path)
MAJOR STREET
PROPERTY LINE
OBSTRUCTION
MAJOR STREET CORNER INTERSECTION
I
I
I I
DESIGN SPEED
SIGHT DISTANCE
(MPH)
(FT.)"
MINOR STREET
55
1240
OR ACCESS
50
1030
45
830
40
660
35
520
30
310
25 -----------
260
NOTE: Line of Sight must be within
20
210
R.O.W. or sight distance easement
15
210
1. Corner sight distance measured from a point on the minor road at 13 feet back from the
edge of the travel lane (flowline) and measured from a height of eye at 3.50 feet
on the minor road to a height of object at 3.5 feet on the major road.
2. At Local -Local street intersections only, the "D" distance shall be ten feet (10') and the
sight distance shall be measured to the centerline of the street.
3. For private driveway access to a public street, use 10 feet back from flowline (or shoulder
for gravel roads).
4. These values apply to passenger cars on 2 -lane roads only. Intersections and
access serving trucks or on multi -lane roadways requires separate analysis.
5. Adjustments may be required on a skewed intersection.
6. For local/local street intersection, the minimum sight distance allowed is the stopping sight
distance. See Table 4-3.
I ARKANSAS
ENGINEERING DIVISION
SIGHT DISTANCE AT INTERSECTIONS
(Unsignalized)
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
SIGHT DISTANCE (SIGHT TRIANGLE)
WITH ON -STREET PARKING
21, 2015
4-1
Standard Sidewalk
2015
I ARKANSAS ENGINEERING DIVISION KNUCKLE DETAIL (LOCAL STREETS ONLY)
4-2
Property Line
so
Sidewalk
IA
yp
oxG
p" dace
1 1.0% (min.)
3
E E
3.0% �0
max.)_ 2% (mm.)
1 Low Point or
_ _
_
_
3%(max.
High Point
Location may Vary
NM
1.0%(min.)
370.
rd
ao
CITY OF
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
DATE'
ebmary zo. 2015
"°°RE'
CUL-DE-SAC DETAIL
eDESCRIPTION
4 3
ENGINEERING DIVISION
FUTURE ROADWAY
__ __ _
_ __ Probe Line
Barricade and
Future Street
Right of Way
Extension Sign
I
Temporary Dead End
Street
Right of Way_ LI III 1.
PROPOSED ROADWAY
Notes:
1. The temporary dead end is limited to 150' in length.
2. A turnaround is not required.
IYIIIVIIIVIII J I I\LL I V I /"1I\YAI\VV Febmory 23, 2015
DESCRIPTION_
ENGINEERING DIVISION STREET STUBOUT 4'4
c,
A
2
Type 3 \ o.
LRghtof Way Sidewalk / \
Barricade / \
Future
_
Extension
R/W
Barricade and
Future Street
/
Extension Sign
Right of Way
\ /
Type 3
/
Barricade
/ \S\
Temporary
Access Easement 31
A
50'(MinJ
50 (MIt)
-1
12
z^o
SECTION A -A
OPTION 1
Temporary [O
Access Easement
_ _
6" Concrete[ _ _1
m
Pavement with
6" Compacted
Base
I I°
Right of
Way
o
a
Barricade and
Future Street
Extension Sign
Future
Extension
Right of Way
NOTES:
1. A temporary access easement is required for the
temporary turnaround. The easement shall incorporate all
of the pavement and signage. Temporary
2. The turnaround shall meet the same pavement Access Easement
requirements as the street section.
OPTION 2
I ARKANSAS
ENGINEERING DIVISION
TEMPORARY TURNAROUND
o
m
Sidewalk
Continuous
Through Access
Drive
J
24
23. 2015
It'
E E N
558-
e o
a o N
Through Street
I
•
Install Concrete Crosspan on
Asphalt Streets When the Slope
n d
.8-5 o
of the Through Street is less
.8-5 o
e N
A
than 1%.
eu`° e N
en N
C1 N
A
J
LL
El
See Cross Pan
2 Connection
CDetail Below
n
Transition Crown to
Through Street
SECTION A - A
I ARKANSAS
ENGINEERING DIVISION
3% (max.)
2% (min.)
Slope
3% (max.) 0 Required Spot Elevation
2% (min.) Locations at Flowline
Slope
CROSS PAN CONNECTION
STREET INTERSECTION APPROACH
2015
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 5- INTERSECTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
5.1 GENERAL..................................................................................................3
5.1.1 General Principals and Considerations...................................................3
5.2 INTERSECTION DESIGN CRITERIA........................................................3
5.2.1 Location of Intersections..........................................................................3
5.2.2 Lane Alignment..........................................................................................3
5.2.3 Angle of Intersection.................................................................................4
5.2.4 Horizontal Alignment and Vertical Profile................................................4
A. Horizontal...............................................................................................4
B. Vertical...................................................................................................4
5.2.5 Exclusive Left Turn Lanes.........................................................................4
5.2.6 Exclusive Right Turn Lanes......................................................................4
A. Warrants for Right Turn Lanes...............................................................4
B. Design Criteria.......................................................................................5
C. Pedestrian Refuge.................................................................................5
5.2.7 Design Vehicles.........................................................................................5
A. DL -23 (Delivery Truck)...........................................................................5
B. SU-30 (Single Unit Truck)......................................................................5
C. CITY -BUS (City Transit Bus).................................................................5
D. WB-40 (Intermediate Semitrailer)..........................................................6
E. WB-67 (Interstate Semitrailer)...............................................................6
F. Other Vehicles.......................................................................................6
5.2.8 Curb Returns..............................................................................................6
A. Curb Return Radii..................................................................................6
B. Curb Return Grades..............................................................................7
5.2.9 Traffic Islands.............................................................................................7
A. Corner Islands Separating Right Turns..................................................7
B. Median Islands Separating Opposing Traffic.........................................7
C. Splitter Islands on Roundabouts............................................................8
5.2.10 Traffic Signals, Striping and Signing.....................................................8
5.2.11 Access Ramps.........................................................................................8
5.2.12 Right-of-way .............................................................................................8
A. Requirements........................................................................................8
5.2.13 Intersection Sight Distance.....................................................................8
A. Minimum Requirements.........................................................................8
B. Landscaping and Hardscaping..............................................................9
5.2.14 Pedestrian Requirements........................................................................9
Minimum Street Standards
5.2.15 Drainage....................................................................................................9
5.3 ROUNDABOUTS.......................................................................................9
5.3.1 Design Vehicle...........................................................................................9
5.3.2 Design Speed.............................................................................................9
5.3.3 Horizontal Configuration...........................................................................9
5.3.4 Roadway Width..........................................................................................9
5.3.5 Truck Apron..............................................................................................10
5.3.6 Pedestrian Access Ramps for Bikes
......................................................10
5.3.7 Pedestrian Crossings..............................................................................10
5.3.8 Drainage...................................................................................................11
5.3.9 Where Allowed.........................................................................................11
5.3.10 Design Software.....................................................................................11
5.3.11 Right-of-way ...........................................................................................11
5.3.12 Splitter Islands.......................................................................................11
5.3.13 Signage...................................................................................................12
LIST OF TABLES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Tables
LIST OF FIGURES
Figures are Located at End of Chapter
Figure 5-1 Intersection Grades
Figure 5-2 Exclusive Left Turn
Figure 5-3 Guidelines for Design of Left Turn Lanes
Figure 5-4 Guidelines for Design Tapers for Left Turn Lanes
Figure 5-5 Traffic Vol. Guidelines for Design Right Turn Lanes
Figure 5-6 Exclusive Right Turn
Figure 5-7 Guidelines for Design of Right Turn Lanes
Figure 5-8 Pedestrian Refuge Island/Right Turn Lane
Figure 5-9 Right Turn Lane to a Continuous Lane with Pedestrian Refuge
Figure 5-10 Turn Lane Design Criteria
Figure 5-11 Splitter Island for Mini Roundabouts
Figure 5-12 Typical Roundabout
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 5— INTERSECTIONS
5.1 GENERAL
Intersections shall be designed to provide for the safety of motorists, pedestrians,
and bicyclists. This chapter is based on criteria from the ITE Traffic Engineering
Handbook, ITE Designing Walkable Urban Thoroughfares and AASHTO's A
Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets.
5.1.1 General Principals and Considerations
By their nature, intersections are conflict locations. Vehicles, pedestrians, and
bicycles all cross paths. Each crossing is a conflict point. The basic design of
intersections includes the following objectives:
A. Minimize conflicts between modes of transportation
B. Accommodate all modes with appropriate levels of service for motorists,
pedestrians, bicyclists, and transit given the recommended speed, volume
and expected mix of traffic.
C. Avoid elimination of any travel modes due to intersection design.
Intersection widening for additional turn lanes to relieve traffic congestion
should be balanced against impacts to pedestrians, bicyclists and transit.
D. Provide good driver and non -driver visibility through proper sight distance
triangles and geometric features that increase visibility.
E. Minimize pedestrian exposure to moving traffic.
F. Avoid extreme intersection angles and break up complex intersections
with pedestrian refuge islands. Keep intersections easily and fully
comprehensible for all users. Strive for simplicity in intersection design.
G. Ensure intersections are fully accessible to the physically disabled.
5.2 INTERSECTION DESIGN CRITERIA
5.2.1 Location of Intersections
For intersection location criteria, refer to Section 166.08 (Street Design and
Access Management Standards) of the U.D.C., and the current Master Street
plan.
5.2.2 Lane Alignment
All lanes shall be in alignment through each intersection, with a maximum of a 2 -
foot shift in a hardship situation only, subject to approval by the City Engineer.
Minimum Street Standards
5.2.3 Angle of Intersection
Crossing roadways should intersect at 90 degrees whenever possible. In no case
shall they intersect at less than 75 degrees or more than 105 degrees.
5.2.4 Horizontal Alignment and Vertical Profile
A. Horizontal
The horizontal alignment of streets through an intersection shall be designed
in conformance with Table 4-1. Intersections may be placed on horizontal
curves, provided that the tangent lengths given in Table 4-1 are provided on
the minor street and the required sight distance is obtained.
B. Vertical
The grade of the street with the higher classification shall prevail at
intersections. The lesser street shall adapt to the grade of the Major street.
When roads are of equal classification, the City Engineer shall determine
which street grade prevails.
The street profile grade of the lesser street shall not exceed 5 percent on the
approach to the intersection, as measured along the centerline of the street for
a minimum distance equal to the tangent length for the street classification,
see Table 5-1. In areas where steep terrain is an issue, the City Engineer may
allow a greater approach grade in order to reduce the grading impact on the
site.
5.2.5 Exclusive Left Turn Lanes
Exclusive left turn lanes shall be provided on all arterial streets and other streets
wherever left turn lanes are warranted and approved by the City Engineer. The
Designer shall use information in the Transportation Impact Study (TIS) to
determine whether an exclusive left turn lane is warranted on non -arterial streets.
Refer to Figures 5.2, 5.3 and 5.4 for design requirements.
5.2.6 Exclusive Right Turn Lanes
Exclusive right turn lanes shall be provided at locations where they are required
by the applicable TIS, and approved by the City Engineer.
A. Warrants for Right Turn Lanes
Figure 5-5 provides guidelines and warrants for whether a right turn lane shall
be provided at intersections or accesses.
Minimum Street Standards
B. Design Criteria
Right turn lanes shall be designed to accomplish the following functions:
1. Provide a means of safe deceleration outside the high speed through lane.
2. Provide a separate storage area for right turns to assist in the optimization
of traffic signal phasing.
Provide a means of separating right turn movements at stop controlled
intersections. The design elements, as shown in Figure 5-6, are the
approach taper, bay taper, lengths of lanes, width of lanes, and departure
taper. For approach taper lengths, see Figure 5-7.
C. Pedestrian Refuge
Where Pedestrian refuge is required, it shall be designed in accordance with
Figure 5-8. If a right turn lane turns into an exclusive lane that continues, use
Figure 5-9
5.2.7 Design Vehicles
As a minimum, intersections shall be designed to accommodate the following
design vehicles for the specified turns. The minimum allowable intersection
turning radii are as follows.
A. DL -23 (Delivery Truck)
All DL -23 vehicles must be able to turn easily from one street to the next and
remain in the correct lane for each roadway. This is required for all roadways.
B. SU-30 (Single Unit Truck)
All SU-30 vehicles must be able to turn easily from one street to the next and
remain in the correct lane for each roadway. For low traffic Local/Local
intersections, the SU-30 may use more than one traffic lane to complete the
turn without tracking onto the curb at corners. For all other roadways this
vehicle must be able to complete turns without entering into opposing lanes.
C. CITY -BUS (City Transit Bus)
All CITY -BUS vehicles may use more than one traffic lane to complete the
turn when turning from the correct lane without tracking onto the curb at
corners. This shall apply to all streets. When the intersection is on a regular or
planned transit route where the turning movement could conflict with a
stopped vehicle at the intersection, then the intersection must be designed to
allow the bus to turn easily from one street to the next without entering
opposing lanes of either roadway.
Minimum Street Standards
D. WB-40 (Intermediate Semitrailer)
All WB-40 vehicles may use more than one traffic lane to complete the turn
without tracking onto the curb at corners. In addition, the vehicle must make
the turn in one forward maneuver not encroaching into opposing traffic lanes
unless the intersection has been designed to allow for safe encroachment. This
requirement shall apply to all Arterial/Arterial, Arterial/Collector,
Arterial/Local and Collector/Collector. For all other intersections (including
mini -roundabouts), the vehicles may use the entire paved surface of the street
to negotiate the turn. The vehicle may have to back up to complete the turn.
E. WB-67 (Interstate Semitrailer).
All modern roundabouts and arterial intersections containing raised medians
and channelizing islands shall be designed to accommodate a WB-67 vehicle.
F. Other Vehicles.
For special circumstances other design vehicles may be required by the City
Engineer.
5.2.8 Curb Returns
A. Curb Return Radii
The corner radii at intersections shall be set so that the selected design
vehicles can pass through the intersection in an appropriate manner. The
design vehicle types and use of lanes shall be per Section 5.2.7. Intersections
shall be designed to minimize curb radii while still accommodating the largest
applicable design vehicle. The following should be considered when possible
in order to minimize the curb return radii:
1. Bike lanes, on -street parking, and other facilities should be included
to create an effective corner radius which accommodates the design
vehicle. When on -street parking is used to establish an effective
turning radius, the effective radius shall be delineated within the
parking lane by an approved striping pattern, raised curb, or other
approved traffic control device.
2. Traffic control devices should be arranged as to allow safe
encroachment of infrequent vehicles into approaching lanes of traffic.
3. Compound radii should be used to minimize the crossing distance for
pedestrians.
4. The outside vehicular lane should be widened through the
intersection to increase the effective turning radius.
Minimum Street Standards
A variance from the above requirements and 5.2.7 may be approved by the
City Engineer where:
1. High pedestrian volumes are present or reasonably anticipated.
2. Volumes of turning vehicles are low.
3. The design vehicle constitutes a very low proportion of the turning
vehicles.
4. Occasional encroachment of the design vehicle beyond that provided in
Section 5.2.7 is acceptable.
Occasional encroachment of turning school bus, moving van, or oversized
delivery truck into an opposing lane is not acceptable.
Larger vehicles than those listed in 5.2.7 are expected to be frequent users
of the street.
For curb returns on a State Highway, every effort shall be made to minimize
curb radii through negotiation with AHTD while acknowledging AHTD's curb radii
requirements
supersede these Standards.
B. Curb Return Grades
The minimum allowable grade for flowlines around curb returns shall be no
less than 0.5 percent. One percent (1%) minimum slope is recommended.
5.2.9 Traffic Islands.
The following is a list of different types of traffic islands:
A. Corner Islands Separating Right Turns
Standard corner islands may be used in Arterial/Arterial intersections to
channelize traffic where required to provide pedestrian refuge or where
required by the City Engineer. The corner islands shall be designed as raised
islands in accordance with Figures 5-8 or 5-9 for a right turn lane continuing
to an exclusive lane or for a right turn lane stop condition, respectively. The
striping shall be in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 7, Traffic
Control Devices.
B. Median Islands Separating Opposing Traffic
Median islands are required at all Arterial/Arterial intersections. The length of
the island shall include the appropriate approach taper, bay taper and length of
lane required by these Standards, or supported by another approved resource
standard. The design shall be in accordance with Figure 5-10 and as follows:
1. No Obstruction. Medians must not obstruct the minimum left turn radius
for the design vehicle(s).
Minimum Street Standards
Drainage. Landscaped medians shall include drainage facilities to handle
sprinkler run-off and nuisance flows. When low maintenance landscaping
is used in conjunction with trickle irrigation, drainage requirements may
be waived and outfall curb and gutter should be used.
A pedestrian refuge area shall be provided at all pedestrian crossings.
C. Splitter Islands on Roundabouts
In modem roundabout designs, raised splitter islands shall be designed in
accordance with Federal Highway Administration Roundabouts to direct
traffic and provide pedestrian refuge.
5.2.10 Traffic Signals, Striping and Signing
See Chapter 7, Traffic Control Devices.
5.2.11 Access Ramps
See Chapter 8, Pedestrian Facilities Design and Technical Criteria.
5.2.12 Right-of-way
A. Requirements
All intersection rights -of -way shall be dedicated as shown in the current
Master Street Plan to provide adequate right-of-way to include greenspace,
sidewalks, and access ramps around the radii. Additional right-of-way may be
required at intersections to provide space for additional left or right turn lanes
without reducing the widths of standard required facilities.
5.2.13 Intersection Sight Distance
Street intersections shall be designed so that adequate sight distance is provided
along all streets. The required sight distance shall be determined by the design
speed and grades of the street and the acceleration rate of an average vehicle as
prescribed below.
A. Minimum Requirements
All designs must provide minimum safe stopping sight distance in accordance
with Chapter 4, Street Design and Technical Criteria, and AASHTO. In
addition, for all streets that intersect with Arterial and Collector streets, the
sight distance must be large enough to allow a vehicle to enter the street and
accelerate to the average running speed without interfering with the traffic
flow on the Arterial or Collector street.
-
Chapter 5 — Intersections
Minimum Street Standards
B. Landscaping and Hardscaping
No landscaping or hardscaping higher than 30 inches above the flow line of
the gutter shall be permitted within a corner cut that will block the line of
sight for pedestrian visibility.
5.2.14 Pedestrian Requirements
See Chapter 7, Traffic Control Devices, concerning crosswalk requirements and
Chapter 8, Pedestrian Facilities Design and Technical Criteria.
5.2.15 Drainage
See Chapter 4, Street Design and Technical Criteria, concerning drainage.
5.3 ROUNDABOUTS
Roundabouts shall be specially designed to the specific need on high traffic
volume streets and used to improve traffic flow. Refer to Federal Highway
Administration, Roundabouts: An Informational Guide for typical layout.
Also refer to Figure 5-11 and 5-12 for typical roundabout layout features. The
following are certain minimum requirements:
5.3.1 Design Vehicle
Arterial and Collector Roundabouts shall be designed to accommodate WB-67
trucks. The design vehicle is to be accommodated by maintaining a 2 -foot
separation between the truck and the curb face. A truck apron shall be provided
around the circulatory island. The WB-67 vehicle may use the truck apron for left
turn movements and may use the truck apron for right -turn movements if
necessary.
5.3.2 Design Speed
The design speed for a single -lane roundabout shall be 20-25 mph. The design
speed for a multi -lane roundabout shall be 25 to 30 mph.
5.3.3 Horizontal Configuration
The roundabout layout shall be determined by the Design Engineer and approved
by the City Engineer.
5.3.4 Roadway Width
The circulatory roadway width shall be a minimum of 1.0 to1.2 times the width of
the widest entering roadway. This width may include the truck apron when
approved by the City Engineer.
Minimum Street Standards
5.3.5 Truck Apron
1. The width of the truck apron shall be a minimum of 8 -feet to allow for
emergency or maintenance vehicles. The truck apron shall be constructed of a
material different in appearance from the adjacent pavement to provide visual
contrast. Final truck apron design shall be based on truck turning analysis plus
a two -foot buffer. The designer shall provide a jointing pattern plan to control
shrinkage cracking.
2. The truck apron shall have a 4% to 6% Cross Slope to allow utility and
maintenance vehicles access and discourage any pedestrian use.
3. Curb for the truck aprons shall be a 6 -inch mountable curb with a 1:1 slope
face. No expansion material shall be specified between the back of curb and
the truck apron.
4. Truck apron pavement thickness shall be developed with the Final Pavement
Design and may required subgrade stabilization if swelling soils exist.
5.3.6 Pedestrian Access Ramps for Bikes
1. Bicycle traffic shall be assisted / encouraged to leave the roadway prior to the
roundabout by construction of bicycle exit and re-entrance ramps.
5.3.7 Pedestrian Crossings
1. The pedestrian crossing through the splitter island shall be set back 25 -feet
from the yield line at the nose of the splitter island pending sight triangle
analysis. The pedestrian crossing and ramps shall meet the ADA requirements
for accessible pathways.
2. A 7 to 8 -foot wide of pedestrian refuge opening shall be provided in the splitter
island.
3. The pedestrian crossing shall cross both the entry and exit roads along a single
tangent roughly perpendicular to the centerline of the splitter island as shown
on Figure 5-11.
4. Pedestrian ramps shall be lined up directly with the crosswalk A two -foot wide
truncated dome surface shall be located perpendicular to the pedestrian
crossing at each location where pedestrians are designated to enter the traffic
way including the splitter island refuge.
5. The pedestrian ramps and splitter island pedestrian refuge shall be contained by
six-inch vertical curbs to give direction at the crossing as shown on Figure 5-
11.
Minimum Street Standards
5.3.8 Drainage
1. All drainage within the roundabout shall drain away from the center island at a
slope of 2% min. (1% min. for concrete). A crowned circulatory roadway shall
be designed for all multi -lane roundabouts unless a variance is granted by the
City Engineer.
2. No pavement swales or drainage crosspans shall be allowed to take storm
drainage away from center island or across roundabout entry or exit
alignments. Drainage directed to the roundabout from adjacent legs must be
intercepted by storm drain inlets to minimize encroachment into the circulatory
roadway.
5.3.9 Where Allowed
Roundabouts may be allowed on any roadway as approved by the City Engineer.
Design engineers are encouraged to evaluate the appropriateness of roundabouts
for intersections within proposed developments.
5.3.10 Design Software
The roundabout design shall be completed with the aid of computer software.
Acceptable products include the latest versions of Auto Turn, ARCADY, RODEL
or other software as approved by the City Engineer. VISSIM or other simulation
software may be used for public presentation. The City Engineer is authorized to
require the use of a specific software package when warranted by the needs of a
specific intersection. The Design Engineer shall have specific knowledge of how
to control the software and be able to demonstrate that understanding to the City
Engineer.
5.3.11 Right-of-way
The City will require additional right-of-way to be dedicated by the Developer to
accommodate the roundabout.
5.3.12 Splitter Islands
Raised splitter islands shall be required on all approaches. Where the approach leg
has a central turning lane or median, the splitter island shall be extended to
connect to the median or a sufficient distance from the pedestrian refuge to
provide confinement of the enter ing and exit movements and control of the
fastest paths (125 -feet is suggested). The vertical face of the raised splitter island
shall be set back approximately 3 -feet from the approach edge of a median nose
and 1 to 1.5 -feet at the trailing edge (down traffic).
Minimum Street Standards
5.3.13 Signage
The signage shall be in accordance with Chapter 7, Traffic Control Devices.
Major
Street
O
z
Lu
W Of
a
a
Minor
Street
L
5% Max.
INTERSECTION GRADE CONTROL LENGTHS (L)
CITY OF
'TITLE
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
'DATE;
Febmary 23. 2015
"�°R`'
DESCRIPTION:
INTERSECTION GRADES
e
QFKAN$Ae
5-1
ENGINEERING DIVISION
MINOR LEG
LOCAL
COLLECTOR
ARTERIAL
Local
95 ft
100 ft
125 ft
Collector
100 ft
120 ft
200 ft
Arterial
125 ft
200 ft
200 ft
IIIIIII4T11T
Stop Bar
rn
@ N
O J
0)
O
t0 d
N a
N N J
0.0
H a p
m
m
NOTES:
1. Refer to Figures 5-3, and 5-4 for design requirements.
2. Provide a 50± arc length at angle points for a smooth curve.
CITYCITY1K Y1111V 'TITLE:
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS CAFE j1jpj Febrvory 23, 2IFIGURE
DESCRIPTI0N . ARKANSAS EXCLUSIVE LEFT TURN 5-2
ENGINEERING DIVISION
Deceleration
Storage
L d/b -- Length of Taper and Lane for Deceleration and
Ls -- Length of Lane for Storage (Full Width Lane) (ft.)
Braking (ft.)
Functional Basis: To provide sufficient length for a
reasonable number of vehicles to queue within the
Functional Basis: To provide sufficient length for a
lane without affecting other lanes.
vehicle to decelerate and brake entirely outside the
through traffic lanes.
Desirable Design: Based on twice the mean arrival
rate (per cycle for signals, per 2 -minute period for
Desirable Design: Deceleration in gear for 3 seconds
stop control) during the peak hour of traffic.
(occurs over bay taper) followed by comfortable
braking to a stopped position. .
Minimum Design: Based on mean arrival rate, with
minimum storage for one vehicle.
Design Values For L d/b
L s for Stop
Control
S-- Speed Length
DHV Ls
(mph) Total Lane (ft) Bay Taper
(vph) (ft)
30 235 115 (120)
≤60 50-75
40 315 155 (160)
61-120 100
50 435 235 (200)
121-180 150
60 530 290 (240)
>180 200 or
more
LS for Traffic
Minimum Design: Braking begins at 2/3 full lane width,
Signal Control
with mimimum 50 -foot storage. For low speeds only, the
following values apply:
600
500
n
>
Design Values For L d/b
400
c
I
m
S
m
S-- Speed Length
o 300
LL
(mph) Total Lane (ft) Bay Taper
>
1 600
c200
30 230 50 (180)
I
35 250 70 (180)
ii 100
500
E
40 280 100 (180)
j
~
0
45 320 140 (180)
0
400
I5,
t
N
e
300
ro
200
❑
N
100
CITYOF
'TITLE.
MINIMUM
STREET STANDARDS
°"T"JFI�IJIE
0......I
oEs�N�Pr�oN53
GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN OF
LEFT TURN LANES
ye v e
ARKANSAS
scar rr
w•rsfAr
rw
rant.
rss-rr
.%,
II,i%
II
j�r
Ta -- Approach Taper Design (ft) (Redirect Taper)
Functional Basis: To provide a smooth lateral
transition for all vehicles approaching the
intersection.
Form of Alignment: Tangent
Low Speed Design: (<45) Provide a fully shadowed lane.
Ta = W S 2 W = Width of Offset (ft)
60 S = Speed (mph)
Tb= Bay Taper Design
Functional Basis: To direct left -turning vehicles
into the turn lane.
Form of Alignment: Tangent; or reverse curves
with 1/3 of the total length comprised of a
central tangent.
Desirable Design: For fully shadowed left
turn lane.
Tb= W3S W1= Width of Lane
S = Speed (mph)
Typical Values for Ta*
Typical Values for Tb.
S-- Speed
W -- Width of Offset (ft)
S-- Speed
W1-- Width of Lane (ft.)
(mph)
11 11.5 12
(mph)
11 12
25
115 120 125
30
110 120
30
165 170 180
40
145 160
50
185 200
35
225 235 245
40
295 305 320
*Rounded to nearesr 5 ft.
`Rounded to nearest 5 ft.
High Speed Design: (≤45) Provide a fully shadowed lane.
Minimum Design: Taper ratios of 8:1 can be
Design as follows:
used for tangent
bay tapers in constrained locations.
Ta = WS
W = Width of Offset (ft)
S = Speed (mph)
S-- Speed
W -- Width of Offset (ft)
(mph)
11 11.5 12
45
495 520 540
50
550 575 600
*Rounded to nearest 5 ft.
IYIIIVIIIVIII J 11\LL I V I PL\YAI\VV February 23, 2015 C A
ARKANSAS oE5CR1PT1ON GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN TAPERS OF LEFT TURN LANES J -"F
ENGINEERING DIVISION
2 -Lane Collectors or Arterials
2
100
O
0
teQ Full Width Turn Lane
0
80
S
=
eery
a
60
7j
.5
Posted S
eed 40-45 mph
C
40
F
Posted Speed ≥50 mph
rn
20
100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Total Peak Hour Volume on Approach Leg (vph)
4 Lane Arterials
120
=
100
Full Width Turn Lane
a-
oSteaS
80
peed
Y
a
60
.C
Posted Speed 40-45
mph�ph
C
40
H
Posted Speed ≥50 mph
0)
E
20
200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
Total Peak Hour Volume on Approach Leg (vph)
CITY OF
'TITLE MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
TE; IFIDURE;
FebDATEi `IG°R`' ruorY 23, 2015
DESCRIPTION_
TRAFFIC VOLUME GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN OF RIGHT TURN LANES
ARKANSAS
55
ENGINEERING
TT
Crosswalk a —
rrL±±
I I I I I I I
Stop Bar
C 0 CO
O J
a)
C
Co
Y_
I I
I I 2
O
0 d
d a
I I a U J
a
T
II
I
NOTES:
1. Refer to Figures 5-7 for design requirements.
2. Provide a 50± arc length at angle points for a smooth
curve.
°"°"�IIGY llle MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS 'DATE: jY OF Febrvory 2
OESCFIPTI°N'.
ARKANSAS EXCLUSIVE RIGHT TURN 5-6
ENGINEERING DIVISION
L d/b -- Length of Taper and Lane for Deceleration and
Braking (ft.)
Functional Basis: To provide sufficient length for a
vehicle to decelerate and brake entirely outside the
through traffic lanes.
Desirable Design: Deceleration in gear for 3 seconds
(occurs over bay taper) followed by comfortable
braking to a stopped position.
Tb= Bay Taper Design
Functional Basis: To direct left -turning vehicles
into the turn lane.
Form of Alignment: Tangent; or reverse curves
with 1/3 of the total length comprised of a
central tangent.
Desirable Design: For fully shadowed left
turn lane.
Design Values
For L d/b
W1= Width of Lane
Tb= W1S
3 S = Speed (mph)
Highway
Stop
Design Speed of
Corner
Radius (mph)
Design
Conditions*
15
20
25
30
Speed, V
Typical Values for Tb"
(mph)
30
235
185
160
140
-
S-- Speed
W1-- Width of Lane (ft.)
35
275
240
213
188
93
(mph)
11 12
40
315
295
265
235
185
45
375
350
325
295
250
30
110 120
40
145 160
50
435
405
385
355
315
50
185 200
" Approximate for right turn lanes in approaches
to stop signs and traffic signals.
Bay Taper Length = 3S
Tb= W1S
3
Ls -- Length of Lane for Storage (Full Width Lane) (ft.)
Functional Basis: To provide sufficient length for a
reasonable number of vehicles to queue within the
lane without affecting other lanes.
Desirable Design: Based on twice the mean arrival
rate (per cycle for signals, per 2 -minute period for
stop control) during the peak hour of traffic.
Minimum Design: Based on mean arrival rate, with
minimum storage for one vehicle.
ARKANSAS
ENGINEERING DIVISION
*Rounded to nearest 5 ft.
Minimum Design: Taper ratios of 8:1 can be
used for tangent bay tapers in constrained locations.
L s for Stop
Control
DHV Ls
(vph) (ft)
≤60 50-75
61-120 100
121-180 150
>180 200 or
more
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN OF RIGHT TURN LANES
25, 2015
5-7
I
3
0
2
U
ww
Z
■20'■
�J
yw
Z
Provide a flat
m g
platform rest
R5' R=5
area
Landscape or
hardscape as
Stop
`/
required by the
ear
City Engineer +1
w
R`300'
0
N
O O
BIKE
LANE
CITYOF 'TITLE:
STREET STANDARDS
C"Fee, a, 23.2015
r'C°re`
DESCRIPTION .
PEDESTRIAN REFUGE ISLAND/ RIGHT TURN LANE
pMINIMUM
�
ARKANSAS
C pp
5 -8
ENGINEERING
DIVISION
Crosswalk
Landscape or
50
Hardscape as ' (Min.)
required by the
City Engineer
w O
8" Solid White Stripe
V I I I
Provide Flat Platform
Rest Area
itt
/ ^0
R=175'
R=10'
e�
L0
a o:
0
BIKE TURN
LANE LANE
NOTE: Use a 175-65-175three centered curve as
shown for the outside curb flowline transition
CITY OF MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS °"IFIGURE
yeve RIPrI°N, 59ENGINEERINGNSDIVISIONIGHT TURN LANE TO A CONTINUOUS LANE W/ PEDESTRIAN REF
Departure Taper
TL
m P
Lip
gyp, R≥100'
Ta Tb Le
Approach Taper = WS 2or W S Bay Taper = WS Storage
60
Left Turn Lane with Full Shadow
High Speed (≥ 45 MPH)
Approach Taper = WS I Bay Taper = WS
3
Left Turn Lane with Partial Shadow
NOTE: Refer to Figure 5-4 for Design Requirements.
TAPER RATIOS
TAPER
DESIGN SPEED
TYPE
35
40
45
50
Bay
12:1
13.3:1
15:1
16.7:1
Approach
20:1
27:1
45:1
50:1
Depart
NA
NA
NA
NA
Combined
20:1
27:1
45:1
50:1
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS I°AFee.,a.v 23. 2015
rdyeARKANS
«tVwe �5-10
ENGINEERING SDIVISION TURN LANE DESIGN CRITERIA
Yield Line
w w
4'Min.
Notes:
1. Each Splitter Island shall have a minimum width equal to the street classification
sidewalk width.
2. The specific design shall determine mimimum radii and island lengths.
3. Raised crosswalk may be required.
4. Designer shall provide design to drain water out of pedestrian refuge.
CITY
OF TITLE MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS °A rLary 23, 2015 "GU""
ev le DESCRIPFION: 5
ENGINEERING DIVISION SPLITTER ISLAND FOR ROUNDABOUTS -11
No Trees or Shrubs that can
become higher than 20"
(measured to bottom of curb)
allowed in Splitter Island (typ.)
IIIJfl\
8'- 10' Colored Truck Apron
with a 4% to 6% Cross Slope
Splitter Island shall be J
Tangent to the Central P
Island (typ.)
12"
19 < W c 1.3 X Entry Width
2% -3%
Catch Curb & Gutter 100% Intersection Traffic:
Greatest Thickness Required
SECTION A - A
3
K➢
6" Mountable Curb & Gutter
1
IVIIIVIIII JIVI J I fl1 1 I J I AI\Yf flldQ October I. 2014
ye a DESCRIPTION, 5-1 2
ENGINEERING DIVISION TYPICAL ROUNDABOUT
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 6- PAVEMENT STRUCTURE AND MATERIALS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
6.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................3
6.1.1 Existing Streets.....................................................................................................3
6.1.2 AASHTO Design....................................................................................................3
6.1.3 Standard Pavement Section................................................................................3
6.1.4 Roundabouts........................................................................................................4
6.1.5 Approval................................................................................................................4
6.1.6 Pavement Report Revisions................................................................................4
A. Phases.............................................................................................................4
B. Imported Fill Material........................................................................................4
C. Change in Existing Conditions..........................................................................4
6.2 SOIL INVESTIGATION REQUIREMENTS...........................................................4
6.2.1 Location and Frequency of Soil Borings............................................................4
6.2.2 Imported Fill..........................................................................................................5
6.2.3 Supervision by Engineer......................................................................................5
6.3 SUBGRADE AND FILL REQUIREMENTS..........................................................5
6.3.1 General..................................................................................................................5
6.3.2 Classification Testing...........................................................................................5
6.3.3 Compaction Testing.............................................................................................5
6.3.4 California Bearing Ratio (CBR) Testing..............................................................6
6.3.5 Subsurface Water Investigation..........................................................................6
6.3.6 Subgrade Requirements......................................................................................6
6.3.7 Embankment Outside the Roadway....................................................................7
6.4 PAVEMENT DESIGN CRITERIA.........................................................................7
6.4.1 Flexible Pavement................................................................................................7
6.4.2 Rigid Pavement.....................................................................................................8
A. General............................................................................................................. 8
B. Joint Design......................................................................................................8
6.4.3 Design Factors......................................................................................................8
A. Equivalent Single Axle Loads(ESAL)...............................................................8
B. Design Serviceability........................................................................................8
C. Minimum Pavement Section.............................................................................8
t
D. Portland Cement Concrete Working Stress(f) .................................................9
E. Arterial and Collector Level Intersections.........................................................9
* A pavement design may be required as requested by the City Engineer..............9
6.4.4 Pavement Materials..............................................................................................9
A. Aggregate Base Material.................................................................................9
Chapter 6 — Pavement Structure
and Materials
Minimum Street Standards
B. Asphalt Concrete Hot Mix.................................................................................9
C. Concrete Requirements.................................................................................10
6.4.5 Special Considerations......................................................................................10
A. Staged Construction.......................................................................................10
B. Full Depth Sections........................................................................................11
C. Rehabilitating Existing Asphalt Streets...........................................................11
D. Special Requirements....................................................................................11
6.5 PAVEMENT DESIGN REPORT.........................................................................11
6.5.1 Required Information for Pavement Design Report........................................11
A. List of Required Information...........................................................................11
LIST OF TABLES
Table 6-1 Pavement Strength Coefficients....................................................................6-7
Table 6-2 Pavement Design Criteria.............................................................................6-9
Table 6-3 Asphalt Requirements...............................................................................6-10
LIST OF FIGURES
This chapter does not contain figures.
Chapter 6 — Pavement Structure
and Materials
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 6— PAVEMENT STRUCTURE AND MATERIALS
6.1 GENERAL
The purpose of this chapter is to present the Pavement Design Criteria required for use on
streets in the City of Fayetteville. These criteria shall be used in conjunction with
Chapter 4, Street Design and Technical Criteria. The Final Pavement Design Report
shall include all testing in accordance with Table 6-1.
6.1.1 Existing Streets
For existing streets the City Engineer may require an evaluation of the existing pavement
and base structure to determine if an overlay is feasible, or if reconstruction is necessary.
Any damage done to existing City streets during construction shall be repaired and/or
replaced at the contractor's expense. All repair work shall meet the requirements of this
document.
6.1.2 AASHTO Design
The design criteria and procedures presented follow American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Guide for the Design of Pavement
Structures.
6.1.3 Standard Pavement Section
Streets are to be constructed of asphaltic concrete pavement or Portland cement concrete
pavement, base course material, and subbase material (where required), and placed on
compacted, unyielding subgrade.
The use of treated subgrade, treated base, and/or full depth asphalt pavement may be
acceptable when designed and submitted by the designer, and approved by the City
Engineer in accordance with these standards.
On streets with grades steeper than 10%, concrete pavement may be required. The final
determination will be made by the City Engineer.
The pavement section requirements for alley construction, whether private or public,
shall be the same as for a public roadway. Alternative pavement materials proposals will
require approval from the City Engineer.
Chapter 6 — Pavement Structure
and Materials
Minimum Street Standards
6.1.4 Roundabouts
The pavement thickness design for the circulatory roadway shall be based on the sum of
the 20 year design volumes from all legs. A separate design analysis is required. Refer to
Section 5.3 for Roundabout design requirements.
6.1.5 Approval
The pavement design shall be submitted with final construction plans for approval.
6.1.6 Pavement Report Revisions
A revised Pavement Design investigation and report shall be required if the following
conditions occur:
A. Phases
If a street is to be built in phases, (i.e., the center two lanes are built first, then at some
later date more lanes are added), and it has been at least two years since the original
design was completed.
B. Imported Fill Material
If any new fill material that does not match the properties of the subgrade soil
proposed in the design is imported, the City may require a new pavement design
report or additional testing to verify the acceptability of this material for roadway fill.
C. Change in Existing Conditions
If material that is not consistent with the approved design report is discovered during
construction, the City may require a new pavement design report or additional testing
to verify the acceptability of this material
6.2 SOIL INVESTIGATION REQUIREMENTS
6.2.1 Location and Frequency of Soil Borings
Soil borings shall be taken in the existing or proposed street right-of-way. Subgrade
samples shall be taken upon the material that will be subgrade for the proposed street
improvements. Sample sizes shall be adequate for soil classification, compaction, and
CBR testing.
A minimum of one boring shall be obtained for any roadway segment. The distance
between borings shall not exceed 500 feet. Multiple samples shall be taken alternately
Chapter 6 — Pavement Structure
and Materials
Minimum Street Standards
among lanes and shall be evenly spaced. The City Engineer may require more frequent
testing.
Samples shall be taken to a minimum depth of 5 feet below the proposed subgrade
elevation.
6.2.2 Imported Fill
All fill material placed in the right-of-way shall be tested and approved by the City prior
to its use on the project. The material shall meet minimum requirements. Sampling shall
be at the beginning of the project, and after every 5,000 cubic yards of material is placed.
6.2.3 Supervision by Engineer
All sampling and testing of soils shall be performed under the direct supervision of a
Professional Engineer who must sign and stamp the report.
6.3 SUBGRADE AND FILL REQUIREMENTS
6.3.1 General
To simplify subgrade support testing, soil samples may be combined to form soil groups
consistent with the AASHTO classification, group index, and location for the area
investigated. Groupings shall not mix samples with different AASHTO classifications.
Appropriate tests, to include gradation, Atterberg limits, maximum compaction testing,
and California Bearing Ratio tests, shall be accomplished in order to determine the
suitability of soils for use as subgrade material within the roadway.
"Subgrade" shall be defined as material within 2 feet of the first paving layer (base or
asphalt). Roadway limits shall extend to 1 foot behind the back of curb, or edge of
pavement when no curb is present.
6.3.2 Classification Testing
Soils shall be classified visually and tested to determine the properties. Soils shall be
classified according to the AASHTO Classification system.
6.3.3 Compaction Testing
Maximum density of soils proposed for use as subgrade material shall be determined by
AASHTO T-99 (Standard Proctor Test), using Note 7. A new moisture/density test shall
Chapter 6 — Pavement Structure
and Materials
Minimum Street Standards
be completed for every 5,000 cubic yards of material imported, or when field testing
results indicate a change in material. This includes instances when field testing results
yield percentages of compaction relative to maximum of 105% or greater.
6.3.4 California Bearing Ratio (CBR) Testing
CBR testing in accordance with ASTM D 1883-94 shall be completed on all soils
proposed for use as subgrade material. CBR testing shall be performed at the dry density
corresponding to 95% of the maximum dry density of the material being tested, and at
2% above optimum moisture content.
The 3 -point method of CBR testing shall be performed on in -situ soils classified as A-1
or A-2, and on all soils proposed for use as borrow material for subgrade.
6.3.5 Subsurface Water Investigation
If groundwater is encountered or predicted to be encountered within 5 feet of the original
or proposed ground surface, a subsurface water investigation report shall be submitted for
approval by the City Engineer. This report is required to ensure mitigation of high
groundwater effects upon public improvements within the right-of-way. This information
may be a separate report or may be included in the geotechnical report.
6.3.6 Subgrade Requirements
The top 24 inches of subgrade must be of material meeting the following specifications
unless a formal design is approved:
A. Material classified by the AASHTO Soil Classification System as A-1, A-2, or A-3,
having a maximum of 35 percent of the material passing the number 200 sieve, and
having a CBR equal to or greater than 8.
B. Material not meeting the above requirements for AASHTO Classification and
gradation, but having a CBR equal to or greater than 8 and a Liquid Limit and
Plasticity Index of less than or equal to 40 and 15, respectively.
C. Material not meeting the above requirements for Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index
may be used if chemically modified by the use of lime, fly ash, or cement. The type
and amount of treatment shall be determined by a material testing lab and approved
by the City. The chemically modified soil must meet all requirements of Section A
above.
D. Material not meeting the CBR requirements of Section A above, but meeting the
requirements for Liquid and Plasticity limits may be used provided a formal
pavement design based on the actual CBR value of the soil is provided. For this case,
CBR values shall be a minimum of 4. Use of lower CBR values may be allowed
Chapter 6 — Pavement Structure
and Materials
Minimum Street Standards
where specialized pavement designs using geogrids or other technologies are
proposed.
6.3.7 Embankment Outside the Roadway
Material for curb backfill, under sidewalks, on backslopes, or in other areas within the
right-of-way may be any material that is free from sod, stumps, roots, or other perishable
or deleterious material that it be capable of forming a stable embankment when
compacted. Areas outside the roadway shall be compacted to minimum of 90% Standard
Proctor density unless otherwise specified.
6.4 PAVEMENT DESIGN CRITERIA
6.4.1 Flexible Pavement
Flexible pavements are those pavements that have sufficiently low bending resistance to
maintain continuous contact with the underlying structure, yet have sufficient stability to
support a given traffic loading condition. Commonly known as asphaltic concrete
pavement.
Refer to Table 6-1 below for structural number coefficients for the pavement design.
Table 6-1 Pavement Strength Coefficients
Pavement Structure Component
Conventional Materials
Design Strength
Coefficients
(Per Inch of Material)
Limiting Test
Criteria
ACHM Surface Course
0.44
*2" Min. Course
ACHM Binder Course
0.44
*3" Min. Course
ACHM Base Course
0.36
R 90+
*4.5" Min. Course
Aggregate Base Course (Class 7)
0.14
R>72
6" Min. Course
Chemically Treated Subgrades (or
Approved Substitute)
Compressive
Strength of Field
Specimen
Cement Treated Sub rade
0.23
7 day, 650-1000 psi
Fly Ash Treated Subgrade
0.10
7 day, 150 psi @ 70°±
Lime Treated Subgrade
0.14
7 day, 160 psi, P1 <6
Kiln Dust Treated Subgrade
0.10
7 day, 150 psi, PI <6
Maximum lift is only limited by compaction requirements.
Chapter 6 — Pavement Structure
and Materials
Minimum Street Standards
6.4.2 Rigid Pavement
A. General
Rigid pavements are those that possess a high bending resistance and distribute loads
over a large area of foundation soil. Commonly known as Portland Cement Concrete
Pavement.
B. Joint Design
The construction plans for rigid pavement areas shall include a joint pattern layout for
each street, alley and intersection. All joints and joint filling in rigid pavement shall
be designed and detailed in accordance with the current AASHTO standards.
6.4.3 Design Factors
A. Equivalent Single Axle Loads (ESAL)
Equivalent Single Axle Loads (ESAL) units are based on 18 kip (80 kN) axle loading
on each design lane. All data and design procedures in this section use ESAL units for
pavement loading repetitions. Maximum ESAL criteria for local residential and
collector streets are given in Table 6-2. Where existing or projected traffic is such
that maximum ESAL's are exceeded, a formal design will be required, at the
discretion of the City Engineer. ESAL calculations are required for arterial streets.
Directional distribution of ESAL's may be 50% unless the Traffic Study indicates
otherwise. Lane distribution factors shall be 80% for two lanes of travel in each
direction.
In the absence of truck traffic distribution data, 5% trucks shall be used, distributed
across truck types in accordance with Federal Highway Administration guidance for
urban arterial streets. The City Engineer may require a higher percentage of trucks to
be included in the calculations when existing or projected truck traffic is expected to
exceed 5%.
B. Design Serviceability
The Serviceability Index to be used for all City Roadways dedicated for public use is
given in Table 6-2.
C. Minimum Pavement Section
Table 6-2 provides the minimum acceptable pavement sections and Structural
Numbers for each roadway classification based on a minimum CBR of the subgrade
material of 8, and on the maximum number of ESAL's as specified. For lower CBR
values and higher ESAL's, pavement design calculations shall be provided. In
Chapter 6 — Pavement Structure
and Materials
Minimum Street Standards
specifying layer thickness, the designer shall consider how the pavement section will
be physically constructed, including minimum asphalt layer thicknesses.
t
D. Portland Cement Concrete Working Stress (f)
t
The working stress (f) to be used in the design shall be 75 percent of that provided by
third -point beam loading, which shall have a minimum laboratory 28 -day strength of
600 psi based on actual tests of materials to be used.
E. Arterial and Collector Level Intersections
The pavement thickness design for arterial and collector level intersections shall be
the combined 20 -year design for both directions for the shared use areas. A separate
design analysis is required.
Table 6-2 Pavement Design Criteria
ROAD
20 -Year
Serviceability Index
Reli
Minimum
Default
Default
Minimum
CLASSIFICATION
Design
(PSI)
a-
Asphalt for
Aggregate
Full Depth
Concrete
Min.
Traffic
bilit
Composite
Base
Asphalt
for Rigid
Struct.
Information
y
Section
Course
Pavement
Section
Section
Thickness
No.
inches
p°
pt
A PSI
Layer,
Layer,
Layer,
Layer,
MAXIMUM
inches
inches
inches
inches
ESAL'S
Init.
Final
Diff.
JLL
HMA
ABC
Min.
Min.
LOCAL
50,000
4.5
2.0
2.5
80
3.0
8.0
5.5
6.0
2.42
COLLECTOR *
500,000
4.5
2.0
2.5
85
5.0
6
7
Design
3.04
ARTERIAL
Two lane
Design
4.5
2.5
2.0
95
Design
Design
Design
Design
Design
Four lane
Design
4.5
2.5
2.0
95
Design
Design
Design
Design
Design
* A pavement design may be required as requested by the City Engineer.
6.4.4 Pavement Materials
A. Aggregate Base Material
Materials for aggregate base courses shall meet the requirements of Section 303.02 of
the AHTD Standard Specifications Edition of 2014.
B. Asphalt Concrete Hot Mix
Materials for Asphalt Concrete Hot Mix base, binder, and surface courses shall meet
the requirements of the 2014 AHTD Standard Specifications referenced in the
Chapter 6 — Pavement Structure
and Materials
Minimum Street Standards
following. NO MARSHALL MIXES ARE ALLOWED UNLESS SPECIFICALLY
AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY THE CITY ENGINEER.
Asphalt mix designs shall meet the requirements of Section 404.01(b), and Tables
405-1, 406-1, 407-1, and 407-2 of Sections 405, 406, and 407, with additional
requirements as follows:
Table 6-3 Asphalt Requirements
20 -Year
Number of Gyrations
Asphalt
Surface
Design
(N)
Grade
Course
Traffic
Aggregate
Information
Size
Allowed
ESAL'S
N'n^'.'
Nosign
NM..
Nms
<300k
6
50
115
64-22
9.5
300k-3 Million
7
75
160
70-22
9.5/12.5
>3 Million
8
100
205
76-22
12.5
3/8" (9.5) mm surface course shall be used on all residential and local streets. '/z"
(12.5 mm) surface course shall be used on arterial streets. Collector streets may use
either type of surface mix.
Lift thicknesses shall be a minimum of 3 times the maximum nominal aggregate size.
Maximum lift thicknesses will be limited by capability of compaction equipment to
achieve minimum compaction requirements, but will not be allowed to exceed 6
times the maximum nominal aggregate size.
C. Concrete Requirements
Materials for Portland Cement Concrete Pavement shall meet the requirements of the
latest edition of the AHTD Standard Specifications. Concrete for paving shall be
Class B concrete with a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 4,000 psi and shall
have air entrainment of 4 to 7 percent.
6.4.5 Special Considerations
A. Staged Construction
This is an alternative for the Developer to provide a minimum thickness pavement
during construction, and after repairs, construct the final lift of asphalt, providing for
a new finished pavement surface.
(HMA) may be submitted for approval with a minimum wearing course thickness of
2.0 inches. If the full pavement section is not to be placed immediately, a pavement
Chapter 6 — Pavement Structure
and Materials
i
Minimum Street Standards
design for staged construction may be required by the City Engineer. The staged
construction design must include asphalt thickness for each proposed stage.
Calculations, traffic numbers, and construction truck traffic numbers supporting the
staged design must also be submitted. For staged construction, accommodations must
be provided for the paved surface to drain with no water left standing on the
pavement.
B. Full Depth Sections
Full depth asphalt pavement sections will be considered on a case by case basis where
depth of bedrock, drainage, and soil conditions are compatible with full -depth asphalt.
When permitted by the City Engineer, full depth asphalt pavements shall consist of
one or more layers of black base or binder course topped with one or more layers of
surface course.
C. Rehabilitating Existing Asphalt Streets
Prior to overlaying existing asphalt, the City Engineer may accept nondestructive
testing to determine the amount of overlay necessary to bring the street to current
standards. All "pot -holes," utility trench settlement, cracking, and any similar
imperfections shall be repaired to the City Engineer's satisfaction prior to overlaying.
D. Special Requirements
The City Engineer may require full depth asphalt, Portland cement concrete or
chemically treated base or subgrade in locations where traffic, utilities, type of
construction, subsurface drainage, or time of construction would make asphalt on
aggregate base impractical.
6.5 PAVEMENT DESIGN REPORT
The pavement design report shall be prepared by or under the supervision of and signed
and stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Arkansas. The report
shall make a recommendation for a typical pavement structural section based on known
site soil conditions and a valid traffic impact study, when required. The report shall be
submitted in pdf format.
6.5.1 Required Information for Pavement Design Report
A. List of Required Information
1. Project Name.
2. Owner Name and Contact Information.
Chapter 6 — Pavement Structure
and Materials
Minimum Street Standards
3. Vicinity map to locate the investigated area.
4. Scaled drawings showing the location of final borings.
5. Plat with street names.
6. Scaled drawings showing the estimated extent of subgrade soil types and ESAL for
each street classification.
7. Pavement design alternatives for each street classification.
8. Tabular listing of sample designation, sample depth, Group Number, liquid limit,
plasticity index, percent passing the No. 200 sieve, AASHTO Classification,
Group Index and soil description.
9. Swell/consolidation tests.
10. Borrow source identification.
11. Design calculations for all phases of soil report.
12. Design coefficient used for asphalt, base course, etc. Refer to Table 6-1.
13. Mix design test results as discussed in Chapter 11, Street Inspection and
Testing Procedures, where chemical stabilization has been approved.
14. A discussion of potential subgrade soil problems including, but not limited to:
a. Heave or settlement prone soils.
b. Frost susceptible soils.
c. Ground water.
d. Drainage considerations (surface and subsurface).
e. Cold weather construction (if appropriate).
f. Soluble sulfates in subgrade.
g. Other factors or properties that could affect the design or performance of the
pavement system.
15. Recommendations to alleviate or mitigate the impact of problems discussed in
Item 14 above.
16. Professional Engineer Stamp
Chapter 6 — Pavement Structure
and Materials
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 7- TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
7.1
GENERAL..................................................................................................3
7.1.1
Installation Responsibility.........................................................................3
7.2
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS........................................................................3
7.2.1
Traffic Signal Design Requirements........................................................3
A. Design Requirements............................................................................3
7.3
TRAFFIC SIGNING....................................................................................4
7.3.1
General.......................................................................................................4
A. Type and Location of Signs...................................................................4
B. Design, Installation, and Maintenance...................................................4
C. New Roadway.......................................................................................4
D. Other Standards....................................................................................5
E. Sign Posts, Supports, and Mountings....................................................5
F. Sign Reflectivity.....................................................................................5
G. Backing Plates.......................................................................................5
7.3.2 Intersections...............................................................................................5
A. Street Name Sign..................................................................................5
7.3.3 Traffic Control Signs.................................................................................6
A. Design and Size.....................................................................................6
B. Regulatory .............................................................................................6
C. Warning.................................................................................................7
7.3.4 Roundabouts..............................................................................................7
7.3.5 Temporary Construction Signage............................................................7
7.4 PAVEMENT MARKING AND STRIPING...................................................8
7.4.1 General.......................................................................................................8
A. Type and Location of Striping and Markings..........................................8
B. Design, Installation, and Maintenance...................................................8
C. New Roadway.......................................................................................8
7.4.2 Pavement Markings (Symbols and Arrows)............................................8
A. General..................................................................................................8
B. Preformed Thermoplastic Pavement Marking Specifications .................8
C. Crosswalks............................................................................................9
D. Stop Bars...............................................................................................9
E. Symbols.................................................................................................9
F. Roundabouts..........................................................................................9
7.4.3 Striping.......................................................................................................9
A. General..................................................................................................9
Chapter 7— Traffic Control Devices
Minimum Street Standards
B. Broken Line............................................................................................9
C. Dotted Line..........................................................................................10
D. Turn Bay Line......................................................................................10
E. Centerline............................................................................................10
F. Parking Stalls and Angle Parking.........................................................10
G. Bikeway...............................................................................................10
7.4.4 Temporary Striping..................................................................................10
A. Specifications.......................................................................................10
B. Time Duration Limit..............................................................................10
C. Extensions...........................................................................................10
LIST OF TABLES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Tables
LIST OF FIGURES
Figures are Located at the End of the Chapter
Figure 7-1
Crosswalk and Stop Bar
Figure 7-2
Turn Arrow Marking
Figure 7-3
"Only" Marking
Figure 7-4
Broken Line Striping
Figure 7-5
Solid Line Striping
Figure 7-6
Center Turn Lane Striping
Figure 7-7
Raised Pavement Markers
Figure 7-8
Future Street Extension Sign
Chapter 7— Traffic Control Devices
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 7— TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
7.1 GENERAL
This chapter describes general signal, signing, and striping design requirements
for use in the City of Fayetteville. All design and construction of signals, signing,
and striping shall be in conformance with this chapter and the latest revision of
the MUTCD. The traffic signal and signage plans shall be included in the
construction plan submittal.
7.1.1 Installation Responsibility
The cost of the installation of traffic signals, street signage and pavement
markings is the responsibility of the developer when required with a proposed
development. The work and materials necessary for the installation shall be
included as part of the street improvements.
7.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
7.2.1 Traffic Signal Design Requirements
The design of traffic signals shall be performed by a qualified Traffic Engineer
approved by the City. The design will follow the latest edition of "Standard
Specifications for Highway Construction," published by AHTD.
A. Design Requirements
1. All mast arm/signal poles, luminaire arms, extensions, foundations, pull
boxes and conduit shall meet AHTD Standards and details.
2. Street light luminaire shall be LED or a 250 Watt HPS streetlight fixture
with cut off design.
3. Controller and cabinet shall be Peek equipment.
4. Radio shall be Ip addressable or compatible with closed loop system.
5. Tomar fire preemption system complete with detectors, wiring, and card in
the cabinet is required.
6. Attachment height for mast arms to signal pole shall be at 20 feet.
7. Video detection with wiring and detector cards for detection counting
traffic on all approach lanes shall be used per Traffic Superintendent
approval.
8. Black, 12"-12"-12" polycarbonate signal head tunnel visors with 5" black
back plates shall be mounted using astrobrackets over the center of each
lane. Side of pole mounted 12"-12"-12" are for the far side right, which
Chapter 7— Traffic Control Devices
Minimum Street Standards
will cover any dedicated right turn lanes. Use of far side left 12"-12"-12"
or 12"-12"-12"-12" heads with tunnel visors are determined on an
intersection by intersection basis but will be used in most cases on State
Highways or Arterials with significant large truck traffic. Section heads
shall not be doghouse style.
9. Black 16 -inch LED pedestrian heads (hand/man) countdown with visors
and a clamshell/banding mounting system are required with ADA
pedestrian buttons for all standard pedestrian movements. Crate style
protection shall be provided for all
pedestrian heads.
10. Two 3 -inch conduits (Schedule 40 PVC minimum) will be used for wiring
between the signal bases and the cabinet.
11. Pedestrian buttons shall be the Pelro SE -2000-08-P33 type with audio
alert, LED light, and sign housing/back plate.
12. The City of Fayetteville operates its own communications network for the
traffic management system, and as such, any new traffic signal installation
shall include the design and expansion of that communications network
from an approved existing access point to the new signal. The design and
expansion of the communications network shall be per the traffic
operations specifications current at that time.
7.3 TRAFFIC SIGNING
7.3.1 General
A. Type and Location of Signs
The Traffic Superintendent shall make the final determination regarding the
type and location of signage controls within the city right-of-way. These
controls shall include traffic control signs, street name signs, delineators, and
permanent barricades. AHTD requirements shall apply for all signage within
AHTD right-of-way.
B. Design, Installation, and Maintenance
Because the City will maintain the permanent traffic control devices on public
rights -of -way, all traffic control devices shall be fabricated and installed in
accordance with this chapter and the latest revision of the MUTCD.
C. New Roadway
Permanent signage, unless otherwise approved by the Traffic Superintendent,
shall be completely in place before any new roadway is opened to the public.
Chapter 7— Traffic Control Devices
Minimum Street Standards
D. Other Standards
These Standards are to be used in conjunction with other applicable City
Regulations.
E. Sign Posts, Supports, and Mountings
Sign Post. The post shall be 12' 2#/ft green U -channel post. If the sign
area is greater than 6 sf, then the post must be 3#/ft.
Sign Bolts. Signs shall be mounted to the post with a minimum of two
5/16" hex bolts with metal washers and nylon washer (against sign face) at
the top of sign.
F. Sign Reflectivity
All traffic control signs must be fabricated with reflective materials. All
reflective materials to be a minimum of high intensity material or greater per
ASTM TYPE III. All signs or traffic control devices must have a 7 -year
materials warranty.
G. Backing Plates
Aluminum blanks of .080 gauge are standard, except for signs larger than 36 x
36 inches, which shall be .100 or .125 gauge aluminum.
7.3.2 Intersections
A. Street Name Sign
General. All street name signs must conform to these standards. If the
intersection has a traffic signal, street name signs will be designated as
part of the signal.
Minor Intersection. Nine -inch plates shall be used at all minor
intersections; lengths will vary to fit street names.
Major Intersection. Nine -inch plates shall be used at all major
intersections, which include the intersections with Collector and Arterial
Roadways.
Sign Assembly. There shall be one plate for each road, with a minimum of
two plates per street sign assembly. Typical installation shall include two
street name signs, one for each direction. For signs with lengths of 18" —
30" use .125 gage blank thickness; for signs 36" — 48" us .125 gage blank
thickness.
5. Sign Face.
a. Letter Size - 6"; Height of Sign Blank — 9".
b. Color. Letters and numbers are to be white on a green background
face. The colors shall not fade when exposed to an accelerated test of
Chapter 7— Traffic Control Devices
Minimum Street Standards
ultraviolet light equivalent to 5 years of outdoor exposure. No silk
screened signs are permitted.
c. Border. There shall be a .625" white border on post mounted street
name signs.
d. The street names shall be a combination of upper and lower case with
the suffix (St., Ave., Ln....) being in 3.5" upper and lower case.
Street Name. Street names designations should be obtained from the
approved plat.
B. Stop Signs
1. Location of all stop signs shall be determined and discussed in the TIS,
when required.
2. Stop signs will be placed in accordance with the TIS, approved
construction plans, and the MUTCD. Stop signs shall be placed at point of
curvature (PC) behind attached sidewalk and before the access ramp.
7.3.3 Traffic Control Signs
A. Design and Size
Sign specifications and diagrams are detailed in the latest revision of the
Federal "Standard Highway Signs," latest version. This publication is
available from the U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway
Administration. Acceptable sign sizes are listed in the standard column of the
table printed with each diagram. Expressway and construction signs shall be a
minimum 36 inches.
B. Regulatory
1. Reflectivity. All regulatory signs, except parking, shall be ASTM TYPE
III grade reflectivity or greater. This includes the red series and black on
white signs.
2. Sheeting Material. All signs shall be fabricated with sheeting material,
including letters.
3. Stop Sign. Stop signs shall be a minimum of 30 inches and ASTM TYPE
III sheeting or greater.
4. Yield Sign. For minor intersections only, a 36"x36"x36" yield sign may
be used in lieu of a stop sign, at the discretion of the City according to
MUTCD.
5. Parking/No Parking Sign. Designated parking and "no parking" zones
shall be signed in accordance with MUTCD. No silk screened signs are
permitted.
Chapter 7— Traffic Control Devices
Minimum Street Standards
C. Warning
1. Reflectivity Requirements. All pedestrian crossing, school crossing, and
W16 -7P signs shall be made with diamond grade fluorescent yellow/green
sheeting.
2. "Future Street Extension" Sign and Barricades.
Dead End. All dead-end streets shall have a Type III barricade with
appropriate advance warning sign(s). Type III Barricades shall have a
"Future Road Extension" sign mounted on the barricade. See Figure 7-8.
Crosswalk Sign. Crosswalks shall be signed where adjacent to a school
and on an established school pedestrian route per Traffic Superintendent
approval. There are usually a minimum of 4 signs per crosswalk. The
color and installation shall be completed according to MUTCD. The color
shall be fluorescent yellow green. The diamond shaped sign shall have a
minimum height and width of 36 inches.
7.3.4 Roundabouts
Signage in advance of the circulating roadway shall be required. Use "Yield At
Roundabout" (W3 -2a, 30 x 30 inches; Rl-2, 36 x 36 inches), "Roundabout
Advisory Sign" (RB-1, 24 x 24 inches) and "Reduced Speed Ahead" (R2 -5a,24" x
30") signs. The "Yield" sign (Rl-2, 36 x 36 inches) shall be located at each entry
to the circulatory roadway. An "arrow" sign, designating direction of travel in
circulatory roadway, shall be located within the central island. Refer to MUTCD.
Specifications for traffic control signs, listed in MUTCD , shall apply to these
signs.
7.3.5 Temporary Construction Signage
All temporary construction signage shall be placed according to MUTCD
standards. All temporary signage is subject to review and approval by the City.
Temporary street lane closures shall be coordinated with the City, emergency
services and transportation providers. Detour plans shall be submitted for review
when detours are required.
Chapter 7— Traffic Control Devices
Minimum Street Standards
7.4 PAVEMENT MARKING AND STRIPING
7.4.1 General
A. Type and Location of Striping and Markings
Per MUTCD Section 3 B.01: Centerline markings shall be placed on arterials
and collectors 20 feet or more in width and having an ADT of 6000 vpd or
greater.
The Traffic Superintendent shall make the final determination in regards to
the type and location of pavement striping and marking within the right-of-
way during the review of the project signing and striping plans.
B. Design, Installation, and Maintenance
The City maintains the permanent pavement striping and marking on public
rights -of -way after completion of the warranty period. All such devices shall
be specified and installed in accordance with these Standards; all designs shall
be in accordance with these Standards and the latest revision of the MUTCD.
C. New Roadway
Permanent striping and marking, unless otherwise approved by the City
Engineer, shall be completely in place before any new Roadway is opened to
the public.
7.4.2 Pavement Markings (Symbols and Arrows)
A. General
Preformed thermoplastic shall be used on all pavement markings such as
arrows, "onlys," crosswalks, railroad crossings, school crossings, stopbars,
and bike symbols.
B. Preformed Thermoplastic Pavement Marking Specifications
The prefabricated markings described shall be 125 mils in thickness unless
otherwise specified and consist of white or yellow pigmented plastic film with
imbedded reflective glass spheres, uniformly distributed throughout their
entire cross-sectional area. It shall be possible to affix the markings to
bituminous or Portland cement concrete pavements by either a pressure
sensitive precoated adhesive or a liquid contact cement and shall have a black
contrasting border 4" wide. Prefabricated legends and symbols shall conform
to the applicable shapes and sizes as outlined in the MUTCD.
Chapter 7— Traffic Control Devices
Minimum Street Standards
C. Crosswalks
General. Crosswalks shall be used at all signalized intersections, approved
crossings, school routes, adjacent to schools, and as otherwise directed.
Standard Crosswalk. White 10 -feet long x 12 -inch wide bars with 48"
spacing shall be used for all crosswalks.
D. Stop Bars
All stop bars shall be white and a minimum of 12 inches wide. Stop bars are
required at signalized locations where the speed limit is 35 mph or higher and
other locations specified by the City Engineer.
E. Symbols
Preformed thermoplastic pavement marking standard material shall be a
minimum of 125 mils thick unless otherwise approved. This material shall be
used for all arrows, "only," bike symbols, bike diamonds, sharrows, railroad
crossing symbols, etc.
F. Roundabouts
Yield Line. The roundabout shall require a yield line at the point of entry
into the circulatory roadway unless otherwise approved by the City
Engineer.
Crosswalk. Generally, crosswalks do not need special markings on each
approach leg at a roundabout.
Lane use arrows shall be fish-hook type with circle.
7.4.3 Striping
A. General
Typical striping widths for lane lines are 4 inches, unless otherwise noted.
Double yellow centerline must have a 4 -inch minimum gap between
stripes.
Preformed thermoplastic shall be used on all striping. Thermoplastic as
specified in 7.4.2 shall be used.
All striping on sealcoats shall require a layout line. Prior to striping, tabs
are required for sealcoats (prior to the sealcoat process). All other
conditions require spot taping at an interval of 25 ft or closer.
B. Broken Line
All broken lines shall be 4 -inch wide using a 40 foot cycle (10' long with 30'
gap).
Chapter 7— Traffic Control Devices
Minimum Street Standards
C. Dotted Line
All dotted lines shall be 4 -inch wide using a 6 foot cycle (2' long with 4' gap).
D. Turn Bay Line
All turn bay lines shall be created with a minimum 4 -inch wide line. However,
if a turn bay occurs on a horizontal curve, the bay taper from the start of the
double wide 4" may be marked with short 4 -inch wide dotted lines (2' long
with 4' gap).
E. Centerline
All centerline striping shall be double yellow, each a minimum of 4 inches
wide, with an 8 -inch minimum gap between the two.
F. Parking Stalls and Angle Parking
All striping for parking shall be white and 4 inches wide. All edge lines of
parking areas shall also be white and a minimum of 4 inches wide.
G. Bikeway
A 4 -inch minimum wide white stripe shall be used for Bike Lanes.
7.4.4 Temporary Striping
All temporary striping shall conform to "Standard Specifications for Highway
Construction," published by AHTD, the latest revision except as herein amended.
When approved, temporary striping shall be required prior to the opening of a
Roadway for travel where pavement and/or permanent striping cannot be
completed due to weather and/or time constraints or for staged construction.
A. Specifications
Temporary striping shall be the same color and width as for permanent
striping. Temporary striping shall consist of tabs, 4 x 4 -inch (min.) tape, or
paint depending on the pavement surface, spaced at 25 -foot intervals.
B. Time Duration Limit
Temporary striping is permitted for no more than 7 days unless for staged
construction or otherwise approved.
C. Extensions
Extensions must be requested in writing if weather does not allow installation
of permanent striping.
Chapter 7— Traffic Control Devices
p -I
CONTINUOUS WHITE THERMOPLASTIC I I I ______
MARKING, SPACING AS SHOWN, ACCESS
RAMP TO ACCESS RAMP
WHITE THERMOPLASTIC STOP BAR N
z
IMI
I I I I I I I I I I I I
CITY OF
'TITLE. MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS 'DATE.
FIGURE.
23
ARKANSAS February , 2415
DESCRIPTION:
7-1
ENGINEERING DIVISION CROSSWALK ANDSTOPBAR
0
io
0
-Co
1'-0"
NOTE: ALL PAVEMENT MARKINGS TO BE
THERMOPLASTIC MATERIAL
CITY of nr�e. MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS ogre. ricURe.
o;mner z 2ma
e"ttV1IlC DESCRIPTION 7-2
KANSAS TURN ARROW MARKING
ENGINEERING DIVISION
October 7 2014
raycucvwc
aKa"sas ENGINEERING DIVISION "ONLY" MARKING 7'
10 30'
10'
30'
RAISED PAVEMENT MARKER (TYP.)
10'
4"SKIP YELLOW CENTER LINE
STRIPE TO BE PAINTED ON
CENTER LINE
ASPHALT PAVEMENT
4" SKIP YELLOW
10' 30'
CENTERLINE -
10'
30'
RAISED PAVEMENT MARKER (TVP.)
10'
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
CITYOF
ARKANSAS
ENGINEERING DIVISION
'TITLE:
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
°""'
February 23, 2415
F'°°RF'
7-4
RPT:
IION
BROKEN LINE STRIPING
4" CONTINUOUS YELLOW
CENTERLINE
RAISED PAVEMENT MARKER (TYR)
4" CONTINUOUS YELLOW
TV OF
V
ARKANSAS
ENGINEERING DIVISION
TITLE
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
IDATE'
ves,y zszms
""
"°°R"
7-5
DEscR'PTloN"
SOLID LINE STRIPING
0
0
z
z o
-i
0
U
_ w
(O
a
M
a0
NOTE:
THE PAIRS OF ARROWS
SHOULD BE INSTALLED
A MAX. OF 500APART
2"
O
0
J
W
>-
0
CITY OF
TITLE'.
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
DATE:
Fee,eo,v 23.2015
FIGURE'.
CENTER TURN LANE STRIPING
eDESCRIPTION:7
AS
6
ENGINEERING DIVISION
4.7"
TYPE II
RED/CLEAR OR
YELLOW/YELLOW
TYPE I
CLEAR OR
YELLOW
NOTE:
THE RED LENS OF THE TYPE II
R.P.M. SHALL FACE THE INCORRECT
TRAFFIC MOVEMENT
ARKANSAS
ENGINEERING DIVISION
RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS
October 7 2014
7-7
cV
Public Right of Way
RESERVED FOR
STREET EXTENSION
r"
1. SIGN SHALL HAVE ASTM TYPE III GRADE REFLECTIVITY.
2. SIGN SHALL BE WHITE WITH BLACK LETTERING.
3. INCLUDE FOUR 3/8" DIAMETER HOLES FOR MOUNTING.
4. SIGN SHALL BE MOUNTED ON A TYPE III BARRICADE.
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS 16.2015
Ua7CUtVfc 7 8
ENGINEERING DIVISION FUTURE STREET EXTENSION SIGN
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 8 - PEDESTRIAN FACILITIES DESIGN AND
TECHNICAL CRITERIA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
8.1
GENERAL..................................................................................................3
8.1.1
Reference Documents...............................................................................3
8.1.2
ADA Requirements....................................................................................3
8.1.3
Obstructions...............................................................................................3
8.1.4
Sidewalk Underdrains (Chases)...........................................................3
8.1.5
Pedestrian Crossings............................................................................3
8.1.6
Pedestrian Refuge Areas......................................................................4
8.1.7
Safety Railing (Handrails).....................................................................4
8.2
SIDEWALKS..............................................................................................4
8.2.1
General Layout and Design Criteria.........................................................4
A. Width......................................................................................................4
B. Shy Distance..........................................................................................4
C. Minimum Distance to Slope...................................................................4
D. Concrete Requirements.........................................................................5
E. Concrete Thickness...............................................................................5
F. Sidewalk Crossings of Driveways and Alleys.........................................5
G. Sidewalk Elevation................................................................................5
H. Slope.....................................................................................................5
I. Joints.......................................................................................................5
J. Finish......................................................................................................6
K. Curing Compound..................................................................................6
L. Existing Sidewalks.................................................................................6
M. Storm Water Runoff at Curb Cuts.........................................................7
8.3
ACCESS RAMPS......................................................................................7
8.3.1
Ramp Requirements..................................................................................7
A. Locations...............................................................................................7
B. Width......................................................................................................7
C. Slope.....................................................................................................7
D. Flared Sides..........................................................................................7
E. Finish.....................................................................................................8
F. Curing Compound..................................................................................8
G. Detectable Warnings.............................................................................8
8.4
MULTI -USE TRAILS..................................................................................8
8.4.1
General Layout and Design Criteria.........................................................8
Chapter 8 — Pedestrian Facilities Design
and Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
A. Width......................................................................................................
8
B. Materials................................................................................................8
C. Grades...................................................................................................8
D. Asphalt Trail Requirements (By approval of
the Trail Coordinator Only)9
E. Concrete Trail Requirements.................................................................9
F. Trail Shoulders.....................................................................................10
G. Tie Back Slopes..................................................................................10
H. Trail Signage.......................................................................................10
I. Street Crosswalks.................................................................................10
J. Striping.................................................................................................10
K. Location Criteria...................................................................................11
L. Overhead Clearance............................................................................11
M. Drainage Design.................................................................................11
8.4.2 Design Speed...........................................................................................11
8.5 SIDEWALK UNDERDRAINS (CHASES)................................................11
8.6 PEDESTRIAN CROSSINGS....................................................................11
8.7 PEDESTRIAN REFUGE AREAS.............................................................11
LIST OF TABLES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Tables
LIST OF FIGURES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Figures
Chapter 8 — Pedestrian Facilities Design
and Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 8 — PEDESTRIAN FACILITIES DESIGN AND
TECHNICAL CRITERIA
8.1 GENERAL
This chapter sets forth the minimum criteria to be used in the design of all
sidewalks, access ramps, and other pedestrian facilities within the right-of-way, or
other public easements.
8.1.1 Reference Documents
Within this chapter, AASHTO's A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and
Streets, as published by the American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials, and the ITE Designing Walkable Urban Thoroughfares
were used as a reference.
8.1.2 ADA Requirements
All pedestrian facilities shall be designed in accordance with American
Disabilities Act (ADA) regulations and the requirements of these Standards. Any
variances from these requirements shall be in accordance with ADA requirements
and shall be approved by the City Engineer prior to construction.
8.1.3 Obstructions
Manholes, utility poles or other appurtenances or obstructions, should not be
located in sidewalks or trails unless specifically approved by the City Engineer.
A minimum ADA accessible path of 3 feet in width should be provided that is
free of such obstruction when feasible.
8.1.4 Sidewalk Underdrains (Chases)
Sidewalk underdrains shall not interfere with the pedestrian's use of the sidewalk.
Underdrains shall not be located within an access ramp, curb cut, or driveway.
8.1.5 Pedestrian Crossings
All crosswalks shall be marked in accordance with Chapter 7, Traffic Control
Devices. Crosswalks will be required at all signalized intersections, school areas,
and high pedestrian areas as designated by the City Engineer.
Chapter 8 — Pedestrian Facilities Design
and Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
8.1.6 Pedestrian Refuge Areas
For Arterials with raised medians and on splitter islands for roundabouts, a
pedestrian refuge area shall be created in the median to increase pedestrian safety.
See Figure 5-8 and Figure 5- 9.
8.1.7 Safety Railing (Handrails)
Safety railings will be required on any drop adjacent to a sidewalk/trail greater
than 30" that has a slope of 1:1 or greater.
8.2 SIDEWALKS
8.2.1 General Layout and Design Criteria
A. Width
Minimum sidewalk widths for the various street classifications shall be as
specified in the City of Fayetteville Master Street Plan. The City Engineer
may require additional width for activity areas and routes leading to and from
these areas. The final sidewalk width shall be determined through additional
study of higher pedestrian traffic areas.
When a sidewalk is located adjacent to the back of curb where on street
parking is allowed, the sidewalk shall be widened by 1.5' to accommodate the
car doors opening onto the sidewalk area.
B. Shy Distance
A shy distance of 2 feet is required where vertical barriers (walls, fences,
signs, etc) greater than 3.5 feet in height are adjacent to the sidewalk and
extend more than 4 feet in length parallel to the sidewalk. A shy distance of
1.5' is required from the back of curb. A shy distance of 1 foot is required for
all other fixed obstacles. Shy distances shall be added to the minimum widths
of sidewalks specified in the Master Street Plan or required by the City
Engineer to determine the final sidewalk width.
C. Minimum Distance to Slope
There shall be a minimum of 1 foot between the sidewalk and the beginning
of a slope.
-A--
Chapter 8 — Pedestrian Facilities Design
and Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
D. Concrete Requirements
All sidewalks, access ramps and driveway approaches shall be constructed of
a Portland Cement concrete mixture that includes at least 5.5 bags of cement
per cubic yard and contains 4 to 7 percent air entrainment and that will
produce a concrete of a compressive strength of 3,500 psi after 28 days set
under standard laboratory methods.
E. Concrete Thickness
All sidewalks not within driveways shall be a minimum of 4 inches thick
concrete. All sidewalks within a driveway shall be a minimum of 6 inches
thick.
F. Sidewalk Crossings of Driveways and Alleys
Sidewalks shall be continuous through driveways and alleys. Sidewalks shall
have an expansion joint at the edge of sidewalk opposite the street. The
sidewalk edge adjacent to the street shall have at least 1 inch deep grooved
joint mark (cannot be a saw cut) to clearly define the sidewalk through the
driveway or alley.
G. Sidewalk Elevation
The back of sidewalk elevation shall be such that the slope from the back of
sidewalk to the top of curb is 2% unless otherwise approved by the City
Engineer.
H. Slope
Cross Slope. Sidewalk cross slopes shall be a minimum of 1 percent and a
maximum of 2%. The cross slope shall be towards the street unless
otherwise approved.
Longitudinal Slope. Longitudinal slope of sidewalks shall be consistent
with the adjacent street slopes.
ADA Requirements for Steeper Slopes. Sidewalks with greater than 5
percent longitudinal slope or those not adjacent to a street, shall be
constructed to meet ADA requirements by use of ramps and landings,
construction of switchbacks, or other acceptable means.
I. Joints
Material. Expansion joint material shall be asphalt impregnated
fiberboard meeting the requirements of AASHTO M213, or other joint
material meeting the requirements of the latest edition of the AHTD
standard specifications.
Chapter 8 — Pedestrian Facilities Design
and Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
2. Location. Full depth expansion joints shall be provided where sidewalks
abut drainage structures, retaining walls, building faces, and all other fixed
objects. Expansion joint material shall be provided at each cold joint.
One -quarter depth (1 inch) weakened plane joints, or saw -cut joints shall
be placed in sidewalks at regular intervals not greater than the width of the
sidewalk.
3. Saw Joints. Saw joints shall be filled with self -leveling sealant such as
Sonneborn SLl or equivalent meeting the requirements of ASTM C 920,
Type S.
4. Joint Sealant. All expansion joints and saw joints shall be sealed with
joint sealant meeting the requirements of ASTM C 920, Type S. A self -
leveling sealant shall be used for horizontal surfaces. A non -sag sealant
shall be used for vertical or nearly vertical surfaces.
J. Finish
All sidewalks shall have a broom finish.
K. Curing Compound
All sidewalks require the application of a concrete curing compound or the
concrete is to be kept moist for seven (7) days.
L. Existing Sidewalks
When redevelopment is proposed on properties with existing sidewalks, the
plans shall show the location of all existing and proposed sidewalk
improvements. In accordance with Chapter 166.04 of the UDC, each
development will be subject to review of the overall impact to the sidewalks
to evaluate the extent of the sidewalk replacement.
Widening of the existing sidewalks to meet current sidewalk width standards
is not allowed.
Removal and replacement of the existing sidewalks is required for all:
a. Segments of the sidewalk, including ramps, that do not meet all applicable
ADA standards, including cross slope and running slope.
b. Segments that have cracked and/or settled to the extent that they are out of
ADA compliance. This is defined as more than'/4 inch of vertical
displacement or cracks or joints more than '/2 inch wide.
c. Segments that display surface spalling or other distress such that a trip
hazard (more than '/4 inch vertical displacement) is created.
Chapter 8 — Pedestrian Facilities Design
and Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
d. Segments of sidewalk damaged during construction to the extent that any
of the items above apply.
M. Storm Water Runoff at Curb Cuts
Drainage shall meet the requirements specified in Chapter 4, in the
section/subsection titled Drainage Systems/Sidewalk Culvert (Chases).
8.3 ACCESS RAMPS
8.3.1 Ramp Requirements
Access ramps shall be installed at all sides of all intersections and at certain mid -
block locations for all new construction or reconstruction of curb and sidewalk.
Access ramps shall meet ADA requirements to the maximum extent feasible.
A. Locations
Intersections. Two access ramps shall be included at all intersection corners.
On T -intersections, corresponding access ramp are required opposite the
intersecting street. Access ramps shall not be placed in designated parking
areas nor in or across from driveways. Ramps shall be located to avoid
conflicts with the storm drain inlet depressions.
B. Width
The minimum width of an access ramp shall be 48 inches excluding the flared
sides.
C. Slope
The slope of the ramp shall not be greater than 8.33% (1:12) for all new
developments.
In existing developed rights -of -way, it may be necessary to install a steeper
ramp to provide access to street crossings. In an alteration, slopes as steep as
1:10(10%) are permitted for the distance of a 6 -inch rise if it is not
technically feasible to provide a ramp at 1:12 (8.33%). For a 3 -inch rise, the
maximum slope may be as steep as 1:8 (12.5%) where necessary.
D. Flared Sides
The slope of the flared sides shall not be greater than 10% (1:10).
Chapter 8 — Pedestrian Facilities Design
and Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
E. Finish
Access ramps shall have a broom finish.
F. Curing Compound
All access ramps require the application of a concrete curing compound or the
concrete is to be kept moist for seven (7) days.
G. Detectable Warnings
Detectable warning devices (truncated domes) meeting ADA requirements
shall be installed on all access ramps.
8.4 MULTI -USE TRAILS
8.4.1 General Layout and Design Criteria
A. Width
The minimum width of trails shall be 12 feet and shall follow the trail cross-
section guidelines of the Master Transportation Plan.
B. Materials
Selection of trail surface materials depends upon site conditions. Final
determination of trail construction materials shall be made by the Trail
Coordinator.
1. Concrete. Trails shall be constructed of concrete when located in or near
floodprone areas, vehicular road crossings, access ramps and within street
right of way.
2. Asphalt. Trails may be constructed of asphalt in areas where the trail is
located above floodprone areas and away from vehicular traffic and street
right of way.
C. Grades
All trails shall be constructed with a 2% maximum cross slope in the same
direction as the existing grade unless otherwise designated to allow drainage
to sheet flow across the trail. Trails adjacent to streets shall have 2%
maximum cross slope towards the street. Longitudinal grade shall not exceed
5%. Longitudinal grade may be varied by the Trails Coordinator for sites with
difficult topography. In such cases, the AASHTO longitudinal grade
requirement for bicycles shall apply.
-
Chapter 8 — Pedestrian Facilities Design
and Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
D. Asphalt Trail Requirements (By approval of the Trail Coordinator Only)
Asphalt trails shall be constructed of asphalt concrete hot mix surface course.
Type III surface course meeting the requirements of AHTD Specifications.
Asphalt trail sections shall be constructed to the following standards:
1. Surface. Asphalt trail sections shall have a minimum 3 inch thick surface.
2. Base Course. Base course for asphalt trails shall consist of a minimum 6
inch thickness of Class 7 aggregate compacted to 95% M.P.D.
3. Subgrade. The top 24 inches of subgrade shall meet the requirements of
Chapter 6, Section 6.3.5 for street construction. Existing material not
meeting these requirements shall be removed and replaced with approved
select fill and compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Density (S.P.D.).
Specific site conditions may require the additional undercut, placement of
stone backfill or other methods in order to create a solid base.
E. Concrete Trail Requirements
All concrete portions of trails shall be constructed of a portland cement
concrete mixture with a compressive strength of 3500 p.s.i. and with 4 to 7
percent air entrainment. Concrete trail sections shall be constructed to the
following standards:
1. Surface. Concrete trail portions shall have a minimum 4 inch thick
concrete surface reinforce with fibers or welded wire fabric with a
medium broom finish.
2. Base Course. Base course for concrete trails shall consist of a 4 inch
minimum thickness of class 7 aggregate compacted to 95% M.P.D.
3. Subgrade. The top 24 inches of subgrade shall meet the requirements of
Chapter 6, Section 6.3.5 for street construction. Existing material not
meeting these requirements shall be removed and replaced with approved
select fill and compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Density (S.P.D.).
Specific site conditions may require the additional undercut, placement of
stone backfill or other methods in order to create a solid base. This
requirement does not apply where trails are constructed within the right of
way adjacent to a street.
4. Expansion joints. Full depth expansion joints shall be provided where
trails abut drainage structures, retaining walls, building faces, and all other
fixed objects. Expansion joint material shall be provided at each cold
-
Chapter 8 — Pedestrian Facilities Design
and Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
joint. Expansion joint material shall be asphalt impregnated fiberboard
meeting the requirements of AASHTO M213, or other joint material
meeting the requirements of the latest edition of the AHTD standard
specifications.
5. Contraction Joints. One inch depth weakened plane joints, or saw -cut
joints, shall be placed in trail at regular intervals matching the trail width,
but not greater than 12 feet apart.
6. Joint Sealant. All expansion joints and saw joints shall be sealed with
joint sealant such as Sonneborn SL! meeting the requirements of ASTM C
920, Type S. A self leveling sealant shall be used for horizontal surfaces.
A non -sag sealant shall be used for vertical or nearly vertical surfaces.
F. Trail Shoulders
A two foot shoulder adjacent to the trail shall be graded smooth and should
not exceed 2% cross -slope in the same direction as the trail. The Trail
Coordinator shall determine the appropriateness and maintenance
requirements of plants and grasses adjacent to trails.
G. Tie Back Slopes
The ground beyond the shoulder shall meet the existing grade with a
maximum slope of 3:1. A swale may be required on the uphill side of the trail
to direct stormwater runoff to a storm sewer system or culvert crossing. These
may be required where runoff is concentrated onto the trail.
H. Trail Signage
Trail signage shall comply with the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices, Part 9 —Traffic Controls for Bicycle Facilities.
I. Street Crosswalks
Trails that intersect and cross public streets shall have a red concrete
crosswalk with two foot wide white thermoplastic stripes on each side. Where
appropriate, this crosswalk may be raised 2.5 inches above pavement surface.
The concrete shall be colored with integral color mix (Soloman Dry Pigment
417 Apple Red with 4% loading) or with thermoplastic (Decomark
Herringbone Patter, Brick Red).
J. Striping
Striping shall conform to the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices,
Part 9 — Traffic Controls for Bicycle Facilities. Additional striping may be
required for increased safety.
I -
Chapter 8 — Pedestrian Facilities Design
and Technical Criteria
1
Minimum Street Standards
K. Location Criteria
Multi -use trail locations shall be based on safety, circulation, and access
considerations.
L. Overhead Clearance
All multi -use trails shall have a minimum of 10 feet clear vertical distance
above the path.
M. Drainage Design
All culvert crossings shall be designed to carry the 10 -year storm event.
8.4.2 Design Speed
For paved surfaces a minimum design speed of 20 mph shall be used. Where
grades exceed 4 percent, a design speed of 30 mph shall be used.
8.5 SIDEWALK UNDERDRAINS (CHASES)
Sidewalk underdrains shall not interfere with the pedestrian's use of the sidewalk.
Underdrains shall not be located within an access ramp, curb cut, or driveway.
8.6 PEDESTRIAN CROSSINGS
All crosswalks shall be marked in accordance with Chapter 7, Traffic Control
Devices. Crosswalk markings will be required at all signalized intersections,
school areas, and high pedestrian areas as designated by the City Engineer.
8.7 PEDESTRIAN REFUGE AREAS
For Arterials with raised medians and on splitter islands for roundabouts, a
pedestrian refuge area shall be created in the median to increase pedestrian safety.
See Figure 5-8 and Figure 5- 9.
Chapter 8 — Pedestrian Facilities Design
and Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
Chapter 8 — Pedestrian Facilities Design
and Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 9- ON -STREET BICYCLE FACILITIES DESIGN AND
TECHNICAL CRITERIA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
9.1 GENERAL..................................................................................................3
9.1.1 Reference Documents...............................................................................3
9.1.2 Bicycle Master Plan...................................................................................3
9.1.3 Obstructions...............................................................................................3
9.2 ON -STREET BIKE LANES DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
...........................3
9.2.1 On -Street Bike Routes...............................................................................3
9.2.2 Width and Cross Sections.........................................................................3
9.2.3 Signage and Striping.................................................................................4
9.2.4 Bike Lanes at Intersections.......................................................................4
LIST OF TABLES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Tables
LIST OF FIGURES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Figures
Chapter 9 — Bicycle Facilities Design
and Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
Chapter 9 — Bicycle Facilities Design
and Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 9— ON -STREET BICYCLE FACILITIES DESIGN
AND TECHNICAL CRITERIA
9.1 GENERAL
This chapter sets forth the minimum criteria to be used in the design of all bike
lanes, bike paths, or other bicycles facilities within the City's rights -of -way.
9.1.1 Reference Documents
In this chapter, the AASHTO "Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities"
as published by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials, the National Association of City Transportation Officials Urban
Bikeway Design Guide and the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices were
used as references.
9.1.2 Bicycle Master Plan
This subsection was developed based on the City of Active Transportation Plan
(ATP). All projects shall optimize bicycle travel within the city by providing
bicycle facilities in all new developments in accordance with this plan.
9.1.3 Obstructions
Manholes, utility poles or other appurtenances or obstructions, should not be
located in bike lanes or bike paths.
9.2 ON -STREET BIKE LANES DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
9.2.1 On -Street Bike Routes
Specific streets are designated in the City of Fayetteville Alternative
Transportation and Trails Master Plan as on -street bicycle routes. Streets
designated as on -street bicycle routes shall be designed with additional width for
bike lanes in accordance with the master street plan.
9.2.2 Width and Cross Sections
The bike lane shall be designed with widths shown in standard street classification
sections. Bicycle lanes on one-way streets shall be on the right side of the street,
Chapter 9 — Bicycle Facilities Design
and Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
unless otherwise specified by the City Engineer. Bike lane width shall not be less
than 5 feet measured from the face of curb or edge of pavement if no curb exists.
9.2.3 Signage and Striping
All designated bike lanes shall be signed and striped, as required by MUTCD and
as required in Chapter 7, Traffic Control Devices.
9.2.4 Bike Lanes at Intersections
At the intersections where a separate right turn lane exists and is striped, the
bicycle lane shall transition and be placed between the through lane and the right
turn lane. The bike lane width shall remain the same as the approaching bike lane.
See Figures 5-8 and 5-9 in Chapter 5, Intersections.
Chapter 9 — Bicycle Facilities Design
and Technical Criteria
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 10- NEIGHBORHOOD TRAFFIC SAFETY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
10.1 GENERAL...............................................................................................5
10.1.1 Intended Use............................................................................................
5
10.2 TRAFFIC SAFETY PROBLEMS.............................................................5
10.2.1 Speeding...................................................................................................5
10.2.2 Measuring Speed of Roadway................................................................5
10.2.3 Intrusion (Cut -Through Traffic)...............................................................6
10.2.4 Pedestrian Safety.....................................................................................6
10.3 TRAFFIC CALMING DESIGN CRITERIA
...............................................6
10.3.1 Intersection Bulb-Outs............................................................................6
A. Appropriate Locations............................................................................6
B. Typical Uses..........................................................................................6
C. Signing and Markings............................................................................6
D. Other Considerations.............................................................................7
E. Advantages............................................................................................7
F. Disadvantages.......................................................................................7
10.3.2 Center Island Narrowing..........................................................................7
A. Appropriate Locations............................................................................7
B. Typical Uses..........................................................................................7
C. Signing and Markings............................................................................7
D. Advantages............................................................................................7
E. Disadvantages.......................................................................................7
10.3.3 Gateway Treatment..................................................................................8
A. Appropriate Locations............................................................................8
B. Typical Uses..........................................................................................8
C. Signing and Markings............................................................................8
D. Advantages............................................................................................8
E. Disadvantages.......................................................................................8
10.3.4 Oval Median..............................................................................................8
A. Appropriate Locations............................................................................8
B. Typical Uses..........................................................................................8
C. Signing and Markings............................................................................8
D. Advantages............................................................................................9
E. Disadvantages.......................................................................................9
10.3.5 Chokers.....................................................................................................9
A. Appropriate Locations............................................................................9
B. Typical Uses..........................................................................................9
Chapter 10 — Neighborhood Traffic Safety
Minimum Street Standards
C. Signing and Markings............................................................................9
D. Other Considerations.............................................................................9
E. Advantages............................................................................................9
F. Disadvantages.......................................................................................9
10.3.6 Chicanes.................................................................................................10
A. Appropriate Locations..........................................................................10
B. Typical Uses........................................................................................10
C. Signing and Markings..........................................................................10
D. Other Considerations...........................................................................10
E. Advantages..........................................................................................10
F. Disadvantages.....................................................................................10
10.3.7 Two -Lane Slow Point.............................................................................11
A. Appropriate Locations..........................................................................11
B. Typical Uses........................................................................................11
C. Signing and Markings..........................................................................11
D. Other Considerations...........................................................................11
E. Advantages..........................................................................................11
F. Disadvantages.....................................................................................11
10.3.8 Traffic Circles.........................................................................................12
A. Appropriate Locations..........................................................................12
B. Typical Uses........................................................................................12
C. Signing and Markings..........................................................................12
D. Other Considerations...........................................................................12
E. Advantages..........................................................................................12
F. Disadvantages.....................................................................................12
10.3.9 Textured Crosswalks.............................................................................13
A. Appropriate Locations..........................................................................13
B. Typical Uses........................................................................................13
C. Advantages..........................................................................................13
D. Disadvantages.....................................................................................13
10.3.10 Speed Tables........................................................................................13
A. Appropriate Locations..........................................................................13
B. Typical Uses........................................................................................13
C. Signing and Markings..........................................................................14
D. Other Considerations...........................................................................14
E. Advantages..........................................................................................14
F. Disadvantages.....................................................................................14
10.3.11 Raised Crosswalks..............................................................................14
A. Appropriate Locations..........................................................................14
B. Typical Uses........................................................................................14
C. Signing and Markings..........................................................................14
D. Other Considerations...........................................................................15
Chapter 10 — Neighborhood Traffic Safety
Minimum Street Standards
E. Advantages..........................................................................................15
F. Disadvantages.....................................................................................15
10.3.12 Raised Intersections............................................................................15
A. Appropriate Locations..........................................................................15
B. Typical Uses........................................................................................15
C. Signing and Markings..........................................................................15
D. Other Considerations...........................................................................15
E. Advantages..........................................................................................16
F. Disadvantages.....................................................................................16
10.3.12 On -Street Parking................................................................................16
A. Appropriate Locations..........................................................................16
B. Typical Uses........................................................................................16
C. Advantages..........................................................................................16
D. Disadvantages.....................................................................................16
LIST OF TABLES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Tables
LIST OF FIGURES
Figures are Located at End of Chapter
Figure 10-1 Intersection Bulb -Out
Figure 10-2 Center Island Narrowing
Figure 10-3 Gateway Treatment
Figure 10-4 Oval Median
Figure 10-5 Choker
Figure 10-6 Chicane
Figure 10-7 Two -Lane Slow Point
Figure 10-8 Traffic Circle
Figure 10-9 Speed Table
Figure 10-10 Elongated Speed Table
Figure 10-11 Raised Crosswalk
Figure 10-12 Raised Intersection
Chapter 10 — Neighborhood Traffic Safety
Minimum Street Standards
Chapter 10 — Neighborhood Traffic Safety
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 10- NEIGHBORHOOD TRAFFIC SAFETY
10.1 GENERAL
This chapter presents acceptable methods of neighborhood traffic calming that are
determined by the City to be necessary for existing Local streets. This chapter
also provides for specific design criteria for a number of traffic calming methods.
10.1.1 Intended Use
The necessity or desire for traffic safety and calming stems from the perception
that local streets, particularly in residential areas, do not always function as
intended. These roadways should be low traffic volume roadways used for direct
access to residences on the street. They are also intended as a multi -modal system
that is shared by vehicular, bicycle, and pedestrian traffic in a manner that
minimally impacts residents in these areas.
10.2 TRAFFIC SAFETY PROBLEMS
The presence of too many vehicles traveling at high speeds through a
neighborhood diminishes that neighborhood's quality of life. Traffic calming
measures are intended to minimize these issues and return the quality of life to the
neighborhood. Care must be taken by the designer so that the installation of traffic
calming devices does not create unintended hazards that delay emergency
response or jeopardize the safety of bicyclists, pedestrians or motorists.
10.2.1 Speeding
Speeding may occur on roadways that allow the driver to feel safe while
exceeding the posted speed limit. Factors that contribute to this perception include
long, unbroken lines of sight, steep roadway grades, wide roadways, low density
developments, low pedestrian activity, and large building setbacks. In addition,
speeding may occur when the street functions as a higher classification street than
originally intended.
10.2.2 Measuring Speed of Roadway
The standard method of measuring speed on any street is the determination of the
85th percentile speed. The 85th percentile speed is the speed at which or below
which 85 percent of the vehicles travel. If the 85`h percentile speed is at or below
the posted speed limit, then speeding is not considered a problem. However, if the
85 percentile speed is over the posted speed limit by 5 miles per hour or greater,
Chapter 10 — Neighborhood Traffic Safety
Minimum Street Standards
either the posted speed limit may be inappropriate or a speeding problem may
exist.
10.2.3 Intrusion (Cut -Through Traffic)
Intrusion is increased volume or excessive non -local traffic along a neighborhood
street. This cut -through traffic is caused by drivers who use a local street to go
through a neighborhood and save time on their trip. These streets, which are less
impeded than others, will often invite cut -through traffic. Routes that are
perceived to be time -saving will attract more traffic. This increased cut -through
traffic can cause local streets to function more like a collector.
10.2.4 Pedestrian Safety
Pedestrian safety negatively impacted by speeding vehicles, cut -through traffic, or
a combination of these problems. The high concern areas are in the vicinity of
neighborhood schools and parks or mid -block pedestrian crossings, particularly
on streets with on -street parking. These areas require special consideration for the
mobility and safety of the pedestrian.
10.3 TRAFFIC CALMING DESIGN CRITERIA
10.3.1 Intersection Bulb -Outs
Bulb -outs are areas of expanded curbing, at intersections, that narrow the overall
street width and protect on street parking. See Figure 10-1.
A. Appropriate Locations
1. Appropriate for local streets.
2. Works well in downtown areas.
3. Primarily used at intersections.
B. Typical Uses
1. Reduce the crossing distance for pedestrians.
2. Improve the line of sight for pedestrians.
3. Make pedestrians more visible to oncoming traffic.
4. Slow traffic by funneling it through a narrower street opening.
C. Signing and Markings
Bulb -outs can be used with the standard intersection signage.
Chapter 10 — Neighborhood Traffic Safety
Minimum Street Standards
D. Other Considerations
Impact on roadway drainage must be addressed. Drainage may be
provided by devices such as inlets, concrete channels, valley gutters, etc...
E. Advantages
1. Improve pedestrian safety.
2. Reduce vehicle speeds.
3. May slow right -turning vehicles.
4. Prevent parking close to intersections.
5. Can improve neighborhood appearance with landscaping.
F. Disadvantages
1. Can result in loss of on -street parking space.
2. May make it difficult to accommodate bicycle lanes.
3. Challenging drainage patterns.
4. Landscaping maintenance.
10.3.2 Center Island Narrowing
Center Island Narrowing are areas of curbed or painted islands located before an
intersection or mid -block along the centerline of a street. See Figure 10-2.
A. Appropriate Locations
1. Appropriate for local streets.
B. Typical Uses
Slow traffic by narrowing the roadway with a median and to increase
pedestrian safety by providing a refuge halfway across the street, so that
only one direction of traffic need be crossed at a time.
C. Signing and Markings
Reflectors and street lighting are recommended to improve visibility.
D. Advantages
1. Improve pedestrian safety.
2. Reduce vehicle speeds.
3. Can improve neighborhood appearance with landscaping.
E. Disadvantages
Can result in loss of on -street parking space.
May make it difficult to accommodate bicycle lanes.
Landscaping maintenance.
May restrict access.
Chapter 10 — Neighborhood Traffic Safety
Minimum Street Standards
10.3.3 Gateway Treatment
Gateway Treatments are short medians at the entrance to a residential street. See
Figure 10-3.
A. Appropriate Locations
1. Appropriate for local streets.
B. Typical Uses
Slow traffic as they turn into the street and to limit the exit to a single lane.
C. Signing and Markings
Reflectors and street lighting are recommended to improve visibility.
D. Advantages
1. Reduce vehicle entry speeds.
2. Prevents drivers from forming a second lane.
3. Can improve neighborhood appearance with landscaping.
4. Does not restrict access for residents.
5. Improve pedestrian safety.
E. Disadvantages
1. Can result in loss of on -street parking space.
2. May make it difficult to accommodate bicycle lanes.
3. Landscaping maintenance.
10.3.4 Oval Median
Oval Medians are curbed oval shaped medians located mid -block See Figure 10-
4.
A. Appropriate Locations
Appropriate for local streets.
Appropriate on streets having volumes less than 3,500 vehicles per day.
B. Typical Uses
Slow traffic by narrowing the roadway with a median.
C. Signing and Markings
Reflectors and street lighting are recommended to improve visibility.
Chapter 10 — Neighborhood Traffic Safety
Minimum Street Standards
D. Advantages
1. Reduce vehicle speeds.
2. Can improve neighborhood appearance with landscaping.
3. Does not restrict access for residents.
E. Disadvantages
Can result in loss of on -street parking space.
May make it difficult to accommodate bicycle lanes.
Landscaping maintenance.
10.3.5 Chokers
Chokers are areas of curbing, typically mid -block, that narrow the overall street
width. See Figure 10-5.
A. Appropriate Locations
1. Appropriate for local streets.
2. Appropriate on streets having volumes less than 3,500 vehicles per day.
B. Typical Uses
Slow traffic by funneling it through a narrower street opening.
C. Signing and Markings
The "Road Narrows" Sign (W5- 1) with an appropriate "Advisory Speed"
Sign (W 13-1) should be used at least 150 feet in advance of the choker.
Reflectors and street lighting are also recommended to improve visibility.
D. Other Considerations
Impact on roadway drainage must be addressed. Drainage may be
provided by devices such as inlets, concrete channels, valley gutters, etc...
E. Advantages
1. Improve pedestrian safety.
2. Reduce vehicle speeds.
3. Can improve neighborhood appearance with landscaping.
F. Disadvantages
1. Can result in loss of on -street parking space.
2. May make it difficult to accommodate bicycle lanes.
3. Challenging drainage patterns.
4. Landscaping maintenance.
Chapter 10 — Neighborhood Traffic Safety
Minimum Street Standards
10.3.6 Chicanes
A chicane is a series of three curb bulb -outs staggered on alternating sides of the
street, at a mid -block location, which forces vehicles to negotiate the narrowed
roadway in a snake -like fashion. See Figure 10-6.
A. Appropriate Locations
Appropriate on local streets having volumes less than 3,500 vehicles per
day.
Appropriate on two-lane, two-way streets or on one -lane, one-way streets.
B. Typical Uses
1. Slows vehicles by forcing motorists to weave through the bulb -outs.
C. Signing and Markings
The "Road Narrows Sign" (W5-1) with an appropriate "Advisory Speed
Sign" (W 13-1) should be used at least 150 feet in advance of the chicane.
Object Markers (OM -3R, OM -3L), may be installed within the Chicanes if
necessary. Reflectors, street lighting and landscaping are also
recommended to improve visibility.
D. Other Considerations
1. Traffic volumes should be balanced in each direction. Chicanes lose
effectiveness when volumes are significantly unbalanced.
2. Chicanes may not be appropriate in areas with high truck traffic.
3. Avoid locations where grades exceed 8 percent.
4. Placement of chicanes will depend on site conditions and driveway
locations.
E. Advantages
1. Reduce vehicle speeds.
2. Reduce traffic volume.
3. May reduce collisions.
4. Traffic noise may be reduced due to lower speeds and volume.
5. Can improve neighborhood appearance with landscaping.
F. Disadvantages
Can result in loss of on -street parking space.
With two-lane chicanes, motorists may cross the centerline to maintain a
straight line of travel.
Landscaping maintenance.
Chapter 10 — Neighborhood Traffic Safety
Minimum Street Standards
10.3.7 Two -Lane Slow Point
A Two -Lane Slow Point is a pair two islands with an angled median in between,
at a mid -block location, which forces vehicles to negotiate the narrowed roadway
in a snake -like fashion. See Figure 10-7.
A. Appropriate Locations
Appropriate on local streets having volumes less than 3,500 vehicles per
day.
Appropriate on two-lane, two-way streets or on one -lane, one-way streets.
B. Typical Uses
1. Slows vehicles by forcing motorists to weave through the Slow Point.
C. Signing and Markings
1. The "Road Narrows Sign" (W5-1) with an appropriate "Advisory Speed
Sign" (W13-1) should be used at least 150 feet in advance of the Slow
Point. Object Markers (OM -3R, OM -3L), may be installed within the
Slow Point if necessary. Reflectors, street lighting and landscaping are
also recommended to improve visibility.
D. Other Considerations
1. Traffic volumes should be balanced in each direction. Slow Points lose
effectiveness when volumes are significantly unbalanced.
2. Slow Points may not be appropriate in areas with high truck traffic.
3. Avoid locations where grades exceed 8 percent.
4. Placement of Slow Points will depend on site conditions and driveway
locations.
E. Advantages
1. Reduce vehicle speeds.
2. Reduce traffic volume.
3. May reduce collisions.
4. Traffic noise may be reduced due to lower speeds and volume.
5. Can improve neighborhood appearance with landscaping.
F. Disadvantages
Can result in loss of on -street parking space.
Landscaping maintenance.
Chapter 10 — Neighborhood Traffic Safety
Minimum Street Standards
10.3.8 Traffic Circles
Traffic circles are raised islands located in the center of an unsignalized
intersection. All traffic must negotiate the circle and circulate in a
counterclockwise direction. See Figure 10-8.
A. Appropriate Locations
Appropriate on local streets having volumes less than 3,500 vehicles per
day.
Appropriate on streets without high pedestrian or left -turning volumes.
B. Typical Uses
1. Slows vehicles due to the horizontal deflection.
C. Signing and Markings
1. The use of the "Advance Traffic Circle Warning Sign" (W6-4) with an
appropriate "Advisory Speed Sign" (W 13-1) is recommended in advance
of the first traffic circle encountered on each street.
D. Other Considerations
Depending on the intersection configuration, the shape of the traffic circle
may not actually be round.
Turning analysis should be completed to ensure that the design vehicle can
negotiate the circle. A mountable concrete apron may be used to
accommodate emergency service vehicles, trucks and buses.
Traffic circles may require additional street lighting.
E. Advantages
Reduce vehicle speeds.
Reduces the number of potential conflict points at an intersection.
May reduce collisions.
Can improve neighborhood appearance with landscaping.
Creates a visual obstruction that deters through traffic.
F. Disadvantages
1. May make it difficult for emergency vehicles, buses, and trucks to turn
left.
2. May require removal of some on -street parking. The prohibition of
parking for 30 feet from the intersection is recommended.
3. Landscaping maintenance.
4. Additional right of way may be necessary.
Chapter 10 — Neighborhood Traffic Safety
Minimum Street Standards
10.3.9 Textured Crosswalks
Textured crosswalks are the use of pavers, imprinted concrete/asphalt, or other
materials to demarcate crosswalks and alert motorists that they are entering a
pedestrian -friendly area.
A. Appropriate Locations
1. Appropriate on all street classifications where high pedestrian volume
exists.
2. May be used on streets posted up to 45 mph.
B. Typical Uses
Often used in combination with raised crosswalks, raised intersections or
bulb -outs.
C. Advantages
1. Improved street appearance.
2. Alerts motorist to the possible presence of pedestrians.
D. Disadvantages
Virtually no effect on traffic speeds or volumes.
Extra noise may be produced from vehicles passing over the textured
surface.
3. Heavily textured surface may present a traction problem for bicyclists,
wheelchairs or disabled persons.
10.3.10 Speed Tables
A speed table is a raised surface on the roadway that is typically 3" in height and
12 to 22 feet in length. See Figure 10-9 and 10-10.
A. Appropriate Locations
1. Appropriate on local streets having volumes less than 3,500 vehicles per
day with posted speeds of 30 mph or less.
2. Primarily used in mid -block locations.
B. Typical Uses
1. Within typical residential travel speeds, speed tables encourage motorists
to slow to a safe speed at or below the speed limit.
Chapter 10 — Neighborhood Traffic Safety
Minimum Street Standards
C. Signing and Markings
The Speed Table Warning Sign (WI 6-I) is recommended to be installed
100 feet in advance of speed tables, at the table, or in both locations. For a
series of tables, the sign may be used at the first table in the series,
The pavement markings as shown in Figures 10-4 and 10-5 shall be used
for all speed tables.
D. Other Considerations
1. Speed tables should be placed 250 to 600 feet apart.
2. Typically, speed tables should not be placed within 150 feet of an
intersection.
3. Speed tables should not be used on curves.
4. Speed tables should not be used on streets with a grade of 8% or greater.
5. Speed tables should not be used on streets without curbing.
E. Advantages
Reduce vehicle speeds.
Relatively inexpensive to install and maintain.
F. Disadvantages
Drainage must be accommodated.
Should be avoided on emergency routes.
Rutting and pavement damage in retro-fit situations.
10.3.11 Raised Crosswalks
Raised crosswalks are marked and elevated pedestrian areas that are an extension
of the sidewalk at intersections or mid -block locations. Raised crosswalks are
typically 3 to 6 inches above street level. See Figure 10-11.
A. Appropriate Locations
1. Appropriate on local streets having volumes less than 3,500 vehicles per
day with posted speeds of 30 mph or less.
B. Typical Uses
Reduce vehicle speeds.
Improve visibility of pedestrians.
C. Signing and Markings
The "Raised Pedestrian Crossing Warning Sign" (W11A-3) is
recommended to be installed with each raised pedestrian crossing.
Chapter 10 — Neighborhood Traffic Safety
Minimum Street Standards
D. Other Considerations
1. Most appropriately used at areas with significant pedestrian crossings.
2. Most effective when combined with textured crosswalks and bulb -outs.
3. Drainage inlets should be installed on the uphill side of the raised
crosswalk.
4. All ADA requirements must be met.
E. Advantages
1. Reduce vehicle speeds.
2. Improves visibility of pedestrians.
F. Disadvantages
1. Drainage must be accommodated.
2. May slow emergency vehicles.
10.3.12 Raised Intersections
Raised Intersections are intersections, including crosswalks, which are raised 3 to
6 inches above street level. See Figure 10-12.
A. Appropriate Locations
Commonly found in commercial areas and business districts with high
pedestrian activity.
They are appropriate on local and collector streets.
They are appropriate on streets with volumes up to 10,000 ADT.
B. Typical Uses
1. Reduce vehicle speeds on all approaches.
2. Decrease conflicts between vehicles and pedestrians by better demarcating
crossing areas and elevating pedestrians above the street.
C. Signing and Markings
Advance warning signs should be posted. The "Raised Pedestrian
Crossing" sign (W11A-3) is recommended.
D. Other Considerations
If raised intersections are the same height as the surrounding curb, a slight
lip or other tactile measure should be used as a warning to the visually
impaired.
Textured pavement treatments and curb extensions are often used in
conjunction with raised intersections.
Chapter 10 — Neighborhood Traffic Safety
Minimum Street Standards
E. Advantages
1. Improves visibility of pedestrians.
2. Visual enhancement.
3. Reduction in vehicle speeds.
F. Disadvantages
1. Expensive to construct.
2. May slow emergency vehicles.
3. May disrupt drainage.
10.3.12 On -Street Parking
On -street parking creates the appearance of a narrower roadway. The proximity
of parked vehicles and opening doors tends to slows traffic.
A. Appropriate Locations
1. Commonly found in commercial areas and business districts, but may be
used on any street of adequate width.
B. Typical Uses
1. Reduce vehicle speeds.
2. Provide additional parking spaces for businesses and residents.
C. Advantages
1. Creates a buffer between pedestrians and moving vehicles.
2. Reduction in vehicle speeds.
D. Disadvantages
1. ROW Impacts
2. Disruption of traffic flow while motorist is parking.
3. May disrupt drainage.
Chapter 10 — Neighborhood Traffic Safety
i
ARKANSAS
ENGINEERING DIVISION
MINIMUM
INTERSECTION BULB -OUT
otlane, 1, Pura
10-1
CITYO F
eoEs�R�Pr�oN.
ENGINEERINGDIVISION
TIT`
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
DAT`-
�a,�n 3, zoos
"°°R`-
0-2
CENTER ISLAND NARROWING
CITYOF
ARKANSAS
ENGINEERING DIVISION
'TITLE:
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS °"T`-
March
"°°R`-
10 -3
DESCRIPTION
Gateway Treatment
MINIMUM
March 2, 2015
rdyCA vwu TWO-LANE SLOW POINT �10-4
ENGINEERING DIVISION
STREET
°
W
N Q
28'
�>
(TYP.)
R.P.M.'S TP 7
(WHITE) 8' C/C
•o
Ii
16'
°
CHOKER DETAIL
28'ROAD WIDTH
6" RAISED CONC.
MEDIAN (ISLAND)
IR=1/4"
R=3"
20'
,a
n a
°
12"
°
TYPE'C'CONCRETE CURB
°
a
b
°
O
U,
ROAD
s NAeRows
(TYP)
CITY OF
TITLE; MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
DATE'
October 1. 2014
FIGURE'
ARKANSAS
1 0-5
DESCRIPTION..
CHOKER
ENGINEERING DIVISION
28'BC
(TYP.)
20
P.
OM -3L
(TYP)
W
OM -3R
(TYP)
24
28ROAD WIDTH
a
F
o
3
R=U4"
R=3"
ro
" N
TYPE 'C' CONCRETE CURB
ROAD W5-1
NARROWS (TYP)
CITY ° ` TITLE
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
Feduary z3, zaJAGURE
rayeltevilie
ARKANSAS
10-6
DESCRIPTION
CHICANE
ENGINEERING DIVISION
CITY OF TITLE.
eDESCRIPTION
RKANs^s
ENGINEERING DIVISION
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
DATE:
Mach 2. 2015
FIGURE.
10 -7
TWO-LANE SLOW POINT
6" CURB
11.7' DIAMETER
�e.
30' TYP.
28' TYP.
m
JL
6" CURB
6.8' DIAMETER
.�e
30' TYP.
21' TYP.
CITY OF
TITLE
MINIMUM
STREET STANDARDS
DATE:
F V-1 23. 2015
FIGURE:
Y e e
ARKANSAS
A Q
-
I O Q
DESCRIPTION
TRAFFIC CIRCLE
ENGINEERING DIVISION
W16-1
SPEED TABLE SIGN, __,
30" X 30" 6" SERIES C SPEED
LETTERS TABLE
15 MPH ADVISORY- 15 SEE NOTE 4
PLAQUE W13-1,
18" X 18"
Al I I III
I CENTER OF
TRAVEL L NE
20' 1B' 16 1{' 12' 10' 8'
ti �l ^1 -1 ;I -A "I
12" THERMOPLASTIC
- SEE NOTE 4
SPEED TABLE MARKING AND SIGNING
No110 Scale
y I
CENTERED ° <
MARKING DETAIL
SAWCUTB
NOTES: FULL DEPT
1. SAWCUT OR FEATHER GRIND TO KEY IN SPEED
TABLE. SEE SECTION A -A.
2. SIGN LOCATIONS SHALL BE VERIFIED BY THE
ENGINEER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.
3. SPEED TABLE CHEVRON MARKING SHALL BE WHITE
THERMOPLASTIC, HEAT FUSED PREFORMED, 125
MIL., OR EQUAL APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER.
4. FOR A SERIES OF SPEED TABLES, USE THE
ADVISORY SPEED PLAQUE AT ONLY THE FIRST
SPEED TABLE IN EACH DIRECTION OF TRAVEL.
5. SPEED TABLES SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 3500 PSI MIN.
ARKANSAS
6'
CHEVRON DETAIL
SECTION A -A
12"
TAPER
CURB DETAIL
CURB AND
GUTTER SECTION B -B
MINIMUM
SPEED TABLE
2015
m
10-9
A
20' 18' 16' 14' 12' 10' 8'
}I r nl i j"I ' nl
I 12' THERN0PVS0C
SPEED TABLE SIGN, _`
30" X 30" 6" SERIES C SPEED
LETTERS TAELE
15 MPH ADVISORY -'_' 15 -SEE NOTE 4
PLAQUE W13-1,
18" X 18" I
(jl I I I I I I CENTER OF
TRAVEL LANE
- SEE NOTE 4
SPEED TABLE MARKING AND SIGNING
Not to Scale
y I
CENTERED
DRIVING LANE DRIVING LANE
MARKING DETAIL
SAWCUT OR FEATHER
GRIND 1y" DEEP TYP.
SAWCUT & REMOVE
FULL DEPTH PAVEMENT, I APPROACH ARC
NOTES: -i
1. SECTION A -A
SAWCUT OR FEATHER GRIND TO KEY IN SPEED
TABLE. SEE SECTION A -A.
2. SIGN LOCATIONS SHALL BE VERIFIED BY THE
ENGINEER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.
3. SPEED TABLE CHEVRON MARKING SHALL BE WHITE
THERMOPLASTIC, HEAT FUSED PREFORMED, 125
MIL., OR EQUAL APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER.
4. FOR A SERIES OF SPEED TABLES, USE THE
ADVISORY SPEED PLAQUE AT ONLY THE FIRST
SPEED TABLE IN EACH DIRECTION OF TRAVEL.
5. SPEED TABLE TO BE INSTALLED USING CITY
PROVIDED TEMPLATE, 48 HOURS NOTICE
REQUIRED.
6. SPEED TABLES SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 3500 PSI MIN.
6'
6'
CHEVRON DETAIL
z9" t2723
1
6'
APPROACH ARC DETAIL
12"
TAPER
I
CURB DETAIL
CURB AND
GUTTER
SECTION B -B
HILT MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS °"'Fee. 23, 2015 "TILT`
DESCRIPTION_
RKANSAs ELONGATED SPEED TABLE 10'10
ENGINEERING DIVISION
MODIFIED SIDEWALK RAMP TYPE 1
DETECTABLE WARNING PATTERN
RAMP FLUSH WITH
RAISED CROSSWALK
F CROSSWALK
I I 6
2 2
6' 10' 6'
MARKING DETAIL
NOTE'. LOCATION SHOULD TAKE INTO
CONSIDERATION PROXIMITY TO DRAINAGE
STRUCTURES. SINCE THE FLOW IN THE GUTTER
WILL BE OBSTRUCTED BY THE CROSSWALK.
ADDITIONAL INLETS MAY NEED TO BE
CONSTRUCTED TO PREVENT PONDING.
ARKANSAS
Wr nl
RAISED CROSSWALK
MODIFIED SIDEWALK RAMP TYPE 2
GAP WIDTH MAY BE ADJUSTED
BETWEEN 12 AND 6D" TO AVOID
WHEEL PATHS
1TYPICAL
CL ROADWAY
1' TYPICAL AT EDGE
GUTTER
MINIMUM
DEPRESS CONCRETE RAMP TO
MATCH RAISED CROSSWALK
SAWCUT & REMOVE EXIST.
PAVEMENT OR GRIND A MIN.
OF 1112" DEEP (TYP)
APPROACHARC-\\
2% MIN.
Cl
r 0'
SECTION A -A
SECTION B -B
APPROACH ARC DETAIL
RAISED CROSSWALK
6'
2015
6' RAMP
RPM
(TYP)
6'
APPROACH ARC DETAIL
NOTES:
I. MINIMUM IN SLOPE REQUIRED IN ALL ARRAS FOR DRAINALF.
2. A 30"X30" YELLOW WARNING SIGN "RAISED PEDESTRIAN
CROSSING" (WI I A3) MAY BE REQUIRED ON ALL APPROACHES NOT
CONTROLLED BY A STOP SIGN.
3. INTERSECTION HUMP MAY BE CONSTRUCTED USING ASPHALT OR
CONCRETE, PER CITY ENGINEER.
4. CONSTRUCT INTERSECTION HUMP USING 4000 PSI HIGH/EARLY
CONCRETE REINFORCED WITH 6 X 6' W2.9 X W2,9 WELDED WIRE
FABRIC.
5. CONCRETE WILL BE COLORED AND TOP STAMPED WITH TEXTURE
PER CITY ENGINEER.
6. CONSTRUCT INTERSECTION HUMP USING ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
IN ACCORDANCE W ITI I SECTION 40201 TI IF. A I I T D
SPECIFICATIONS, CURRENT EDITION.
7. APPLY PAVEMENT MARKINGS USING WIIITETIIFRMOPLASTIC,
125 MIL.. IN THICKNESS IN ACCORDANCE WITH A.H.T.D.
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS CURRENT EDITION_
8_ APPLY RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS, TP II (YELLOW/YELLOW)
(CENTERLINE) AND TP 13 (CLEAR/ICED) (EDGE OF PAVEMENT),
USING IIF.ATR.D BITUMINOUS ADIIFSIV E IN ACCORDANCE W ITII
A.H T.D. SPECIFICATIONS, CURRENT EDITION.
MINIMUM
I ARKANSAS
ENGINEERING DIVISION
6'
3"-6"
6.. 12"
o o,
SECT. B -B
SECT. A -A
RAISED INTERSECTION
2015
6'
10-12
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 11 - STREET INSPECTION AND TESTING
PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
11.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE............................................................................3
A. City Observation................................................................................................
3
B. Inspection...........................................................................................................
3
C. Testing................................................................................................................
3
D. Pavement Design Report ....................................................................................
4
E. Mix Designs........................................................................................................
4
F. Test Reports........................................................................................................
4
11.2
PAVEMENT...............................................................................................4
11.2.1
Subgrade..................................................................................................4
A. Existing Material................................................................................................
5
B. Moisture and Density Requirements..................................................................
5
C. Final Proof-Rolling............................................................................................
5
D. Testing Frequency..............................................................................................
5
E. Finished Subgrade..............................................................................................
5
11.2.2
Base Course.............................................................................................
5
A. Materials.............................................................................................................
6
B. Moisture and Density Requirements..................................................................
6
C. Thickness............................................................................................................
6
D. Testing Frequency..............................................................................................
6
E. Finished Grade....................................................................................................
6
11.2.3
Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA)............................................................................6
A. Materials.............................................................................................................
6
B. HMA Testing......................................................................................................
6
C. Density Requirements........................................................................................
7
D. Thickness...........................................................................................................
7
E. Surface Tolerance...............................................................................................
7
11.2.4
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement....................................................8
A. Materials.............................................................................................................
8
B. Concrete Testing................................................................................................
8
C. Concrete Roadway Inspection............................................................................
8
11.3
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE......................................................................11
11.3.1
Concrete Specifications........................................................................11
Materials...............................................................................................................
11
11.3.2
Concrete Testing and Inspections.......................................................11
Chapter 11 — Street Inspection and
l Testing Procedures
If; �
Minimum Street Standards
A. Structural and Inspection Requirements..........................................................11
B. Foundation Testing and Inspection Requirements...........................................11
C. Inspection of Forms and False Work...............................................................
11
D. Inspection of Reinforcing Steel........................................................................
11
E. Concrete Testing and Inspections.....................................................................
12
F. Testing Frequency and Related Inspections.....................................................
13
G. Placement (Inspection).....................................................................................
13
11.4 NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.............................................................13
11.4.1 Concrete Specifications........................................................................13
A. Materials...........................................................................................................
13
B. General Specifications......................................................................................
14
11.4.2 Concrete Testing and Inspections.......................................................15
A. Concrete Tests..................................................................................................
15
B. Testing Frequency and Related Inspections.....................................................
15
C. Placement (Inspection).....................................................................................
16
11.5 MISCELLANEOUS.....................................................................................16
11.5.1 Traffic Signs, Striping, and Signals......................................................16
A. Installation/Application....................................................................................
16
iiiati]alrr_1_14NK
Table 11-1 Materials Testing..............................................................................10
Table 11-2 Concrete Mix Designs........................................................................10
LIST OF FIGURES
This Chapter Contains No Figures
I -
Chapter 11 — Street Inspection and
I Testing Procedures
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 11 - STREET INSPECTION AND TESTING
PROCEDURES
11.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. City Observation
A City Public Works Inspector will observe key steps of the construction
process to insure compliance with these standards and the approved plans and
specifications. Inspections will include but not be limited to: grading, erosion
control, storm sewer installation, structures, non-structural concrete, sub -
grade, base course, pavement and traffic control devices.
B. Inspection
The engineer of record shall provide inspection services for all work on the
approved construction plans. The inspector shall keep a daily log of all
construction activities and testing for the project. The logs shall be submitted
to the City in pdf format on a weekly basis, unless otherwise approved.
The inspector will be responsible for coordinating the required testing to make
sure that the contractor, testing lab and City representatives are present.
All inspection personnel shall be qualified to read and interpret the plans and
specifications and to observe the construction and testing procedures to ensure
compliance.
The costs of all inspections and oversight of the construction process shall be
paid for by the Developer.
C. Testing
During the construction process testing from an independent laboratory is
required on all infrastructure installation including soils, concrete, asphalt, and
other applicable tests. All testing laboratories engaged in testing for projects
shall be pre -qualified by the City Engineer.
These Standards state the minimum requirements for materials sampling,
testing, and inspection. All tests shall be made and certified by an approved
independent testing laboratory. All costs required and pertaining to testing, the
work performed, and materials supplied to verify compliance with these
Standards shall be the responsibility of the Developer.
The use of the testing laboratory's services does not relieve the Developer of
the responsibility to furnish the required materials and to perform the required
construction in full compliance with these Standards. Passing test results do
not constitute acceptance of the work or materials represented by the test. The
Developer is responsible for quality control of their work.
I -
Chapter 11 — Street Inspection and
I Testing Procedures
If; �
Minimum Street Standards
In various sections of these Standards, specific testing or other data is required
by the City to insure that the intent of these Standards is fulfilled. The costs of
such tests or other specific data where required by these Standards or on the
approved plans shall be borne by the Developer. When evidence indicates that
the work performed may not comply with these standards or the approved
plan, the City Engineer may require additional tests or data beyond that
required in these Standards or on the approved plans. The costs of such tests
shall be borne by the Developer. Should such tests or additional data show a
failure to meet these Standards or the approved plans, the Developer shall be
responsible for all costs associated with repair or replacement of said failure.
D. Pavement Design Report
The pavement design report required in these Standards shall be submitted for
review a minimum of 10 working days prior to any paving. Refer to Chapter
6, Pavement Structure and Materials.
E. Mix Designs
Pavement mix designs meeting the requirements of these Standards shall be
furnished to the City Engineer a minimum of 10 working days prior to
intended use of the mix. The mix design shall be reviewed and accepted by
the City Engineer prior to use. If a mix design not accepted by the City is
used, the City may require removal of all improvements placed with the
unaccepted material.
F. Test Reports
Test reports submitted to the City shall include all tests performed on the
project. All test reports shall show the location where the test was performed
or at which work or batch is represented by the test. Test reports shall include
all information specified in the AASHTO, ASTM, or local test procedure
used. Prior to acceptance of each phase of a project, all final reports shall be
submitted to the City indicating compliance with these specifications.
11.2 PAVEMENT
11.2.1 Subgrade
The subgrade will be evaluated by the City Public Works Inspector prior to the
placement of the next course. Any necessary reworking, compaction, or
replacement will be required prior to continuation. The approval is valid only to a
time when weather conditions may have changed the condition of the subgrade.
I -
Chapter 11 — Street Inspection and
Testing Procedures
Minimum Street Standards
Changes in weather such as freezing or precipitation, which may cause changes in
the subgrade, will require re -approval of the subgrade.
A. Existing Material
Unsuitable material will be excavated to a depth as directed by the City
Engineer or the geotechnical engineer, disposed of, and replaced with fill
material meeting the requirements of Chapter 6, Pavement Structure and
Materials.
If the existing material is acceptable for use as subgrade material, or modified
to be suitable, the subgrade will be scarified to a depth of 8 inches and
recompacted to conform to the requirements of this chapter.
B. Moisture and Density Requirements
All lifts in embankment areas shall be compacted to not less than 95% of the
maximum density. The moisture content of the material shall be within 2% of
optimum moisture content before compaction.
Maximum density will be determined using AASHTO T-99 (Standard
Proctor). In -place field density measurements shall be determined using
AASHTO T-191, T-233 or T-310.
Density requirements do not apply to portions of embankments constructed of
materials such as rock that cannot be tested by approved testing methods.
C. Final Proof -Rolling
Final proof rolling of subgrade shall be required prior to taking density tests.
Proof rolling shall be done with a fully loaded tandem -axle dump truck.
D. Testing Frequency
Density tests shall be taken every 300 feet for each lane or portion thereof.
For streets less than 300 feet in length, a minimum of one test shall be taken
for each lane. The Public Works Inspector shall determine the location of the
tests.
E. Finished Subgrade
The subgrade shall be shaped for its full width to the required grade and cross
section. The finished subgrade shall not vary at any point by more than 1/2"
from the design elevation.
11.2.2 Base Course
The base course material shall be placed on a completed and approved subgrade
or existing base that conforms to the grade and cross section shown on the plans.
Base course shall not be placed on frozen subgrade.
I -
Chapter 11 — Street Inspection and
Testing Procedures
Minimum Street Standards
A. Materials
Materials for aggregate base courses shall meet the requirements of Section
303 of the AHTD Standard Specifications (2014 Edition) for Class 7.
B. Moisture and Density Requirements
All lifts in embankment areas shall be compacted at substantially optimum
moisture content to not less than 98% of the maximum density.
Maximum density will be determined using AASHTO T-180 (Modified
Proctor). In -place field density measurements shall be determined using
AASHTO T-310.
C. Thickness
The compacted base course shall be tested for thickness in the same general
location of the density testing. The finished base course shall not vary at any
point by more than '4" from the design thickness.
D. Testing Frequency
Density tests shall be taken every 300 feet for each lane or portion thereof.
For streets less than 300 feet in length, a minimum of one test shall be taken
for each lane. The Public Works Inspector shall determine the location of the
tests.
E. Finished Grade
The base course shall be shaped for its full width to the required grade and
cross section. The finished base course shall not vary at any point by more
than 1/2" from the design elevation.
11.2.3 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA)
A. Materials
Materials for Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete base, binder and surface courses shall
meet the requirements of the AHTD Standard Specifications (2014 Edition)
as referenced in Section 6.4.4 of these standards. No "Marshall Mixes" are
allowed within City right of way unless specifically authorized in writing by
the City Engineer.
B. HMA Testing
All testing shall be done in accordance with AASHTO or ASTM as
designated throughout this chapter.
Testing results for Asphalt Binder Content, VMA and Air Voids shall be
provided by the contractor upon request by the City Engineer.
I -
Chapter 11 — Street Inspection and
l Testing Procedures
Minimum Street Standards
The pavement shall be cored at 500 foot intervals for each lane, or fraction
thereof, in each lane. The core locations shall be chosen so as to accurately
represent the quality of the asphalt placed in a particular area.
C. Density Requirements
Minimum asphalt density shall be 92% of the maximum theoretical density.
No density of less than 90% shall be accepted. The asphalt where densities
are less than 92% and greater than 90% shall be left in place and a penalty of
2% of the in -place construction cost of the deficient asphalt shall be paid to
the City for each .10% deviation from the required density up to a maximum
of 40 %. Where densities are less than 90%, the paving shall be removed and
replaced.
When a deficient density is obtained, two additional cores shall be taken
within 10' either side of the deficient core location. If the density of both of
these cores is 92% or higher, then no additional cores are necessary and no
penalty will be applied. If insufficient density is reported with the new cores,
then additional cores shall be taken every 50 feet until the limits of the
deficient asphalt have been established.
The asphalt density used for the purpose of computing the penalty shall be the
average density over the deficient area. Only the deficient densities (from 90-
92%) shall be used to calculate the average.
D. Thickness
Thickness measurements shall be taken for each core sample. The thickness
measurement shall be averaged for each run of paving. A run shall be
considered a portion of paving constructed in one day on one section of street.
Multiple streets paved in one day will result in multiple runs.
Should any deviation be found, additional cores may be taken to define the
horizontal limits of the deviation. When measurement of the core is not
deficient by more than 1/4 inch from the design thickness, the pavement
thickness will be considered to be within acceptable tolerance. When such
measurement is deficient more than 1/4 inch from the design thickness, two
additional cores at intervals not less than 50 ft will be taken and used to
determine the average thickness for that area. When the average thickness of
cores is deficient by more than 1/4 inch the City Engineer may require that the
area be removed and replaced.
Maximum thickness used for averaging purposes shall be the specified
thickness plus 1/2 inch.
E. Surface Tolerance
The finished surface of the pavement, when tested with a 10 -foot straight edge
parallel to the centerline or perpendicular across joints, will show variations as
I -
Chapter 11 — Street Inspection and
Testing Procedures
Minimum Street Standards
measured from the testing face of the straight edge to the surface of the
pavement, which shall not exceed 1/8 inch on surface course and 3/16 inch on
binder course. Areas that do not meet the required surface accuracy shall be
clearly marked and if the City Engineer requires repair, the contractor shall
repair the pavement.
11.2.4 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement
A. Materials
Materials for Portland Cement Concrete Pavement shall meet the
requirements of the latest edition of the AHTD Standard Specifications.
B. Concrete Testing
All testing shall be done in accordance with AASHTO or ASTM as
designated throughout this chapter.
C. Concrete Roadway Inspection
1. Tolerances.
a. Where the constructed surface varies from the design cross slope by
more than 1/2 inch in 10 feet, the pavement shall be removed and
replaced. This technique may not apply in areas with less than 2%
cross slope.
b. Areas showing high spots greater than 1/4 inch as measured with a 10 -
foot straight edge, but less than 1/2 inch, may be diamond ground to
within the specification of 1/4 inch.
c. Thickness Tolerance. The thickness of the pavement shall be
determined by average caliper measurement of cores tested. A
minimum of 1 core per 500 LF will be taken at random. Should any
deviation be found, additional cores may be taken to define the
horizontal limits of the deviation. When measurement of the core is
not deficient by more than 1/4 inch from the design thickness, the
pavement thickness will be considered to be within acceptable
tolerance. When such measurement is deficient more than 1/4 inch and
not more than 1 inch from the design thickness, two additional cores at
intervals not less than 50 ft will be taken and used to determine the
average thickness for that area. When the thickness of pavement is
deficient by more than 1/4 inch the City Engineer may require that the
area be removed and replaced.
I -
Chapter 11 — Street Inspection and
l Testing Procedures
Minimum Street Standards
2. Specifications.
a. All panels with cracks wider than 1/8 inch shall be repaired by total
removal of the panel and replacement as required by the criteria
herein.
b. All panel cracks 1/8 inch and narrower may be routed and sealed at the
discretion of the City Engineer.
c. There shall be no more than one structural crack per panel. Panels with
more than one structural crack shall be repaired by total panel removal
and replacement.
d. All sections removed shall have edges parallel to adjacent panel joints.
e. All saw cuts for removal of slabs shall be full depth cuts.
f. No panel shall be allowed that has a crack meeting an adjacent panel at
an angle more acute than 45 degrees to a finished edge or control joint.
g. All corner cracks to a panel shall be removed and replaced.
h. Any vertical differential movement across a crack greater than 3/16
inch shall be repaired by either partial or total panel removal and
replacement.
i. All panels with faulted joints resulting from settlement and/or
pumping of the edges shall be repaired by removal and replacement.
j. All manholes, water valves, range boxes, etc., shall be flush to 1/4 inch
below the final surface roadway grade.
k. When an entire panel is removed, the panel shall be secured to the
surrounding panels with 18" long '/z"diameter smooth dowel bars
placed at 12" centers.
I -
Chapter 11 — Street Inspection and
Testing Procedures
Minimum Street Standards
Table 11-1
Materials Testing
Subgrade
AASHTO
ASTM
Frequency
Sampling
187
D420
Per Soil Type
Encountered
Soil Classification
M145
D3282
D2488/D2487
Proctor
Standard
T99/T310
D698
Modified
T1801T310
D1557
Density & Moisture
Content
T191/T233/T310
D2922/D3017
1 per 300LF lane
Min. 1 per lane
Hot Mix Asphalt
Sampling
T168
D979
Density
Nuclear
--
D2950
As Directed by City
Coring
T166
D2726
1 per 500LF lane
Min. 1 per lane
Concrete
Sampling
T141
C172
Mold and Cure
T23
C31
Cylinder Tranport.
T23
C31
Physical Properties
1 per 100 cy
Min. 1 per day
1 per 1000 LF Curb
Slump
T119
C143
See Table 11-2
Air Content
T152
C231
Comp. Strength
T22
C39
Coring
T24
C42
As Directed by City
Comp. Strength
T24
C42
Aggregate Base Course
Gradation
T27
C136
1 Per Source
Proctor
Modified
T180
D1557
Standard
T99
D698
Density & Moisture
Content
1 per 300LF lane
Min. 1 per lane
Table 11-2
Concrete Mix Designs
Concrete Class
Class A
Class B
28 -Day Comp. Strength (psi)
3500
4000
Portland Cement (bags)
5.5
6.5
Max. Water/Cement Ratio
.49
.44
Slump Range (inches)
1-4
1-4
Air Entrainment (%)
4-7
4-7
Maximum Fly Ash Content
20%
20%
I -
Chapter 11 — Street Inspection and
l Testing Procedures
Minimum Street Standards
11.3 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
This section delineates the testing, inspection, and related documentation
requirements for all structures, including retaining walls, cast -in -place box
culverts, and other concrete structures specified within.
11.3.1 Concrete Specifications
Materials
Class A or B concrete shall be used in drop inlets, junction boxes and others
as specified.
Class B concrete shall be used in box culverts, bridges, retaining walls and
other structures as specified.
11.3.2 Concrete Testing and Inspections
A. Structural and Inspection Requirements
The structural design Engineer or his representative, familiar with
assumptions inherent in the structure design, shall inspect the construction in
sufficient detail to confirm that the construction meets the requirements of the
plans and specifications.
B. Foundation Testing and Inspection Requirements
Unstable foundation material shall be removed to a depth approved by the
City Engineer below the finish grade elevation and be replaced with a material
and construction procedure as approved by the City.
C. Inspection of Forms and False Work
1. The forms shall be clean of all dirt, mortar, and all foreign material. Forms
that will later be removed shall be thoroughly coated with an approved
form oil.
2. The forms shall be mortar tight and of a quality (in addition to the bracing)
to withstand the pressures from deposited concrete.
3. Unless otherwise specified, forms for exposed surfaces shall be constructed
with triangular fillets 3/4 inch at all exterior corners.
D. Inspection of Reinforcing Steel
1. Material Grade and Size. The material grade and size shall be as specified
by the Designer on the certified construction plans.
Chapter 11 — Street Inspection and
I Testing Procedures
Minimum Street Standards
2. Tying.
a. The intersections of all bars shall be tied in accordance with the
following requirements: Slab bars shall be tied at every intersection
around the periphery and at spacing according to bar sizes. Unless bar
spacing is less than 12" in which case every other intersection shall be
tied. However, in no case shall less than 30% of the intersections be
tied.
b. Wall bars should be tied sufficiently to prevent shifting, at least 3 times
in any bar length at every third or fourth intersection and at spaces
according to bar sizes, staggered:
#5 and smaller - 3'0"
#6 to #9 - 4'0" to 5'0"
#10 to #11 - 6'0" to 8'0"
Upper and lower mats shall be tied or otherwise fastened at 4 foot
maximum spacing in each direction. Minimum splice length shall be
24 bar diameters.
1) All reinforcing steel shall be supported with steel chair or precast
mortar.
2) Reinforcing steel shall be clean and free of all foreign material
before concrete is placed.
3) All clearances shall be in compliance with approved plans and
specifications.
E. Concrete Testing and Inspections
1. Materials Specifications. The class of concrete used shall be in accordance
with Table 11-2. Concrete that does not meet strength in 28 days is
subject to removal.
2. Concrete Tests.
a. All testing shall be done in accordance with AASHTO or ASTM as
designated in Table 11-1.
b. Maximum time allowed between sampling and casting cylinders shall
not exceed 15 minutes. Cylinders shall be transported to the laboratory
within 24 hours of casting but after the concrete has hardened, (see
AASHTO T23 or ASTM C-31).
c. The slump test shall be performed in accordance with AASHTO T119.
The air test shall be performed in accordance with AASHTO T196 or
I -
Chapter 11 — Street Inspection and
Testing Procedures
Minimum Street Standards
T121. Slump and air test measurements shall be taken with each
cylinder series.
d. If compressive strength of cylinders does not meet the specified values,
the Design Engineer shall recommend and the City Engineer shall
approve the necessary mitigation measures needed.
F. Testing Frequency and Related Inspections
1. Testing frequency shall be in accordance with Table 11-1.
2. At least 4 compressive strength cylinders shall be taken from the same
concrete delivery truck to provide design compliance testing at the
laboratory. Two of the four specimens will be tested at 28 days for
acceptance and 1 shall be tested at 7 days for information. The fourth
cylinder shall only be necessary if the 28 -day fails. Additional cylinders
may be required, as directed by the City Engineer.
G. Placement (Inspection)
1. Concrete placement shall be done in a manner such that the concrete is not
segregated or altered before placing. It shall not be allowed to free fall
more than 5 feet. Concrete shall be placed in lifts not to exceed 18 inches.
2. A sufficient number of vibrators shall be used to properly consolidate the
concrete as required.
3. Weepholes and drainage systems should be installed in the structure at the
locations noted on the plans or specifications.
4. Construction joints and expansion joints shall be constructed in
conformance with approved plans and specifications.
11.4 NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Non-structural concrete includes curb, gutter, sidewalks, driveways, crosspans and ADA
ramps.
11.4.1 Concrete Specifications
A. Materials
Class A concrete shall be used in curb and gutter, sidewalks driveways,
crosspans, ADA ramps and miscellaneous concrete items as specified. See
Table 11-2.
I -
Chapter 11 — Street Inspection and
Testing Procedures
Minimum Street Standards
B. General Specifications
1. Humps and Depressions. Any localized humps and/or depressions greater
than 1/4 inch (as measured with a 10 -foot straight edge) will require
removal and replacement of the work in question.
2. Water Ponding. No ponding of water shall greater than 1/4 inch be allowed.
3. Flowline Depth. Curb and gutter flowline depth shall not vary from adopted
standards by more than ± 1/4 inch, measured vertically from the top of
curb to the gutter invert.
4. Cross Slope in Pedestrian Walks. Pedestrian walks shall have a maximum
of 2.0 percent cross slope.
5. Joint Spacing. Contraction and construction joints shall be placed at a
maximum spacing of 10 feet in curb and gutter, crosspans, trickle
channels, etc. Refer to Chapter 8 for Sidewalk and Trail joint spacing.
6. Heave or Settlement of Sidewalk. Heave or settlement of sidewalk, relative
to separate curb pour, greater than 1/4" shall be cause for corrective
action.
7. Utility Placement. No utility facilities shall be placed in curb and gutter,
sidewalk, crosspan, ADA ramp etc., unless specifically called out on the
approved construction plans. This includes meter boxes, manholes, power
poles, fire hydrants, water valves, etc.
8. Concrete Cracks.
a. At the time of final acceptance, the repair of all cracks will be
completed.
b. Any section of concrete with longitudinal cracks or with cracks greater
than 1/16" in width will require complete removal and replacement of
that section between joints.
c. Repair action for hairline cracks may be waived at the discretion of the
City Engineer. For the purpose of this section, a hairline crack is one
that is reasonably immeasurable and without separation as determined
by the City Engineer.
9. Concrete Chips and Gouges.
Chips and gouges in the concrete will be evaluated on an individual basis.
If determined by the City to be unacceptable, then the section shall be
removed and replaced.
10. Other Imperfections in Concrete Surface. Stress cracking, pop -outs,
spalling, rain damage, graffiti, and other surface defects will remain
discretionary and will usually require removal and replacement.
I -
Chapter 11 — Street Inspection and
Testing Procedures
Minimum Street Standards
11. Final Grade.
a. A light broom finish shall be required.
b. All concrete work shall have the proper finished grade.
c. No abrupt changes in grade shall be allowed, i.e., curb returns from new
to existing, driveway entrances, etc.
11.4.2 Concrete Testing and Inspections
A. Concrete Tests
1. Concrete Tests.
a. All testing shall be done in accordance with AASHTO or ASTM as
designated in Table Il-l.
b. Maximum time allowed between sampling and casting cylinders shall
not exceed 15 minutes. Cylinders shall be transported to the laboratory
within 24 hours of casting but after the concrete has hardened, (see
AASHTO T23 or ASTM C-31).
c. The slump test shall be performed in accordance with AASHTO T119.
The air test shall be performed in accordance with AASHTO T196 or
T121. Slump and air test measurements shall be taken with each
cylinder series.
d. If compressive strength of cylinders does not meet the specified values,
the Design Engineer shall recommend and the City Engineer shall
approve the necessary mitigation measures needed.
2. Grade Verification of Gutter Flowline.
After completion of curb and gutter, including curb returns and crosspans,
and prior to installation of asphalt, the new installation must be flow -tested
with water in the presence of the Public Works Inspector to confirm that
there are no areas that hold water. The City Engineer will confirm the
results and accept or reject the work. The work will not be accepted if it
holds water more than 1/4 inch deep or for a distance greater than 5 feet.
Unacceptable work must be removed and replaced.
B. Testing Frequency and Related Inspections
1. Testing frequency shall be in accordance with Table 11-1.
2. At least 4 compressive strength cylinders shall be taken from the same
concrete delivery truck to provide design compliance testing at the
laboratory. Two of the four specimens will be tested at 28 days for
acceptance and 1 shall be tested at 7 days for information. The fourth
I -
Chapter 11 — Street Inspection and
I Testing Procedures
Minimum Street Standards
cylinder shall only be necessary if the 28 -day fails. Additional cylinders
may be required, as directed by the City Engineer.
C. Placement (Inspection)
1. Concrete placement shall be done in a manner such that the concrete is not
segregated or altered before placing. It shall not be allowed to free fall
more than 5 feet. Concrete shall be placed in lifts not to exceed 18 inches.
2. A sufficient number of vibrators shall be used to properly consolidate the
concrete as required.
3. Construction joints and expansion joints shall be constructed in
conformance with approved plans and specifications.
11.5 MISCELLANEOUS
11.5.1 Traffic Signs, Striping, and Signals
A. Installation/Application
The City Engineer shall verify that traffic control devices are installed or
applied at appropriate locations as shown on the approved signing and striping
plans.
All striping layouts will be reviewed by the City Engineer prior to any
installation of paint or markings. The City requires a 48 -hour notice before
any application for inspection or approval.
I -
Chapter 11 — Street Inspection and
l Testing Procedures
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 12 - ACCEPTANCE/WARRANTY PROCEDURES AND
RECORD DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
12.1 GENERAL...............................................................................................3
12.1.1 Developer's Process................................................................................3
A. Completion of Work...............................................................................3
B. Notification.............................................................................................3
C. Inspection — By Engineer of Record......................................................3
C. Joint Inspection......................................................................................3
D. Correction of Deficiencies......................................................................3
E. Submittal of Record Plans.....................................................................4
F. Initial Acceptance...................................................................................4
G. Start of Warranty Period........................................................................4
H. Warranty Inspection...............................................................................4
I. Written Notification of Release................................................................4
12.2 INITIAL ACCEPTANCE..........................................................................4
12.2.1 Recommendation for Initial Acceptance................................................4
12.2.2 Initial Acceptance Letter..........................................................................5
12.2.3 Submittal of Record Plans......................................................................5
12.2.4 Submittal of Warranty Guarantee...........................................................5
12.3 WARRANTY PERIOD.............................................................................6
12.3.1 Definition of the Warranty Period...........................................................6
12.3.2 The Warranty Guarantee.........................................................................6
12.3.3 Time Frames for Completing Repair......................................................6
12.3.4 Failure to Complete Repair.....................................................................6
12.3.5 Responsibility for Maintenance..............................................................6
12.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE............................................................................7
12.4.1 Request for Final Inspection...................................................................7
12.4.2 Preparation for Inspection......................................................................7
12.4.3 Inspection and Punchlist.........................................................................7
12.4.4 Damage Caused by City Crews..............................................................7
12.4.5 Re-Inspection...........................................................................................7
12.4.6 Release from Responsibility...................................................................7
12.4.7 Release of Warranty Guarantee..............................................................8
12.4.8 Failure to Complete Repair.....................................................................8
12.5 RECORD PLANS(AS-BUILTS)..............................................................8
12.5.1 Updating Plans with Design Changes....................................................8
Chapter 12—Acceptance/Warranty
Procedures and Record Drawings
Minimum Street Standards
A. Street.....................................................................................................8
B. Drainage................................................................................................9
C. Utilities...................................................................................................9
D. Other......................................................................................................
9
12.5.2 Minor Design Changes
............................................................................9
12.5.3 Submittal of Plans..................................................................................10
12.5.4 Form of Submittal..................................................................................10
LIST OF TABLES
This Chapter Does Not Include Tables
LIST OF FIGURES
This Chapter Does Not Include Figures
I -
Chapter 12—Acceptance/Warranty
Procedures and Record Drawings
Minimum Street Standards
CHAPTER 12 — ACCEPTANCE/WARRANTY PROCEDURES
AND RECORD DRAWINGS
12.1 GENERAL
This chapter defines the requirements for approval and acceptance of the Public
Improvements installed within the rights -of -way and easements. This chapter also
covers warranty and record plan (as-builts) requirements.
12.1.1 Developer's Process
The Developer shall be required to meet the following process prior to the
acceptance of the public improvements and maintenance:
A. Completion of Work
Completion of all Public Improvements required in the approved Construction
Plans & Specifications in accordance with these Standards.
B. Notification
Developer notifies the Public Works Inspector and the Engineer of Record of
the Project Completion.
C. Inspection — By Engineer of Record
The Engineer of Record shall perform a site inspection to determine if the
project is substantially complete and ready for a joint inspection as described
below. The Engineer of Record shall generate a deficiency list (punch list)
and all items on the list shall be corrected before scheduling a joint inspection.
The City Engineer may deem some punch list items as incidental and allow
the scheduling of the joint inspection.
C. Joint Inspection
A joint inspection will be performed with City representatives, the Engineer of
Record, and the contractor. The public improvements will be inspected for
compliance to the plans, standards and specifications. The Engineer of
Record shall develop a final punchlist.
D. Correction of Deficiencies
The Contractor or Developer shall correct deficiencies. As -built survey may
identify additional deficiencies, which shall be addressed as stated below.
I -
Chapter 12—Acceptance/Warranty
Procedures and Record Drawings
Minimum Street Standards
E. Submittal of Record Plans
The Engineer of Record shall submit signed and sealed Record Plans (As-
builts) in accordance with the description in Section 12.5. One hard copy, one
electronic copy in PDF format and one electronic copy in .dwg format shall be
submitted to the City Engineer's office. A review copy in PDF format will be
required for review purposes prior to the final submittal.
F. Initial Acceptance
After the Contractor has corrected the deficiencies identified on the punch list
and the Engineer of Record has inspected the site, the City may be contacted
by the Engineer of Record to inspect the corrections. Upon satisfactory
completion of the punch list items and submittal of the public improvement
construction costs, warranty guarantee, inspection reports, material testing
reports, engineer certifications, final as -built drainage report, as -built plans,
and any other project requirements per the approval letter, initial acceptance
shall be granted.
G. Start of Warranty Period
Upon written initial acceptance by the City, the warranty period shall
commence.
H. Warranty Inspection
No more than forty-five days prior to the completion of the warranty period,
the City Engineer may inspect all public improvements for defects in
workmanship or materials. A deficiency list shall be developed and provided
to the Developer. Normal wear and tear shall not be considered a deficiency.
I. Written Notification of Release
Once the Developer/Contractor has satisfactorily completed any necessary
repairs or replacements at the end of the warranty period, a written
notification from the City shall release the Developer of all future repairs for
the Public Improvements and the Warranty Guarantee shall be released to the
original provider.
12.2 INITIAL ACCEPTANCE
12.2.1 Recommendation for Initial Acceptance
After the Contractor has completed the punchlist, the Engineer of Record shall
inspect and notify the Public Works Inspector that the work has been complete.
The Public Works Inspector shall recommend granting or denial of initial
-
Chapter 12—Acceptance/Warranty
Procedures and Record Drawings
Minimum Street Standards
acceptance based on re -inspection for compliance with the joint inspection punch
list.
If new deficiencies are found, either in quality or extent of construction, the
Developer/Contractor shall be notified in writing of these deficiencies. These
deficiencies shall be also be corrected, and additional inspections shall be
performed until the work is acceptable.
12.2.2 Initial Acceptance Letter
The City Engineer shall issue written notice either granting or withholding Initial
Acceptance within ten working days of the acceptance re -inspection. The Initial
Acceptance letter shall specify the date on which the Developer is eligible to
request Final Acceptance.
12.2.3 Submittal of Record Plans
Prior to issuance of the Initial Acceptance, Record Plans shall be completed,
stamped, and signed by the Engineer of Record and submitted to the City
Engineer. The Record Plans shall be submitted in paper and electronic form (as
specified by the City Engineer). Refer to Section 12.5 for Record Drawing
requirements.
12.2.4 Submittal of Warranty Guarantee
Prior to issuance of the Initial Acceptance, a Warranty Guarantee in the amount of
25% of all Public Improvements associated with the project shall be submitted to
the City. The following items shall be included on the Guarantee:
• Identify guarantee as for MAINTENANCE.
• Name of project.
• Project description & location (address, subdivision, if applicable).
• Description of items guaranteed & total construction cost of public
infrastructure.
• Name the City of Fayetteville as Obligee or Duel Obligee.
• Contact information for the provider of guarantee — (who purchased the
guarantee).
I -
Chapter 12—Acceptance/Warranty
Procedures and Record Drawings
Minimum Street Standards
12.3 WARRANTY PERIOD
12.3.1 Definition of the Warranty Period
The Warranty Period for all Public Improvements shall be two years. During the
Warranty Period, the Developer/Contractor shall guarantee the work to be free of
any damage or defects in workmanship and material. The Warranty Period shall
start the date that Initial Acceptance occurs. The Warranty Period shall end with
the Final Acceptance of the Public Improvements. If deficiencies are noted during
the City's warranty inspection, the Developer/Contractor shall repair the
deficiencies.
12.3.2 The Warranty Guarantee
A Warranty Guarantee shall be required for the entire Warranty Period. The
Warranty Guarantee shall be in the form of a letter of credit, maintenance bond, or
cash deposit in accordance with the Unified Development Code Chapter 158. The
Guarantee shall be in the amount of 25% of the total value of the public
improvements for the project. (Including Water/Sewer/Drainage/ Sidewalk/etc.)
12.3.3 Time Frames for Completing Repair
At any time before the completion of the Warranty Period, the City may notify the
Developer of needed repairs. If repair areas are considered to be an imminent
danger to the public health, safety, and welfare, the Contractor shall act within 24
hours to complete the repair. If the work is not considered a safety issue, the
Developer has 10 working days to schedule the work, and 30 calendar days to
complete the work. Extensions of time may be considered when necessary due to
weather constraints.
12.3.4 Failure to Complete Repair
If the Developer has not completed the warranty repairs in the time frame
specified, the City may choose to affect the necessary repairs. The City will either
invoice the Developer for all costs for the related work plus a $500.00
administrative fee or it will collect from the guarantee.
12.3.5 Responsibility for Maintenance
The Developer is responsible for maintaining all public improvements throughout
the Warranty Period.
-
Chapter 12—Acceptance/Warranty
Procedures and Record Drawings
Minimum Street Standards
12.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
12.4.1 Request for Final Inspection
Within 45 days of the end of the Warranty Period, the Developer shall request a
final inspection and acceptance, in writing, to the City Engineer.
12.4.2 Preparation for Inspection
The Developer is responsible for sweeping and cleaning public improvements for
inspection. If the Developer does not provide a clean site, including having curb
flowlines clear of debris and dirt, then the inspection may be postponed until the
site is sufficiently clean.
12.4.3 Inspection and Punchlist
The City Engineer shall inspect all Public Improvements related to the Project. If
applicable, a written final punchlist shall be compiled listing any necessary repair
or replacement of materials or workmanship. The punchlist shall be sent to the
Developer and Contractor.
12.4.4 Damage Caused by City Crews
If the Developer can demonstrate that the City maintenance crews caused damage
to certain improvements, the Developer will not be held responsible for the
replacement.
12.4.5 Re -Inspection
If repair or replacement of Public Improvements is required, the
Developer/Contractor shall complete repair or replacement within thirty calendar
days of receipt of the final punchlist, unless otherwise agreed upon. Upon
completion, the Developer/Contractor shall contact the City Engineer for a re -
inspection.
12.4.6 Release from Responsibility
Once all repairs or replacements are satisfactorily completed, the
Developer/Contractor shall receive written notice from the City that all Public
Improvements are complete and the City releases the Developer/Contractor from
responsibility for all future maintenance and repairs for the Public Improvements
on this project.
I -
Chapter 12—Acceptance/Warranty
Procedures and Record Drawings
Minimum Street Standards
12.4.7 Release of Warranty Guarantee
Upon the satisfactory completion of the final punchlist the City will release the
Warranty guarantee.
12.4.8 Failure to Complete Repair
If the Developer has not completed the warranty repairs in the time frame
specified, the City may choose to affect the necessary repairs. The City will either
invoice the Developer for all costs for the related work plus a $500.00
administrative fee or it will collect from the guarantee.
12.5 RECORD PLANS (AS-BUILTS)
12.5.1 Updating Plans with Design Changes
The Construction Plans shall be updated with all design changes that occurred
after plan approval. The final installation of all public infrastructure shall be
surveyed prior to submittal of record drawings. The Professional surveyor shall
provide stamped drawings specifically identifying the limits of as -built survey
performed. Field changes not previously approved by City Engineer, discovered
during the as -built process are at the Contractor's risk and may not be accepted.
A. Street
Street Record Drawings shall identify the actual pavement type and grade or mix
type used; if the subgrade was treated or additional undercut: location of any
under drains added; and document all changes to widths and lengths for streets,
sidewalks, and curbs.
• At 100 ft interval or as necessary to reflect actual placement of roadway, the
back of curb shall be located in reference to the existing/or proposed right-of-
way.
o Deviations more than 6 inches shall be identified on the plans and
included in a transmittal letter to the City Engineer.
o Additional Right of Way or Reconstruction may be required.
• At grade breaks, no more than 500 ft intervals, profile and cross slope
verification will be performed and shown on plans.
o Deviations more than 0.5% profile or cross slope shall be identified on
the plans and included in a transmittal letter to the City Engineer.
o Geometric K values no longer meeting city criteria shall be evaluated.
o Additional Calculations or Reconstruction may be required.
-
Chapter 12—Acceptance/Warranty
Procedures and Record Drawings
Minimum Street Standards
• Record drawings shall identify all signage and striping locations as actually
placed in the project.
B. Drainage
Record storm drainage drawings shall document the location, size, rim elevation
and invert elevation of all pipes (including pipe class), inlets, riprap, headwalls,
detention pond volumes, swale cross -sections and all other storm drainage
infrastructure shown on the construction plans, including those improvements
located in areas outside of the public right-of-way, if appropriate. Record
drawings shall also show all pipe and/or drainage way/swale grade percentages.
o More than 2 ft deviation of design alignment shall require new easement
dedication or adjustment of the storm drain.
o More than 0.1 ft deviation of design elevation shall require revisions in the
drainage report. Any field changes, that no longer meets drainage design
criteria, shall be removed and replaced.
o Any field changes, that creates an adverse slope, shall be removed and
replaced to original design.
o Change in specified material shall require revisions to the drainage report.
C. Utilities
Water and Sanitary Sewer Record drawings shall document the location, size,
invert elevations and rim elevation of all pipes and manholes, location of all
valves, changes in direction, encasements, meters, services, hydrants, etc.
o Professional surveyor shall provide stamp drawings specifically identifying
the limits of as -built survey performed.
o More than 2 ft deviation of design alignment shall require new easement
dedication or adjustment of the utility drain.
o See Water & Sewer Specifications for additional criteria.
D. Other
Record drawings shall verify other information as specifically requested by the
City Engineer or outlined in the project's conditional approval letter.
12.5.2 Minor Design Changes
Minor changes are not required to be included on the Record Plans. Minor
changes include incorrect references and grade changes less than 0.1 foot.
I -
Chapter 12—Acceptance/Warranty
Procedures and Record Drawings
Minimum Street Standards
12.5.3 Submittal of Plans
A Licensed Arkansas Professional Engineer shall update and stamp the As -Built
Construction Plans. The Engineer shall submit the plans to the City and receive
approval prior to the Initial Acceptance.
The Engineer must also certify that the streets, sidewalk, storm sewer, water, fire
line, and sewer lines, etc., were installed per approved plans and City of
Fayetteville requirements.
12.5.4 Form of Submittal
All Record Documents shall be submitted in the following formats as required by
the City Engineer:
• Plans shall be submitted in electronic format as specified by the City
Engineer, in PDF format, in .dwg format and one full size paper copy.
• Warranty Guarantee shall be original documents.
• All other documents shall be submitted in electronic PDF format.
o Public improvement construction costs
o Inspection reports
o Submittals & material testing reports
o Engineer certifications
o Final as -built drainage report
I -
Chapter 12—Acceptance/Warranty
Procedures and Record Drawings
•
City of Fayetteville Staff Review Form
2015-0326
Legistar File ID
8/4/2015
City Council Meeting Date - Agenda Item Only
N/A for Non -Agenda Item
Chris Brown 7/15/2015 Engineering /
Development Services Department
Submitted By Submitted Date Division / Department
Action Recommendation:
Approval of the updates to the Minimum Street Standards and revisions to Unified Development Code, Chapter
171, Streets and Sidewalks.
Budget Impact:
Account Number
Project Number
Budgeted Item? NA
Does item have a cost? No
Budget Adjustment Attached? No
Current Budget
Funds Obligated
Current Balance
Item Cost
Budget Adjustment
Remaining Budget
Fund
Project Title
D
D
V20140710
Previous Ordinance or Resolution #
Original Contract Number:
Comments:
Approval Date:
CITY OF
TayeeNle ARKANSAS
MEETING OF AUGUST 4, 2015
TO: Mayor and City Council
CITY COUNCIL AGENDA MEMO
THRU: Don Marr, Chief of Staff
Jeremy Pate, Development Services Director
FROM: Chris Brown, City Engineer
DATE: July 16, 2015
SUBJECT: UPDATES TO THE MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS AND UDC REVISIONS
TO CHAPTER 171 STREETS AND SIDEWALKS
RECOMMENDATION:
Staff recommends approval of the updates to the Minimum Street Standards and revisions to
Unified Development Code, Chapter 171, Streets and Sidewalks.
BACKGROUND:
City staff has prepared the final draft of the guidance document for design and construction of
streets, sidewalks and trails. This document will replace a 1996 version of the Minimum Street
Standards, and will serve as a technical supplement to the City's Unified Development Code. In
addition, the associated revisions to Chapter 171 Streets and Sidewalks are attached.
The Transportation Committee has reviewed the item and recommends approval. On July 13,
2015, the Planning Commission voted to forward this item to the City Council with a
recommendation for approval with a minor revision from the City Attorney.
DISCUSSION:
The revisions proposed to Chapter 171 are summarized below:
• 171.01 A purpose statement was added to the chapter.
• 171.02 Adoption of the Minimum Street Standards added.
• 171.02 Language for retaining wall locations adjacent to the ROW was clarified.
• 171.06 Procedure for Vacations was changed to reflect the current submittal procedure.
• 171.07 Removed technical criteria for utilities within the ROW and referenced the
Minimum Street Standards.
• 171.13 Changed language from Sidewalk Administrator to City Engineer.
• 171.14 Removed technical criteria for sidewalk, driveway and trail construction and
referenced the Minimum Street Standards.
• 171.15 Removed technical criteria for excavations in the ROW and updated the
permitting procedure.
Mailing Address:
113 W. Mountain Street www.fayetteville-ar.gov
Fayetteville, AR 72701
BUDGET/STAFF IMPACT:
None
ATTACHMENTS:
Unified Development Code Revisions:
Chapter 171 Streets and Sidewalks
Planning Commission Memo
Chapter 171 Streets and Sidewalks as submitted to Planning Commission
Minimum Street Standards
TITLE XV UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE
CHAPTER 171: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS
171.01 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
171.02
171.03 RESERVED
3
4
4
171.04 CROSSWALKS TO BE ACCESSIBLE TO PHYSICALLY DISABLED.........................................4
171.05 PROCEDURE FOR CLOSING UTILITY EASEMENTS AND STREET RIGHTS -OF -WAY ...........4
171.06 OCCUPATION OF STREETS AND HIGHWAYS BY PUBLIC UTILITIES.....................................4
171.07 MAINTENANCE AND CONSTRUCTION POLICIES......................................................................5
171.08 ORDER OF CITY COUNCIL OR PERMIT REQUIRED..................................................................5
171.09 APPLICATION FOR PERMIT
6",
171.10 STANDARDS FOR ISSUANCE OF PERMIT; EXPIRATION AND REMOVAL .............................6
171.11 INSPECTION OF WORK; REPLACEMENT OF REJECTED WORK............................................6
171.12 PROPERTY OWNER TO CONSTRUCT SIDEWALK OR CONTRIBUTE COST OF SIDEWALK 6
171.13 SIDEWALK, DRIVEWAY AND TRAIL SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................7
171.14 EXCAVATIONS............................................................................................................................... 8
171.15 STREET IMPROVEMENT DISTRICTS
171.16-171.99 RESERVED
9
10
CD171:1
Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
CD171:2
CHAPTER 171: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS
171.01 Purpose
It is the purpose of this chapter to preserve and
protect the health, safety, and general welfare of
citizens by providing regulations for design and
construction of public streets and sidewalks; thereby
providing safe, convenient, cost effective
transportation systems that are accessible to all users
and modes of transportation.
171.02 General Provisions
(A) Minimum Street Standards.
(1) Adoption and enforcement of Minimum
Street Standards. The City Council adopts
the Minimum Street Standards as
recommended by the City Engineer and
attached to the enacting ordinance. All
technical procedures and design standards
contained within the Minimum Street
Standards shall be enforceable as part of the
Unified Development Code through
enforcement procedures of Chapter 153 as
well as § 150.12 Penalty.
(2) Variances to Minimum Street Standards.
When the City Engineer determines that
application of the technical procedures or
design standards within the Minimum Street
Standards would cause undue hardship or
unnecessary practical problems for a
particular street or sidewalk project, the City
Engineer may vary such Minimum Street
Standards and may condition such variances
by requiring other standards to safeguard the
purposes of this chapter and the Minimum
Street Standards.
(B) Designation as streets or avenues. All
thoroughfares now or hereafter platted, which run
in an east and west direction through the
corporate limits of the city, shall be designated as
"street," and all thoroughfares now or hereafter
platted, which run in a north and south direction
through the corporate limits of the city, shall be
designated as "avenues." This section shall not
be construed so as to prohibit the use of such
descriptive names as "boulevard," "road," "way,"
"trail," and the like which might be used
indiscriminately as a designation of the
thoroughfare, and this section shall in no way be
deemed applicable to any alleys or alleyways.
(C) Retaining walls near sidewalk or right-of-way.
(1) Definition. For purposes of this section,
retaining walls are defined as vertical or near
vertical walls at least 2.5 feet in height, that
require a footing or other structural
reinforcement for structural stability.
(2) City Engineer Approval. The City Engineer
may approve retaining walls within rights of
way where necessary to protect adjacent
property, minimize right of way widths,
protect sensitive environmental areas, or for
other reasons that further the purpose of this
chapter.
(3) Requirements. Retaining walls constructed
within rights of way shall:
(a) Be constructed such that footings or other
structural reinforcement do not conflict with
existing or future storm drainage or utility
installations.
(b) Be of sufficient distance from sidewalks or
trails so as to not impede or encroach on the
minimum effective width.
(c) Have adequate safety railings or other
precautions to prevent falls.
(d) Meet any other requirements of the City
Engineer to protect the public interest.
(D) Gated streets not allowed in most residential
subdivisions.
No residential subdivision or apartment complex
shall be constructed with a gate across a street
without prior express approval by resolution of
the City Council that finds that security
considerations favoring a gate outweigh aesthetic
considerations and the city's policies in favor of
connectivity, openness and neighborliness.
(E) Taxi Stands. Taxi stand shall mean such portion
or portions of the public street or highway
designated by the City Council of the City of
Fayetteville as a place in which taxis may stand
or park.
(1) No unattended parking allowed. A taxi must
remain attended by its driver and ready for
service while located within a taxi stand.
(2) City Council Establishment of Taxi Stands:
(a) The City Council may establish taxi
stands on portions of public streets or
facilities or private areas if permitted by
the owner.
(b) The establishment, enlargement, or
removal of a taxi stand shall be by City
Council Resolution after a public
hearing. Adjoining property owners
within the block of the street or abutting
the parking lot in which the taxi stand is
CD171:3
Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
proposed shall be notified by mail by the vacated and properties adjacent to
Planning Division and a planning the vacated area.
notification sign shall be placed near the
taxi stand location two weeks before the
public hearing at City Council. (3) Utilities comments. Comments from owners
or agents, of all utility companies concerning
(Ord. No. 845, 5-6-40; Ord. No. 1026, 6-23-52; Ord. No. public easements or rights of way to be
1262, 5-8-61; Code 1965, §18-1, 18-2, 18-7; Ord. No. 2623, vacated and its relationship to existing or
4-15-80; Code 1991, §98.01, 98.02, 98.06; Ord. No. 4100, planned utilities, with recommendations, as
§2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98; Ord. No. 4579, 06-01-04; Ord. 4946, 11- to what action should be taken.
21-06)
Cross reference(s)--Enforcement, Ch. 153.
171.03 Intersections
(A) Streets shall be planned and designed to provide
a safe system for present and prospective traffic
and shall be approved by the City Engineer.
(B) Proposed streets shall be planned in such a
manner as to provide safe access to proposed
lots.
(Code 1965, App. C., Art. IV, §E; Ord. No. 2196, 2-17-76;
Code 1991, §159.50; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
171.04 Reserved
(Code 1965, App. C., Art. IV, §J; Ord. No. 2935, 8-2-83; Ord.
No. 3302, 10-20-87; Code 1991, §159.55; Ord. No. 4100, §2
(Ex. A), 6-16-98; Ord. 5296, 12-15-09)
171.05 Crosswalks To Be Accessible To
Physically Disabled
Adequate and reasonable access for the safe and
convenient movement of physically handicapped
persons, including those in wheelchairs, across curbs
constructed or replaced shall be provided
(Code 1965, §18-14; Ord. No. 2267, 8-17-76; Code 1991,
§98.12; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
171.06 Procedure For Closing Public
Utility Easements And Street Rights -Of -
Way
The procedure for closing of streets and alleys shall
hereafter be as follows:
(A) Information to City Planning Division. Petitioners
shall present to the City Planning Division in
duplicate the following information before
processing shall begin:
(1) Petition Petition to vacate public
easement or right-of-way, including
a certified or photostatic copy of the
plat on record in the Circuit Clerk's
office.
(2) Documentation of Ownership.
Abstractor's certificate of ownership
or other acceptable documentation
of ownership of the area to be
(B) Information to Planning Commission. One copy
of the above shall be presented by the Planning
Division to the Planning Commission r review and
recommendation.
(C) Recommendation to City Council. The
recommendation of the Planning Commission
shall be forwarded to the City Council.
(D) Record with Circuit Clerk. If an ordinance is
adopted vacating the public easement or right of
way, it shall be published and reported in the
Circuit Clerk's office.
(E) Exception. The vacation request need not be
presented to the Planning Commission before
being submitted to the City Council if the City
Council finds the following by a vote of at least
two-thirds of its membership and the Mayor:
(1) The public easement or right-of-way to be
vacated has not been constructed or has not
been used by the public for at least five
years or the easement does not contain any
utilities within the area to be vacated; and
(2) Special circumstances exist which require
prompt consideration of the vacation request
and justify the bypass of the Planning
Commission.
(Code 1965, §18-15; Ord. No. 1685, 7-7-69; Ord. No. 1898,
1-16-73; Code 1991, §98.13; Ord. No. 3925, §1, 10-3-95;
Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98; Ord. 5127, 4-01-08)
Cross reference(s)--Notifications and Public Hearings,
Ch. 157, Fees, Ch. 159.
171.07 Occupation Of Streets And
Highways By Public Utilities
Any public utility, as defined by state law, which
occupies the streets, highways or other public places
of the city under a franchise granted by the city or the
state shall occupy said streets, highways or other
public places in accordance with the requirements of
the Minimum Street Standards and subject to the
following terms and conditions:
(A) Written approval. A public utility shall not erect or
place any facility more than seven (7) feet inside
the right-of-way line for any street without the
CD171:4
TITLE XV UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE
prior written approval of the City Engineer, who
carry heavy amounts of traffic shall have
shall grant such approval only if he determines
priority over lesser streets.
that the facility will not impair or obstruct present
or future vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
(2) Condition. The condition of the pavement, in
general, roadways which are more
(B) Relocation. Whenever public utility facilities
deteriorated shall have priority over those
which are located within a public right-of-way
streets of lesser deterioration. However
must be relocated in order not to impair or
those streets of lesser deterioration may
obstruct vehicular or pedestrian traffic on any
have priority when it is determined that the
new or existing street, highway, road, or
benefits of resurfacing the roadways of
sidewalk, the public utility shall be required to
lesser deterioration may be greater.
relocate its facilities within a reasonable time
from receipt of written notice from the City, and
(C) Sidewalks.
shall bear its own relocation costs; provided,
where any project is funded with federal or state
(1) Repair/replacement. Existing city sidewalks
funds and said funds are received by the city for
shall be repaired and replaced by the city, as
the purpose of reimbursing utility relocation
needed.
expenses, the utility shall receive such
reimbursement. This division shall not be
(2) Priorities. In establishing priorities for
construed as requiring a utility to relocate its
sidewalk repair or replacement, the factors to
facilities within or from a private easement
be considered shall include, but not be
without payment of just compensation.
limited to the following:
(C) City Engineer approval. All proposed
(a) The conditions of the sidewalk;
locations and utility designs shall be reviewed
and subject to approval by the City Engineer to
(b) The expected level of pedestrian traffic;
ensure that the proposed construction will not
and,
cause avoidable interference with existing or
planned street facilities, or with street operation
(c) The use of the sidewalk by school
or maintenance. The procedure for submitting
children.
plans and information to the City Engineer for
approval shall be developed and agreed upon by
(Code 1965,18-47; Ord. No. 1725, 1-8-70; Ord. No. 2647, l-
each utility and the City Engineer.
15-80; Ord. No. 2655, 8-5-80; Ord. No. 2724, 5-19-81; Code
1991, §98.15; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
(D) Street design. When plans for street
improvement and development are
formulated, utility line locations should be
recognized and the street designed so as to
minimize conflict with existing utilities.
(Code 1965, §18-17.1; Ord. No. 2850, 8-17-82; Ord. No.
2926, 6-7-83; Ord. No. 3245, 3-3-87; Code 1991, §98.14;
Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
171.08 Maintenance And Construction
Policies
The city's policies concerning and regarding the
maintenance and construction of streets, curbs,
gutters, and sidewalks shall be as follows:
(A) Maintenance. The city shall maintain roadways
in the city which have been accepted by the city
as city streets, or which have come under the
jurisdiction of the city by or through annexation.
(B) Priorities. The following factors shall be
considered in establishing priorities for roadway
resurfacing and rebuilding:
(1) Function. The function of the street, that is,
the streets which carry or are expected to
Cross reference(s)--Sidewalks, §158.06.
171.09 Order Of City Council Or Permit
Required
No person shall begin to construct, reconstruct,
repair, alter or grade any sidewalk, curb, curb -cut,
driveway or street on the public streets, unless the
same has been properly ordered by the City Council,
or plans for such have been approved by the city as
site improvements for a subdivision, or a permit has
been issued by the city's official charged with the
administration of this chapter.
(Code 1965, §18-25; Ord. No. 1790, 3-15-71; Code No
1991, §98.61: Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex.), 6-16-98)
Cross reference(s)--Penalty, §98.99; Sidewalks,
§158.06.
171.10 Application For Permit
An applicant for a permit hereunder shall file with the
city official an application showing:
(A) Name and address of the owner, or agent in
charge, of the property abutting the proposed
work area;
(B) Name and address of the party doing the work;
CD171:5
Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
(Code 1965, §18-30; Ord. No. 1790, 3-15-71; Code 1991,
(C) Location of the work area;
§98.65; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
(D) A plan or clear description of the work to be
171.13 Property Owner To Construct
done;
Sidewalk Or Contribute Cost Of Sidewalk
(E) Such other information as the city official shall
(A) Requirement. The owner of any property
find reasonably necessary to the determination of
abutting a public street or highway for which a
whether a permit should be issued hereunder.
sidewalk is required by the city's Master Street
Plan shall construct a sidewalk in accordance
(Code 1965, §18-26; Ord. No. 1790, 3-15-71; Code 1991,
with this chapter, along said street or highway
§98.62; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
upon the receipt of notice issued at the time a
171.11 Standards For Issuance Of
building or parking lot permit is issued.
Permit; Expiration And Removal
(1) The property owner shall construct the
sidewalk in accordance with the
(A) The city official shall issue a permit hereunder
specifications provided in the Minimum
when he/she finds:
Street Standards.
(1) That the plans have been approved.
(2) The property owner may request a waiver to
§171.13(A)(1) requiring sidewalk
(2) That the work shall be done according to the
construction. The City Engineer shall review
specifications contained herein,
the following factors to determine whether or
not to grant a waiver:
(3) That the operation will not unreasonably
interfere with vehicular and pedestrian traffic,
(a) Pedestrian traffic generators such as
the demand and necessity for parking
parks and schools in the area.
spaces, and the means of ingress to and
egress from the property affected and
(b) The existence of a sidewalk network in
adjacent properties.
the area.
(4) That the health, safety, and welfare of the
(c) The density of current and future
public will not be unreasonably impaired.
development in the area.
(B) Any permit issued shall expire three (3) months
(d) The amount of pedestrian traffic likely to
from the date of issue and may be renewed upon
be generated by the proposed
application.
development.
(Code 1965, §18-29; Ord. No. 1790, 3-15-71; Code 1991,
(e) Whether the terrain is such that a
§98.64; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
sidewalk is physically practical and
feasible, and the extent to which trees,
ground cover and natural areas would
171.12 Inspection Of Work; Replacement
be adversely impacted by the
Of Rejected Work
construction of the sidewalk.
(f) The overall need for a sidewalk to be
(A) The city official shall make all necessary
constructed on the lot.
inspections before, during and after the
construction of all sidewalks, curbing and
(3) If the City Engineer grants the waiver to
guttering to insure the work is being done in
construct a sidewalk, the owner shall have
accordance with the plans and specifications. In
an option to construct the sidewalk, or to
the event any or part of any work is not done in a
contribute money in lieu of construction as
satisfactory manner or not in conformity with the
set forth below:
plans and specifications, the city official shall
notify the contractor and owner in writing of
(a) The amount of money in lieu of
his/her nonacceptance of the work. All such
construction to be dedicated shall be
rejected work shall be removed and replaced
determined based upon the rough
within 30 days of this notification.
proportionality of the impact of the
development upon the sidewalk
(B) Advance notification must be given the city
infrastructure needs near the
official for inspections under this section.
development including consideration of
the persons served by the development
CD171:6
TITLE XV UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE
and approximate pedestrian trip (2) Existing residential structure. On which an
generation rates of the development. existing residential structure is being
modified so as to increase the number of
(b) To facilitate administration of this dwelling units located therein or to change
ordinance for certain recurrent types of the use of the nonresidential use.
development, the City Council has
determined that the city will accept, as (3) Parking lot/garage. On which a parking lot,
the roughly proportionate impact, the or parking garage having a minimum
amount shown below: capacity of five (5) automobiles is
constructed.
(i) Single family house $630.00
(4) Building Additions. Additions of 2,500
(ii) Duplex $720.00
square feet or larger.
(c)
Unless the developer presents evidence
(5) Conditional use. Any development which
that the number of persons served by
requires conditional use approval.
the development and the pedestrian trip
generation rates of the development
(Code 1965, §18-31; Ord. No. 2653, 8-5-80; Ord. No. 2780,
justify a reduced contribution in lieu of
11-17-81; Ord. No. 2917, 5-3-83; Ord. No. 3113, 9-3-85;
the construction of sidewalks, all
Code 1991, §98.66; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98; Ord.
industrial, commercial, and multi -family
No. 4311, 5-1-01; Ord. No. 4387, 4-16-02)
developments shall make a cash
171.14 Sidewalk, Driveway And Trail
contribution in lieu of the construction of
the sidewalk at a rate of three dollars
Specifications
($3.00) per square foot of the sidewalk
that normally would have been required.
(A) Sidewalks.
The amount per square foot and
amounts for a single family house and a
(1) Grades; establishment of property lines. All
duplex shall be reviewed by the City
sidewalks, access ramps, and driveway
Council at least every five (5) years.
approaches shall be constructed in grades
as approved by the City Engineer. It shall be
(d)
Contribution in lieu of construction of
the responsibility of the owner to establish
sidewalks shall be paid or construction
property lines by competent survey at his/her
of the sidewalks shall be completed
own expense.
before receiving final plat approval, or
issuance of a certificate of occupancy.
(2) Minimum width of sidewalks. The minimum
width of sidewalks shall follow the guidelines
(e)
Contributions must be expended within
of the Master Street Plan, of the
one (1) year to build a sidewalk close
Comprehensive Land Use Plan. In all cases,
enough to serve the project being
the effective width of the sidewalk shall be a
constructed.
minimum of 4 feet. Effective sidewalk width
is the actual sidewalk width, less:
(f) If the owner voluntarily consents in
writing, the contributions may be used to
construct sidewalk projects where most
needed as determined by the City
Engineer.
(4) An owner/builder may appeal the City
Engineer's refusal to grant a waiver or the
administrator's determination of the amount
of contribution in lieu of construction to the
Planning Commission pursuant to
§155.06(D).
(B) Application of provisions. The provisions of this
section shall only apply to the following property:
(1) New structure. On which a new structure is
being built;
(a) A shy distance of 2 feet where vertical
barriers (walls, fences, signs, etc)
greater than 3.5 feet in height are
adjacent to the sidewalk and extend
more than 4 feet in length parallel to the
sidewalk.
(b) A shy distance of 1.5 feet for curb
adjacent to the sidewalk
(c) A shy distance of 1 foot for all other
fixed obstacles.
The greatest of the above distances shall
apply for each side of the walk.
(3) Sidewalk distances from the curb. The
sidewalk setback distance from the curb
shall follow the guidelines of the Master
Street Plan, or be as specified in the final
plat unless otherwise approved by the City
Engineer.
CD171:7
Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
(4) ADA guidelines. Sidewalks within rights of
way shall conform to ADA guidelines.
(5) Sidewalk elevation. The back of sidewalk
elevation shall be such that the slope from
the back of sidewalk to the top of curb is 2%,
unless otherwise approved by the City
Engineer. This elevation shall be continuous
through the driveway approach.
to clearly mark the trail crossing. For major
streets, this crosswalk may be raised 2.5
inches above pavement surface.
(6)Striping. Center line stripe and a diamond
pattern stripe around the bollards shall be
installed. Striping shall conform to the
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices,
Part 9 — Traffic Controls for Bicycle Facilities.
Additional striping may be required for
increased safety in accordance with MUTCD
standards
(6)
Inspection. All sidewalks and curb cuts
(Code 1965, §18-28; Ord. No. 1790, 3-15-71; Ord. No. 2629,
made for driveway approaches require an
5-6-80; Ord. No. 3117, 9-3-85; Code 1991, §98.67; Ord. No.
inspection prior to the concrete placement.
4005, §1, 11-19-96; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98; Ord.
4919, 9-05-06; Ord. 5044, 8-07-07; Ord. 5270, 9-1-09;
(B) Access ramps.
Ord.5333, 7-6-10)
171.15 Excavations
(1)
ADA requirements. Access ramps shall
conform to ADA requirements, including
(A) Permit required. It shall be unlawful for any
detectable warning devices such as
person to make any excavation in any street,
truncated domes.
alley, sidewalk, road, highway, or other public
(2)
Sidewalk intersections. Access ramps shall
way in the city without first obtaining a permit to
be installed at all sidewalk intersections with
do so from the Mayor, or his/her duly authorized
the street.
representative. Such permit shall be granted
only after written application has been filed and
(3)
Raised crosswalk. The raised or built-up
the deposit or bond required by §158.02 has
access ramp shall not be installed on public
been filed. The fee for each permit shall be paid
streets without the approval of the City
in advance. Provided, however, that utility
engineer,
companies franchised by the city may be billed
monthly for all permits granted during the
(4)
Minimum width. The minimum width of a
previous month.
curb ramp shall be Forty-eight (48) inches.
(B) Lights and guards. Every person making an
(5)
Slope. The slope of the ramp shall not be
excavation as provided for in this chapter shall
greater than slopes specified in the Minimum
place and maintain lights and guards around the
Street Standards.
same for the protection of the public. Such lights
and guards shall be subject to the approval of the
(D) Multi -use Trails.
Mayor.
(1)
Minimum width of multi -use trails. The
(C) Repairs of public property; return of cash deposit.
minimum width of trails shall follow the trail
cross-section guidelines of the Active
(1) Cost. Each person making an excavation
Transportation Plan.
under this chapter shall repair the street or
other public way at his own expense, and
(2)
ADA guidelines. Trails shall conform to ADA
under the direction and supervision of the
guidelines, to the extent possible.
City Engineer or designee.
(3)
Bollards. Bollards are required at trail
(2) Standards. Repair of the street or other
intersections with streets.
public way shall be made in accordance with
(4)
Trail signage. Trail signage shall comply with
the requirements of the Minimum Street
the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Standards.
Devices, Part 9 — Traffic Controls for Bicycle
Facilities.
(3) Notice. The permittee shall notify the City
(5)
Street Crosswalks. Trails that intersect and
Engineer, prior to beginning such repair, of
cross public streets shall have a red colored
the time and manner of repair and obtain the
concrete crosswalk with two foot wide white
approval of the City Engineer prior to
thermoplastic stripes on each side, a
beginning of such repair.
patterned thermoplastic overly for the full
crossing area, or other approved treatment
(4) Return of deposit. When the repairs
required by this section are completed and
CD171:8
TITLE XV UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE
approved, the return of any sum deposited
call a special meeting of the City Council for the
under §171.14 above will be made to the
purpose of hearing such petition, such called
permittee. In the event the permitteeshall
meeting to be held not less than 15 days after the
fail, refuse, or neglect to make such repairs,
date of the call and the notice of the hearing
the city may repair the street and deduct the
thereat to be published for the time and in the
cost therefrom from the amount on deposit
manner above stated.
with the city and the balance of the deposit, if
any, shall be paid to the permittee.
(C) Hearing on petition; ordinance establishing
district.
(D) Street closings for excavations.
(1) At the time named in said notice, the City
(1) Prohibited without approval. It shall be
Council shall meet and hear all owners of
unlawful for any person to cause a street to
real property within the proposed district who
be closed due to the making of an
desire to be heard on the question of
excavation without the prior written approval
whether a majority in assessed value of
of the City. In granting such approval, the
property owners has signed the petition, and
City shall impose time limits and such other
shall make a finding of whether the petition is
reasonable conditions as are necessary to
signed by a majority in assessed value of
minimize any inconvenience or danger to the
such property owners. The finding of the
public,
governing body shall be expressed in an
ordinance. If it finds that a majority has
(2) Exception. This section shall not apply to
signed the petition, it shall then be its duty by
emergency repairs.
the same ordinance to establish the district.
The ordinance shall designate the
(Code 1965, §18-40, 18-42, 18-44; Ord. No. 1829, 10-18-71;
boundaries of the district and shall also give
Ord. No. 2806, 4-20-82; Code 1991, §98.80, 98.82, 98.83,
the district a name descriptive of the nature
98.84; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
of the proposed improvement and a number
Cross reference(s)--Penalty, §98.99; Enforcement,
to prevent it from being confused with similar
Ch. 153; Bonds and Guarantees, Ch. 158; Fees, Ch. 159.
districts.
171.16 Street Improvement Districts
(2) The ordinance shall be published within 30
days after its adoption for one insertion in
(A) Petition to form street improvement district. Any
some newspaper published in the city and
person desiring to initiate the formation of a street
the findings of the governing body shall be
improvement district shall file with the City Clerk
conclusive unless attached by a suit in the
a petition requesting the organization of a street
Chancery Court brought within 30 days after
improvement district and signed by persons
such publication.
claiming to be a majority in value, as shown by
(D) Appointment of Board of Improvement. In the
the last county assessment, of the owners of real
ordinance creating the district, the City Council
property in the proposed district. Forms of this
shall appoint three (3) owners of real property
petition shall be available to any person at the
therein as commissioners, who shall compose a
office of the City Clerk, and the City Engineer
Board of Improvement for the district. Such
shall assist in the preparation of said petition by
Board of Improvement shall have control of the
providing a legal description of the property to be
construction of the improvements in the district.
included in the proposed district. Such petition
may limit the cost of the improvement to either a
(E) Plans for improvement. Immediately after their
fixed sum or to a percentage of the assessed
qualification, the Board of Improvement shall
value of the real property in the proposed district,
form plans for the improvement as prayed in the
(B) Notice of public hearing. When persons claiming
petition, and shall procure estimates of the costs
to be a majority in value, as shown by the last
thereof. For this purpose, the board may employ
county assessment of the owners of real property
such engineers and other agents as may be
in a proposed street improvement district file with
needful, and may provide for their compensation
the City Clerk a petition for the organization of
which, with all other necessary expenditures,
such an improvement district, it shall be the duty
shall be taken as a part of the cost of the
of the City Clerk to give notice that such petition
improvement. If for any cause the improvement
will be heard at a meeting of the City Council to
shall not be made, said cost shall be raised and
be held more than 15 days after the filing of such
paid by an ad valorem tax upon the real property
petition. Such notice shall be published once a
in the district as assessed for state and county
week for two (2) weeks, the last insertion to be
purposes, which shall be levied by the City
not less than seven (7) days before the date fixed
Council on the application of any person
for the hearing. The Mayor, if he sees fit, may
interested, and shall be paid to the Board of
CD171:9
Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
Improvement, to be distributed amongst the
creditors of the district.
(F) Appointment of Board of Assessment. As soon
as the Board of Improvement shall have formed
said plan, and shall have ascertained the cost of
the improvement, it shall report the same to the
City Council who shall appoint three electors of
the city, who shall constitute a Board of
Assessment of the benefits to be received by
each lot or block, or other subdivision of land
within said district, by reason of said proposed
improvement.
(G) Assessment of benefits. The Board of
Assessment shall at once proceed to inscribe in a
book to be used for the purpose of description of
each of said lots, blocks, or parcels of land and
shall assess the value of the benefit to accrue to
each of said lots, blocks, or parcels of land by
reason of such improvement, which assessment
of said benefits they shall enter upon said book
opposite the description thereof; and they shall
then subscribe said assessment and deposit it in
the office of the City Clerk, where it shall be kept
and preserved as a public record. Provided, said
assessment may be annually readjusted
according to additional improvements placed
upon the lands, when a succession of collections
is necessary to pay for the improvements.
(H) Notice of filing of assessment. Immediately on
the filing of said assessments, the City Clerk shall
insert in some newspaper published in the city,
the following notice:
"The assessment of Street Improvement District
No. , was filed in my office on the day
of , and the same is now
subject to inspection.
Clerk of the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas."
(I) Appeal of assessments to City Council. Anyone
whose real estate is embraced in said
assessment may at any time within 10 days from
the giving of said notice, file with the City Clerk in
writing his/her notice of appeal from the action of
said Board of Assessment in making said
assessment of his/her property, which appeal
shall be heard and disposed of at the next regular
meeting of the City Council, and on such appeal
the matter shall be heard de novo on such
evidence as may be adduced on either side.
(J) Finding of City Council. The City Council shall
enter on its minutes the results of its finding on
any such appeal, and shall cause a copy of its
finding to be certified to said Board of
Assessment, which shall make its assessment
conform thereto if any change has been made
therein by said City Council.
(K) Assessments payable in annual installments. It
shall be provided by ordinance that the local
assessment of benefits shall be paid in
successive annual installments so that the tax
levied in any one (1) year shall not exceed 25%
of the assessed benefits accruing to real
property.
(L) Publication of ordinance. Within 30 days after
the passage of the ordinance mentioned in
subsection (C) above, the City Clerk shall publish
a copy of it in some newspaper published and
having a bona fide circulation in the city for one
time. Within 30 days after such publication the
district, or any property owner may bring suit in
Chancery Court for the purpose of correcting or
invalidating such assessment; but if such suit is
not brought within the time, all objections to the
creation of the district for the validity of the
assessment shall be forever barred and
precluded.
(M) Copy of assessment delivered to collector.
Within 40 days after the passage of the
ordinance mentioned in (C) above, unless the
time be extended by the City Council, the City
Clerk shall deliver to the County Collector a
certified copy of said assessment of benefits
containing a description of said blocks, lots, and
parcels of land in said district, and the amount
assessed on each, duly extended against each
lot, block, or parcel of land, and a certified copy
of the ordinance fixing the percentum to be
collected each year. At the same time the City
Clerk delivers to the County Collector a certified
copy of the assessment of benefits, and the
certified copy of the ordinance fixing the
percentum to be collected, he/she shall deliver
like said copies to the County Clerk.
(N) Annual financial report required. The
commissioners of each street improvement
district shall file an annual financial report with
the City Clerk on or before the first day of March
of each year, covering the financial affairs of their
respective districts for the preceding year. Such
financial statements shall be certified and filed as
herein provided by the chief financial officer of
each such improvement district.
(Code 1965, §§18.18, 18.19--18.22, 18-22.1--18-22.9; Ord.
No. 2051, 9-17-74; Code 1991, §98.30, §98.43; Ord. No.
4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
171.17-171.99 Reserved
CD171:10
TITLE XV UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE
CHAPTER 171: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS
171.01 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS..................................................................................................3
171.02 INTERSECTIONS.................................................................................................................... 44433
171.03
RESERVED.............................................................................................................................55434
171.04
CROSSWALKS TO BE ACCESSIBLE TO PHYSICALLY DISABLED.................................55434
171.05
PROCEDURE FOR CLOSING UTILITY EASEMENTS AND STREET RIGHTS -OF -WAY .......
554
171.06
OCCUPATION OF STREETS AND HIGHWAYS BY PUBLIC UTILITIES.............................55544
171.07
MAINTENANCE AND CONSTRUCTION POLICIES..............................................................77646
171.08
ORDER OF CITY COUNCIL OR PERMIT REQUIRED..........................................................77756
171.09
APPLICATION FOR PERMIT..................................................................................................77756
171.10
STANDARDS FOR ISSUANCE OF PERMIT; EXPIRATION AND REMOVAL .....................77756
171.11 INSPECTION OF WORK; REPLACEMENT OF REJECTED WORK....................................88757
171.12 PROPERTY OWNER TO CONSTRUCT SIDEWALK OR CONTRIBUTE COST OF SIDEWALK88767
171.13 SIDEWALK, DRIVEWAY AND TRAIL SPECIFICATIONS .....................................................99978
171.14 EXCAVATIONS...............................................................................................................121-21-2814
171.15 STREET IMPROVEMENT DISTRICTS...........................................................................131-31-391-2
171.16-171.99 RESERVED........................................................................................................151-1441914
CD171:1
Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
CD171:2
CHAPTER 171: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS
171.01 Purpose
It is the purpose of this chapter to preserve and
protect the health, safety, and general welfare of
citizens by providing regulations for design and
construction of public streets and sidewalks: thereby
providing safe, convenient, cost effective
transportation systems that are accessible to all users
and modes of transportation.
171.024 GeneralMissellaneeus
Provisions
(A) Minimum Street Standards.
(1) Adoption and enforcement of Minimum
Street Standards. The City Council adopts
the Minimum Street Standards as
recommended by the City Engineer and
attached to the enacting ordinance. All
technical procedures and design standards
contained within the Minimum Street
Standards shall be enforceable as part of the
Unified Development Code through
enforcement procedures of Chapter 153 as
well as 5 150.12 Penalty.
(2) Variances to Minimum Street Standards.
When the City Engineer determines that
application of the technical procedures or
design standards within the Minimum Street
Standards would cause undue hardship or
unnecessary practical problems for a
particular street or sidewalk project the City
Engineer may vary such Minimum Street
Standards and may condition such variances
by requiring other standards to safeguard the
purposes of this chapter and the Minimum
Street Standards.
R Inn end r At'e street 'm stn The City Council horeby adopts by rotore a the
Minimum Street Standards of the City of
Ca •oH..Jlle nd a • he a Rded from £m
}n 4'm by the City Cnn'noor. All technic
al
procedures and design standards contained
thre'n shall have then e force and effect a if
n}n•� ��•f for • .. r.l je—this chantor The G ty
CnginccrV is hereby authorized to prcpare such
rulcs andcgulations in conncction with the
standardizatiron of the design, construction, and
ntenan of street and alle •nl .1'n
dr'. n n'rl n.. n Ln storm ertn nrl
br'dgcs material,and construction methods,
matters and thin in connoction with the
construction and maintenance of such work,
which ho within the jurisdiction of the city, as to
him/her shell deem
odienl Icon the n mSo of s sch les
(B) Designation as streets or avenues. All
thoroughfares now or hereafter platted, which run
in an east and west direction through the
corporate limits of the city, shall be designated as
"street," and all thoroughfares now or hereafter
platted, which run in a north and south direction
through the corporate limits of the city, shall be
designated as "avenues." This section shall not
be construed so as to prohibit the use of such
descriptive names as "boulevard," "road," "way,"
"trail," and the like which might be used
indiscriminately as a designation of the
thoroughfare, and this section shall in no way be
deemed applicable to any alleys or alleyways.
(C) Retaining walls near sidewalk or right-of-way
(1) PorinitDefinition
Mayer.For purposes of this section, retaining
walls are defined as vertical or near vertical
walls at least 2.5 feet in height, that require a
footing or other structural reinforcement for
structural stabilit
(2) Eeteblictied--ed line City Engineer Approval.
The City Engineer may approve retaining
walls within rights of way where necessary to
protect adiacent property, minimize right of
way widths, protect sensitive environmental
areas, or for other reasons that further the
urpose of this chapter
(3) Requirements. Retaining walls constructed
within rights of way shall:
(a) Be constructed such that footings or other
structural reinforcement do not conflict with
existing or future storm drainage or utility
installations.
CD171:3
Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
(b) Be of sufficient distance from sidewalks or
trails so as to not impede or encroach on the
minimum effective width.
(c) Have adequate safety railings or other
precautions to prevent falls.
(d) Meet any other requirements of the City
Engineer to protect the public interest.
1I . - -
LR1ET.EMilW 7GT.7.' W . e a
(D) Gated streets not allowed in most residential
subdivisions.
No residential subdivision or apartment complex
shall be constructed with a gate across a street
without prior express approval by resolution of
the City Council that finds that security
considerations favoring a gate outweigh aesthetic
considerations and the city's policies in favor of
connectivity, openness and neighborliness.
(E) Taxi Stands. Taxi stand shall mean such portion
or portions of the public street or highway
designated by the City Council of the City of
Fayetteville as a place in which taxis may stand
or park.
(1) No unattended parking allowed. A taxi must
remain attended by its driver and ready for
service while located within a taxi stand.
(2) City Council Establishment of Taxi Stands:
(a) The City Council may establish taxi
stands on portions of public streets or
facilities or private areas if permitted by
the owner.
(b) The establishment, enlargement, or
removal of a taxi stand shall be by City
Council Resolution after a public
hearing. Adjoining property owners
within the block of the street or abutting
the parking lot in which the taxi stand is
proposed shall be notified by mail by the
Planning Division and a planning
notification sign shall be placed near the
taxi stand location two weeks before the
public hearing at City Council.
(Ord. No. 845, 5-6-40; Ord. No. 1026, 6-23-52; Ord. No.
1262, 5-8-61; Code 1965, §18-1, 18-2, 18-7; Ord. No. 2623,
4-15-80; Code 1991, §98.01, 98.02, 98.06; Ord. No. 4100,
§2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98; Ord. No. 4579, 06-01-04; Ord. 4946, 11-
21-06)
Cross reference(s)--Enforcement, Ch. 153.
171.032 Intersections
(A) Streets shall be planned and designed to provide
a safe system for present and prospective traffic
and shall be approved by the City Engineer.
(B) Proposed streets shall be planned in such a
manner as to provide safe access to proposed
lots.
(C) De•ign ctandardc:
Ordinary I4i44
CD171:4
TITLE XV UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE
Approaoh
25 mph
20 mph
Sight distance
90 -feet
70 -feet
Grades within 100 ft.
Flat
4%
Minimum angle
755
7rr°-
(Code 1965, App. C., Art. IV, §E; Ord. No. 2196, 2-17-76;
Code 1991, §159.50; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
171.043 Reserved
(Code 1965, App. C., Art. IV, §J; Ord. No. 2935, 8-2-83; Ord.
No. 3302,10-20-87; Code 1991, §159.55; Ord. No. 4100, §2
(Ex. A), 6-16-98; Ord. 5296, 12-15-09)
171.054 Crosswalks To Be Accessible To
Physically Disabled
Aadequate and reasonable access for the safe and
convenient movement of physically handicapped
persons, including those in wheelchairs, across curbs
constructed or replaced o after the effective date
of -this -section -shall be provided -
(Code 1965, §18-14; Ord. No. 2267, 8-17-76; Code 1991,
§98.12; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
171.065 Procedure For Closing Public
Utility Easements And Street Rights -Of -
Way
The procedure for closing of streets and alleys shall
hereafter be as follows:
JA) Information to City Planning DivisionCity Clerk.
Petitioners shall present to the City Planning
Division City Clerk in duplicate the following
information before processing shall begin:
(1) Petitionlplab Petition to
-close and vacate public easement or right-
ef-waystreet or alley, including a
certified or photostatic copy of the
plat on record in the Circuit Clerk's
office.
(2) Documentation of
OwnershiCAosn9rl9,'se^�'of .9 ^
Abstractor's certificate of ownership
or other acceptable documentation
of ownership of the area to be
vacated and properties adjacent to
the vacated area.
(3) Utilities comments. Comments from owners
or agents, of all utility companies concerning
streets or alleyspublic easements or rights of
way to be closed vacated and its relationship
to existing or planned utilities, with
recommendations, as to what action should
be taken.
(B) Information to Zoning and Development
nd>, .or'Planning Commission. One copy
of the above shall be presented by the City Clerk
Planning Division to the Zoning and Development
Armi^strtr^torPlanning Commission who shall
submit same for review and recommendation of
the Planning Commis
(C) Recommendation to City Council. The
recommendation of the Planning Commission
shall be forwarded to the City Council.
(D) Record with Circuit Clerk. If an ordinance is
adopted closing oc—vacating the street or
a4eypublic easement or right of way, it shall be
published and reported in the Circuit Clerk's
office.
(E) Exception. The vacation request need not be
presented to the Planning Commission before
being submitted to the City Council if the City
Council finds the following by a vote of at least
two-thirds of its membership and the Mayor:
(1) The strew-. ^"^ public easement or right-of-
way to be vacated has not been constructed
or has not been used by the public for at
least five years or the easement does not
contain any utilities within the area to be
vacated; and
(2) Special circumstances exist which require
prompt consideration of the vacation request
and justify the bypass of the Planning
Commission.
(Code 1965, §18-15; Ord. No. 1685, 7-7-69; Ord. No. 1898,
1-16-73; Code 1991, §98.13; Ord. No. 3925, §1, 10-3-95;
Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98; Ord. 5127, 4-01-08)
Cross reference(s)--Notifications and Public Hearings,
Ch. 157, Fees, Ch. 159.
171.07 6 Occupation Of Streets And
Highways By Public Utilities
Any public utility, as defined by state law, which
occupies the streets, highways or other public places
of the city under a franchise granted by the city or the
state shall occupy said streets, highways or other
public places in accordance with the requirements of
CD171:5
Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
the Minimum Street Standards and subject to the
following terms and conditions:
(A) Written approval. A public utility shall not erect or
place any facility more than seven (7) feet inside
the right-of-way line for any street without the
prior written approval of the MayerCity Engineer,
who shall grant such approval only if he
determines that the facility will not impair or
obstruct present or future vehicular and
pedestrian traffic.
(B) Relocation. Whenever public utility facilities
which are located within a public right-of-way
must be relocated in order not to impair or
obstruct vehicular or pedestrian traffic on any
new or existing street, highway, road, or
sidewalk, the public utility shall be required to
relocate its facilities within a reasonable time
from receipt of written notice from the MayocQffy,
and shall bear its own relocation costs; provided,
where any project is funded with federal or state
funds and said funds are received by the city for
the purpose of reimbursing utility relocation
expenses, the utility shall receive such
reimbursement. This division shall not be
construed as requiring a utility to relocate its
facilities within or from a private easement
without payment of just compensation.
(d} City Engineer approval. All proposed locations
and utility designs shall be reviewed and subject
to approval by the City Engineer to ensure that
the proposed construction will not cause
avoidable interference with existing or planned
street facilities, or with street operation or
maintenance. The procedure for submitting
plans and information to the City Engineer for
approval shall be developed and agreed upon by
each utility and the City Engineer.
-'I 1aRWSffiIItIPWU1III1
CD171:6
TITLE XV UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE
it should- extend be considered shall include, but not be
outside the n .n. ^ ,.h,.hcercido,^,nl . Whore limited to the following:
me the ^ nt shall extend I^ th^
control lines, to the tsidn of frontage (a) The conditions of the sidewalk;
roadc, or to an indicated lino that allowo for future
w'widoni g ^'h^ o'. (b) The expected level of pedestrian traffic;
and,
(c) The use of the sidewalk by school
children.
(Code 1965,18-47; Ord. No. 1725, 1-8-70; Ord. No. 2647, 7-
15-80; Ord. No. 2655, 8-5-80; Ord. No. 2724, 5-19-81; Code
1991, §98.15; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
D( 1{ )S(4)Street design. When plans for street
improvement and development are
formulated, utility line locations should be
recognized and the street designed so as to
minimize conflict with existing utilities.
(Code 1965, §18-17.1; Ord. No. 2850, 8-17-82; Ord. No.
2926, 6-7-83; Ord. No. 3245, 3-3-87; Code 1991, §98.14;
Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
171.087 Maintenance And Construction
Policies
The city's policies concerning and regarding the
maintenance and construction of streets, curbs,
gutters, and sidewalks shall be as follows:
(A) Maintenance. The city shall maintain roadways
in the city which have been accepted by the city
as city streets, or which have come under the
jurisdiction of the city by or through annexation.
(B) Priorities. The following factors shall be
considered in establishing priorities for roadway
resurfacing and rebuilding:
(1) Function. The function of the street, that is,
the streets which carry or are expected to
carry heavy amounts of traffic shall have
priority over lesser streets.
(2) Condition. The condition of the pavement, in
general, roadways which are more
deteriorated shall have priority over those
streets of lesser deterioration. However
those streets of lesser deterioration may
have priority when it is determined that the
benefits of resurfacing the roadways of
lesser deterioration may be greater.
(C) Sidewalks.
(1) Repair/replacement. Existing city sidewalks
shall be repaired and replaced by the city, as
needed.
(2) Priorities. In establishing priorities for
sidewalk repair or replacement, the factors to
Cross reference(s)--Sidewalks, §158.06.
171.098 Order Of City Council Or Permit
Required
No person shall begin to construct, reconstruct,
repair, alter or grade any sidewalk, curb, curb -cut,
driveway or street on the public streets, unless the
same has been properly ordered by the City Council,
or plans for such have been approved by the city as
site improvements for a subdivision, or a permit has
been issued by the city's official charged with the
administration of this chapter.
(Code 1965, §18-25; Ord. No. 1790, 3-15-71; Code No.
1991, §98.61: Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex.), 6-16-98)
Cross reference(s)--Penalty, §98.99; Sidewalks,
§158.06.
171.1009 Application For Permit
An applicant for a permit hereunder shall file with the
city official an application showing:
(A) Name and address of the owner, or agent in
charge, of the property abutting the proposed
work area;
(B) Name and address of the party doing the work;
(C) Location of the work area;
(D) A plan or clear description of the work to be
done;
(E) Such other information as the city official shall
find reasonably necessary to the determination of
whether a permit should be issued hereunder.
(Code 1965, §18-26; Ord. No. 1790, 3-15-71; Code 1991,
§98.62; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
171.110 Standards For Issuance Of
Permit; Expiration And Removal
(A) The city official shall issue a permit hereunder
when he/she finds:
(1) That the plans have been approved.
CD171:7
Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
(2) The property owner may request a waiver to
(2) That the work shall be done according to the
specifications contained herein.
(3) That the operation will not unreasonably
interfere with vehicular and pedestrian traffic,
the demand and necessity for parking
spaces, and the means of ingress to and
egress from the property affected and
adjacent properties.
§171.132(A)(1) requiring sidewalk
construction. The sidewalk-adcrthistratocQfty
Engineer shall review the following factors to
determine whether or not to grant a waiver:
(a) Pedestrian traffic generators such as
parks and schools in the area.
(b) The existence of a sidewalk network in
the area.
(4) That the health, safety, and welfare of the
public will not be unreasonably impaired.
(c) The density of current and future
development in the area.
(B) Any permit issued shall expire three (3) months
from the date of issue and may be renewed upon
(d) The amount of pedestrian traffic likely to
application,
be generated by the proposed
development.
(Code 1965, §18-29; Ord. No. 1790, 3-15-71; Code 1991,
§98.64; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
(e) Whether the terrain is such that a
sidewalk is physically practical and
feasible, and the extent to which trees,
171.1214 Inspection Of Work;
ground cover and natural areas would
Replacement Of Rejected Work
be adversely impacted by the
construction of the sidewalk.
(A) The city official shall make all necessary
(f) The overall need for a sidewalk to be
inspections before, during and after the
constructed on the lot.
construction of all sidewalks, curbing and
guttering to insure the work is being done in
(3) If the Sidowalk AdminictratorCitv Engineer
accordance with the plans and specifications. In
grants the waiver to construct a sidewalk, the
the event any or part of any work is not done in a
owner shall have an option to construct the
satisfactory manner or not in conformity with the
sidewalk, or to contribute money in lieu of
plans and specifications, the city official shall
construction as set forth below:
notify the contractor and owner in writing of
his/her nonacceptance of the work. All such
(a) The amount of money in lieu of
rejected work shall be removed and replaced
construction to be dedicated shall be
within 30 days of this notification.
determined based upon the rough
proportionality of the impact of the
(B) Advance notification must be given the city
development upon the sidewalk
official for inspections under this section.
infrastructure needs near the
development including consideration of
(Code 1965, §18-30; Ord. No. 1790, 3-15-71; Code 1991,
the persons served by the development
§98.65; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
and approximate pedestrian trip
generation rates of the development.
171.132 Property Owner To Construct
Sidewalk Or Contribute Cost Of Sidewalk
(b) To facilitate administration of this
ordinance for certain recurrent types of
(A) Requirement. The owner of any property
development, the City Council has
abutting a public street or highway for which a
determined that the city will accept, as
sidewalk is required by the city's Master Street
the roughly proportionate impact, the
Plan, shall construct a sidewalk in accordance
amount shown below:
with §171.13 of this-sedethis chanter, along said
(i) Single family house $630.00
street or highway upon the receipt of notice
issued at the time a building or parking lot permit
(ii) Duplex $720.00
is issued.
(1) The property owner shall construct the
(c) Unless the developer presents evidence
sidewalk in accordance with
that the number of persons served by
the
the development and the pedestrian trip
specifications provided in the Minimum
generation rates of the development
Street Standards.-
justify a reduced contribution in lieu of
the construction of sidewalks, all
CD171:8
TITLE XV UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE
industrial, commercial, and multi -family
developments shall make a cash
contribution in lieu of the construction of
the sidewalk at a rate of three dollars
($3.00) per square foot of the sidewalk
that normally would have been required.
The amount per square foot and
amounts for a single family house and a
duplex shall be reviewed by the City
Council at least every five (5) years.
(d) Contribution in lieu of construction of
sidewalks shall be paid or construction
of the sidewalks shall be completed
before receiving final plat approval, or
issuance of a certificate of occupancy.
(e) Contributions must be expended within
one (1) year to build a sidewalk close
enough to serve the project being
constructed.
(f) If the owner voluntarily consents in
writing, the contributions may be used to
construct sidewalk projects where most
needed as determined by the sidewalk
administraterCity Engineer.
(4) An owner/builder may appeal the sidewalk
adminictra' ^^o^City Engineer's refusal to
grant a waiver or the administrator's
determination of the amount of contribution
in lieu of construction to the Planning
Commission pursuant to §155.06(D).
(B) Application of provisions. The provisions of this
section shall only apply to the following property:
(1) New structure. On which a new structure is
being built;
(2) Existing residential structure. On which an
existing residential structure is being
modified so as to increase the number of
dwelling units located therein or to change
the use of the nonresidential use.
(3) Parking lot/garage. On which a parking lot,
or parking garage having a minimum
capacity of five (5) automobiles is
constructed.
(4) Building Additions. Additions of 2,500
square feet or larger.
(5) Conditional use. Any development which
requires conditional use approval.
(Code 1965, §18-31; Ord. No. 2653, 8-5-80; Ord. No. 2780,
11-17-81; Ord. No. 2917, 5-3-83; Ord. No. 3113, 9-3-85;
Code 1991, §98.66; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98; Ord.
No. 4311, 5-1-01; Ord. No. 4387, 4-16-02)
171.145 Sidewalk, Driveway And Trail
Specifications
(A) Sidewalks.
(1) Grades; establishment of property lines. All
sidewalks, access ramps, and driveway
approaches shall be constructed in grades
as approved by the City Engineer. It shall be
the responsibility of the owner to establish
property lines by competent survey at his/her
own expense.
(2) Minimum width of sidewalks. The minimum
width of sidewalks shall follow the guidelines
of the Master Street Plan, of the
Comprehensive Land Use Plan. In all cases,
the effective width of the sidewalk shall be a
minimum of 4 feet. Effective sidewalk width
is the actual sidewalk width, less:
(_a)_ A shy distance of 2 feet where
vertical barriers (walls, fences, signs,
etc) greater than 3.5 feet in height are
adjacent to the sidewalk and extend
more than 4 feet in length parallel to the
sidewalk.
(b) A shy distance of 1.5 feet for curb
adjacent to the sidewalk
(_c)_ A shy distance of 1 foot_d-for
all other fixed obstacles.
The greatest of the above distances shall
apply for each side of the walk.
(3) Sidewalk distances from the curb. The
sidewalk setback distance from the curb
shall follow the guidelines of the Master
Street Plan, of the Qomprehen e acid Use
€laror be as specified in the final plat
unless otherwise approved by the City
Engineer.
(3 Al//mum—nnomsM" know of c/do,yalkq and
CD171:9
Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
(64-4) Inspection. All sidewalks and curb cuts
made for driveway approaches require an
inspection prior to the concrete placement.
(47) ADA guidelines. Sidewalks within rights of
w@yshall conform to ADA guidelines.
(450) Sidewalk elevation. The back of
sidewalk elevation shall be such that the
slope from the back of sidewalk to the top of
curb is 2%, unless otherwise approved by
the City Engineer. This elevation shall be
continuous through the driveway approach.
(18) Curing compound. All cidowalko and
of a concroto curing compound or tho
concroto ic to be kept moict for covon (7)
CD171:10
TITLE XV UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE
(6) Broken edges of saw cuts. Broken edges of
saw nuts n od by domolition rafloyd (3) Grader All trails shall ben nstc cted ). ih n
saw -cut. Oo/ maximum cross
slope in the same
direction as theexisting grade unless
(GB) Access ramps. otherwise designated. Longitudinal grade
shall not o od 5o/ Longitudinal gitudinal grade may
(1) ADA requirements. Access ramps shall he iad by -the Trills Goord'nator for sins
conform to ADA requirements, including n ih riff'^ It topograph , In ^ ch s the
detectable warning devices such as ASHTO longitudinal grade requirement for
truncated domes. bicy^' ^ shall apply.
(2) Sidewalk intersections. Access ramps shall (A) Asphalt frail requirements Asphalt trails shall
be installed at all sidewalk intersections with be constructed of asphalt concrete hot mix
the street. surfer course. curtaco
meeting ethe requirements of ^nuTD
(3) Raised crosswalk. The raised or built-up Specifications, 199E Edition, shall he re
access ramp shall not be installed on public unless otherwise approved. Asphalt trail
streets without the approval of the City soctionc shell he constructed he following
engineer. stana rs.Is_
(4) Minimum width. The minimum width of a (a) Surfano asphalt trail sontionr shall have a 3
curb ramp shall be Forty-eight (48) inches. inch thick g''rfane.
c'„t„ lap) ' ashes nded ..nl of flared sides. (b) Base Course. Base course forasphalt trails
(5) Slope. The slope of the ramp shall not be aggregate compacted to 959/ M.P.D.
greater than slopes specified in the Minimum
Street Standards.8 33 (1:12). (c) Subgrado. The top 21 inchos of subgrado
Shall meet the requirements of City of
(6) Slope of flared sides. The elope of the flared Fayzttey 1'e Minimum Stroot Stan.fardc.
drips shall not he greater than 10% (1:10) Existing material not meeting these
requirements shall be removed nd
(7) Broom finish. Access ramps shall have
broom f nish compactod to 959/ Standard Proctor y Donci^t
(S D fl ) Spec fin ^'ter nxl't'e J
(D) Multi -use Trails. the addition of 1 inch chot rock or other
material in order to croato a solid base.
(1) Minimum width of multi -use trails. The
minimum width of trails be 1 shall feet ag,fet an,, (5) Concrete trail requirements. All concreto
shall follow the trail cross-section guidelines portions of trails shall be conotructod of a
of the Mactor Active Transportation Plan. portland cement concrete mixture with a
comproccivo strength of 3599 p with Ito
I Trail iaatorfo Soloctio of trail cu r{
��) Y. vtlticvQ 7Fe percent air entrainment. Concrete
materials doponds upon cite conditions.
Conorally, trails shall he n art. intod of standards:
asphalt except whore they are located in
floodprono areas or adjacent to vehicular (a) Sw-taco. Concrete trail portions shall havo a
traffic. Final —dotormi ties of tray 1 inch fiber reinforced concrete surface with
construct'o ater'als shall he made h the a medium broom finish.
kn attQF
CD171:11
Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
(642)Striping. Center line stripe and a diamond
pattern stripe around the bollards shall be
installed. Striping shall conform to the
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices,
Part 9 — Traffic Controls for Bicycle Facilities.
Additional striping may be required for
increased safety in accordance with MUTCD
standards—
striping detail to the developer prior to
(26) ADA guidelines. Trails shall conform to ADA
guidelines, to the extent possible.
{7 Trail shoulders.
to
A two foot chouldor
tho trail be
adjacent
and cho,,Id
same dire!'..
Coordinator
appropriateness
ome
to trails.
chall graded cmooth
not exceed 2% crocc elope in the
as the trail. The Trail
shall determine the
maintenance
and
of and adjacent
plants graccoc
(39) Bollards. Bollards are required at trail
intersections with streets. The Tall
ctandard roquiromontc to the developer prior
te-soRstwction.
(44-8) Trail signage. Trail signage shall comply
with the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices, Part 9 — Traffic Controls for Bicycle
Facilities.. The Tr^ile Coordinator ..III
provide a signage detail with standard
req nto to the develop prior to
(544) Street Crosswalks. Trails that intersect
and cross public streets shall have a red
colored concrete crosswalk with two foot
wide white thermoplastic stripes on each
side, a patterned thermoplastic overly for the
full crossing area, or other approved
treatment to clearly mark the trail crossing.
For major streets, this crosswalk may be
raised 2.5 inches above pavement surface.
For newly paved lower traveled roadc, a rod
thormoplactic brick pattern may be applied.
The Trnlle Coordinator will provide
(Code 1965, §18-28; Ord. No. 1790, 3-15-71; Ord. No. 2629,
5-6-80; Ord. No. 3117, 9-3-85; Code 1991, §98.67; Ord. No.
4005, §1, 11-19-96; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98; Ord.
4919, 9-05-06; Ord. 5044, 8-07-07; Ord. 5270, 9-1-09;
Ord.5333, 7-6-10)
171.154 Excavations
(A) Permit required. It shall be unlawful for any
person to make any excavation in any street,
alley, sidewalk, road, highway, or other public
way in the city without first obtaining a permit to
do so from the Mayor, or his/her duly authorized
representative. Such permit shall be granted
only after written application has been filed and
the deposit or bond required by §158.02 has
been filed. The fee for each permit shall be paid
in advance. Provided, however, that utility
companies franchised by the city shall—mnLbe
billed monthly for all permits granted during the
previous month.
(B) Lights and guards. Every person making an
excavation as provided for in this chapter shall
place and maintain lights and guards around the
same for the protection of the public. Such lights
and guards shall be subject to the approval of the
Mayor.
(C) Repairs of public property; return of cash deposit.
(1) Cost. Each person making an excavation
under this chapter shall repair the street or
other public way at his own expense, and
under the direction and supervision of the
MayorCity Engineer or designee.
(2) Standards. Repair of the street or other
public way shall be made in accordance with
CD171:12
TITLE XV UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE
the requirements of the Minimum Street
Standards?e the folI^,•,In^ ctandardc:
C1 CTJ4flIs\I -.. ..L{rRTSd:L11�T7LETdrllfllT
I . . .
$3 nspha tie alod ,...,.,..,. e,.,..a,,,.d ,'mots
shall h,. . u,rfa,.,.,J with a u urfaco e mils to
that . h'eh a 'steel before ,at'a
(3) Notice. The permittee shall notify the
MayerCity Engineer, prior to beginning such
repair, of the time and manner of repair and
obtain the approval of the MayorIii
Engineer prior to beginning of such repair
and afford then Mayer then opportunity u u
ertnit, of Lein,.n.t a g then ,.f ch pre
until complotod..
(4) Return of deposit. When the repairs
required by this section are completed; and
approved,_aad- paid -for, the --Mayor shall
authorize the return of any sum deposited
under §171.14 above will be made to the
permittee. In the event the permittee-holders
shall fail, refuse, or neglect to make such
repairs, the city may repair the street and
deduct the cost therefrom from the amount
on deposit with the city and the balance of
the deposit, if any, shall be paid to the
permitteei+holder.
(D) Street closings for excavation ^" in oxoocs-of�^f �1
hours.
(1) Prohibited without approval of Mayer. It shall
be unlawful for any person to cause a street
to be closed for moro than 21 hourc due to
the making of an excavation without the prior
written approval of the MayerQ y. In
granting such approval, the Mayor City shall
impose time limits and such other
reasonable conditions as are necessary to
minimize any inconvenience or danger to the
public.
(2) Exception. This section shall not apply to
emergency repairs.
(Code 1965, §18-40, 18-42, 18-44; Ord. No. 1829, 10-18-71;
Ord. No. 2806, 4-20-82; Code 1991, §98.80, 98.82, 98.83,
98.84; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
Cross reference(s)--Penalty, §98.99; Enforcement,
Ch. 153; Bonds and Guarantees, Ch. 158; Fees, Ch. 159.
171.165 Street Improvement Districts
(A) Petition to form street improvement district. Any
person desiring to initiate the formation of a street
improvement district shall file with the City Clerk
a petition requesting the organization of a street
improvement district and signed by persons
claiming to be a majority in value, as shown by
the last county assessment, of the owners of real
property in the proposed district. Forms of this
petition shall be available to any person at the
office of the City Clerk, and the City Engineer
shall assist in the preparation of said petition by
providing a legal description of the property to be
included in the proposed district. Such petition
may limit the cost of the improvement to either a
fixed sum or to a percentage of the assessed
value of the real property in the proposed district.
(B) Notice of public hearing. When persons claiming
to be a majority in value, as shown by the last
county assessment of the owners of real property
in a proposed street improvement district file with
the City Clerk a petition for the organization of
such an improvement district, it shall be the duty
of the City Clerk to give notice that such petition
will be heard at a meeting of the City Council to
be held more than 15 days after the filing of such
petition. Such notice shall be published once a
week for two (2) weeks, the last insertion to be
not less than seven (7) days before the date fixed
for the hearing. The Mayor, if he sees fit, may
call a special meeting of the City Council for the
purpose of hearing such petition, such called
meeting to be held not less than 15 days after the
date of the call and the notice of the hearing
thereat to be published for the time and in the
manner above stated.
(C) Hearing on petition; ordinance establishing
district.
(1) At the time named in said notice, the City
Council shall meet and hear all owners of
real property within the proposed district who
desire to be heard on the question of
whether a majority in assessed value of
CD171:13
Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
property owners has signed the petition, and
shall make a finding of whether the petition is
signed by a majority in assessed value of
such property owners. The finding of the
governing body shall be expressed in an
ordinance. If it finds that a majority has
signed the petition, it shall then be its duty by
the same ordinance to establish the district.
The ordinance shall designate the
boundaries of the district and shall also give
the district a name descriptive of the nature
of the proposed improvement and a number
to prevent it from being confused with similar
districts.
(2) The ordinance shall be published within 30
days after its adoption for one insertion in
some newspaper published in the city and
the findings of the governing body shall be
conclusive unless attached by a suit in the
Chancery Court brought within 30 days after
such publication.
(D) Appointment of Board of Improvement. In the
ordinance creating the district, the City Council
shall appoint three (3) owners of real property
therein as commissioners, who shall compose a
Board of Improvement for the district. Such
Board of Improvement shall have control of the
construction of the improvements in the district.
(E) Plans for improvement. Immediately after their
qualification, the Board of Improvement shall
form plans for the improvement as prayed in the
petition, and shall procure estimates of the costs
thereof. For this purpose, the board may employ
such engineers and other agents as may be
needful, and may provide for their compensation
which, with all other necessary expenditures,
shall be taken as a part of the cost of the
improvement. If for any cause the improvement
shall not be made, said cost shall be raised and
paid by an ad valorem tax upon the real property
in the district as assessed for state and county
purposes, which shall be levied by the City
Council on the application of any person
interested, and shall be paid to the Board of
Improvement, to be distributed amongst the
creditors of the district.
(F) Appointment of Board of Assessment. As soon
as the Board of Improvement shall have formed
said plan, and shall have ascertained the cost of
the improvement, it shall report the same to the
City Council who shall appoint three electors of
the city, who shall constitute a Board of
Assessment of the benefits to be received by
each lot or block, or other subdivision of land
within said district, by reason of said proposed
improvement.
(G) Assessment of benefits. The Board of
Assessment shall at once proceed to inscribe in a
book to be used for the purpose of description of
each of said lots, blocks, or parcels of land and
shall assess the value of the benefit to accrue to
each of said lots, blocks, or parcels of land by
reason of such improvement, which assessment
of said benefits they shall enter upon said book
opposite the description thereof; and they shall
then subscribe said assessment and deposit it in
the office of the City Clerk, where it shall be kept
and preserved as a public record. Provided, said
assessment may be annually readjusted
according to additional improvements placed
upon the lands, when a succession of collections
is necessary to pay for the improvements.
(H) Notice of filing of assessment. Immediately on
the filing of said assessments, the City Clerk shall
insert in some newspaper published in the city,
the following notice:
"The assessment of Street Improvement District
No. , was filed in my office on the day
of , and the same is now
subject to inspection.
Clerk of the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas."
(I) Appeal of assessments to City Council. Anyone
whose real estate is embraced in said
assessment may at any time within 10 days from
the giving of said notice, file with the City Clerk in
writing his/her notice of appeal from the action of
said Board of Assessment in making said
assessment of his/her property, which appeal
shall be heard and disposed of at the next regular
meeting of the City Council, and on such appeal
the matter shall be heard de novo on such
evidence as may be adduced on either side.
(J) Finding of City Council. The City Council shall
enter on its minutes the results of its finding on
any such appeal, and shall cause a copy of its
finding to be certified to said Board of
Assessment, which shall make its assessment
conform thereto if any change has been made
therein by said City Council.
(K) Assessments payable in annual installments. It
shall be provided by ordinance that the local
assessment of benefits shall be paid in
successive annual installments so that the tax
levied in any one (1) year shall not exceed 25%
of the assessed benefits accruing to real
property.
(L) Publication of ordinance. Within 30 days after
the passage of the ordinance mentioned in
subsection (C) above, the City Clerk shall publish
a copy of it in some newspaper published and
CD171:14
TITLE XV UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE
having a bona fide circulation in the city for one
time. Within 30 days after such publication the
district, or any property owner may bring suit in
Chancery Court for the purpose of correcting or
invalidating such assessment; but if such suit is
not brought within the time, all objections to the
creation of the district for the validity of the
assessment shall be forever barred and
precluded.
(M) Copy of assessment delivered to collector.
Within 40 days after the passage of the
ordinance mentioned in (C) above, unless the
time be extended by the City Council, the City
Clerk shall deliver to the County Collector a
certified copy of said assessment of benefits
containing a description of said blocks, lots, and
parcels of land in said district, and the amount
assessed on each, duly extended against each
lot, block, or parcel of land, and a certified copy
of the ordinance fixing the percentum to be
collected each year. At the same time the City
Clerk delivers to the County Collector a certified
copy of the assessment of benefits, and the
certified copy of the ordinance fixing the
percentum to be collected, he/she shall deliver
like said copies to the County Clerk.
(N) Annual financial report required. The
commissioners of each street improvement
district shall file an annual financial report with
the City Clerk on or before the first day of March
of each year, covering the financial affairs of their
respective districts for the preceding year. Such
financial statements shall be certified and filed as
herein provided by the chief financial officer of
each such improvement district.
(Code 1965, §§18.18, 18.19--18.22, 18-22.1--18-22.9; Ord.
No. 2051, 9-17-74; Code 1991, §98.30, §98.43; Ord. No.
4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
171.167-171.99 Reserved
CD171:15
CITY OF
TayeeNle ARKANSAS
TO:
THRU:
FROM:
MEETING DATE:
SUBJECT:
STAFF MEMO
Fayetteville Planning Commission
Chris Brown, City Engineer
Matt Casey, Engineering Design Manager
June -22-2045 July 13, 2015
UPDATES TO THE MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS AND UDC
AMENDMENT CHAPTER 171 STREETS AND SIDEWALKS
RECOMMENDATION:
Staff recommends forwarding the Minimum Street Standards and code amendments to the City
Council with a recommendation for approval.
BACKGROUND:
City staff has prepared the final draft of the guidance document for design and construction of
streets, sidewalks and trails. This document will replace a 1996 version of the Minimum Street
Standards, and will serve as a technical supplement to the City's Unified Development Code. In
addition, the associated revisions to Chapter 171 Streets and Sidewalks are attached,
DISCUSSION:
The revisions proposed to Chapter 171 are summarized below:
• 171.01 A purpose statement was added to the chapter.
• 171.02 Adoption of the Minimum Street Standards added.
• 171.02 Language for retaining wall locations adjacent to the ROW was clarified.
• 171.06 Procedure for Vacations was changed to reflect the current submittal procedure.
• 171.07 Removed technical criteria for utilities within the ROW and referenced the
Minimum Street Standards.
• 171.13 Changed language from Sidewalk Administrator to City Engineer.
• 171.14 Removed technical criteria for sidewalk, driveway and trail construction and
referenced the Minimum Street Standards.
• 171.15 Removed technical criteria for excavations in the ROW and updated the
permitting procedure.
BUDGET/STAFF IMPACT:
None
ATTACHMENTS:
Unified Development Code Revisions:
Chapter 171 Streets and Sidewalks
Minimum Street Standards
Mailing Address:
113 W. Mountain Street www.fayetteville-ar.gov
Fayetteville, AR 72701
TITLE XV UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE
CHAPTER 171: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS
171.01
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS..................................................................................................3
171.02
INTERSECTIONS............................................................................................................................
3
171.03
RESERVED.....................................................................................................................................4
171.04
CROSSWALKS TO BE ACCESSIBLE TO PHYSICALLY DISABLED.........................................4
171.05
PROCEDURE FOR CLOSING UTILITY EASEMENTS AND STREET RIGHTS -OF -WAY ...........4
171.06
OCCUPATION OF STREETS AND HIGHWAYS BY PUBLIC UTILITIES.....................................4
171.07
MAINTENANCE AND CONSTRUCTION POLICIES......................................................................
5
171.08
ORDER OF CITY COUNCIL OR PERMIT REQUIRED..................................................................
5
171.09
APPLICATION FOR PERMIT.........................................................................................................5
171.10
STANDARDS FOR ISSUANCE OF PERMIT; EXPIRATION AND REMOVAL .............................6
171.11
INSPECTION OF WORK; REPLACEMENT OF REJECTED WORK............................................6
171.12
PROPERTY OWNER TO CONSTRUCT SIDEWALK OR CONTRIBUTE COST OF
SIDEWALK......................................................................................................................................
6
171.13
SIDEWALK, DRIVEWAY AND TRAIL SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................
7
171.14
EXCAVATIONS...............................................................................................................................
8
171.15
STREET IMPROVEMENT DISTRICTS...........................................................................................9
171.16-171.99 RESERVED........................................................................................................................10
CD171:1
Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
CD171:2
CHAPTER 171: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS
171.01 Purpose
existing or future storm drainage or utility
It is the purpose of this chapter to preserve and
installations.
protect the health, safety, and general welfare of
(b) Be of sufficient distance from sidewalks or
citizens by providing regulations for design and
trails so as to not impede or encroach on the
construction of public streets and sidewalks; thereby
minimum effective width.
providing safe, convenient, cost effective
(c) Have adequate safety railings or other
transportation systems that are accessible to all users
precautions to prevent falls.
and modes of transportation.
(d) Meet any other requirements of the City
Engineer to protect the public interest.
171.02 General Provisions
(D) Gated streets not allowed in most residential
subdivisions.
(A) Rules and regulations governing street
improvements. The City Council hereby adopts
No residential subdivision or apartment complex
by reference the Minimum Street Standards of
shall be constructed with a gate across a street
the City of Fayetteville, and as may be amended
without prior express approval by resolution of
from time to time by the City Engineer. All
the City Council that finds that security
technical procedures and design standards
considerations favoring a gate outweigh aesthetic
contained therein shall have the same force and
considerations and the city's policies in favor of
effect as if printed word for word in this chapter.
connectivity, openness and neighborliness.
Such rules and regulations shall have the same
force and effect as law and violations thereof
(E) Taxi Stands. Taxi stand shall mean such portion
shall be punished as provided in Chapter 153.
or portions of the public street or highway
designated by the City Council of the City of
(B) Designation as streets or avenues. All
Fayetteville as a place in which taxis may stand
thoroughfares now or hereafter platted, which run
or park.
in an east and west direction through the
corporate limits of the city, shall be designated as
(1) No unattended parking allowed. A taxi must
"street," and all thoroughfares now or hereafter
remain attended by its driver and ready for
platted, which run in a north and south direction
service while located within a taxi stand.
through the corporate limits of the city, shall be
designated as "avenues." This section shall not
(2) City Council Establishment of Taxi Stands:
be construed so as to prohibit the use of such
descriptive names as "boulevard," "road," "way,"
(a) The City Council may establish taxi
"trail," and the like which might be used
stands on portions of public streets or
indiscriminately as a designation of the
facilities or private areas if permitted by
thoroughfare, and this section shall in no way be
the owner.
deemed applicable to any alleys or alleyways.
(b) The establishment, enlargement, or
(C) Retaining walls near sidewalk or right-of-way,
removal of a taxi stand shall be by City
Council Resolution after a public
(1) Definition. For purposes of this section,
hearing. Adjoining property owners
retaining walls are defined as vertical or near
within the block of the street or abutting
vertical walls at least 2.5 feet in height, that
the parking lot in which the taxi stand is
require a footing or other structural
proposed shall be notified by mail by the
reinforcement for structural stability.
Planning Division and a planning
notification sign shall be placed near the
(2) City Engineer Approval. The City Engineer
taxi stand location two weeks before the
may approve retaining walls within rights of
public hearing at City Council.
way where necessary to protect adjacent
property, minimize right of way widths,
(Ord. No. 845, 5-6-40; Ord. No. 1026, 6-23-52; Ord. No.
protect sensitive environmental areas, or for
1262, 5-8-61; Code 1965, §18-1, 18-2, 18-7; Ord. No. 2623,
other reasons that further the purpose of this
4-15-80; Code 1991, §98.01, 98.02, 98.06; Ord. No. 4100,
chapter.
§2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98; Ord. No. 4579, 06-01-04; Ord. 4946, 11-
21-06)
(3) Requirements. Retaining walls constructed
within rights of way shall:.
Cross reference(s)--Enforcement, Ch. 153
(a) Be constructed such that footings or other
171.03 Intersections
structural reinforcement do not conflict with
CD171:3
Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
(A) Streets shall be planned and designed to provide
a safe system for present and prospective traffic
and shall be approved by the City Engineer.
(B) Proposed streets shall be planned in such a
manner as to provide safe access to proposed
lots.
(Code 1965, App. C., Art. IV, §E; Ord. No. 2196, 2-17-76;
Code 1991, §159.50; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
171.04 Reserved
(Code 1965, App. C., Art. IV, §J; Ord. No. 2935, 8-2-83; Ord.
No. 3302, 10-20-87; Code 1991, §159.55; Ord. No. 4100, §2
(Ex. A), 6-16-98; Ord. 5296, 12-15-09)
171.05 Crosswalks To Be Accessible To
Physically Disabled
Adequate and reasonable access for the safe and
convenient movement of physically handicapped
persons, including those in wheelchairs, across curbs
constructed or replaced shall be provided
(Code 1965, §18-14; Ord. No. 2267, 8-17-76; Code 1991,
§98.12; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
171.06 Procedure For Closing Public
Utility Easements And Street Rights -Of -
Way
The procedure for closing of streets and alleys shall
hereafter be as follows:
(A) Information to City Planning Division. Petitioners
shall present to the City Planning Division in
duplicate the following information before
processing shall begin:
(1) Petition Petition to vacate public
easement or right-of-way, including
a certified or photostatic copy of the
plat on record in the Circuit Clerk's
office.
(2) Documentation of Ownership.
Abstractor's certificate of ownership
or other acceptable documentation
of ownership of the area to be
vacated and properties adjacent to
the vacated area.
(3) Utilities comments. Comments from owners
or agents, of all utility companies concerning
public easements or rights of way to be
vacated and its relationship to existing or
planned utilities, with recommendations, as
to what action should be taken.
(B) Information to Planning Commission. One copy
of the above shall be presented by the Planning
Division to the Planning Commission r review and
recommendation.
(C) Recommendation to City Council. The
recommendation of the Planning Commission
shall be forwarded to the City Council.
(D) Record with Circuit Clerk. If an ordinance is
adopted vacating the public easement or right of
way, it shall be published and reported in the
Circuit Clerk's office.
(E) Exception. The vacation request need not be
presented to the Planning Commission before
being submitted to the City Council if the City
Council finds the following by a vote of at least
two-thirds of its membership and the Mayor:
(1) The public easement or right-of-way to be
vacated has not been constructed or has not
been used by the public for at least five
years or the easement does not contain any
utilities within the area to be vacated; and
(2) Special circumstances exist which require
prompt consideration of the vacation request
and justify the bypass of the Planning
Commission.
(Code 1965, §18-15; Ord. No. 1685, 7-7-69; Ord. No. 1898,
1-16-73; Code 1991, §98.13; Ord. No. 3925, §1, 10-3-95;
Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98; Ord. 5127, 4-01-08)
Cross reference(s)--Notifications and Public Hearings,
Ch. 157, Fees, Ch. 159.
171.07 Occupation Of Streets And
Highways By Public Utilities
Any public utility, as defined by state law, which
occupies the streets, highways or other public places
of the city under a franchise granted by the city or the
state shall occupy said streets, highways or other
public places in accordance with the requirements of
the Minimum Street Standards and subject to the
following terms and conditions:
(A) Written approval. A public utility shall not erect or
place any facility more than seven (7) feet inside
the right-of-way line for any street without the
prior written approval of the City Engineer, who
shall grant such approval only if he determines
that the facility will not impair or obstruct present
or future vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
(B) Relocation. Whenever public utility facilities
which are located within a public right-of-way
must be relocated in order not to impair or
obstruct vehicular or pedestrian traffic on any
new or existing street, highway, road, or
sidewalk, the public utility shall be required to
relocate its facilities within a reasonable time
from receipt of written notice from the City, and
shall bear its own relocation costs; provided,
where any project is funded with federal or state
CD171:4
TITLE XV UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE
funds and said funds are received by the city for (1) Repair/replacement. Existing city sidewalks
the purpose of reimbursing utility relocation shall be repaired and replaced by the city, as
expenses, the utility shall receive such needed.
reimbursement. This division shall not be
construed as requiring a utility to relocate its (2) Priorities. In establishing priorities for
facilities within or from a private easement sidewalk repair or replacement, the factors to
without payment of just compensation. be considered shall include, but not be
limited to the following:
(C) City Engineer approval. All proposed
locations and utility designs shall be reviewed
and subject to approval by the City Engineer to
ensure that the proposed construction will not
cause avoidable interference with existing or
planned street facilities, or with street operation
or maintenance. The procedure for submitting
plans and information to the City Engineer for
approval shall be developed and agreed upon by
each utility and the City Engineer.
(D) Street design. When plans for street
improvement and development are
formulated, utility line locations should be
recognized and the street designed so as to
minimize conflict with existing utilities.
(Code 1965, §18-17.1; Ord. No. 2850, 8-17-82; Ord. No.
2926, 6-7-83; Ord. No. 3245, 3-3-87; Code 1991, §98.14;
Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
171.08 Maintenance And Construction
Policies
The city's policies concerning and regarding the
maintenance and construction of streets, curbs,
gutters, and sidewalks shall be as follows:
(A) Maintenance. The city shall maintain roadways
in the city which have been accepted by the city
as city streets, or which have come under the
jurisdiction of the city by or through annexation.
(B) Priorities. The following factors shall be
considered in establishing priorities for roadway
resurfacing and rebuilding:
(1) Function. The function of the street, that is,
the streets which carry or are expected to
carry heavy amounts of traffic shall have
priority over lesser streets.
(2) Condition. The condition of the pavement, in
general, roadways which are more
deteriorated shall have priority over those
streets of lesser deterioration. However
those streets of lesser deterioration may
have priority when it is determined that the
benefits of resurfacing the roadways of
lesser deterioration may be greater.
(C) Sidewalks.
(a) The conditions of the sidewalk;
(b) The expected level of pedestrian traffic;
and,
(c) The use of the sidewalk by school
children.
(Code 1965, 18-47; Ord. No. 1725, 1-8-70; Ord. No. 2647, 7-
15-80; Ord. No. 2655, 8-5-80; Ord. No. 2724, 5-19-81; Code
1991, §98.15; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
Cross reference(s)--Sidewalks, §158.06.
171.09 Order Of City Council Or Permit
Required
No person shall begin to construct, reconstruct,
repair, alter or grade any sidewalk, curb, curb -cut,
driveway or street on the public streets, unless the
same has been properly ordered by the City Council,
or plans for such have been approved by the city as
site improvements for a subdivision, or a permit has
been issued by the city's official charged with the
administration of this chapter.
(Code 1965, §18-25; Ord. No. 1790, 3-15-71; Code No.
1991, §98.61: Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex.), 6-16-98)
Cross reference(s)--Penalty, §98.99; Sidewalks,
§158.06.
171.10 Application For Permit
An applicant for a permit hereunder shall file with the
city official an application showing:
(A) Name and address of the owner, or agent in
charge, of the property abutting the proposed
work area;
(B) Name and address of the party doing the work;
(C) Location of the work area;
(D) A plan or clear description of the work to be
done;
(E) Such other information as the city official shall
find reasonably necessary to the determination of
whether a permit should be issued hereunder.
(Code 1965, §18-26; Ord. No. 1790, 3-15-71; Code 1991,
§98.62; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
CD171:5
Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
171.11 Standards For Issuance Of
Permit; Expiration And Removal (1) The property owner shall construct the
sidewalk in accordance with the
(A) The city official shall issue a permit hereunder specifications provided in the Minimum
when he/she finds: Street Standards.
(1) That the plans have been approved.
(2) The property owner may request a waiver to
§171.13(A)(1) requiring sidewalk
(2) That the work shall be done according to the
construction. The City Engineer shall review
specifications contained herein.
the following factors to determine whether or
not to grant a waiver:
(3) That the operation will not unreasonably
(a) Pedestrian traffic generators such as
interfere with vehicular and pedestrian traffic,
parks and schools in the area.
the demand and necessity for parking
spaces, and the means of ingress to and
(b) The existence of a sidewalk network in
egress from the property affected and
the area.
adjacent properties.
(4) That the health, safety, and welfare of the
(c) The density of current and future
public will not be unreasonably impaired.
development in the area.
(B) Any permit issued shall expire three (3) months
(d) The amount of pedestrian traffic likely to
from the date of issue and may be renewed upon
be generated by the proposed
application.
development.
(Code 1965, §18-29; Ord. No. 1790, 3-15-71; Code 1991,
(e) Whether the terrain is such that a
§98.64; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
sidewalk is physically practical and
feasible, and the extent to which trees,
ground cover and natural areas would
171.12 Inspection Of Work; Replacement
be adversely impacted by the
construction of the sidewalk.
Of Rejected Work
1
(f) The overall need for a sidewalk to be
constructed on the lot.
(A) The city official shall make all necessary
inspections before, during and after the
(3) If the City Engineer grants the waiver to
construction of all sidewalks, curbing and
construct a sidewalk, the owner shall have
guttering to insure the work is being done in
an option to construct the sidewalk, or to
accordance with the plans and specifications. In
contribute money in lieu of construction as
the event any or part of any work is not done in a
set forth below:
satisfactory manner or not in conformity with the
plans and specifications, the city official shall
(a) The amount of money in lieu of
notify the contractor and owner in writing of
construction to be dedicated shall be
his/her nonacceptance of the work. All such
determined based upon the rough
rejected work shall be removed and replaced
proportionality of the impact of the
within 30 days of this notification.
development upon the sidewalk
infrastructure needs near the
(B) Advance notification must be given the city
development including consideration of
official for inspections under this section.
the persons served by the development
and approximate pedestrian trip
(Code 1965, §18-30; Ord. No. 1790, 3-15-71; Code 1991,
generation rates of the development.
§98.65; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
171.13 Property Owner To Construct (b) To facilitate administration of this
ordinance for certain recurrent types of
Sidewalk Or Contribute Cost Of Sidewalk development, the City Council has
determined that the city will accept, as
(A) Requirement. The owner of any property the roughly proportionate impact, the
abutting a public street or highway for which a amount shown below:
sidewalk is required by the city's Master Street
Plan shall construct a sidewalk in accordance (i) Single family house $630.00
with this chapter, along said street or highway
upon the receipt of notice issued at the time a (ii) Duplex $720.00
building or parking lot permit is issued.
CD171:6
TITLE XV UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE
(c) Unless the developer presents evidence
that the number of persons served by
the development and the pedestrian trip
generation rates of the development
justify a reduced contribution in lieu of
the construction of sidewalks, all
industrial, commercial, and multi -family
developments shall make a cash
contribution in lieu of the construction of
the sidewalk at a rate of three dollars
($3.00) per square foot of the sidewalk
that normally would have been required.
The amount per square foot and
amounts for a single family house and a
duplex shall be reviewed by the City
Council at least every five (5) years.
(d) Contribution in lieu of construction of
sidewalks shall be paid or construction
of the sidewalks shall be completed
before receiving final plat approval, or
issuance of a certificate of occupancy.
(e) Contributions must be expended within
one (1) year to build a sidewalk close
enough to serve the project being
constructed.
(f) If the owner voluntarily consents in
writing, the contributions may be used to
construct sidewalk projects where most
needed as determined by the City
Engineer.
(4) An owner/builder may appeal the City
Engineer's refusal to grant a waiver or the
administrator's determination of the amount
of contribution in lieu of construction to the
Planning Commission pursuant to
§155.06(D).
(B) Application of provisions. The provisions of this
section shall only apply to the following property:
(1) New structure. On which a new structure is
being built;
(2) Existing residential structure. On which an
existing residential structure is being
modified so as to increase the number of
dwelling units located therein or to change
the use of the nonresidential use.
(3) Parking lot/garage. On which a parking lot,
or parking garage having a minimum
capacity of five (5) automobiles is
constructed.
(4) Building Additions. Additions of 2,500
square feet or larger.
(5) Conditional use. Any development which
requires conditional use approval.
(Code 1965, §18-31; Ord. No. 2653, 8-5-80; Ord. No. 2780,
11-17-81; Ord. No. 2917, 5-3-83; Ord. No. 3113, 9-3-85;
Code 1991, §98.66; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98; Ord.
No. 4311, 5-1-01; Ord. No. 4387, 4-16-02)
171.14 Sidewalk, Driveway And Trail
Specifications
(A) Sidewalks.
(1) Grades; establishment of property lines. All
sidewalks, access ramps, and driveway
approaches shall be constructed in grades
as approved by the City Engineer. It shall be
the responsibility of the owner to establish
property lines by competent survey at his/her
own expense.
(2) Minimum width of sidewalks. The minimum
width of sidewalks shall follow the guidelines
of the Master Street Plan, of the
Comprehensive Land Use Plan. In all cases,
the effective width of the sidewalk shall be a
minimum of 4 feet. Effective sidewalk width
is the actual sidewalk width, less:
(a) A shy distance of 2 feet where vertical
barriers (walls, fences, signs, etc)
greater than 3.5 feet in height are
adjacent to the sidewalk and extend
more than 4 feet in length parallel to the
sidewalk.
(b) A shy distance of 1.5 feet for curb
adjacent to the sidewalk
(c) A shy distance of 1 foot for all other
fixed obstacles.
The greatest of the above distances shall
apply for each side of the walk.
(3) Sidewalk distances from the curb. The
sidewalk setback distance from the curb
shall follow the guidelines of the Master
Street Plan, or be as specified in the final
plat unless otherwise approved by the City
Engineer.
(4) ADA guidelines. Sidewalks within rights of
way shall conform to ADA guidelines.
(5) Sidewalk elevation. The back of sidewalk
elevation shall be such that the slope from
the back of sidewalk to the top of curb is 2%,
unless otherwise approved by the City
Engineer. This elevation shall be continuous
through the driveway approach.
CD171:7
Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
(6) Inspection. All sidewalks and curb cuts (Code 1965, §18-28; Ord. No. 1790, 3-15-71; Ord. No. 2629,
made for driveway approaches require an 5-6-80; Ord. No. 3117, 9-3-85; Code 1991, §98.67; Ord. No.
inspection prior to the concrete placement. 4005, §1, 11-19-96; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98; Ord.
4919, 9-05-06; Ord. 5044, 8-07-07; Ord. 5270, 9-1-09;
(B) Access ramps. Ord.5333, 7-6-10)
(1) ADA requirements. Access ramps shall
conform to ADA requirements, including
detectable warning devices such as
truncated domes.
(2) Sidewalk intersections. Access ramps shall
be installed at all sidewalk intersections with
the street.
(3) Raised crosswalk. The raised or built-up
access ramp shall not be installed on public
streets without the approval of the City
engineer.
(4) Minimum width. The minimum width of
curb ramp shall be Forty-eight (48) inches.
(5) Slope. The slope of the ramp shall not be
greater than slopes specified in the Minimum
Street Standards.
(D) Multi -use Trails.
(1) Minimum width of multi -use trails. The
minimum width of trails shall follow the trail
cross-section guidelines of the Active
Transportation Plan.
(2) ADA guidelines. Trails shall conform to ADA
guidelines, to the extent possible.
(3) Bollards. Bollards are required at trail
intersections with streets.
(4) Trail signage. Trail signage shall comply with
the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices, Part 9 — Traffic Controls for Bicycle
Facilities.
(5) Street Crosswalks. Trails that intersect and
cross public streets shall have a red colored
concrete crosswalk with two foot wide white
thermoplastic stripes on each side, a
patterned thermoplastic overly for the full
crossing area, or other approved treatment
to clearly mark the trail crossing. For major
streets, this crosswalk may be raised 2.5
inches above pavement surface.
(6)Striping. Center line stripe and a diamond
pattern stripe around the bollards shall be
installed. Striping shall conform to the
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices,
Part 9 — Traffic Controls for Bicycle Facilities.
Additional striping may be required for
increased safety in accordance with MUTCD
standards
171.15 Excavations
(A) Permit required. It shall be unlawful for any
person to make any excavation in any street,
alley, sidewalk, road, highway, or other public
way in the city without first obtaining a permit to
do so from the Mayor, or his/her duly authorized
representative. Such permit shall be granted
only after written application has been filed and
the deposit or bond required by §158.02 has
been filed. The fee for each permit shall be paid
in advance. Provided, however, that utility
companies franchised by the city may be billed
monthly for all permits granted during the
previous month.
(B) Lights and guards. Every person making an
excavation as provided for in this chapter shall
place and maintain lights and guards around the
same for the protection of the public. Such lights
and guards shall be subject to the approval of the
Mayor.
(C) Repairs of public property; return of cash deposit.
(1) Cost. Each person making an excavation
under this chapter shall repair the street or
other public way at his own expense, and
under the direction and supervision of the
City Engineer or designee.
(2) Standards. Repair of the street or other
public way shall be made in accordance with
the requirements of the Minimum Street
Standards.
(3) Notice. The permittee shall notify the City
Engineer, prior to beginning such repair, of
the time and manner of repair and obtain the
approval of the City Engineer prior to
beginning of such repair.
(4) Return of deposit. When the repairs
required by this section are completed and
approved, the return of any sum deposited
under §171.14 above will be made to the
permittee. In the event the permitteeshall
fail, refuse, or neglect to make such repairs,
the city may repair the street and deduct the
cost therefrom from the amount on deposit
with the city and the balance of the deposit, if
any, shall be paid to the permittee.
(D) Street closings for excavations.
(1) Prohibited without approval. It shall be
unlawful for any person to cause a street to
CD171:8
TITLE XV UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE
be closed due to the making of an
excavation without the prior written approval
of the City. In granting such approval, the
City shall impose time limits and such other
reasonable conditions as are necessary to
minimize any inconvenience or danger to the
public.
(2) Exception. This section shall not apply to
emergency repairs.
(Code 1965, §18-40, 18-42, 18-44; Ord. No. 1829, 10-18-71;
Ord. No. 2806, 4-20-82; Code 1991, §98.80, 98.82, 98.83,
98.84; Ord. No. 4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
Cross reference(s)--Penalty, §98.99; Enforcement,
Ch. 153; Bonds and Guarantees! Ch. 158; Fees, Ch. 159.
171.16 Street Improvement Districts
(A) Petition to form street improvement district. Any
person desiring to initiate the formation of a street
improvement district shall file with the City Clerk
a petition requesting the organization of a street
improvement district and signed by persons
claiming to be a majority in value, as shown by
the last county assessment, of the owners of real
property in the proposed district. Forms of this
petition shall be available to any person at the
office of the City Clerk, and the City Engineer
shall assist in the preparation of said petition by
providing a legal description of the property to be
included in the proposed district. Such petition
may limit the cost of the improvement to either a
fixed sum or to a percentage of the assessed
value of the real property in the proposed district.
(B) Notice of public hearing. When persons claiming
to be a majority in value, as shown by the last
county assessment of the owners of real property
in a proposed street improvement district file with
the City Clerk a petition for the organization of
such an improvement district, it shall be the duty
of the City Clerk to give notice that such petition
will be heard at a meeting of the City Council to
be held more than 15 days after the filing of such
petition. Such notice shall be published once a
week for two (2) weeks, the last insertion to be
not less than seven (7) days before the date fixed
for the hearing. The Mayor, if he sees fit, may
call a special meeting of the City Council for the
purpose of hearing such petition, such called
meeting to be held not less than 15 days after the
date of the call and the notice of the hearing
thereat to be published for the time and in the
manner above stated.
(C) Hearing on petition; ordinance establishing
district.
(1) At the time named in said notice, the City
Council shall meet and hear all owners of
real property within the proposed district who
desire to be heard on the question of
whether a majority in assessed value of
property owners has signed the petition, and
shall make a finding of whether the petition is
signed by a majority in assessed value of
such property owners. The finding of the
governing body shall be expressed in an
ordinance. If it finds that a majority has
signed the petition, it shall then be its duty by
the same ordinance to establish the district.
The ordinance shall designate the
boundaries of the district and shall also give
the district a name descriptive of the nature
of the proposed improvement and a number
to prevent it from being confused with similar
districts.
(2) The ordinance shall be published within 30
days after its adoption for one insertion in
some newspaper published in the city and
the findings of the governing body shall be
conclusive unless attached by a suit in the
Chancery Court brought within 30 days after
such publication.
(D) Appointment of Board of Improvement. In the
ordinance creating the district, the City Council
shall appoint three (3) owners of real property
therein as commissioners, who shall compose a
Board of Improvement for the district. Such
Board of Improvement shall have control of the
construction of the improvements in the district.
(E) Plans for improvement. Immediately after their
qualification, the Board of Improvement shall
form plans for the improvement as prayed in the
petition, and shall procure estimates of the costs
thereof. For this purpose, the board may employ
such engineers and other agents as may be
needful, and may provide for their compensation
which, with all other necessary expenditures,
shall be taken as a part of the cost of the
improvement. If for any cause the improvement
shall not be made, said cost shall be raised and
paid by an ad valorem tax upon the real property
in the district as assessed for state and county
purposes, which shall be levied by the City
Council on the application of any person
interested, and shall be paid to the Board of
Improvement, to be distributed amongst the
creditors of the district.
(F) Appointment of Board of Assessment. As soon
as the Board of Improvement shall have formed
said plan, and shall have ascertained the cost of
the improvement, it shall report the same to the
City Council who shall appoint three electors of
the city, who shall constitute a Board of
Assessment of the benefits to be received by
each lot or block, or other subdivision of land
within said district, by reason of said proposed
improvement.
CD171:9
Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
a copy of it in some newspaper published and
(G) Assessment of benefits. The Board of
having a bona fide circulation in the city for one
Assessment shall at once proceed to inscribe in a
time. Within 30 days after such publication the
book to be used for the purpose of description of
district, or any property owner may bring suit in
each of said lots, blocks, or parcels of land and
Chancery Court for the purpose of correcting or
shall assess the value of the benefit to accrue to
invalidating such assessment; but if such suit is
each of said lots, blocks, or parcels of land by
not brought within the time, all objections to the
reason of such improvement, which assessment
creation of the district for the validity of the
of said benefits they shall enter upon said book
assessment shall be forever barred and
opposite the description thereof; and they shall
precluded.
then subscribe said assessment and deposit it in
the office of the City Clerk, where it shall be kept
(M) Copy of assessment delivered to collector.
and preserved as a public record. Provided, said
Within 40 days after the passage of the
assessment may be annually readjusted
ordinance mentioned in (C) above, unless the
according to additional improvements placed
time be extended by the City Council, the City
upon the lands, when a succession of collections
Clerk shall deliver to the County Collector a
is necessary to pay for the improvements,
certified copy of said assessment of benefits
containing a description of said blocks, lots, and
(H) Notice of filing of assessment. Immediately on
parcels of land in said district, and the amount
the filing of said assessments, the City Clerk shall
assessed on each, duly extended against each
insert in some newspaper published in the city,
lot, block, or parcel of land, and a certified copy
the following notice:
of the ordinance fixing the percentum to be
collected each year. At the same time the City
"The assessment of Street Improvement District
Clerk delivers to the County Collector a certified
No. , was filed in my office on the day
copy of the assessment of benefits, and the
of , and the same is now
certified copy of the ordinance fixing the
subject to inspection.
percentum to be collected, he/she shall deliver
like said copies to the County Clerk.
Clerk of the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas."
(N) Annual financial report required. The
commissioners of each street improvement
(I) Appeal of assessments to City Council. Anyone
district shall file an annual financial report with
whose real estate is embraced in said
the City Clerk on or before the first day of March
assessment may at any time within 10 days from
of each year, covering the financial affairs of their
the giving of said notice, file with the City Clerk in
respective districts for the preceding year. Such
writing his/her notice of appeal from the action of
financial statements shall be certified and filed as
said Board of Assessment in making said
herein provided by the chief financial officer of
assessment of his/her property, which appeal
each such improvement district.
shall be heard and disposed of at the next regular
meeting of the City Council, and on such appeal
(Code 1965, §§18.18, 18.19--18.22, 18-22.1--18-22.9; Ord.
the matter shall be heard de novo on such
No. 2051, 9-17-74; Code 1991, §98.30, §98.43; Ord. No.
evidence as may be adduced on either side.
4100, §2 (Ex. A), 6-16-98)
(J) Finding of City Council. The City Council shall
171.17-171.99 Reserved
enter on its minutes the results of its finding on
any such appeal, and shall cause a copy of its
finding to be certified to said Board of
Assessment, which shall make its assessment
conform thereto if any change has been made
therein by said City Council.
(K) Assessments payable in annual installments. It
shall be provided by ordinance that the local
assessment of benefits shall be paid in
successive annual installments so that the tax
levied in any one (1) year shall not exceed 25%
of the assessed benefits accruing to real
property.
(L) Publication of ordinance. Within 30 days after
the passage of the ordinance mentioned in
subsection (C) above, the City Clerk shall publish
CD171:10
CITY F
ARKANSAS
Minimum Street Standards
May 2015
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION
Chapter 1. General Provisions
Chapter 2. Submittal and Review Procedures
Chapter 3. Construction Plans Submittal Requirements
DESIGN
Chapter 4.
Street Design And Technical Criteria
Chapter 5.
Intersections
Chapter 6.
Pavement Structure and Materials
Chapter 7.
Traffic Control Devices
Chapter 8.
Pedestrian Facilities Design & Technical Criteria
Chapter 9.
On Street Bicycle Facilities Design & Technical
Criteria
Chapter 10.
Neighborhood Traffic Safety
CONSTRUCTION
Chapter 11. Street Inspection and Testing Procedures
Chapter 12. Acceptance/Warranty Procedures and Record
Drawings
CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
1.1
AUTHORITY OF THIS DOCUMENT.........................................................3
1.2
INTENT AND PROVISIONS......................................................................3
1.2.1
Objectives of Street Standards.................................................................3
A. Minimum Standards...............................................................................3
B. Objectives..............................................................................................
3
1.3
RESOURCE STANDARDS.......................................................................4
A. List of Resource Standards for Reference.............................................4
1.4
AUTHORITY OF THE CITY ENGINEER...................................................5
1.5
ENFORCEMENT RESPONSIBILITY.........................................................5
1.6
AMENDMENTS AND REVISIONS TO STANDARDS...............................5
1.7
DEFINITIONS OF TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS..................................5
1.8
INTERPRETATION OF STANDARDS....................................................12
1.8.1
Governing Standards..............................................................................12
1.8.2
Prior Acceptance of Construction Plans...............................................12
1.9
VARIANCES AND APPEALS.................................................................12
1.9.1
Variances..................................................................................................12
1.9.2
Appeals.....................................................................................................13
1.10
WORK SCHEDULE.................................................................................13
1.11
UTILITY COORDINATION.......................................................................14
LIST OF TABLES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Tables
LIST OF FIGURES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Figures
CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 AUTHORITY OF THIS DOCUMENT
This document adopted by Resolution No. of the City of Fayetteville,
provides technical procedures and design standards to support Chapter 171:
Streets and Sidewalks and other applicable Chapters of the Title XV Unified
Development Code (UDC).
1.2 INTENT AND PROVISIONS
These Standards shall be required for all development projects within the
jurisdiction of the City of Fayetteville. The City's review and approval of any
plans, reports, or drawings or the City's inspection and approval of any
improvements constructed by the Developer in accordance with these Standards,
does not constitute a representation, warranty, or guarantee by the City that such
improvements are free from defects or will operate adequately for the purpose
intended. These Standards shall also be used as a guidance document for projects
to be constructed by the City, including construction by City crews.
The chapters and appendices that make up these standards pertain to planning,
design, approval, construction, inspection, testing, and documentation of street
improvements. The intent of this manual is to establish the minimum acceptable
standards.
These Standards are a supplement to the City of Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
Title XV Unified Development Code and other Ordinances. Where conflict
between these Standards and City Code exists, the Code shall govern.
1.2.1 Objectives of Street Standards
A. Minimum Standards
These Standards shall be the minimum standards necessary for design and
construction of all street improvements required for development projects
within the jurisdiction of the City of Fayetteville. Special situations as
determined by the City may require different facilities and/or standards. For
items not covered by these Standards, the City may require the use of resource
standards in Section 1.3 below.
B. Objectives
It is the objective of these Minimum Street Standards to address the following:
1. Public Safety and Convenience. To protect the public health, safety, and
welfare and to minimize public inconvenience resulting from construction
and maintenance activities within the public rights -of -way.
2. Maintaining Public Use. To assure that bicycle, pedestrian and vehicular
uses of rights -of -way are the primary uses thereof and that the rights -of -
way are properly maintained during construction and repair work in these
areas.
3. Standardizing Criteria. To protect the City's infrastructure investment by
establishing standardized design, materials, construction, and repair
criteria for all public improvements.
4. Optimizing Use. To optimize the use of the limited physical capacity of
public rights -of -way held by the City.
5. Protecting Private Property. To protect private property from damages that
could occur because of faulty design and construction of public
improvements upon public rights -of -way and easements.
6. Inspection. To provide criteria for inspection of public and private
improvements, by the City or Design Engineer's designated inspector, in
order to assure conformance with approved plan's uniformity, proper
construction techniques, and to ensure that acceptable materials are used
for the construction process of such public and/or private improvements.
1.3 RESOURCE STANDARDS
The following Resource Standards (the latest editions unless otherwise stated)
may be used as reference material when certain design or construction methods
and materials are not specifically addressed in these Standards and require
approval of the City Engineer.
A. List of Resource Standards for Reference
1. Arkansas State Highway and Transportation Department, Standard
Specifications for Highway Construction (Latest Edition unless otherwise
specified).
2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, A
Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets.
3. Institute of Traffic Engineers (ITE), Trip Generation Volumes 1 through 3.
4. Institute of Traffic Engineers (ITE), Designing Walkable Urban
Thoroughfares: A Context Sensitive Approach
5. Institute of Traffic Engineers, Highway Capacity Manual.
6. ASTM, American Society for Testing and Materials.
7. Federal Americans with Disabilities Act, (A.D.A.) Regulations.
8. U.S. Department of Transportation, Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices (M.U.T.C.D.)
9. Federal Highway Administration, Roundabouts: An Informational Guide.
10. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials,
Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities.
11. Standard Specifications for Transportations Materials and Methods of
Sampling and Testing and AASHTO Provisional Standards.
12. City of Fayetteville standard drawings, details and specifications when
available.
13. National Association of City Transportation Officials (NACTO) Urban
Bikeway Design Guide
1.4 AUTHORITY OF THE CITY ENGINEER
The City Engineer shall have the authority on behalf of the City to determine that
all design and construction is completed to a level that is equal to or exceeds the
requirements set forth in these Minimum Street Standards.
1.5 ENFORCEMENT RESPONSIBILITY
It shall be the duty of the City Engineer acting on behalf of the City of
Fayetteville to enforce the provisions of these Minimum Street Standards.
1.6 AMENDMENTS AND REVISIONS TO STANDARDS
These Standards may be periodically amended as necessary to provide additional
clarity or to reflect changes in policy or in construction or engineering practice.
Technical revisions shall consist of such additions, revisions, and corrections to
these Standards as may, in the judgment of the City Engineer, be necessary to
better conform to good engineering and/or construction standards and practice.
The City Engineer shall approve only those proposed technical revisions that are
consistent with all existing policies relevant to the revision and are consistent with
existing law. Technical revisions shall become effective when approved, in
writing, by the City Engineer.
1.7 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
When the following words, phrases, or abbreviations appear in these Standards,
they shall have the following definition and meaning. Where conflict between
these Standards and Chapter 151 :Definitions in the Unified Development Code
exists, the Code shall govern.
AASHTO — American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.
ABC — Aggregate Base Course.
Access Management — The concept of a public agency controlling the location of access
points in order to achieve the dual purposes of providing access to individual land uses
and limiting access on higher order streets in order to facilitate the smooth flow of traffic
with a limited amount of impedance.
ACI — American Concrete Institute.
ADH — Arkansas Department of Health
AHTD — Arkansas State Highway and Transportation Department
AISC — American Institute of Steel Construction.
Alley — A minor public way dedicated to public use for utility easements and vehicle
access to the back or the side of properties abutting a street.
ANSI — American National Standards Institute.
Applicant — The person or designated agent providing pertinent information for
preparation of permit, etc. This is often the Developer.
Approach Taper — A taper from the point where all approaching traffic must shift
laterally, to the point of the beginning bay taper.
APWA — American Public Works Association.
Arterials — A street or road of considerable continuity which serves or is intended to
serve as the principal traffic way between separated areas or districts which is the main
means of access to the primary street system or expressways.
ASA — American Standards Association.
ASTM — American Society for Testing and Materials.
ATSSA — American Traffic Safety Services Association.
Attached Sidewalk — Sidewalk that is adjoining the curb.
Bay Taper — A taper from the edge of the adjacent through traffic lane to the beginning
of the full width of the turn lane storage.
Bicycle Facilities — A general term denoting improvements and provisions made by
public agencies to accommodate or encourage bicycling, including parking facilities,
mapping of all bikeways, and shared roadways not specifically designated for bicycle
use.
Bicycle Lane (Bike Lane) — The portion of the shoulder or roadway that has been
designated by striping, signing, and pavement markings for the preferential or exclusive
use of bicyclists.
Bridge — Any structure conveying a roadway or path over a body of water or other
feature. Bridges shall be designed to carry a varying combination of loading, including
vehicular, bicycle, and/or pedestrian traffic.
Calendar Day — Each and every day shown on the calendar, beginning and ending at
midnight.
Chicanes — Offset curb extensions which change the path of vehicular travel from
straight to curvilinear.
City — The City of Fayetteville, Arkansas
CMP — Corrugated Metal Pipe.
Code — The latest official adopted ordinances, policies, codes, and/or regulations of the
City of Fayetteville.
Collector — A street which in addition to serving abutting properties, intercepts minor
streets, connects with community facilities and carries neighborhood traffic to the major
arterial street system.
Construction Costs — Generally, the cost of all right-of-way, earthwork, paving,
drainage, structures, signing and striping, traffic control, curb and gutter, sidewalk, and
utility work necessary to complete the required improvements.
Consultant Engineer — An Arkansas licensed professional engineer working on behalf
of the Developer.
Continuity — The continuous length of a roadway segment that is uninterrupted by 90
degree turns or controlled intersections.
Contract Documents — The executed contract agreement, approved plans, and technical
specifications, prepared by an Arkansas licensed professional engineer, for constructing a
facility.
Contractor — The person, firm, or organization to whom a construction contract is
awarded by the Developer or City. Agents, employees, workers, or designers employed
by the Contractor are also bound by the terms of the contract or permit.
Corner Sight Distance — The distance necessary for the driver of a motor vehicle
stopped at a stop sign on a Minor Street or driveway to see approaching vehicles,
pedestrians, and bicyclists along the intersecting major street and have sufficient space to
make any allowed move to cross the Major Street or merge with traffic on the Major
Street without causing vehicles, pedestrians, or bicyclists traveling at or near the design
speed on the major street to slow down. The controlling distance for design is the longest
distance, generally the distance necessary to merge with traffic.
Cross Slope — Slope of the pavement surface, excluding gutter, measured perpendicular
to the street centerline.
Days — Intended as calendar days and not working days unless stipulated as working
days.
Deceleration Lane — A right -turn lane or left turn lane lengthened to provide for safe
reduction of travel speed.
Departure Taper — A left -turn bay from the point where through traffic beyond the
intersection begins a lateral shift to the left to the point where the through lane is adjacent
and parallel to the centerline.
Design Speed — The speed determined for design which takes into account the physical
features of a street influencing vehicle operation; the maximum safe speed maintainable
on a specified section of street when conditions permit design features to govern. Design
speed is normally 5 to 10 mph higher than the posted speed limit to provide a factor of
safety and allow for other conditions or uses of the street that may affect vehicle
operation.
Designer — The person or company responsible for the creation and submission of
contract documents or construction plans for the purpose of one-time construction of a
facility. This person shall be an Arkansas licensed professional engineer.
Developer — Any person(s), parties, partnerships, or corporations, private or public,
engaging in activities described as development.
Development — Shall include, but shall not be limited to, the construction of a new
improvement, the construction of an addition to an existing improvement, or a parceling
which results in the need for access and utilities.
Driveway — A private access from a public or private roadway.
Driveway Approach — The portion of the driveway lying in the public right-of-way or
public access easement between the street gutter lip or roadway of a public street and the
right-of-way or public access easement line, for the full width of the access, including
both apron and side slopes.
Engineer of Record - The person or company responsible for the creation and
submission of contract documents or construction plans for the purpose of one-time
construction of a facility. This person shall be an Arkansas licensed professional
engineer.
FEMA — Federal Emergency Management Agency.
Fence — An artificially constructed barrier of wood, masonry, stone, wire, metal, or other
manufactured material, or combination of materials, erected to enclose, partition,
beautify, mark, or screen areas of real property.
FHWA — Federal Highway Administration, Department of Transportation.
Final Acceptance — The written notification from the City, after the City Engineer finds
the Warranty Period to be satisfactorily completed, that all public improvements are free
of defects and the City releases the Developer from future maintenance obligations.
FIRM — Flood Insurance Rate Map.
Franchise Agreement — An agreement between the City and certain private utility
companies, specifying terms and conditions for use of the City's public rights -of -way or
other public lands.
Frontage — The property line or lines of a lot which coincide with a right-of-way or other
public open space.
Greenspace — Area of right-of-way between the face of the curb and the sidewalk.
HMA — Hot Mix Asphalt
HHOD — Hillside Hilltop Overlay District
Improvements — All public or private improvements within City rights -of -way or
easements.
Initial Acceptance — This is the City's document and process, by which the City initially
accepts for ownership, maintenance, and warranty the public improvements identified in
the approved plans for a specific project.
Inspector — An authorized representative of the Design Engineer, assigned to make
inspections to assure work is completed in compliance with plans, standards and
specifications.
Intersection Nose — The radius or distance from the end of the storage bay to the near
edge of the cross -route exit lane for the left -turning vehicle. For left -turn bays the cross -
route exit reference is normally the centerline of an unchannelized 2 -way street or the far
edge of the median in a channelized street.
Intersection Sight Distance — Refer to Corner Sight Distance.
"Issued for Construction" Plans — Design plans that conform to these Standards and are
signed and stamped by the Designer, ready for distribution to the Contractor for
construction.
ITE - Institute of Transportation Engineers.
Landscaping — The area within the boundaries of a given lot which consists of planting
materials, including but not limited to trees, shrubs, ground covers, grass, flowers,
decorative rock, bark, mulch, and other similar materials.
Knuckle — A bulb or semi -circular extension of a curb on the outside edge of a street or
at an "L" turn to provide more street frontage for adjacent lots.
Lane Width — The width of a travel lane measured from the centerline of the lane
striping to the centerline of the parallel lane stripe, the face of curb, or to the lip of gutter,
whichever is applicable.
Lift — The maximum specified thickness of material that may be placed at one time.
Lip — Defines the outermost edge of the gutter pan.
Local Streets — All street facilities that are not in one of the higher systems. Their
primary purpose is to provide direct access to abutting lands and connections to the
higher classification streets.
Mini -Roundabout — Elevated circular islands placed in the center of a street intersection
to reduce vehicular travel speeds by requiring the motorist to travel in a counter
clockwise direction around the circular island.
MSP - Master Street Plan
MUTCD — Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.
Neckdowns — A narrowing of the roadway for traffic calming at intersections or mid -
block.
Neighborhood — A residential or commercial area defined by ordinance, resolution or
common understanding.
Opinion of Cost (Cost Estimate) — Unit costs, based on those approved by the City and
assigned to materials and related quantities.
Ordinance — A law established by the City Council.
OSHA — Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
P.C. — Point of curvature.
P.C.R. — Point of curb return.
Pedestrian Walkway — A public facility for pedestrian traffic either within the right-of-
way of the vehicular traffic roadway or within a public easement (e.g., public tunnels).
Permittee — The holder of a valid permit issued in accordance with these Standards or
other City related process.
Phasing Plan — A plan that defines improvements to be completed in specified parts over
a defined sequence.
P.I. — Point of intersection.
Plans — Construction plans signed by the City depicting public improvements to be
constructed for the project.
Pre -Construction Meeting — A meeting between the Designer and assigned agents and
the City to review proposed work necessary to construct the project, prior to proceeding
with the work. A meeting may be required for each project, at the City's discretion.
Professional Engineer (P.E.) — An Arkansas licensed professional engineer.
Professional Land Surveyor (P.L.S.) — An Arkansas licensed land surveyor.
Project — The public or private improvement(s) designated in the approved plans, which
are to be constructed in conformance with these Standards. The term "Project" includes
any and all public or private improvement projects whether development projects, private
utility projects, or capital improvement projects.
Project Supervisor — The person appointed by the Developer or Contractor for
management and control of the work on the project as performed by the Contractor and
Subcontractors.
Proposed Roadway Improvements — Those roadway improvements deemed necessary
due to the impact of the project development.
P.T. — Point of tangency.
Public Improvements — Those public -type facilities to include: pavement, curb and
gutter, sidewalk, pedestrian/bike paths, storm drain facilities with related appurtenances,
culverts, channels, bridges, water distribution or transmission facilities with related
appurtenances, sanitary sewer collection facilities with related appurtenances, water and
waste water treatment facilities, pavement markings, signage and striping, traffic signals
and related appurtenances, erosion control and right-of-way grading, or earth excavation
processes integral to construction of other public improvements listed herein.
Punch list, Initial or Final — A written list of work items, compiled by the Inspector,
which do not conform to these Standards, the plans or other associated City Codes that
govern the project.
Raised Crosswalk — A roadway crossing that slightly elevates the pedestrian crossing
surface above the general roadway surface. A raised crosswalk is a traffic calming
device.
Record Drawings — (Also As -Built Plans) Original design drawings updated by a
Professional Engineer depicting all modifications from the design that occurred during
construction.
Report — A bound document, the contents of which may contain certain necessary
analyses, surveys, tests, exhibits, and other pertinent data supporting the subject matter.
Right-of-way — (Also ROW or "public right-of-way.") The land opened, reserved or
dedicated for streets, sidewalks, drainage or other public purposes.
Roadway — The portion of the highway, arterial, collector, or local street, including
shoulders, intended for vehicle and/or bicycle use.
Roundabout — A circular street intersection used as a traffic control device in lieu of a
multi -way stop or a traffic signal.
Shall — A mandatory condition.
Shared Roadway — Any roadway upon which a bicycle lane is not designated and which
may be legally used by bicyclists regardless of whether such facility is specifically
designated as a bikeway.
Should — An advisory condition, recommended, but not required.
Sidewalks — Paved or otherwise improved area for pedestrian use.
Specifications — Construction specifications and standards adopted by the City.
Speed Tables - Elevated areas placed in the street roadway with the intent to slow
vehicular traffic. The geometrics of the speed table determine how fast it can be
navigated.
Stop Work Order (S.W.O.) — A written instruction/notice from the City, revoking the
Developer's and/or Contractor's rights to continue work on the project due to
nonconformance with these Standards.
Stopping Sight Distance — The distance required by the driver of a vehicle traveling at
the design speed to bring the vehicle to a stop after an object on the road becomes visible.
This distance is measured from the driver's eye, 3.5 feet above the pavement to the top of
an object 2 feet high on the pavement anywhere on the roadway.
Storage Length — The distance from the end of the bay taper to the nearest flow line
extension of the intersecting street.
Street — A strip of land intended primarily as a means of vehicular and pedestrian travel
which may also be used to provide space for sewers, public utilities, trees and sidewalks.
Streetscape — Pedestrian and landscape improvements in the right-of-way, generally
occurring between the curb and the right-of-way line. Streetscape generally includes
sidewalks, street trees, pedestrian lighting, fencing, furnishings, and landscaped areas,
including medians and irrigation.
Structure — Anything constructed or erected with a fixed location below, upon, or above
grade, including without limitation foundations, traffic signals, fences, retaining walls,
buildings, inlets, vaults, poles, bridges, and major drainage facilities.
Subcontractor — A person, other than the Contractor, supplying labor and materials, or
labor only, for the Project, and working for the Contractor or the City.
Substantial Completion — Major completion of all Work for the Project, prior to certain
inspection(s) or the creation of Punch lists.
Target Speed — The desired operating speed of a roadway.
TIS - Transportation Impact Study.
Trail — Any path used by pedestrians or bicyclists within a public right-of-way or
easement. This would include concrete, gravel, or natural surfaces.
U.D.C. —Unified Development Code
USGS — United States Geological Survey.
Variance — A grant of relief to a person from the requirements of these Standards. A
variance, therefore, permits construction in a manner otherwise prohibited by these
Standards.
Warranty Period — The period of time that the Developer or Contractor is responsible
for material and workmanship defects in the public improvements, until written
notification by the City of final acceptance of the public improvements.
Work — All construction activity, including materials, labor, supervision, and use of tools
and equipment necessary to complete the Project in full compliance with these Standards,
or approved Plans.
1.8 INTERPRETATION OF STANDARDS
In the interpretation and application of the provisions of these Minimum Street
Standards, the following principles apply:
1.8.1 Governing Standards
These Standards are a supplement to the City of Fayetteville Code of Ordinances
Title XV Unified Development Code and other Ordinances. Where conflict
between these Standards and City Code exists, the Code shall govern.
1.8.2 Prior Acceptance of Construction Plans
These Minimum Street Standards shall not modify or alter any street construction
plans that have been filed with and accepted by the City prior to the effective date
of the ordinance or resolution adopting these Standards. This exception shall be
subject to the conditions and limitations under which said plans were accepted by
the City Engineer.
1.9 VARIANCES AND APPEALS
1.9.1 Variances
Any design that does not conform to these Standards must be approved by the
City Engineer. Variances from these Standards will be considered
administratively on a case -by -case basis following a written request for a variance
prepared by a Professional Engineer and submitted to the City Engineer. If the
developer, contractor, or utility responsible to the City for public improvements
desires to design and construct such improvements in variance to criteria in these
standards, such variance(s) shall be identified in a written attachment to the initial
submittal of construction plans to the City Engineer. The design submitted for
review shall show the variance.
To assist with their plan preparation, designers may submit variance requests,
along with sufficient documentation to support the variance, prior to formal
submittal of construction plans for informal advisory consideration. Such advisory
consideration shall not be binding on the City Engineer, but may help to guide the
requestor in the preparation of plans.
The variance request(s) shall include the following:
a. Identifying Issue. Identification of the standard to be waived or varied
and why the standard is unfeasible or is not in the public interest.
b. Proposed Alternate Design. Identification of the proposed alternative
design or construction criteria.
c. Comparing to Standards. A thorough description of the variance
request including impact on capital and maintenance requirements,
costs, and how the new design compares to the standard.
d. Justification. The Professional Engineer must determine and state that
the variance will not be detrimental to the public health, safety and
welfare, will not reduce design life of the improvement nor cause the
City additional maintenance costs. The proposed plan (as varied) must
advance the public purpose of the standard sought to be varied equally
well or better than would compliance with such standard.
e. Approval or Denial of Variance. Based upon review of the plans and
additional information submitted, and an analysis of the criteria set
forth in this subsection the City Engineer may approve or deny the
variance request.
If the City Engineer approves the variance request, the plans will
continue to be reviewed and approved within the typical review
process.
If the City Engineer denies the variance request, the developer shall
subsequently submit revised plans in compliance with these Standards.
The City Engineer shall provide a written response outlining the basis
for all approvals or denials of variance requests.
1.9.2 Appeals
If a variance request is denied by the City Engineer, the Developer may appeal the
decision as outlined in Chapter 155, Appeals of the Unified Development Code.
1.10 WORK SCHEDULE
Normal working day hours are 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday
excluding City Holidays. No work requiring Public Works Inspector observation
may be conducted outside of these normal working hours without prior approval.
Contractors shall follow the guidelines of Chapter 96, Noise Control, of the City
of Fayetteville Code of Ordinances. Noise from construction activities shall be
limited to no later than 11:00 p.m. every day and no earlier than 7:00 a.m. on all
days except Sundays when the time is extended to 9:00 a.m.
1.11 UTILITY COORDINATION
The Developer shall coordinate construction with affected private utility
companies and notify said utilities in accordance with their notification prior to
interruption of service or operation. Prior to construction, the Developer shall be
responsible to make special arrangements with private utilities for any relocation
necessary within the approved project and to coordinate such relocation activities
with adjacent affected property owners. The Developer shall be responsible to
notify said utilities of any damage to utility systems caused during construction.
All private utility installation within the City of Fayetteville Right of Way shall
follow all requirements of Section 171.06, Occupation of Streets and Highways
by Public Utilities of the City of Fayetteville Unified Development Code and the
AHTD Utility Accommodation Policy.
CHAPTER 2- SUBMITTAL AND REVIEW PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
2.1 GENERAL..................................................................................................3
2.1.1 General Submittal Criteria and Procedures.............................................3
2.1.2 Authorization/Certification........................................................................3
A. Designer's Signature.............................................................................. 3
B. Additional Requirements........................................................................3
C. Final Authorization................................................................................. 3
D. Construction Traffic Control Plans.........................................................3
E. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans(SWPPP)................................3
2.2 SUBMITTALS AND CONTENT.................................................................4
2.2.1 Public Improvement Construction Plans.................................................4
2.2.2 Soils Investigation Report .........................................................................4
2.2.3 Pavement Design Report...........................................................................4
2.2.4 Work Area Traffic Control Plan.................................................................4
2.2.5 Street Cross Sections................................................................................4
2.2.6 Drainage Report.........................................................................................4
2.2.7 Opinion of Costs........................................................................................4
2.2.9 Record Drawings.......................................................................................4
2.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES....................................................................5
2.3.1 Submittal Process......................................................................................5
2.3.2 Construction Permits................................................................................5
LIST OF TABLES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Tables
LIST OF FIGURES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Figures
CHAPTER 2- SUBMITTAL AND REVIEW PROCEDURES
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 General Submittal Criteria and Procedures
This chapter gives criteria and procedures for submitting engineering drawings as
required by these Minimum Street Standards. All other requirements for planning
and related submittals can be found in the City of Fayetteville Unified
Development Code.
2.1.2 Authorization/Certification
A. Designer's Signature
All documents, including plans and other submittals noted below, shall be
prepared, stamped, signed, and dated by a Professional Engineer registered in
the State of Arkansas.
B. Additional Requirements
The Designer should be aware that whenever unusual or serious problems are
anticipated or encountered for a proposed construction project, additional
information and analysis beyond the minimum requirements of these
specifications and criteria will be required.
C. Final Authorization
No plans are considered final and ready for construction until signed and
stamped by the Designer and signed by the City Engineer or designee. Refer
to Chapter 3, Construction Plan Submittal Requirements.
D. Construction Traffic Control Plans
Plans for traffic control during construction for the development project must
be accepted by the City prior to any issuance of grading permits for Collector
and Arterial streets and on lower classification streets when deemed necessary
by the City Engineer.
E. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans (SWPPP)
A Storm Water Pollution Prevention plan for the construction of the
development project must be accepted by the City and the Arkansas
Department of Environmental Quality (ADEQ), when required, prior to
issuance of the grading permit.
2.2 SUBMITTALS AND CONTENT
2.2.1 Public Improvement Construction Plans
Refer to Chapter 3, Construction Plan Submittal Requirements, for further
description and requirements.
2.2.2 Soils Investigation Report
Refer to Chapter 6, Pavement Design and Report, for the content and
requirements for the soils report.
2.2.3 Pavement Design Report
Refer to Chapter 6, Pavement Design and Report, for the content and
requirements for the pavement design report.
2.2.4 Work Area Traffic Control Plan
The plans shall be designed in accordance with MUTCD, Section VI.
2.2.5 Street Cross Sections
Typical and unique street cross sections shall be submitted for each street,
including the proposed width, treatment of curbs and gutters, sidewalk systems,
and bikeway systems where deviations are proposed from these Standards.
2.2.6 Drainage Report
The Developer is required to submit a drainage report in compliance with the City
of Fayetteville Drainage Criteria Manual.
2.2.7 Opinion of Costs
As a separate attachment to the Plans, an Opinion of Costs for all Public
Improvements will be required. The items shall be identified by unit price and
total cost for each item for each type of Project.
2.2.9 Record Drawings
Record Drawings shall follow the requirements set forth in Chapter 12,
Acceptance Procedures and Record Drawings/Warranty, and be signed,
stamped, and dated by the Professional Engineer. The Record Drawings shall be
prepared utilizing the original plans. They must show any deviations from the
approved plans. Record Drawings must be signed and stamped with the
Professional Engineer's statement that the changes have not changed the intent of
the approved plans.
2.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
2.3.1 Submittal Process
The submittal shall be complete with all necessary information included for
review of the project. The material shall include, but shall not be limited to the
Plans, Traffic Impact Study (where required), soils report, pavement design,
utility plans, erosion control plans, SWPPP, tree preservation plans where
required, and the Drainage Report.
The review and approval process for Construction Plans shall comply with the
following criteria:
A The Plans shall be submitted digitally in PDF format.
B All Construction Plans shall be submitted directly to the City's
Engineering Division.
C Upon completion of the Engineering Division review, the Design Engineer
will be notified that comments are available. These comments can be
given to the Design Engineer by e-mail, ftp, cd, or portable data storage
device.
D After the Design Engineer has addressed all review comments, the
Consultant Engineer shall re -submit in pdf format as stated above and
include a typed written response to each of the City's comments or
questions either on the plans or in a separate correspondence.
E The submittal process may be repeated until such time as the City deems
the plans to meet the City standards. At that time, the Design Engineer
will be contacted by the City with a request to submit the final plans both
in digital pdf format and four (4) hard copies as described in Chapter 3 of
these standards.
F Upon subsequent review and approval by the City the plans will be
stamped and signed by the City's review engineer. The Design Engineer
(or Developer) will be contacted to pick up the approved plans.
2.3.2 Construction Permits
A. A Grading and Drainage Permit must be issued before construction can
begin. In order to obtain a Grading and Drainage Permit, the following is
required:
1. Approved Construction Plans and Drainage Report.
2. Material submittals must be submitted with the City
standard checklist through the Engineer of Record and
approved prior to the preconstruction conferenct.
3. The Design Engineer shall schedule a pre -construction
conference with the City's Review Engineer, the City's
Public Works Inspector, and the contractor.
4. The Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and NOT, if
required, shall be submitted in PDF form to the City.
5. The erosion control measures and tree preservation fencing
shall be installed.
6. An Erosion Control performance bond shall be submitted
for projects over 5 acres.
7. A Public Infrastructure performance bond shall be
submitted when required.
8. Signed easements or written permission from owner for
off -site work.
B. Additional permits may be required by State and/or Federal agencies. All
permits required shall be obtained prior to construction. These permits
may include, but are not limited to AHD, ADEQ, US Army COE, and
AHTD.
CHAPTER 3- CONSTRUCTION PLANS SUBMITTAL
REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
3.1 GENERAL..................................................................................................3
3.1.1 Plan Set....................................................................................................... 3
3.1.2 Horizontal and Vertical Datum..................................................................3
3.1.3 Expiration of Plan Set................................................................................3
3.2 GENERAL FORMATTING AND REQUIRED INFORMATION ..................3
3.2.1 Size of Plan Sheets....................................................................................3
3.2.2 Title Block...................................................................................................4
A. Required Information.............................................................................4
3.2.3 Incomplete Plans.......................................................................................4
3.2.4 Stamped Plans & Designer Statement.....................................................4
3.2.5 Scale...........................................................................................................4
A. General..................................................................................................4
B. Bar Scale and Other Options.................................................................5
C. Signing and Striping..............................................................................5
D. Key Map................................................................................................5
E. Vicinity Map...........................................................................................5
3.2.6 Dates...........................................................................................................5
3.2.7 North Arrow................................................................................................5
3.2.8 Existing Facilities.......................................................................................5
3.2.9 Legend of Symbols....................................................................................5
3.2.10 Key Map.................................................................................................... 5
3.3 SHEET TITLE NAMES AND SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS ......................5
3.3.1 Cover Sheet................................................................................................6
A. General Construction Notes...................................................................6
B. Vicinity Map...........................................................................................6
C. Engineer/Owner Contacts......................................................................6
D. Index......................................................................................................6
E. Indemnification Statement.....................................................................6
F. Project Title............................................................................................6
G. Legend of Symbols................................................................................6
3.3.2 Grading and SWPPP..................................................................................7
3.3.3 Street Improvements.................................................................................7
A. Street Plan View....................................................................................7
B. Street Profile.......................................................................................... 8
C. Typical Street Section(s)........................................................................9
D. Cross-Sections......................................................................................9
E. Key Map...............................................................................................10
3.3.4 Street Improvements Details...................................................................10
3.3.5 Traffic Signing and Pavement Markings................................................10
A. Area Map.............................................................................................10
B. Road Segment Pages..........................................................................10
C. Signing Plan........................................................................................10
D. Striping Plan........................................................................................11
E. Traffic Control Plan..............................................................................11
LIST OF TABLES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Tables
LIST OF FIGURES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Figures
CHAPTER 3- CONSTRUCTION PLAN SUBMITTAL
REQUIREMENTS
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Plan Set
The submittal shall be complete with all necessary information included for
review of the project. The material shall include, but shall not be limited to the
Plans, Traffic Impact Study (where required), soils report, pavement design,
utility plans, erosion control plans, SWPPP, tree preservation plans where
required, and the Drainage Report.
3.1.2 Horizontal and Vertical Datum
The horizontal datum shall be NAD83, Arkansas State Plane, North Zone. The
units shall be U.S. Survey Foot.
The vertical datum shall be North American Vertical Datum of 1988 (NAVD88).
At least two horizontal control monuments shall be shown on each sheet. At least
one benchmark shall be shown on each sheet. A horizontal and vertical tie to at
least one City of Fayetteville GPS monument shall be made and the results
provided to the City Surveyor.
3.1.3 Expiration of Plan Set
Public improvement construction plans shall be valid for a period of one year
from the date of approval by the City Engineer unless construction has begun and
continual progress is made towards completion of the improvements. Refer to
section 166.20 of the Unified Development Code for time limits and the process
for time extensions.
3.2 GENERAL FORMATTING AND REQUIRED INFORMATION
The following information is provided for the Developer when determining Plan
format and design requirements required by the City. This information should be
considered the minimum information to be provided.
3.2.1 Size of Plan Sheets
All sheets in the construction plan set shall be either 22 inches x 34 inches or 11
inches x 17 inches..
3.2.2 Title Block
A title block is required on every sheet submitted for review and acceptance. The
title block shall be located in the extreme lower right hand corner, the right side
margin, or along the bottom edge of the sheet. Provide an area 2" x 4" on each
sheet for the City to place a stamp of approval.
A. Required Information
The following information shall appear in title block on each sheet:
1. The subdivision or Development name and project number (if applicable).
2. The type of improvement (Grading, Site Plan, Utility Plan).
3. Designer's Name, address, including zip code, telephone number, e-mail
address, professional seal, company name and date.
4. Sheet number (consecutive, beginning with the cover sheet).
5. Revision block.
3.2.3 Incomplete Plans
Incomplete plan submittals or plans that do not have a sufficient level of detail
will not be reviewed. The Applicant shall be notified if the submitted plans are
incomplete. Partial plans may be submitted when appropriate. This may be
allowed on a case by case basis and must be authorized by the review engineer
prior to submittal.
3.2.4 Stamped Plans & Designer Statement
All sheets shall include the Designer's signature, stamp and date and shall be
stamped and signed in accordance with the rules and regulations established by
the Arkansas State Board of Licensure for Professional Engineers and
Professional Surveyors.
3.2.5 Scale
A. General
All scales listed below shall be based on a standard 22"x34" full scale
drawing.
All Plan and profile sheets:
1. Horizontal. 1 inch = 10, 20, 30, 40, or 50 feet.
2. Vertical. 1 inch = 5 or 10 feet.
3. Overall Plan. 1 inch = 100 feet.
4. Cross Sections. Vertical exaggeration ratio shall be a maximum of 5:1. 1:1
is preferred.
B. Bar Scale and Other Options
Show bar scale. Other scales may be used upon City approval.
C. Signing and Striping
All signing and striping plans require a scale of 1 inch = 30 feet minimum.
D. Key Map
1 inch = 500 - 1,000 feet
E. Vicinity Map
1 inch = 1,000- 1,500 feet
3.2.6 Dates
All sheets shall have dates shown in the Title Block for both Plan preparations
and subsequent revisions. An electronic date shall appear on all electronic files to
be submitted. Final approved construction plans shall start the date sequence
again.
3.2.7 North Arrow
All design sheets shall have a north arrow oriented toward the top or right side of
applicable sheets.
3.2.8 Existing Facilities
Each sheet shall show all existing facilities in a ghosted or alternate line weight or
type.
3.2.9 Legend of Symbols
Each plan sheet shall include a legend that identifies the symbols pertaining to the
sheet unless an overall legend is provided for the entire plan set.
3.2.10 Key Map
For plan sets that include 3 or more plan and profile sheets, each Plan and profile
sheet shall provide a key map showing the location of the street being detailed.
3.3 SHEET TITLE NAMES AND SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
This section outlines the minimum required information to be included on specific
sheets of the Plan set. The following sheets are listed in the order they should
appear in the Plan set. Some sections of the Plan set may have more than one
sheet, but should be labeled alike.
3.3.1 Cover Sheet
All sets of construction drawings shall include a cover sheet with the following
information provided:
A. General Construction Notes
General Notes may be shown on this sheet or as a separate sheet.
B. Vicinity Map
1. Information to Include. The vicinity map shall show the location and name
of all Arterial roadways within one mile of the proposed construction, and
all other roadways within 1/2 mile of the proposed construction. The
project area shall be indicated by shading.
2. Size. Minimum size of vicinity map shall be 10 inches x 10 inches and to a
scale of 1 inch = 1,000 - 1,500 feet.
C. Engineer/Owner Contacts
The name, address, e-mail address and phone number of the Developer
(owner) and Design Engineer shall be listed on the cover sheet.
D. Index
Each cover sheet shall include an index of all sheets within the Plan set.
E. Indemnification Statement
The indemnification statement shall be shown on the cover sheet. Annotate
the following on Cover Sheet only:
These plans have been reviewed by the City for concept only. The review does
not imply responsibility by the reviewing department, the City Engineer, or
the City for accuracy and correctness of the calculations. Furthermore, the
review does not imply that quantities of items on the plans are the final
quantities required. The review shall not be construed for any reason as
acceptance of financial responsibility by the City for additional quantities of
items shown that may be required during the construction phase.
F. Project Title
The project title shall be clearly shown.
G. Legend of Symbols
Provide City of Fayetteville standard symbols for all appurtenances related to
each type of facility. The standard legend may be expanded as necessary to fit
specific projects
3.3.2 Grading and SWPPP
These Plan sheets shall be drawn at a legible scale (1"=10' to 1"=50') which will
clearly convey design and construction intent. All erosion control devices
(temporary and long term) shall be included, as well as revegetation methods with
specific notes. Plan must show grades of all drainage facilities. All grading plans
shall meet the requirements as described in Chapter 169 of the Unified
Development Code. The SWPPP shall meet all ADEQ requirements.
3.3.3 Street Improvements
The Plans shall include Plan and Profile views for each street (private or public)
proposed in the development. Cross-section sheets are required for all roadways.
All plans shall be produced at a scale that is completely legible for review and for
construction. In addition to the requirements set forth elsewhere in these
Minimum Street Standards, the following information shall be shown on all
Roadway plans submitted for review and approval:
A. Street Plan View
The plan view shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Existing and proposed Property and/or right-of-way lines, easements, and
adjacent property owners names and addresses. Type and dimension of
easement or tract is to be clearly labeled. Dimensions of Property and
right-of-way lines are to be marked.
2. Survey lines and stationing lines shall normally be based on centerline of
travel lanes; other profiles may be included but shall be referenced to
centerline stationing. Stationing in cul-de-sacs shall be on the centerline to
the center of the bulb with flowlines dimensioned within the bulb.
Survey lines and stationing lines shall deviate from centerline of street to
parallel the roadway for situations where two sides of a divided roadway
are not parallel.
3. Stationing shall read in ascending order in the direction of the north arrow
or to the right.
4. Roadways and Roadway names.
5. Existing utilities and structures (shown as phantom lines), including, but
not limited to:
a. Storm sewer and appurtenances.
b. Ditches or swales.
c. Bridges or culverts.
d. Fence lines and gates.
e. Water lines and appurtenances.
f. Sewer lines and appurtenances.
g. Curbs and gutters.
h. Pavement limits.
i. Telephone lines and appurtenances.
j. Electric lines, poles and appurtenances.
k. CATV lines and appurtenances.
1. Gas lines and appurtenances, etc.
m. Signs.
n. Guardrails.
o. Houses or other buildings.
p. Trees.
q. Driveways.
6. Critical elevation (flowline, invert of pipe, etc.) of all existing and
proposed utility or drainage structures.
7. Storm drainage flow direction arrows, particularly at intersections and all
high and low points.
8. Match lines, stations and consecutive sheet numbers, beginning with cover
sheet.
9. Station and elevation of all horizontal curves including PI, PC's, PT's,
etc.; high or low point and VPI/PVI of all vertical curves; existing and
proposed, centerline bearings, distances, and complete curve data.
10. Curb return radii, existing and proposed. Stations and elevations of all
curb returns at the gutter line; mid -point elevations and additional
locations as necessary, flowline-flowline intersection elevations,
corresponding centerline spot elevations and percent of grade from the
P.C.R. to flowline-flowline intersections of all crosspans.
11. Centerline stations of all intersecting roadways.
12. Survey tie lines to section corners or quarter corners, consistent with that
shown on the plat.
13. Intersections. Any roadway intersections shall include construction and
lane details for the new construction and existing facilities for a minimum
of 150 feet beyond the limits of construction.
14. Basis of plan view and profile elevations shall be the same, i.e., flowline
and flowline, top of curb and bottom of curb, etc.
15. Cul-de-sacs. High point and grades shown with percent arrows at critical
points (cross -slope and flow line).
16. Location of all proposed and existing sidewalk and/or trails.
17. Soil Boring Locations and CBR test locations (when available).
18. Location of all existing or proposed retaining walls.
B. Street Profile
Profiles shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. All streets shall be designed to show profile of center line.
2. Original ground (dashed) and design grade (heavy, solid). Both grades are
to be plainly labeled for all centerline profiles.
3. Existing and design elevations shall be provided for the centerline.
4 Elevation and location of all utilities and storm sewer in the immediate
vicinity of the construction shall be shown on the profile. Separate left and
right profiles may be required for clarification when there are multiple
utility or storm sewer lines.
5. Station and elevation of all vertical grade breaks.
6. Distance and grade between VPI's.
7. Vertical curves, when necessary, with VPI, VPC, and VPT, high or low
point (if applicable) stations and elevations. All vertical curves shall be
labeled with length of curve (L) and K=L/A where A is the algebraic
difference in slopes, in percent.
8. Profiles for curb returns when requested.
9. Specify limits of typical sections and transitions.
10. Separate drainage profiles are required for off -site storm drainage.
C. Typical Street Section(s)
A typical street section shall be included in the Plans and shall show the
following:
1. Pavement section type, width and thickness
2. Cross slope and crown
3. Location of profile grade (crown, center line, curb line)
4 Curbs and/or ditches/swales
5. Existing and proposed grades
6. Right of way width
7. Sidewalks and/or trails, where required
8. Landscaping, if required
9. Stationing limits for the typical section
10. Street name and classification
11. Parking, where required
D. Cross -Sections
Roadway Cross -Sections. Roadway cross -sections shall be provided at
intervals deemed necessary by the City to effectively evaluate connection with
the existing facilities, (typically every 50 feet horizontally, at intersections,
transition points, driveways, storm sewer structures, etc...).
The cross -sections shall include the following:
1. Profile centerline including proposed and existing spot elevations,
2. Roadway width.
3. Right-of-way width.
4. Pavement cross slope.
5. Pavement thickness.
6. Curbs and/or ditches/swales.
7. Proposed and existing drainage and utilities in the right of way (size,
material, elevation and location).
8. Street name.
E. Key Map
1. Clearly depict each sheet's relative position compared to the overall
project. The Roadway or area that the design pertains to will be shaded.
2. Minimum scale is 1 inch = 500 feet, showing the location and name of all
roadways within and adjacent to the proposed construction and all future
roadways. Scale should be indicated. The key map should be oriented
consistent with detail in the sheet, i.e., same north.
3.3.4 Street Improvements Details
All pertinent details related to street improvements shall be shown on a detail
sheet (or sheets) for the Project. Standard City of Fayetteville Detail Sheets shall
be included, along with standard AHTD detail sheets where work is planned with
AHTD right of way.
3.3.5 Traffic Signing and Pavement Markings
All permanent and temporary traffic signing and pavement markings shall be
shown on the signing and striping plan, with the existing and proposed street
system used as the base layout. Locations of signs and pavement markings shall
be indicated by station/offset, or other specific dimensions indicating exact
locations. This sheet shall also contain any construction or application notes, (e.g.,
application temperatures, surface cleaning methods to be used prior to application,
etc.).
A. Area Map
Separate signage and striping plans are to consist of an overall area map
noting all specific use areas, such as schools, parks, recreation centers, library,
commercial, industrial, fire zones, no -parking and designated parking.
B. Road Segment Pages
The pages following the area map are to be broken down into road segments,
for notation of signage and striping details.
C. Signing Plan
The permanent signing plan should:
1. Show the general longitudinal location of each sign (horizontal offset and
station).
Specify the sign legend and sign type (from MUTCD).
Specify the sign size.
Detail post and base dimensions and installation plan (showing sleeves,
depth below surface, and materials used, according to City standards).
Specify the blank gauge of the sign.
Note the reflectorization provided.
D. Striping Plan
The striping plan must show:
1. Color and type.
2. Lane widths, taper lengths, storage lengths, etc.
3. Striping/skip interval.
4. Typical treatments for acceleration/deceleration lanes, turning lanes, and
crosswalks.
5. Type of material (thermoplastic).
6. Station and offset or dimensions to all angle points, symbol locations, and
line terminations.
7. Pedestrian crossings.
E. Traffic Control Plan
All temporary traffic control signage and striping for lane closures and detours
shall be shown. Controls must be designed to meet all MUTCD standards.
CHAPTER 4- STREET DESIGN AND TECHNICAL CRITERIA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
4.1 GENERAL..................................................................................................3
4.2 STREET LAYOUT REQUIREMENTS.......................................................3
4.2.1 Logical Placement and Extension............................................................3
4.2.2 Master Planned Arterial and Collector Streets........................................3
4.2.3 Local Streets..............................................................................................3
A. Neighborhood Traffic Safety and Traffic Calming..................................3
4.3 STREET CLASSIFICATIONS....................................................................4
4.4 GENERAL DESIGN ELEMENTS..............................................................4
4.4.1 Alignment...................................................................................................5
A. Horizontal Alignment..............................................................................
5
B. Vertical Alignment..................................................................................6
C. Sight Distance.......................................................................................7
4.4.2 Cross Slope................................................................................................8
A. Minimum Cross Slope...........................................................................8
B. Maximum Allowable Cross Slope.........................................................9
C. Cross Slope for Street Modifications....................................................9
D. Cross Slope for Cul-de-Sacs................................................................9
4.4.3 Superelevation on Horizontal Curves......................................................9
A. Where Superelevation Is Permitted......................................................9
B. Run-Out................................................................................................
9
4.4.4 Design Speed.............................................................................................9
4.4.5 Curb Return Radii......................................................................................9
4.5 MEDIANS.................................................................................................10
4.5.1 Turn Lane and Access.............................................................................10
4.5.2 Drainage...................................................................................................10
4.5.3 Nose..........................................................................................................10
4.5.4 Transitions................................................................................................10
4.5.5 Objects......................................................................................................10
4.6 NON -CONNECTIVE STREET ALIGNMENTS.........................................11
4.6.1 Cul-de-Sacs..............................................................................................11
A. Permitted Locations.........................................................................11
B. Minimum Radius.............................................................................11
4.6.2 Knuckle.....................................................................................................11
A. Permitted Locations............................................................................11
B. Permitted Lengths...............................................................................11
4.6.3 Dead -End Streets.....................................................................................11
A. Temporary Dead -End Streets..............................................................11
B. Temporary Turnarounds.....................................................................11
C. Temporary Turnaround Easements....................................................11
4.7 DRAINAGE SYSTEMS............................................................................12
4.7.1 Drainage...................................................................................................12
4.7.2 Underdrains..............................................................................................12
A. Controlling Groundwater.....................................................................12
B. Protecting Right-of-way Improvements...............................................12
C. Design Criteria....................................................................................12
4.7.3 Sidewalk Underdrain...............................................................................12
4.7.4 Crosspans................................................................................................13
A. Basic Requirements............................................................................13
B. Dimensions and Depth........................................................................13
C. Minimum Grade..................................................................................13
4.7.5 Inlets.........................................................................................................13
4.7.6 Waterway Crossings................................................................................13
4.7.7 Roadside Ditches and Driveway Culverts..............................................13
A. Roadside Ditches................................................................................13
B. Driveway Culverts...............................................................................14
LIST OF TABLES
Table 4-1 Technical Design Criteria...................................................................4-4
Table 4-2 Centerline Arc Lengths.......................................................................4-5
Table 4-3 Stopping Sight Distance.....................................................................4-7
LIST OF FIGURES
Figures are Located at the End of the Chapter
Figure 4-1 Intersection Sight Distance (Sight Triangle) — No On -street Parking
Figure 4-1a Intersection Sight Distance (Sight Triangle) — With On -street
Parking
Figure 4-2
Knuckle Detail
Figure 4-3
Cul-De-Sac Detail
Figure 4-4
Street Stubout
Figure 4-5
Temporary Turnaround
Figure 4-6
Street Intersection Approach
CHAPTER 4- STREET DESIGN AND TECHNICAL CRITERIA
4.1 GENERAL
This chapter defines layout criteria and other design criteria that shall be followed
for locating and designing all streets.
4.2 STREET LAYOUT REQUIREMENTS
The locations of Arterial and Collector streets shall be in accordance with the
current Master Street Plan. Other streets shall be located in accordance with all
other applicable street layout requirements.
4.2.1 Logical Placement and Extension
All streets shall have a logical relationship to the existing topography and to the
location of existing or platted streets within adjacent properties. Certain streets
within the project may need to be extended to the project boundary to provide for
the future extension of the street through adjacent properties.
4.2.2 Master Planned Arterial and Collector Streets
The Master Street Plan shows the approximate locations of all Arterial streets
and some Collector streets for the City and its Planning Area. The Master Street
Plan shall be used for establishing approximate locations of these streets. The City
Engineer shall hold approval authority for specific alignments for all Arterial and
Collector streets.
4.2.3 Local Streets
Layout of new Local streets not covered by the Master Street Plan shall meet the
needs of the specific development and satisfy all other specific requirements of
this chapter and the access management requirements of Chapter 166 of the
Unified Development Code. The City retains the authority for approval of the
overall street layout.
A. Neighborhood Traffic Safety and Traffic Calming
A major component in street layout is neighborhood traffic safety. This is an
essential transportation issue in the City of Fayetteville. Traffic calming is the
implementation of physical and perceptual techniques intended to slow or
divert traffic on existing or planned roadways. It is often a reactive approach
to minimize high speeds and volumes of vehicular traffic. Significant efforts
in traffic calming have been put forward on existing roadways and in the
development of new roadways to limit traffic speeds and traffic volumes in
neighborhoods and to provide for safer travel for all modes of transportation
including pedestrian, bicycle, and vehicular.
4.3 STREET CLASSIFICATIONS
Street cross sections shall meet the classifications as shown in the current City of
Fayetteville Master Street Plan.
4.4 GENERAL DESIGN ELEMENTS
All streets shall be designed in accordance with design speeds specified for each
street classification in Table 4-1. Where ranges are specified, the design speed
shall be determined by the City Engineer.
Table 4-1
Technical Design Criteria
Design Element
Arterial
Collector
Local
Alley
Principal
Minor
Overall Design Parameters
Design Speed (mph)
25-40
25-40
25-30
15-25
5-10
Target Speed (mph)*
25-40
25-40
25-30
15-25
5-10
Stopping Sight Distance
See Table 4-3
Horizontal Alignment
Minimum Centerline Radius (ft)
Design
Design
175
90
Maximum Super -Elevation %
4
4
4
n/a
Minimum Tangent between
Curves or at Intersections (ft)
100
100
100
30
n/a
Vertical Alignment
Maximum
Centerline Grade
Ordinary
8
8
8
10
10
Hilly
8
8
12**
15**
15
Minimum Center Line Grade (%)
.5
.5
.5
.5
.5
Minimum
K -values
Crest
50
50
30
20***
10
Sag
50
50
40
30***
20
Intersection Design
Minimum Sight Distance at
Intersections
See Figure
4-1 and 4-1a
* Through streets shall be designed to minimize excessive speeds. Traffic calming measures may be required
by the City Engineer when a street design creates conditions where target speeds are expected to be
exceeded due to horizontal and vertical alignment.
** These grades are allowed for a maximum distance of 300 feet.
*** In HHOD, K -values may be less than the minimum upon approval by the City Engineer.
4.4.1 Alignment
Horizontal and vertical street alignments should conform to existing land layout
plus the following criteria:
A. Horizontal Alignment
On Arterial and Collector roadways, curve radii and tangents shall be as large
as possible using the minimums only where necessary. All changes in
direction shall be made using standard curves. Traffic calming measures may
be required for relatively straight sections of local streets that encourage
excessive speeds.
Horizontal Curve Radii. The minimum allowable centerline radii for
horizontal curves shall be as designated in Table 4-1. For low speed, low
volume subdivision streets with 90 degree turns, it may be appropriate to
have a curve radius less than the minimum shown. These will be
evaluated on a case by case basis and may be approved by the City
Engineer. For these curves, a Knuckle design may be used to provide
additional lot frontage around the curve (See Figure 4-2). Reverse and
compound curves should be used only when a single radius curve will not
work. For driver safety, compound curves shall have a ratio no greater
than 1.5 where the value of the larger radius is divided by the smaller
radius.
Minimum Tangent Length
a. Intersection. Whenever a minor street intersects a street of higher
classification, a tangent length (measured from the nearest gutter
flowline of the intersected street to the point of curvature in the
intersecting street) shall be provided for a safe sight distance and safe
traffic operation. The minimum required tangent lengths indicated in
Table 4-1 apply to the minor leg(s) only. The angle of departure shall
not exceed 10 degrees for the length of tangent.
b. Reverse Curves. The tangent between reverse curves shall be no less
than the length shown in Table 4-1. If the curve radii are at least 50%
greater than the radii required by the design speed, the tangent sections
may not be required depending on grades and topography. If the
curves are superelevated, the superelevation transition lengths will
determine the minimum length of tangent between reverse curves.
Consistent Radii. All curves along a local street segment shall be designed
with radii that are approximately equal to provide consistency and
minimize unexpected difficult or quick maneuvers for the driver.
Curves with Small Deflection Angles (10° or less). To reduce the
appearance of kinks in the street, minimum lengths of curve shall be
designed with minimum arc lengths as shown in Table 4-2.
Table 4- 2
Centerline Arc Lengths
Street Classification
Minimum
Centerline Arc
Length (ft.)
Arterial
400
Collector
300
Local
200
5. Horizontal Curves on Vertical Curves. For driver safety, horizontal curves
shall not begin near the top of a crest vertical curve nor near the bottom of
a sag vertical curve.
6. Coefficient of Friction. The coefficient of friction shall conform to the
recommendations in Chapter 3 of the AASHTO "Green Book."
7. Joining Existing Improvements. Connection with existing streets shall be
made to match the existing alignment of the existing improvements, in
accordance with horizontal alignment criteria.
8. Lane Transitions. The lengths for the transition in the lane width or for the
addition or reduction of the number of travel lanes shall be designed in
accordance with AASHTO standards.
B. Vertical Alignment
Maximum and Minimum Grades for Streets. The maximum and minimum
grades for specific street classifications are shown in Table 4-1. The
centerline grade in the bulb of a cul-de-sac shall not exceed 3 percent (See
Figure 4-3).
Minimum Flowline Grades. Minimum flowline grades for gutters shall be
0.50 percent, except the bulb of cul-de-sacs where the minimum shall be
1.0 percent (See Figure 4-3).
Requirements for Using Vertical Curves. Vertical curves are required for
grade changes that exceed 1.0 percent. Both centerlines and the curb and
gutter flowlines shall be designed with vertical curves to meet AASHTO
requirements. A series of grade breaks may be used in lieu of a specified
vertical curve as long as the series of breaks meet the vertical curve
criteria in these Standards for the design speed. K -values for design shall
conform to Table 4-1. In sag curves on flow line, the minimum grade
requirement of 0.50 percent shall override the slope within the vertical
curve.
4. Joining Existing Improvements. Connection with existing streets shall be
made to match the existing grade of the existing streets, in accordance
with vertical alignment criteria. (Grade breaks shall not exceed allowable.)
5. Vertical Clearance. Vertical clearance above a roadway is a minimum of
16.5 feet. Clearance may be higher in AHTD right of way. AHTD
requirements will govern.
6. Intersection Approach Grades. Intersection approach grades are discussed
in Chapter 5, Intersections.
7. Off -Site Continuance of Grade and Ground Lines. To assure that future
street improvements will meet these Standards the future grade and ground
lines of all streets, except cul-de-sacs, shall be continued for 100 feet
beyond the proposed construction.
8. Master Residential Lot Grading Plan. Consideration should be given to the
earthwork associated with the individual lot grading for finished floor
elevations, driveway slopes, etc...
C. Sight Distance
Sight distance is the distance necessary for a vehicle operator to perform
expected functions and be able to do so without causing a hazard for the driver
or other vehicle operators for the specific design speed of the street. In no case
shall the distance be less than the stopping sight distance. This includes
visibility at intersections and higher volume driveways as well as around
curves and roadside encroachments.
1. Stopping Sight Distance for Vertical Crest Curves. Stopping sight distance
is calculated assuming the following:
Object height is 2 feet above road surface and viewer's height is 3.5
feet above road surface.
2. Stopping Sight Distance on Horizontal Curves. Where an object off the
pavement restricts sight distance, the minimum radius of curvature is
determined by the stopping sight distance. In no case shall the stopping
sight distance be less than as specified in Table 4-3. The sight distance
design procedure shall assume a 6 -foot high obstruction (as measured
from actual finished grade) exists at all property lines except in the sight
distance easements that may be required to preserve the needed sight
distance.
Stopping sight distance on horizontal curves is based upon lateral
clearance from the inner edge of pavement to sight obstruction, for various
radii of inner edge of pavement and design speeds. The position of the
driver's eye and the object sighted shall be assumed to be 6 ft. from the
inner edge of pavement, with the sight distance being measured along this
arc. Minimum stopping sight distances are given in Table 4-3.
Table 4-3
Stopping Sight Distance
Design Speed
(mph)
Stopping Sight
Distance (ft)
20
125
25
150
30
200
35
250
40
275
45
325
50
400
From AASHTO "Green Book"
(For Intersection Sight- Distance, see Figure 4-1.)
Corner Sight Distance. The corner sight distance provides for vehicles to
enter traffic and accelerate to the average running speed. Corner sight
distance shall be measured as shown in Figure 4-1.
Intersection Sight Distance Triangles. All sight -distance triangles must be
shown on the street plan/profile plans. All sight distances must be within
the public right-of-way or a sight distance easement. The easement shall
be dedicated to the City and be kept free of sight obstructions.
Sight Obstructions. Any object within the sight distance easement more
than 30 inches above the flow line elevation of the adjacent street shall
constitute a sight obstruction, and shall be removed or lowered. Such
objects include but are not limited to berms, buildings, parked vehicles on
private property, cut slopes, hedges, trees, bushes, utility cabinets or tall
crops. Mailbox clusters must be installed a minimum of 2 feet from back
of curb and not cause any sight obstruction. The City may limit parking to
protect visibility. The sight distance shall be measured to the centerline of
the closest through -lane in both directions. In no case shall any permanent
object encroach into the line -of -sight of any part of the sight distance
triangle.
4.4.2 Cross Slope
Cross slope on a pavement is provided to drain water from the street surface. The
design of cross slope shall consider driver comfort and safety.
A. Minimum Cross Slope
A minimum cross slope on all streets shall be 2.0 percent. Minimum cross
slope on reconstruction or overlays of existing roadways is 1.5 percent.
B. Maximum Allowable Cross Slope
Maximum allowable cross slope on all new construction shall be 3 percent.
Maximum allowable cross slope on any reconstruction or overlays of existing
roadways shall be 4 percent.
C. Cross Slope for Street Modifications
When widening an existing street or adding turn lanes to an existing street, the
resulting cross slope of the widened portion shall be within the limits stated
above and the new cross slope shall be no less than the existing cross slope.
However, if the cross slope of the existing street exceeds the Standards then
new curb and gutter shall be designed such that the existing pavement, when
overlaid, will result in a straight line cross slope grade that meets these
Standards. Alternatively, the existing pavement may be removed and
reprofiled to comply with these Standards.
D. Cross Slope for Cul-de-Sacs
Refer to Figure 4-6 for cul-de-sac bulb cross slopes.
4.4.3 Superelevation on Horizontal Curves
The purpose of superelevating a roadway is to maintain the riding comfort on
smaller than standard curves. Superelevation may only be used when other means
of design will not work and is subject to review and approval by the City
Engineer. The following criteria shall be followed:
A. Where Superelevation Is Permitted
Superelevation may be allowed for curves on Arterial and Collector streets in
order to reduce the minimum centerline radius. In no case shall superelevation
exceed 4.0 percent cross slope. Superelevation shall not be used to reduce
minimum radii on Local Streets.
B. Run -Out
When superelevation is used, the minimum run -out used entering and exiting
the superelevated portion shall be 100 feet.
4.4.4 Design Speed
Each roadway classification has a specific design speed. See Table 4-1.
4.4.5 Curb Return Radii
The required curb return radii are defined in Table 5-1, unless otherwise
approved or required by the City Engineer.
4.5 MEDIANS
4.5.1 Turn Lane and Access
The design of medians shall include the evaluation for needed turn lanes and
accesses. For the minimum requirements of turn lanes, refer to Chapter 5,
Intersections.
4.5.2 Drainage
Landscaped medians shall be provided with drainage facilities to handle sprinkler
runoff and nuisance flows. Sprinklers shall be designed to prevent spray onto the
pavement surface. A properly designed under drain system shall be required.
4.5.3 Nose
Vehicle tracking templates shall be used to determine the position of the median
nose so that vehicles do not track onto the median. The minimum radius for nose
curbs shall be 2 feet to back of curb. A Single Unit (SU) truck template should be
used for the design vehicle.
4.5.4 Transitions
The ends of medians shall transition into turn lanes with a minimum radius of 100
feet. A change of directions must be accomplished with the use of radii. Angle
points shall not be allowed. See Figure 5-10.
4.5.5 Objects
No permanent structures, including light poles, fire hydrants, etc., shall be placed
within 5 feet of the travel lane or in any location that would obstruct sight
distance except for structures as approved in these Standards. If a median
streetlight is placed within 5 feet of the travel lane, the light must be a breakaway
model.
4.6 NON -CONNECTIVE STREET ALIGNMENTS
4.6.1 Cul-de-Sacs
A. Permitted Locations.
Cul-de-sacs shall be used only where necessary. Cul-de-sacs are permitted
only on Local Streets in conformance with Chapter 166 of the U.D.C.
B. Minimum Radius
The cul-de-sac shall have a minimum radius of 50', or as required by the fire
code.
4.6.2 Knuckle
A. Permitted Locations
Knuckles may be permitted only on Local Streets that intersect Local Streets.
B. Permitted Lengths
Knuckles shall have a maximum radius as indicated in Figure 4-2.
4.6.3 Dead -End Streets
A. Temporary Dead -End Streets
Temporary dead-end streets will be permitted only on streets that have no
direct access from adjoining property. Additionally, a temporary dead-end
street shall be planned to extend into neighboring property during a later
development phase or project. The road must be fully constructed to the
property line. Refer to Figure 4-4.
B. Temporary Turnarounds
At locations where a temporary dead-end street exceeds 150 feet in length, a
temporary turnaround shall be constructed. Refer to Figure 4-5 for two layout
options.
C. Temporary Turnaround Easements
All temporary turnarounds shall be constructed within an access Easement or
street ROW. The Easement may be vacated by the City when the Easement is
no longer necessary.
4.7 DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
4.7.1 Drainage
Drainage system design shall be in accordance with current City of Fayetteville
Drainage Criteria Manual.
4.7.2 Underdrains
A. Controlling Groundwater
Under drains used for the purpose of controlling groundwater on private
property may be constructed within public right-of-way. The system shall be
private and must be maintained by viable private parties.
B. Protecting Right-of-way Improvements
Under drains constructed for the purpose of protecting public right-of-way
improvements may be installed only if other means are not possible. The City
shall own and maintain these systems.
C. Design Criteria
All Under drains covered by these Standards shall be designed to meet the
following criteria:
1. Positive Outfall: Demonstrate that under drain has positive outfall for
gravity drainage.
2. Groundwater Barriers: The system shall be designed such that clay cutoff
walls are provided at boundaries of the development to preclude hydraulic
communication with offsite utility trenches either upstream or
downstream.
3. Filter Fabric: The under drain trench shall be lined with a filter fabric
specifically selected in consideration of on -site soil conditions in order to
minimize the invasion of fine soil particles into the bedding gravel.
4.7.3 Sidewalk Underdrain
Storm water from concentrated points of discharge shall not be allowed to flow
over sidewalks, but shall drain to the roadway by use of a sidewalk underdrain or
other methods approved by the City Engineer.
A sidewalk underdrain shall not be located within a curb ramp, curb cut, or
driveway. Sidewalk underdrains shall only be allowed in special situations, on a
case -by -case basis, as determined by the City Engineer. Sidewalk underdrain
sections shall be constructed in accordance with Figure 4-7.
4.7.4 Crosspans
A. Basic Requirements
Crosspans for passing storm drainage flow across roadways shall be
constructed at intersections along streets that have a slope of one percent or
less. Crosspans shall be constructed as shown in Figure 4-6.
B. Dimensions and Depth
Crosspans shall be a minimum width of 2 feet and a 1 -inch typical depth
adjacent to all streets classifications.
C. Minimum Grade
Minimum grade on crosspans at flowline of pan shall be 0.5 percent.
4.7.5 Inlets
Refer to the Drainage Criteria Manual requirements for sizing of inlets. Inlets or
inlet depressions should not be located in the curb return or in the ADA ramp
location, but shall be located at or behind the tangent points of the curb returns.
Inlets located in a sidewalk shall be integrated with sidewalks. The inlet access
shall be flush with the sidewalk surface. No manholes, inlets, or other storm sewer
facilities are allowed within handicap access ramps.
4.7.6 Waterway Crossings
All waterway crossings beneath and/or within the public right-of-way shall be
designed to minimize maintenance requirements. The design shall maintain or
increase the water velocity through the structure to minimize silting or provide
other design elements to address this issue.
If the waterway crossing is designated as an area with a streamside protection
zone, all requirements of U.D.C. Chapter 168.12 shall be met.
4.7.7 Roadside Ditches and Driveway Culverts
A. Roadside Ditches
Any roadway sections developed without curbs (and with roadside drainage
ditches) must complete the ditch construction with the installation of sod or
other approved erosion control blanket within the ditch area. The profile grade
of the ditch shall be maintained at a minimum slope of one (1) percent and a
maximum slope of five (5) percent. A ditch profile grade greater than 5% may
be approved by the City Engineer if the ditch is permanently stabilized to
prevent erosion. The side slopes of the ditches shall be a 3:1 slope or less
with a 4' wide shoulder between the edge of pavement and the top of slope.
B. Driveway Culverts
The slope and capacity of any roadside ditches shall be maintained in any
areas that driveways cross the ditch. Each site is required to provide a pipe
culvert a minimum of eighteen (18) inches in diameter, calculated to meet
capacity and strength. The pipe shall be designed to have no less than twelve
(12) inches of cover over the pipe. At each end of the culvert, there shall be a
headwall or a flared end section installed. If a HDPE or CMP flared end
section is used, a min. 6" wide concrete band shall be constructed around the
exposed edges of the flared end section.
(Vehicle Path)
PROPERTY LINE
OBSTRUCTION
MINOR STREET
OR ACCESS
*NOTE: Line of Sight must be within
R.O.W. or sight distance easement
(Vehicle Path)
atGNS MAJOR STREET
PROPERTY LINE
OBSTRUCTION
MAJOR STREET CORNER INTERSECTION
DESIGN SPEED
SIGHT DISTANCE
(MPH)
(FT.)*
55
1240
50
1030
45
830
40 -----------660
35
520
30
310
25 -----------260
20
210
15
210
1. Corner sight distance measured from a point on the minor road at 13 feet back from the
edge of the travel lane (flowline) and measured from a height of eye at 3.50 feet
on the minor road to a height of object at 3.5 feet on the major road.
2. At Local -Local street intersections only, the "D" distance shall be ten feet (10') and the
sight distance shall be measured to the centerline of the street.
3. For private driveway access to a public street, use 10 feet back from flowline (or shoulder
for gravel roads).
4. These values apply to passenger cars on 2 -lane roads only. Intersections and
access serving trucks or on multi -lane roadways requires separate analysis.
5. Adjustments may be required on a skewed intersection.
6. For local/local street intersection, the minimum sight distance allowed is the stopping sight
distance. See Table 4-3.
ARKANSAS
ENGINEERING DIVISION
SIGHT DISTANCE AT INTERSECTIONS
(Unsignalized)
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
SIGHT DISTANCE (SIGHT TRIANGLE)
NO ON -STREET PARKING
2,, 2015
4-1
(Vehicle Path)
PROPERTY LINE
OBSTRUCTION
(Vehicle Path)
MAJOR STREET
PROPERTY LINE
OBSTRUCTION
MAJOR STREET CORNER INTERSECTION
I
I I
I
DESIGN SPEED
SIGHT DISTANCE
(MPH)
(FT.) -
MINOR STREET
55
1240
OR ACCESS
50
1030
45
830
40
660
35
520
30
310
25 -----------
260
NOTE: Line of Sight must be within
20
210
R.O.W. or sight distance easement
15
210
1. Corner sight distance measured from a point on the minor road at 13 feet back from the
edge of the travel lane (flowline) and measured from a height of eye at 3.50 feet
on the minor road to a height of object at 3.5 feet on the major road.
2. At Local -Local street intersections only, the "D" distance shall be ten feet (10') and the
sight distance shall be measured to the centerline of the street.
3. For private driveway access to a public street, use 10 feet back from flowline (or shoulder
for gravel roads).
4. These values apply to passenger cars on 2 -lane roads only. Intersections and
access serving trucks or on multi -lane roadways requires separate analysis.
5. Adjustments may be required on a skewed intersection.
6. For local/local street intersection, the minimum sight distance allowed is the stopping sight
distance. See Table 4-3.
ARKANSAS
ENGINEERING DIVISION
SIGHT DISTANCE AT INTERSECTIONS
(Unsignalized)
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
SIGHT DISTANCE (SIGHT TRIANGLE)
WITH ON -STREET PARKING
21, 2015
4-1
Standard Sidewalk
2015
I ARKANSAS ENGINEERING DIVISION KNUCKLE DETAIL (LOCAL STREETS ONLY)
Property Line
Sidewalk
1
yp
o�G
1.0% (mm.)
Gov'
E
.g.�,
3.0%
max.) 2% (min.)
Low Point or
o a
—
3% (max.
High
q o
atsPoint
Location may Vary
1.0% (min.)
� Cr
ade
CITYOF
TITLE;MINIMUM
STREET STANDARDS
°""' an zo. �a,�
"°°R`'
DETAIL
eDESCRIPTION
ARKANSASCUL-DE-SAC
4-3
ENGINEERINGDIVISION
FUTURE ROADWAY
__ __ _
_ __ Probe Line
Barricade and
Future Street
Right of Way
Extension Sign
I
Temporary Dead End
Street
Right of Way- IJ III 1.
PROPOSED ROADWAY
Notes:
1. The temporary dead end is limited to 150' in length.
2. A turnaround is not required.
IIIIII/IIIVIII V II\LL I J I /"1I\YAI\YV Febmory 23, 2015
DESCRIPTION_
ENGINEERING DIVISION
IARKANSAS
STREET STUBOUT 4'4
A
Type 3
Right of Way Sidewalk / \
Barricade / \
I
Future
Extension
�
Barricade and
Future Street
Q-
Extension Sign
Right of Way
\ /
Se3 /
Sidewalk
Barricade
Temporary
Access Easement
5 0'(MT)
50' (Mn)
H2
%
SECTION A -A
OPTION 1
Temporary uD
Access Easement
6" Concrete[ 1
Pavement with °
6" Compacted I
-
1
Base
Right of Way
V
I o
1 I I
I
Barricade and
AiI
Future Street
I I I
I I I I I I I I I
Extension Sign
————————
Future
Extension
Sidewalk
Right of Way Continuous
Through Access
° Drive
NOTES:
1. A temporary access easement is required for the f
temporary turnaround. The easement shall incorporate all
of the pavement and signage. Temporary
2. The turnaround shall meet the same pavement Access Easement 24'
requirements as the street section.
OPTION 2
CCTV OF TIT`E. MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS °""' FIGURE'
rE. zs. zais
eDc CRiPncn_
ENGINEERINGDIVISIONTEMPORARY TURNAROUND 4-5
x
x
�
EEo
0
E E 0
o e N
a e N
Through Street
_
_ _
Install Concrete Crosspan on
d
Asphalt Streets When the Slope
= d
g. 8-
of the Through Street is less
E o
than 1%.
s o` N
t+1 N
I
M N
A
E
LL
O
See Cross Pan
Connection
o Detail Below
ro
Transition Crown to
Through Street
c3'
SECTION A - A
I ARKANSAS
ENGINEERING DIVISION
3% (max.)
2% (min.)
Slope
3% (max.) • Required Spot Elevation
2% (min.) Locations at Flowline
Slope
STREET INTERSECTION APPROACH
2015
CHAPTER 5 -INTERSECTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
5.1 GENERAL..................................................................................................3
5.1.1 General Principals and Considerations...................................................3
5.2 INTERSECTION DESIGN CRITERIA........................................................3
5.2.1 Location of Intersections..........................................................................3
5.2.2 Lane Alignment..........................................................................................3
5.2.3 Angle of Intersection.................................................................................4
5.2.4 Horizontal Alignment and Vertical Profile................................................4
A. Horizontal...............................................................................................4
B. Vertical...................................................................................................4
5.2.5 Exclusive Left Turn Lanes.........................................................................4
5.2.6 Exclusive Right Turn Lanes......................................................................4
A. Warrants for Right Turn Lanes...............................................................4
B. Design Criteria....................................................................................... 5
C. Pedestrian Refuge.................................................................................5
5.2.7 Design Vehicles.........................................................................................5
A. DL -23 (Delivery Truck)...........................................................................5
B. SU-30 (Single Unit Truck)......................................................................5
C. CITY -BUS (City Transit Bus).................................................................5
D. WB-40 (Intermediate Semitrailer)..........................................................6
E. WB-67 (Interstate Semitrailer)...............................................................6
F. Other Vehicles.......................................................................................6
5.2.8 Curb Returns..............................................................................................6
A. Curb Return Radii..................................................................................6
B. Curb Return Grades..............................................................................7
5.2.9 Traffic Islands.............................................................................................7
A. Corner Islands Separating Right Turns..................................................7
B. Median Islands Separating Opposing Traffic.........................................7
C. Splitter Islands on Roundabouts............................................................8
5.2.10 Traffic Signals, Striping and Signing.....................................................8
5.2.11 Access Ramps.........................................................................................8
5.2.12 Right-of-way ............................................................................................. 8
A. Requirements........................................................................................8
5.2.13 Intersection Sight Distance.....................................................................8
A. Minimum Requirements.........................................................................8
B. Landscaping and Hardscaping..............................................................9
5.2.14 Pedestrian Requirements........................................................................9
5.2.15 Drainage....................................................................................................9
5.3 ROUNDABOUTS.......................................................................................9
5.3.1 Design Vehicle...........................................................................................9
5.3.2 Design Speed.............................................................................................9
5.3.3 Horizontal Configuration...........................................................................9
5.3.4 Roadway Width..........................................................................................9
5.3.5 Truck Apron..............................................................................................10
5.3.6 Pedestrian Access Ramps for Bikes......................................................10
5.3.7 Pedestrian Crossings..............................................................................10
5.3.8 Drainage...................................................................................................11
5.3.9 Where Allowed.........................................................................................11
5.3.10 Design Software.....................................................................................11
5.3.11 Right-of-way ...........................................................................................11
5.3.12 Splitter Islands.......................................................................................11
5.3.13 Signage...................................................................................................12
LIST OF TABLES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Tables
LIST OF FIGURES
Figures are Located at End of Chapter
Figure 5-1 Intersection Grades
Figure 5-2 Exclusive Left Turn
Figure 5-3 Guidelines for Design of Left Turn Lanes
Figure 5-4 Guidelines for Design Tapers for Left Turn Lanes
Figure 5-5 Traffic Vol. Guidelines for Design Right Turn Lanes
Figure 5-6 Exclusive Right Turn
Figure 5-7 Guidelines for Design of Right Turn Lanes
Figure 5-8 Pedestrian Refuge Island/Right Turn Lane
Figure 5-9 Right Turn Lane to a Continuous Lane with Pedestrian Refuge
Figure 5-10 Turn Lane Design Criteria
Figure 5-11 Splitter Island for Mini Roundabouts
Figure 5-12 Typical Roundabout
CHAPTER 5 -INTERSECTIONS
5.1 GENERAL
Intersections shall be designed to provide for the safety of motorists, pedestrians,
and bicyclists. This chapter is based on criteria from the ITE Traffic Engineering
Handbook, ITE Designing Walkable Urban Thoroughfares and AASHTO's A
Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets.
5.1.1 General Principals and Considerations
By their nature, intersections are conflict locations. Vehicles, pedestrians, and
bicycles all cross paths. Each crossing is a conflict point. The basic design of
intersections includes the following objectives:
A. Minimize conflicts between modes of transportation
B. Accommodate all modes with appropriate levels of service for motorists,
pedestrians, bicyclists, and transit given the recommended speed, volume
and expected mix of traffic.
C. Avoid elimination of any travel modes due to intersection design.
Intersection widening for additional turn lanes to relieve traffic congestion
should be balanced against impacts to pedestrians, bicyclists and transit.
D. Provide good driver and non -driver visibility through proper sight distance
triangles and geometric features that increase visibility.
E. Minimize pedestrian exposure to moving traffic.
F. Avoid extreme intersection angles and break up complex intersections
with pedestrian refuge islands. Keep intersections easily and fully
comprehensible for all users. Strive for simplicity in intersection design.
G. Ensure intersections are fully accessible to the physically disabled.
5.2 INTERSECTION DESIGN CRITERIA
5.2.1 Location of Intersections
For intersection location criteria, refer to Section 166.08 (Street Design and
Access Management Standards) of the U.D.C., and the current Master Street
plan.
5.2.2 Lane Alignment
All lanes shall be in alignment through each intersection, with a maximum of a 2 -
foot shift in a hardship situation only, subject to approval by the City Engineer.
5.2.3 Angle of Intersection
Crossing roadways should intersect at 90 degrees whenever possible. In no case
shall they intersect at less than 75 degrees or more than 105 degrees.
5.2.4 Horizontal Alignment and Vertical Profile
A. Horizontal
The horizontal alignment of streets through an intersection shall be designed
in conformance with Table 4-1. Intersections may be placed on horizontal
curves, provided that the tangent lengths given in Table 4-1 are provided on
the minor street and the required sight distance is obtained.
B. Vertical
The grade of the street with the higher classification shall prevail at
intersections. The lesser street shall adapt to the grade of the Major street.
When roads are of equal classification, the City Engineer shall determine
which street grade prevails.
The street profile grade of the lesser street shall not exceed 5 percent on the
approach to the intersection, as measured along the centerline of the street for
a minimum distance equal to the tangent length for the street classification,
see Table 5-1. In areas where steep terrain is an issue, the City Engineer may
allow a greater approach grade in order to reduce the grading impact on the
site.
5.2.5 Exclusive Left Turn Lanes
Exclusive left turn lanes shall be provided on all arterial streets and other streets
wherever left turn lanes are warranted and approved by the City Engineer. The
Designer shall use information in the Transportation Impact Study (TIS) to
determine whether an exclusive left turn lane is warranted on non -arterial streets.
Refer to Figures 5.2, 5.3 and 5.4 for design requirements.
5.2.6 Exclusive Right Turn Lanes
Exclusive right turn lanes shall be provided at locations where they are required
by the applicable TIS, and approved by the City Engineer.
A. Warrants for Right Turn Lanes
Figure 5-5 provides guidelines and warrants for whether a right turn lane shall
be provided at intersections or accesses.
B. Design Criteria
Right turn lanes shall be designed to accomplish the following functions:
1. Provide a means of safe deceleration outside the high speed through lane.
2. Provide a separate storage area for right turns to assist in the optimization
of traffic signal phasing.
Provide a means of separating right turn movements at stop controlled
intersections. The design elements, as shown in Figure 5-6, are the
approach taper, bay taper, lengths of lanes, width of lanes, and departure
taper. For approach taper lengths, see Figure 5-7.
C. Pedestrian Refuge
Where Pedestrian refuge is required, it shall be designed in accordance with
Figure 5-8. If a right turn lane turns into an exclusive lane that continues, use
Figure 5-9
5.2.7 Design Vehicles
As a minimum, intersections shall be designed to accommodate the following
design vehicles for the specified turns. The minimum allowable intersection
turning radii are as follows.
A. DL -23 (Delivery Truck)
All DL -23 vehicles must be able to turn easily from one street to the next and
remain in the correct lane for each roadway. This is required for all roadways.
B. SU-30 (Single Unit Truck)
All SU-30 vehicles must be able to turn easily from one street to the next and
remain in the correct lane for each roadway. For low traffic Local/Local
intersections, the SU-30 may use more than one traffic lane to complete the
turn without tracking onto the curb at corners. For all other roadways this
vehicle must be able to complete turns without entering into opposing lanes.
C. CITY -BUS (City Transit Bus)
All CITY -BUS vehicles may use more than one traffic lane to complete the
turn when turning from the correct lane without tracking onto the curb at
corners. This shall apply to all streets. When the intersection is on a regular or
planned transit route where the turning movement could conflict with a
stopped vehicle at the intersection, then the intersection must be designed to
allow the bus to turn easily from one street to the next without entering
opposing lanes of either roadway.
D. WB-40 (Intermediate Semitrailer)
All WB-40 vehicles may use more than one traffic lane to complete the turn
without tracking onto the curb at corners. In addition, the vehicle must make
the turn in one forward maneuver not encroaching into opposing traffic lanes
unless the intersection has been designed to allow for safe encroachment. This
requirement shall apply to all Arterial/Arterial, Arterial/Collector,
Arterial/Local and Collector/Collector. For all other intersections (including
mini -roundabouts), the vehicles may use the entire paved surface of the street
to negotiate the turn. The vehicle may have to back up to complete the turn.
E. WB-67 (Interstate Semitrailer).
All modern roundabouts and arterial intersections containing raised medians
and channelizing islands shall be designed to accommodate a WB-67 vehicle.
F. Other Vehicles.
For special circumstances other design vehicles may be required by the City
Engineer.
5.2.8 Curb Returns
A. Curb Return Radii
The corner radii at intersections shall be set so that the selected design
vehicles can pass through the intersection in an appropriate manner. The
design vehicle types and use of lanes shall be per Section 5.2.7. Intersections
shall be designed to minimize curb radii while still accommodating the largest
applicable design vehicle. The following should be considered when possible
in order to minimize the curb return radii:
1. Bike lanes, on -street parking, and other facilities should be included
to create an effective corner radius which accommodates the design
vehicle. When on -street parking is used to establish an effective
turning radius, the effective radius shall be delineated within the
parking lane by an approved striping pattern, raised curb, or other
approved traffic control device.
2. Traffic control devices should be arranged as to allow safe
encroachment of infrequent vehicles into approaching lanes of traffic.
3. Compound radii should be used to minimize the crossing distance for
pedestrians.
4. The outside vehicular lane should be widened through the
intersection to increase the effective turning radius.
A variance from the above requirements and 5.2.7 may be approved by the
City Engineer where:
1. High pedestrian volumes are present or reasonably anticipated.
2. Volumes of turning vehicles are low.
3. The design vehicle constitutes a very low proportion of the turning
vehicles.
4. Occasional encroachment of the design vehicle beyond that provided in
Section 5.2.7 is acceptable.
Occasional encroachment of turning school bus, moving van, or oversized
delivery truck into an opposing lane is not acceptable.
Larger vehicles than those listed in 5.2.7 are expected to be frequent users
of the street.
For curb returns on a State Highway, every effort shall be made to minimize
curb radii through negotiation with AHTD while acknowledging AHTD's curb radii
requirements
supersede these Standards.
B. Curb Return Grades
The minimum allowable grade for flowlines around curb returns shall be no
less than 0.5 percent. One percent (1%) minimum slope is recommended.
5.2.9 Traffic Islands.
The following is a list of different types of traffic islands:
A. Corner Islands Separating Right Turns
Standard corner islands may be used in Arterial/Arterial intersections to
channelize traffic where required to provide pedestrian refuge or where
required by the City Engineer. The corner islands shall be designed as raised
islands in accordance with Figures 5-8 or 5-9 for a right turn lane continuing
to an exclusive lane or for a right turn lane stop condition, respectively. The
striping shall be in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 7, Traffic
Control Devices.
B. Median Islands Separating Opposing Traffic
Median islands are required at all Arterial/Arterial intersections. The length of
the island shall include the appropriate approach taper, bay taper and length of
lane required by these Standards, or supported by another approved resource
standard. The design shall be in accordance with Figure 5-10 and as follows:
1. No Obstruction. Medians must not obstruct the minimum left turn radius
for the design vehicle(s).
Drainage. Landscaped medians shall include drainage facilities to handle
sprinkler run-off and nuisance flows. When low maintenance landscaping
is used in conjunction with trickle irrigation, drainage requirements may
be waived and outfall curb and gutter should be used.
A pedestrian refuge area shall be provided at all pedestrian crossings.
C. Splitter Islands on Roundabouts
In modem roundabout designs, raised splitter islands shall be designed in
accordance with Federal Highway Administration Roundabouts to direct
traffic and provide pedestrian refuge.
5.2.10 Traffic Signals, Striping and Signing
See Chapter 7, Traffic Control Devices.
5.2.11 Access Ramps
See Chapter 8, Pedestrian Facilities Design and Technical Criteria.
5.2.12 Right-of-way
A. Requirements
All intersection rights -of -way shall be dedicated as shown in the current
Master Street Plan to provide adequate right-of-way to include greenspace,
sidewalks, and access ramps around the radii. Additional right-of-way may be
required at intersections to provide space for additional left or right turn lanes
without reducing the widths of standard required facilities.
5.2.13 Intersection Sight Distance
Street intersections shall be designed so that adequate sight distance is provided
along all streets. The required sight distance shall be determined by the design
speed and grades of the street and the acceleration rate of an average vehicle as
prescribed below.
A. Minimum Requirements
All designs must provide minimum safe stopping sight distance in accordance
with Chapter 4, Street Design and Technical Criteria, and AASHTO. In
addition, for all streets that intersect with Arterial and Collector streets, the
sight distance must be large enough to allow a vehicle to enter the street and
accelerate to the average running speed without interfering with the traffic
flow on the Arterial or Collector street.
B. Landscaping and Hardscaping
No landscaping or hardscaping higher than 30 inches above the flow line of
the gutter shall be permitted within a corner cut that will block the line of
sight for pedestrian visibility.
5.2.14 Pedestrian Requirements
See Chapter 7, Traffic Control Devices, concerning crosswalk requirements and
Chapter 8, Pedestrian Facilities Design and Technical Criteria.
5.2.15 Drainage
See Chapter 4, Street Design and Technical Criteria, concerning drainage.
5.3 ROUNDABOUTS
Roundabouts shall be specially designed to the specific need on high traffic
volume streets and used to improve traffic flow. Refer to Federal Highway
Administration, Roundabouts: An Informational Guide for typical layout.
Also refer to Figure 5-11 and 5-12 for typical roundabout layout features. The
following are certain minimum requirements:
5.3.1 Design Vehicle
Arterial and Collector Roundabouts shall be designed to accommodate WB-67
trucks. The design vehicle is to be accommodated by maintaining a 2 -foot
separation between the truck and the curb face. A truck apron shall be provided
around the circulatory island. The WB-67 vehicle may use the truck apron for left
turn movements and may use the truck apron for right -turn movements if
necessary.
5.3.2 Design Speed
The design speed for a single -lane roundabout shall be 20-25 mph. The design
speed for a multi -lane roundabout shall be 25 to 30 mph.
5.3.3 Horizontal Configuration
The roundabout layout shall be determined by the Design Engineer and approved
by the City Engineer.
5.3.4 Roadway Width
The circulatory roadway width shall be a minimum of 1.0 to1.2 times the width of
the widest entering roadway. This width may include the truck apron when
approved by the City Engineer.
5.3.5 Truck Apron
1. The width of the truck apron shall be a minimum of 8 -feet to allow for
emergency or maintenance vehicles. The truck apron shall be constructed of a
material different in appearance from the adjacent pavement to provide visual
contrast. Final truck apron design shall be based on truck turning analysis plus
a two -foot buffer. The designer shall provide a jointing pattern plan to control
shrinkage cracking.
2. The truck apron shall have a 4% to 6% Cross Slope to allow utility and
maintenance vehicles access and discourage any pedestrian use.
3. Curb for the truck aprons shall be a 6 -inch mountable curb with a 1:1 slope
face. No expansion material shall be specified between the back of curb and
the truck apron.
4. Truck apron pavement thickness shall be developed with the Final Pavement
Design and may required subgrade stabilization if swelling soils exist.
5.3.6 Pedestrian Access Ramps for Bikes
1. Bicycle traffic shall be assisted / encouraged to leave the roadway prior to the
roundabout by construction of bicycle exit and re-entrance ramps.
5.3.7 Pedestrian Crossings
1. The pedestrian crossing through the splitter island shall be set back 25 -feet
from the yield line at the nose of the splitter island pending sight triangle
analysis. The pedestrian crossing and ramps shall meet the ADA requirements
for accessible pathways.
2. A 7 to 8 -foot wide of pedestrian refuge opening shall be provided in the splitter
island.
3. The pedestrian crossing shall cross both the entry and exit roads along a single
tangent roughly perpendicular to the centerline of the splitter island as shown
on Figure 5-11.
4. Pedestrian ramps shall be lined up directly with the crosswalk A two -foot wide
truncated dome surface shall be located perpendicular to the pedestrian
crossing at each location where pedestrians are designated to enter the traffic
way including the splitter island refuge.
5. The pedestrian ramps and splitter island pedestrian refuge shall be contained by
six-inch vertical curbs to give direction at the crossing as shown on Figure 5-
11.
5.3.8 Drainage
1. All drainage within the roundabout shall drain away from the center island at a
slope of 2% min. (1% min. for concrete). A crowned circulatory roadway shall
be designed for all multi -lane roundabouts unless a variance is granted by the
City Engineer.
2. No pavement swales or drainage crosspans shall be allowed to take storm
drainage away from center island or across roundabout entry or exit
alignments. Drainage directed to the roundabout from adjacent legs must be
intercepted by storm drain inlets to minimize encroachment into the circulatory
roadway.
5.3.9 Where Allowed
Roundabouts may be allowed on any roadway as approved by the City Engineer.
Design engineers are encouraged to evaluate the appropriateness of roundabouts
for intersections within proposed developments.
5.3.10 Design Software
The roundabout design shall be completed with the aid of computer software.
Acceptable products include the latest versions of Auto Turn, ARCADY, RODEL
or other software as approved by the City Engineer. VISSIM or other simulation
software may be used for public presentation. The City Engineer is authorized to
require the use of a specific software package when warranted by the needs of a
specific intersection. The Design Engineer shall have specific knowledge of how
to control the software and be able to demonstrate that understanding to the City
Engineer.
5.3.11 Right-of-way
The City will require additional right-of-way to be dedicated by the Developer to
accommodate the roundabout.
5.3.12 Splitter Islands
Raised splitter islands shall be required on all approaches. Where the approach leg
has a central turning lane or median, the splitter island shall be extended to
connect to the median or a sufficient distance from the pedestrian refuge to
provide confinement of the enter ing and exit movements and control of the
fastest paths (125 -feet is suggested). The vertical face of the raised splitter island
shall be set back approximately 3 -feet from the approach edge of a median nose
and 1 to 1.5 -feet at the trailing edge (down traffic).
5.3.13 Signage
The signage shall be in accordance with Chapter 7, Traffic Control Devices.
Major
Street
O
z
uJ
W
d(7
a
Minor
Street
L
5% Max.
INTERSECTION GRADE CONTROL LENGTHS (L)
CITY OF
'TITLE
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
'DATE;
February 23. 2015
"�°R`'
DESCRIPTION:
INTERSECTION GRADES
e
�ARKANSAS
5-1
ENGINEERING DIVISION
MINOR LEG
LOCAL
COLLECTOR
ARTERIAL
Local
95 ft
100 ft
125 ft
Collector
100 ft
120 ft
200 ft
Arterial
125 ft
200 ft
200 ft
IIIIIII4TT
Stop Bar
m
6 y
2-J
U)
O
N d
JN J
0.0
H a p
m
0
NOTES:
1. Refer to Figures 5-3, and 5-4 for design requirements.
2. Provide a 50± arc length at angle points for a smooth curve.
CITY OF 'TITLE:
eDESCRIPTION MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS °"T ` Febry 23rvo, 2INCITED
. 5-2
ENGINEERINGN
EXCLUSIVE LEFT TURN
Deceleration
Storage
L d/b -- Length of Taper and Lane for Deceleration and
Ls — Length of Lane for Storage (Full Width Lane) (ft.)
Braking (ft.)
Functional Basis: To provide sufficient length for a
reasonable number of vehicles to queue within the
Functional Basis: To provide sufficient length for a
lane without affecting other lanes.
vehicle to decelerate and brake entirely outside the
through traffic lanes.
Desirable Design: Based on twice the mean arrival
rate (per cycle for signals, per 2 -minute period for
Desirable Design: Deceleration in gear for 3 seconds
stop control) during the peak hour of traffic.
(occurs over bay taper) followed by comfortable
braking to a stopped position. .
Minimum Design: Based on mean arrival rate, with
minimum storage for one vehicle.
Design Values For L d/b
L s for Stop
Control
S-- Speed Length
DHV Ls
(mph) Total Lane (ft) Bay Taper
(vph) (ft)
30 235 115 (120)
≤60 50-75
40 315 155 (160)
61-120 100
50 435 235 (200)
121-180 150
60 530 290 (240)
>180 200 or
more
LS for Traffic
Minimum Design: Braking begins at 2/3 full lane width,
Signal Control
with mimimum 50 -foot storage. For low speeds only, the
following values apply:
600
r 500
Design Values For L d/b
>
d 400
c
2
m
N
S-- Speed Length
o 300
LL
(mph) Total Lane (ft) Bay Taper
>
1 600
c200
30 230 50 (180)
35 250 70 (180)
H
ii 100
500
E
40 280 100 (180)
"�
-
o
45 320 140 (180)
`0
N
400
IO1
.
N
300
en
2000
0
N
100
CITY OF
'TITLE.
MINIMUM
STREET STANDARDS
DATE:
N"."',
NES�N�PT�oN53
GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN OF
JR�UIE
LEFT TURN LANES
ye v e
N AAVISION
ENGINEERARK
wnnna
:11
acirr
. t. v.
rt
�tr
III
11
rw
III;;I'
rt
sir
Mr
a,
Ta -- Approach Taper Design (ft) (Redirect Taper)
Functional Basis: To provide a smooth lateral
transition for all vehicles approaching the
intersection.
Form of Alignment: Tangent
Low Speed Design: (<45) Provide a fully shadowed lane.
Ta = W S 2 W = Width of Offset (ft)
60 S = Speed (mph)
Tb= Bay Taper Design
Functional Basis: To direct left -turning vehicles
into the turn lane.
Form of Alignment: Tangent; or reverse curves
with 113 of the total length comprised of a
central tangent.
Desirable Design: For fully shadowed left
turn lane.
Tb= W 3S W1 = Width of Lane
S = Speed (mph)
Typical Values for Ta*
Typical Values for Tb*
S- Speed
W -- Width of Offset (ft)
5-- Speed
W1-- Width of Lane (ft.)
(mph)
11 11.5 12
(mph)
11 12
25
115 120 125
30
110 120
30
165 170 180
40
145 160
50
185 200
35
225 235 245
40
295 305 320
*Rounded to nearesr 5 ft.
`Rounded to nearest 5 ft.
High Speed Design: (≤45) Provide a fully shadowed lane.
Minimum Design: Taper ratios of 8:1 can be
Design as follows:
used for tangent
bay tapers in constrained locations.
Ta = WS
W = Width of Offset (ft)
S = Speed (mph)
S— Speed
W -- Width of Offset (ft)
(mph)
11 11.5 12
45
495 520 540
50
550 575 600
`Rounded to nearest 5 ft.
IIIIII/IIIVIII VII\LLI JI/'1I\YAI\YV Febr 23,2x15 C A
ARKANSAS DESCRIPTION
GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN TAPERS OF LEFT TURN LANES 5-4
ENGINEERING DIVISION
2 -Lane Collectors or Arterials
2
100
O
:
feQ Full Width Turn Lane
0
80
S
Y
=Ct
Pea
�r�
a
60
7j
.5
h
Posted S
c
eed 40-45 m ph
40
H
Posted Speed ≥50 mph
rn
20
100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Total Peak Hour Volume on Approach Leg (vph)
4 Lane Arterials
120
=
100
Full Width Turn Lane
a-
oSfPaS
80
APPa
Y
m
a
60
�c3S
.N
Posted Speed 40-45
mph�ph
C
40
H
Posted Speed ≥50 mph
0)
E
20
200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
Total Peak Hour Volume on Approach Leg (vph)
CITY OF'T
ITLE. MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
DATE' 'FIGURE.
Febuy 23, 2015 rar
VOLUME GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN OF RIGHT TURN LANES
N55
ENGINEERIARS
NGRSDIVISIONTRAFFIC
Crosswalk rrL1±
I I I I I I I
Stop Bar
Cu in
O J
C
(6
J
m
I I
I I 2
O
0 a
WV
II Cu
a U J
T ~ C
II
I
NOTES:
1. Refer to Figures 5-7 for design requirements.
2. Provide a 50± arc length at angle points for a smooth
curve.
CITY e MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS 'DATE:IFIG
February 2
°escawn°u.
ARKANSAS EXCLUSIVE RIGHT TURN 5-6
ENGINEERINGDIVISION
L d/b -- Length of Taper and Lane for Deceleration and
Braking (ft.)
Functional Basis: To provide sufficient length for a
vehicle to decelerate and brake entirely outside the
through traffic lanes.
Desirable Design: Deceleration in gear for 3 seconds
(occurs over bay taper) followed by comfortable
braking to a stopped position.
Tb= Bay Taper Design
Functional Basis: To direct left -turning vehicles
into the turn lane.
Form of Alignment: Tangent; or reverse curves
with 1/3 of the total length comprised of a
central tangent.
Desirable Design: For fully shadowed left
turn lane.
Design Values
For L d/b
W1= Width of Lane
Tb= W1S
3 S = Speed (mph)
Highway
Stop
Design Speed of
Corner
Radius (mph)
Design
Conditions*
15
20
25
30
Speed, V
Typical Values for Tb*
(mph)
30
235
185
160
140
-
S-- Speed
W1-- Width of Lane (ft.)
35
275
240
213
188
93
(mph)
11 12
40
315
295
265
235
185
45
375
350
325
295
250
30
110 120
40
145 160
50
435
405
385
355
315
50
185 200
Approximate for right turn lanes in approaches
to stop signs and traffic signals.
Bay Taper Length = 3S
Tb= W1 S
3
Ls -- Length of Lane for Storage (Full Width Lane) (ft.)
Functional Basis: To provide sufficient length for a
reasonable number of vehicles to queue within the
lane without affecting other lanes.
Desirable Design: Based on twice the mean arrival
rate (per cycle for signals, per 2 -minute period for
stop control) during the peak hour of traffic.
Minimum Design: Based on mean arrival rate, with
minimum storage for one vehicle.
ARKANSAS
ENGINEERING DIVISION
*Rounded to nearest 5 ft.
Minimum Design: Taper ratios of 8:1 can be
used for tangent bay tapers in constrained locations.
L s for Stop
Control
DHV Ls
(vph) (ft)
≤60 50-75
61-120 100
121-180 150
>180 200 or
more
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN OF RIGHT TURN LANES
23, 2015
5-7
I
3
EO
2
U
ww
Z
. 20'.
J
F -
w
Y
Provide a flat
m g
platform rest
=5 ': R=5
area
Landscape or
JU
J///hardscape
as
required by the
ear
City Engineer +1
w
h
R�300'
0
N
ro
O O
BIKE
LANE
CITYOF
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
DATE a,:23.1015
"�°re`-
DESCRIPTION
REFUGE ISLAND/ RIGHT TURN LANE
p e'TITLE:
�
p
5-8
ENGINEERIARKAAS
NGNS
DIVISIONPEDESTRIAN
Crosswalk
Landscape or
50
Hardscape as ' (Min.)
required by the
City Engineer
� r
W O
R,1p 8" Solid White Stripe
V I I I
Provide Flat Platform
Rest Area
R=175'
R=10'
t a
U
BIKE TURN
LANE LANE
NOTE: Use a 175'-65'-175three centered curve as
shown for the outside curb flowline transition
°` MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS °" " "`°�"
yeve o,a
DESCRIPTION:
5 9
ENGINEERING°S DIVISION RIGHT TURN LANE TO A CONTINUOUS LANE W/ PEDESTRIAN REFUGE
Departure Taper
FL
N P
moo R a 100' Lip
Ta Tb Le
Approach Taper = WS 2or w5 Bay Taper = WS Storage
60 3
Left Turn Lane with Full Shadow
High Speed (≥ 45 MPH)
Approach Taper = I Bay Taper = WS
3
Left Turn Lane with Partial Shadow
NOTE: Refer to Figure 5-4 for Design Requirements.
TAPER RATIOS
TAPER
DESIGN SPEED
TYPE
35
40
45
50
Bay
12:1
13.3:1
15:1
16.7:1
Approach
20:1
27:1
45:1
50:1
Depart
NA
NA
NA
NA
Combined
20:1
27:1
45:1
50:1
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS °AFee.�a.v 23. 2015
rdyeARKA
«tVwe 510
ENGINEERINGNSDIVISION TURN LANE DESIGN CRITERIA
Yield Line
i
W W J
Ni
W W
4'Min.
Notes:
1. Each Splitter Island shall have a minimum width equal to the street classification
sidewalk width.
2. The specific design shall determine mimimum radii and island lengths.
3. Raised crosswalk may be required.
4. Designer shall provide design to drain water out of pedestrian refuge.
CITY OF MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS °" F o, a 23, 2015 "`°R"
e v le GESCRIPr1°N -R
ENGINEERING DIVISION SPLITTER ISLAND FOR ROUNDABOUTS 5-11
No Trees or Shrubs that can
become higher than 20"
0 (measured to bottom of curb)
)J\ ui)'- allowed in Splitter Island (typ.)
III I
8 - 10' Colored Truck Apron
with a 4% to 6% Cross Slope
1�
Splitter Island shall be J
Tangent to the Central P
Island (typ.)
12"
19 < W< 1.3 X Entry Width
2% 3°
Catch Curb & Gutter 100% Intersection Traffic:
Greatest Thickness Required
SECTION A - A
r.
A
1.1
6" Mountable Curb & Gutter
A
e
rnrnrnwrrr JrnLLI prnrlunnup October I. 2014
YV DESCRIPTION
ENGINEERING DIVISION TYPICAL ROUNDABOUT 5'12
CHAPTER 6- PAVEMENT STRUCTURE AND MATERIALS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
6.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................3
6.1.1 Existing Streets.....................................................................................................3
6.1.2 AASHTO Design....................................................................................................3
6.1.3 Standard Pavement Section................................................................................3
6.1.4 Roundabouts........................................................................................................4
6.1.5 Approval................................................................................................................4
6.1.6 Pavement Report Revisions................................................................................4
A. Phases.............................................................................................................4
B. Imported Fill Material........................................................................................4
C. Change in Existing Conditions..........................................................................4
6.2 SOIL INVESTIGATION REQUIREMENTS...........................................................4
6.2.1 Location and Frequency of Soil Borings............................................................4
6.2.2 Imported Fill..........................................................................................................5
6.2.3 Supervision by Engineer......................................................................................5
6.3 SUBGRADE AND FILL REQUIREMENTS..........................................................5
6.3.1 General..................................................................................................................5
6.3.2 Classification Testing...........................................................................................5
6.3.3 Compaction Testing.............................................................................................5
6.3.4 California Bearing Ratio (CBR) Testing..............................................................6
6.3.5 Subsurface Water Investigation..........................................................................6
6.3.6 Subgrade Requirements......................................................................................6
6.3.7 Embankment Outside the Roadway....................................................................7
6.4 PAVEMENT DESIGN CRITERIA.........................................................................7
6.4.1 Flexible Pavement................................................................................................7
6.4.2 Rigid Pavement.....................................................................................................8
A. General............................................................................................................. 8
B. Joint Design...................................................................................................... 8
6.4.3 Design Factors......................................................................................................8
A. Equivalent Single Axle Loads(ESAL)...............................................................8
B. Design Serviceability........................................................................................8
C. Minimum Pavement Section.............................................................................8
c
D. Portland Cement Concrete Working Stress(f) .................................................9
E. Arterial and Collector Level Intersections.........................................................9
* A pavement design may be required as requested by the City Engineer..............9
6.4.4 Pavement Materials..............................................................................................9
A. Aggregate Base Material.................................................................................9
B. Asphalt Concrete Hot Mix.................................................................................9
C. Concrete Requirements.................................................................................10
6.4.5 Special Considerations......................................................................................10
A. Staged Construction.......................................................................................10
B. Full Depth Sections........................................................................................11
C. Rehabilitating Existing Asphalt Streets...........................................................11
D. Special Requirements....................................................................................11
6.5 PAVEMENT DESIGN REPORT.........................................................................11
6.5.1 Required Information for Pavement Design Report ........................................11
A. List of Required Information...........................................................................11
LIST OF TABLES
Table 6-1 Pavement Strength Coefficients....................................................................6-7
Table 6-2 Pavement Design Criteria.............................................................................6-9
Table 6-3 Asphalt Requirements...............................................................................6-10
LIST OF FIGURES
This chapter does not contain figures.
CHAPTER 6- PAVEMENT STRUCTURE AND MATERIALS
6.1 GENERAL
The purpose of this chapter is to present the Pavement Design Criteria required for use on
streets in the City of Fayetteville. These criteria shall be used in conjunction with
Chapter 4, Street Design and Technical Criteria. The Final Pavement Design Report
shall include all testing in accordance with Table 6-1.
6.1.1 Existing Streets
For existing streets the City Engineer may require an evaluation of the existing pavement
and base structure to determine if an overlay is feasible, or if reconstruction is necessary.
Any damage done to existing City streets during construction shall be repaired and/or
replaced at the contractor's expense. All repair work shall meet the requirements of this
document.
6.1.2 AASHTO Design
The design criteria and procedures presented follow American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Guide for the Design of Pavement
Structures.
6.1.3 Standard Pavement Section
Streets are to be constructed of asphaltic concrete pavement or Portland cement concrete
pavement, base course material, and subbase material (where required), and placed on
compacted, unyielding subgrade.
The use of treated subgrade, treated base, and/or full depth asphalt pavement may be
acceptable when designed and submitted by the designer, and approved by the City
Engineer in accordance with these standards.
On streets with grades steeper than 10%, concrete pavement may be required. The final
determination will be made by the City Engineer.
The pavement section requirements for alley construction, whether private or public,
shall be the same as for a public roadway. Alternative pavement materials proposals will
require approval from the City Engineer.
6.1.4 Roundabouts
The pavement thickness design for the circulatory roadway shall be based on the sum of
the 20 year design volumes from all legs. A separate design analysis is required. Refer to
Section 5.3 for Roundabout design requirements.
6.1.5 Approval
The pavement design shall be submitted with final construction plans for approval.
6.1.6 Pavement Report Revisions
A revised Pavement Design investigation and report shall be required if the following
conditions occur:
A. Phases
If a street is to be built in phases, (i.e., the center two lanes are built first, then at some
later date more lanes are added), and it has been at least two years since the original
design was completed.
B. Imported Fill Material
If any new fill material that does not match the properties of the subgrade soil
proposed in the design is imported, the City may require a new pavement design
report or additional testing to verify the acceptability of this material for roadway fill.
C. Change in Existing Conditions
If material that is not consistent with the approved design report is discovered during
construction, the City may require a new pavement design report or additional testing
to verify the acceptability of this material
6.2 SOIL INVESTIGATION REQUIREMENTS
6.2.1 Location and Frequency of Soil Borings
Soil borings shall be taken in the existing or proposed street right-of-way. Subgrade
samples shall be taken upon the material that will be subgrade for the proposed street
improvements. Sample sizes shall be adequate for soil classification, compaction, and
CBR testing.
A minimum of one boring shall be obtained for any roadway segment. The distance
between borings shall not exceed 500 feet. Multiple samples shall be taken alternately
among lanes and shall be evenly spaced. The City Engineer may require more frequent
testing.
Samples shall be taken to a minimum depth of 5 feet below the proposed subgrade
elevation.
6.2.2 Imported Fill
All fill material placed in the right-of-way shall be tested and approved by the City prior
to its use on the project. The material shall meet minimum requirements. Sampling shall
be at the beginning of the project, and after every 5,000 cubic yards of material is placed.
6.2.3 Supervision by Engineer
All sampling and testing of soils shall be performed under the direct supervision of a
Professional Engineer who must sign and stamp the report.
6.3 SUBGRADE AND FILL REQUIREMENTS
6.3.1 General
To simplify subgrade support testing, soil samples may be combined to form soil groups
consistent with the AASHTO classification, group index, and location for the area
investigated. Groupings shall not mix samples with different AASHTO classifications.
Appropriate tests, to include gradation, Atterberg limits, maximum compaction testing,
and California Bearing Ratio tests, shall be accomplished in order to determine the
suitability of soils for use as subgrade material within the roadway.
"Subgrade" shall be defined as material within 2 feet of the first paving layer (base or
asphalt). Roadway limits shall extend to 1 foot behind the back of curb, or edge of
pavement when no curb is present.
6.3.2 Classification Testing
Soils shall be classified visually and tested to determine the properties. Soils shall be
classified according to the AASHTO Classification system.
6.3.3 Compaction Testing
Maximum density of soils proposed for use as subgrade material shall be determined by
AASHTO T-99 (Standard Proctor Test), using Note 7. A new moisture/density test shall
be completed for every 5,000 cubic yards of material imported, or when field testing
results indicate a change in material. This includes instances when field testing results
yield percentages of compaction relative to maximum of 105% or greater.
6.3.4 California Bearing Ratio (CBR) Testing
CBR testing in accordance with ASTM D 1883-94 shall be completed on all soils
proposed for use as subgrade material. CBR testing shall be performed at the dry density
corresponding to 95% of the maximum dry density of the material being tested, and at
2% above optimum moisture content.
The 3 -point method of CBR testing shall be performed on in -situ soils classified as A-1
or A-2, and on all soils proposed for use as borrow material for subgrade.
6.3.5 Subsurface Water Investigation
If groundwater is encountered or predicted to be encountered within 5 feet of the original
or proposed ground surface, a subsurface water investigation report shall be submitted for
approval by the City Engineer. This report is required to ensure mitigation of high
groundwater effects upon public improvements within the right-of-way. This information
may be a separate report or may be included in the geotechnical report.
6.3.6 Subgrade Requirements
The top 24 inches of subgrade must be of material meeting the following specifications
unless a formal design is approved:
A. Material classified by the AASHTO Soil Classification System as A-1, A-2, or A-3,
having a maximum of 35 percent of the material passing the number 200 sieve, and
having a CBR equal to or greater than 8.
B. Material not meeting the above requirements for AASHTO Classification and
gradation, but having a CBR equal to or greater than 8 and a Liquid Limit and
Plasticity Index of less than or equal to 40 and 15, respectively.
C. Material not meeting the above requirements for Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index
may be used if chemically modified by the use of lime, fly ash, or cement. The type
and amount of treatment shall be determined by a material testing lab and approved
by the City. The chemically modified soil must meet all requirements of Section A
above.
D. Material not meeting the CBR requirements of Section A above, but meeting the
requirements for Liquid and Plasticity limits may be used provided a formal
pavement design based on the actual CBR value of the soil is provided. For this case,
CBR values shall be a minimum of 4. Use of lower CBR values may be allowed
where specialized pavement designs using geogrids or other technologies are
proposed.
6.3.7 Embankment Outside the Roadway
Material for curb backfill, under sidewalks, on backslopes, or in other areas within the
right-of-way may be any material that is free from sod, stumps, roots, or other perishable
or deleterious material that it be capable of forming a stable embankment when
compacted. Areas outside the roadway shall be compacted to minimum of 90% Standard
Proctor density unless otherwise specified.
6.4 PAVEMENT DESIGN CRITERIA
6.4.1 Flexible Pavement
Flexible pavements are those pavements that have sufficiently low bending resistance to
maintain continuous contact with the underlying structure, yet have sufficient stability to
support a given traffic loading condition. Commonly known as asphaltic concrete
pavement.
Refer to Table 6-1 below for structural number coefficients for the pavement design.
Table 6-1 Pavement Strength Coefficients
Pavement Structure Component
Conventional Materials
Design Strength
Coefficients
(Per Inch of Material)
Limiting Test
Criteria
ACHM Surface Course
0.44
*2" Min. Course
ACHM Binder Course
0.44
*3" Min. Course
ACHM Base Course
0.36
R 90+
'4.5" Min. Course
Aggregate Base Course (Class 7)
0.14
R>72
6" Min. Course
Chemically Treated Subgrades (or
Approved Substitute)
Compressive
Strength of Field
Specimen
Cement Treated Subgrade
0.23
7 day, 650-1000 psi
Fly Ash Treated Subgrade
0.10
7 day, 150 psi @ 70°±
Lime Treated Subgrade
0.14
7 day, 160 psi, P1 <6
Kiln Dust Treated Subgrade
0.10
7 day, 150 psi, PI <6
Maximum lift is only limited by compaction requirements.
6.4.2 Rigid Pavement
A. General
Rigid pavements are those that possess a high bending resistance and distribute loads
over a large area of foundation soil. Commonly known as Portland Cement Concrete
Pavement.
B. Joint Design
The construction plans for rigid pavement areas shall include a joint pattern layout for
each street, alley and intersection. All joints and joint filling in rigid pavement shall
be designed and detailed in accordance with the current AASHTO standards.
6.4.3 Design Factors
A. Equivalent Single Axle Loads (ESAL)
Equivalent Single Axle Loads (ESAL) units are based on 18 kip (80 kN) axle loading
on each design lane. All data and design procedures in this section use ESAL units for
pavement loading repetitions. Maximum ESAL criteria for local residential and
collector streets are given in Table 6-2. Where existing or projected traffic is such
that maximum ESAL's are exceeded, a formal design will be required, at the
discretion of the City Engineer. ESAL calculations are required for arterial streets.
Directional distribution of ESAL's may be 50% unless the Traffic Study indicates
otherwise. Lane distribution factors shall be 80% for two lanes of travel in each
direction.
In the absence of truck traffic distribution data, 5% trucks shall be used, distributed
across truck types in accordance with Federal Highway Administration guidance for
urban arterial streets. The City Engineer may require a higher percentage of trucks to
be included in the calculations when existing or projected truck traffic is expected to
exceed 5%.
B. Design Serviceability
The Serviceability Index to be used for all City Roadways dedicated for public use is
given in Table 6-2.
C. Minimum Pavement Section
Table 6-2 provides the minimum acceptable pavement sections and Structural
Numbers for each roadway classification based on a minimum CBR of the subgrade
material of 8, and on the maximum number of ESAL's as specified. For lower CBR
values and higher ESAL's, pavement design calculations shall be provided. In
specifying layer thickness, the designer shall consider how the pavement section will
be physically constructed, including minimum asphalt layer thicknesses.
t
D. Portland Cement Concrete Working Stress (f)
t
The working stress (f) to be used in the design shall be 75 percent of that provided by
third -point beam loading, which shall have a minimum laboratory 28 -day strength of
600 psi based on actual tests of materials to be used.
E. Arterial and Collector Level Intersections
The pavement thickness design for arterial and collector level intersections shall be
the combined 20 -year design for both directions for the shared use areas. A separate
design analysis is required.
Table 6-2 Pavement Design Criteria
ROAD
20 -Year
Serviceability Index
Reli
Minimum
Default
Default
Minimum
CLASSIFICATION
Design
(PSI)
a-
Asphalt for
Aggregate
Full Depth
Concrete
Min.
Traffic
bllit
Composite
Base
Asphalt
for Rigid
Struct.
Information
y
Section
Course
Pavement
Section
Section
Thickness
No.
inches
Pa
pt
A PSI
Layer,
Layer,
Layer,
Layer,
MAXIMUM
inches
inches
inches
inches
ESAL'S
Init.
Final
Diff.
JL
HMA
ABC
Min.
Min.
LOCAL
50,000
4.5
2.0
2.5
80
3.0
8.0
5.5
6.0
2.42
COLLECTOR *
500,000
4.5
2.0
2.5
85
5.0
6
7
Design
3.04
ARTERIAL
Two lane
Design
4.5
2.5
2.0
95
Design
Design
Design
Design
Design
Four lane
Design
4.5
2.5
2.0
95
Design
Design
Design
Design
Design
* A pavement design may be required as requested by the City Engineer.
6.4.4 Pavement Materials
A. Aggregate Base Material
Materials for aggregate base courses shall meet the requirements of Section 303.02 of
the AHTD Standard Specifications Edition of 2014.
B. Asphalt Concrete Hot Mix
Materials for Asphalt Concrete Hot Mix base, binder, and surface courses shall meet
the requirements of the 2014 AHTD Standard Specifications referenced in the
following. NO MARSHALL MIXES ARE ALLOWED UNLESS SPECIFICALLY
AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY THE CITY ENGINEER.
Asphalt mix designs shall meet the requirements of Section 404.01(b), and Tables
405-1, 406-1, 407-1, and 407-2 of Sections 405, 406, and 407, with additional
requirements as follows:
Table 6-3 Asphalt Requirements
20 -Year
Number of Gyrations
Asphalt
Surface
Design
(N)
Grade
Course
Traffic
Aggregate
Information
Size
Allowed
ESAL'S
N'n^'ai
Noesien
Nma.
Nmas
<300k
6
50
115
64-22
9.5
300k-3 Million
7
75
160
70-22
9.5/12.5
>3 Million
8
100
205
76-22
12.5
3/8" (9.5) mm surface course shall be used on all residential and local streets. ''h"
(12.5 mm) surface course shall be used on arterial streets. Collector streets may use
either type of surface mix.
Lift thicknesses shall be a minimum of 3 times the maximum nominal aggregate size.
Maximum lift thicknesses will be limited by capability of compaction equipment to
achieve minimum compaction requirements, but will not be allowed to exceed 6
times the maximum nominal aggregate size.
C. Concrete Requirements
Materials for Portland Cement Concrete Pavement shall meet the requirements of the
latest edition of the AHTD Standard Specifications. Concrete for paving shall be
Class B concrete with a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 4,000 psi and shall
have air entrainment of 4 to 7 percent.
6.4.5 Special Considerations
A. Staged Construction
This is an alternative for the Developer to provide a minimum thickness pavement
during construction, and after repairs, construct the final lift of asphalt, providing for
a new finished pavement surface.
(HMA) may be submitted for approval with a minimum wearing course thickness of
2.0 inches. If the full pavement section is not to be placed immediately, a pavement
design for staged construction may be required by the City Engineer. The staged
construction design must include asphalt thickness for each proposed stage.
Calculations, traffic numbers, and construction truck traffic numbers supporting the
staged design must also be submitted. For staged construction, accommodations must
be provided for the paved surface to drain with no water left standing on the
pavement.
B. Full Depth Sections
Full depth asphalt pavement sections will be considered on a case by case basis where
depth of bedrock, drainage, and soil conditions are compatible with full -depth asphalt.
When permitted by the City Engineer, full depth asphalt pavements shall consist of
one or more layers of black base or binder course topped with one or more layers of
surface course.
C. Rehabilitating Existing Asphalt Streets
Prior to overlaying existing asphalt, the City Engineer may accept nondestructive
testing to determine the amount of overlay necessary to bring the street to current
standards. All "pot -holes," utility trench settlement, cracking, and any similar
imperfections shall be repaired to the City Engineer's satisfaction prior to overlaying.
D. Special Requirements
The City Engineer may require full depth asphalt, Portland cement concrete or
chemically treated base or subgrade in locations where traffic, utilities, type of
construction, subsurface drainage, or time of construction would make asphalt on
aggregate base impractical.
6.5 PAVEMENT DESIGN REPORT
The pavement design report shall be prepared by or under the supervision of and signed
and stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Arkansas. The report
shall make a recommendation for a typical pavement structural section based on known
site soil conditions and a valid traffic impact study, when required. The report shall be
submitted in pdf format.
6.5.1 Required Information for Pavement Design Report
A. List of Required Information
1. Project Name.
2. Owner Name and Contact Information.
3. Vicinity map to locate the investigated area.
4. Scaled drawings showing the location of final borings.
5. Plat with street names.
6. Scaled drawings showing the estimated extent of subgrade soil types and ESAL for
each street classification.
7. Pavement design alternatives for each street classification.
8. Tabular listing of sample designation, sample depth, Group Number, liquid limit,
plasticity index, percent passing the No. 200 sieve, AASHTO Classification,
Group Index and soil description.
9. Swell/consolidation tests.
10. Borrow source identification.
11. Design calculations for all phases of soil report.
12. Design coefficient used for asphalt, base course, etc. Refer to Table 6-1.
13. Mix design test results as discussed in Chapter 11, Street Inspection and
Testing Procedures, where chemical stabilization has been approved.
14. A discussion of potential subgrade soil problems including, but not limited to:
a. Heave or settlement prone soils.
b. Frost susceptible soils.
c. Ground water.
d. Drainage considerations (surface and subsurface).
e. Cold weather construction (if appropriate).
f. Soluble sulfates in subgrade.
g. Other factors or properties that could affect the design or performance of the
pavement system.
15. Recommendations to alleviate or mitigate the impact of problems discussed in
Item 14 above.
16. Professional Engineer Stamp
CHAPTER 7- TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
7.1
GENERAL..................................................................................................3
7.1.1
Installation Responsibility.........................................................................3
7.2
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS........................................................................3
7.2.1
Traffic Signal Design Requirements........................................................3
A. Design Requirements............................................................................3
7.3
TRAFFIC SIGNING....................................................................................4
7.3.1
General.......................................................................................................4
A. Type and Location of Signs...................................................................4
B. Design, Installation, and Maintenance...................................................4
C. New Roadway.......................................................................................4
D. Other Standards.................................................................................... 5
E. Sign Posts, Supports, and Mountings....................................................5
F. Sign Reflectivity.....................................................................................5
G. Backing Plates....................................................................................... 5
7.3.2 Intersections...............................................................................................5
A. Street Name Sign..................................................................................5
7.3.3 Traffic Control Signs.................................................................................6
A. Design and Size.....................................................................................6
B. Regulatory .............................................................................................6
C. Warning.................................................................................................7
7.3.4 Roundabouts..............................................................................................7
7.3.5 Temporary Construction Signage............................................................7
7.4 PAVEMENT MARKING AND STRIPING...................................................8
7.4.1 General.......................................................................................................8
A.
Type and Location of Striping and Markings..........................................8
B.
Design, Installation, and Maintenance...................................................8
C.
New Roadway.......................................................................................8
7.4.2 Pavement Markings (Symbols and Arrows)............................................8
A.
General.................................................................................................. 8
B.
Preformed Thermoplastic Pavement Marking Specifications .................8
C.
Crosswalks............................................................................................9
D.
Stop Bars............................................................................................... 9
E.
Symbols................................................................................................. 9
F.
Roundabouts..........................................................................................9
7.4.3 Striping.......................................................................................................9
A. General.................................................................................................. 9
B. Broken Line............................................................................................
9
C. Dotted Line..........................................................................................10
D. Turn Bay Line......................................................................................10
E. Centerline............................................................................................10
F. Parking Stalls and Angle Parking.........................................................10
G. Bikeway...............................................................................................10
7.4.4 Temporary Striping..................................................................................10
A. Specifications.......................................................................................10
B. Time Duration Limit..............................................................................10
C. Extensions...........................................................................................10
LIST OF TABLES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Tables
LIST OF FIGURES
Figures are Located at the End of the Chapter
Figure 7-1
Crosswalk and Stop Bar
Figure 7-2
Turn Arrow Marking
Figure 7-3
"Only" Marking
Figure 7-4
Broken Line Striping
Figure 7-5
Solid Line Striping
Figure 7-6
Center Turn Lane Striping
Figure 7-7
Raised Pavement Markers
Figure 7-8
Future Street Extension Sign
CHAPTER 7- TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
7.1 GENERAL
This chapter describes general signal, signing, and striping design requirements
for use in the City of Fayetteville. All design and construction of signals, signing,
and striping shall be in conformance with this chapter and the latest revision of
the MUTCD. The traffic signal and signage plans shall be included in the
construction plan submittal.
7.1.1 Installation Responsibility
The cost of the installation of traffic signals, street signage and pavement
markings is the responsibility of the developer when required with a proposed
development. The work and materials necessary for the installation shall be
included as part of the street improvements.
7.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
7.2.1 Traffic Signal Design Requirements
The design of traffic signals shall be performed by a qualified Traffic Engineer
approved by the City. The design will follow the latest edition of"Standard
Specifications for Highway Construction," published by AHTD.
A. Design Requirements
1. All mast arm/signal poles, luminaire arms, extensions, foundations, pull
boxes and conduit shall meet AHTD Standards and details.
2. Street light luminaire shall be LED or a 250 Watt HPS streetlight fixture
with cut off design.
3. Controller and cabinet shall be Peek equipment.
4. Radio shall be Ip addressable or compatible with closed loop system.
5. Tomar fire preemption system complete with detectors, wiring, and card in
the cabinet is required.
6. Attachment height for mast arms to signal pole shall be at 20 feet.
7. Video detection with wiring and detector cards for detection counting
traffic on all approach lanes shall be used per Traffic Superintendent
approval.
8. Black, 12"- 12"- 12" polycarbonate signal head tunnel visors with 5" black
back plates shall be mounted using astrobrackets over the center of each
lane. Side of pole mounted 12"-12"-12" are for the far side right, which
will cover any dedicated right turn lanes. Use of far side left 12"-12"-12"
or 12"-12"-12"-12" heads with tunnel visors are determined on an
intersection by intersection basis but will be used in most cases on State
Highways or Arterials with significant large truck traffic. Section heads
shall not be doghouse style.
9. Black 16 -inch LED pedestrian heads (hand/man) countdown with visors
and a clamshell/banding mounting system are required with ADA
pedestrian buttons for all standard pedestrian movements. Crate style
protection shall be provided for all
pedestrian heads.
10. Two 3 -inch conduits (Schedule 40 PVC minimum) will be used for wiring
between the signal bases and the cabinet.
11. Pedestrian buttons shall be the Pelro SE -2000-08-P33 type with audio
alert, LED light, and sign housingiback plate.
12. The City of Fayetteville operates its own communications network for the
traffic management system, and as such, any new traffic signal installation
shall include the design and expansion of that communications network
from an approved existing access point to the new signal. The design and
expansion of the communications network shall be per the traffic
operations specifications current at that time.
7.3 TRAFFIC SIGNING
7.3.1 General
A. Type and Location of Signs
The Traffic Superintendent shall make the final determination regarding the
type and location of signage controls within the city right-of-way. These
controls shall include traffic control signs, street name signs, delineators, and
permanent barricades. AHTD requirements shall apply for all signage within
AHTD right-of-way.
B. Design, Installation, and Maintenance
Because the City will maintain the permanent traffic control devices on public
rights -of -way, all traffic control devices shall be fabricated and installed in
accordance with this chapter and the latest revision of the MUTCD.
C. New Roadway
Permanent signage, unless otherwise approved by the Traffic Superintendent,
shall be completely in place before any new roadway is opened to the public.
D. Other Standards
These Standards are to be used in conjunction with other applicable City
Regulations.
E. Sign Posts, Supports, and Mountings
Sign Post. The post shall be 12' 2#/ft green U -channel post. If the sign
area is greater than 6 sf, then the post must be 3#/ft.
Sign Bolts. Signs shall be mounted to the post with a minimum of two
5/16" hex bolts with metal washers and nylon washer (against sign face) at
the top of sign.
F. Sign Reflectivity
All traffic control signs must be fabricated with reflective materials. All
reflective materials to be a minimum of high intensity material or greater per
ASTM TYPE III. All signs or traffic control devices must have a 7 -year
materials warranty.
G. Backing Plates
Aluminum blanks of .080 gauge are standard, except for signs larger than 36 x
36 inches, which shall be .100 or .125 gauge aluminum.
7.3.2 Intersections
A. Street Name Sign
General. All street name signs must conform to these standards. If the
intersection has a traffic signal, street name signs will be designated as
part of the signal.
Minor Intersection. Nine -inch plates shall be used at all minor
intersections; lengths will vary to fit street names.
Major Intersection. Nine -inch plates shall be used at all major
intersections, which include the intersections with Collector and Arterial
Roadways.
Sign Assembly. There shall be one plate for each road, with a minimum of
two plates per street sign assembly. Typical installation shall include two
street name signs, one for each direction. For signs with lengths of 18" —
30" use .125 gage blank thickness; for signs 36" — 48" us .125 gage blank
thickness.
5. Sign Face.
a. Letter Size - 6"; Height of Sign Blank — 9".
b. Color. Letters and numbers are to be white on a green background
face. The colors shall not fade when exposed to an accelerated test of
ultraviolet light equivalent to 5 years of outdoor exposure. No silk
screened signs are permitted.
c. Border. There shall be a .625" white border on post mounted street
name signs.
d. The street names shall be a combination of upper and lower case with
the suffix (St., Ave., Ln....) being in 3.5" upper and lower case.
Street Name. Street names designations should be obtained from the
approved plat.
B. Stop Signs
1. Location of all stop signs shall be determined and discussed in the TIS,
when required.
2. Stop signs will be placed in accordance with the TIS, approved
construction plans, and the MUTCD. Stop signs shall be placed at point of
curvature (PC) behind attached sidewalk and before the access ramp.
7.3.3 Traffic Control Signs
A. Design and Size
Sign specifications and diagrams are detailed in the latest revision of the
Federal "Standard Highway Signs," latest version. This publication is
available from the U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway
Administration. Acceptable sign sizes are listed in the standard column of the
table printed with each diagram. Expressway and construction signs shall be a
minimum 36 inches.
B. Regulatory
1. Reflectivity. All regulatory signs, except parking, shall be ASTM TYPE
III grade reflectivity or greater. This includes the red series and black on
white signs.
2. Sheeting Material. All signs shall be fabricated with sheeting material,
including letters.
3. Stop Sign. Stop signs shall be a minimum of 30 inches and ASTM TYPE
III sheeting or greater.
4. Yield Sign. For minor intersections only, a 36"x36"x36" yield sign may
be used in lieu of a stop sign, at the discretion of the City according to
MUTCD.
5. Parking/No Parking Sign. Designated parking and "no parking" zones
shall be signed in accordance with MUTCD. No silk screened signs are
permitted.
C. Warning
1. Reflectivity Requirements. All pedestrian crossing, school crossing, and
W16 -7P signs shall be made with diamond grade fluorescent yellow/green
sheeting.
2. "Future Street Extension" Sign and Barricades.
Dead End. All dead-end streets shall have a Type III barricade with
appropriate advance warning sign(s). Type III Barricades shall have a
"Future Road Extension" sign mounted on the barricade. See Figure 7-8.
Crosswalk Sign. Crosswalks shall be signed where adjacent to a school
and on an established school pedestrian route per Traffic Superintendent
approval. There are usually a minimum of 4 signs per crosswalk. The
color and installation shall be completed according to MUTCD. The color
shall be fluorescent yellow green. The diamond shaped sign shall have a
minimum height and width of 36 inches.
7.3.4 Roundabouts
Signage in advance of the circulating roadway shall be required. Use "Yield At
Roundabout" (W3 -2a, 30 x 30 inches; R1-2, 36 x 36 inches), "Roundabout
Advisory Sign" (RB-1, 24 x 24 inches) and "Reduced Speed Ahead" (R2 -5a,24" x
30") signs. The "Yield" sign (Rl-2, 36 x 36 inches) shall be located at each entry
to the circulatory roadway. An "arrow" sign, designating direction of travel in
circulatory roadway, shall be located within the central island. Refer to MUTCD.
Specifications for traffic control signs, listed in MUTCD , shall apply to these
signs.
7.3.5 Temporary Construction Signage
All temporary construction signage shall be placed according to MUTCD
standards. All temporary signage is subject to review and approval by the City.
Temporary street lane closures shall be coordinated with the City, emergency
services and transportation providers. Detour plans shall be submitted for review
when detours are required.
7.4 PAVEMENT MARKING AND STRIPING
7.4.1 General
A. Type and Location of Striping and Markings
Per MUTCD Section 3 B.01: Centerline markings shall be placed on arterials
and collectors 20 feet or more in width and having an ADT of 6000 vpd or
greater.
The Traffic Superintendent shall make the final determination in regards to
the type and location of pavement striping and marking within the right-of-
way during the review of the project signing and striping plans.
B. Design, Installation, and Maintenance
The City maintains the permanent pavement striping and marking on public
rights -of -way after completion of the warranty period. All such devices shall
be specified and installed in accordance with these Standards; all designs shall
be in accordance with these Standards and the latest revision of the MUTCD.
C. New Roadway
Permanent striping and marking, unless otherwise approved by the City
Engineer, shall be completely in place before any new Roadway is opened to
the public.
7.4.2 Pavement Markings (Symbols and Arrows)
A. General
Preformed thermoplastic shall be used on all pavement markings such as
arrows, "onlys," crosswalks, railroad crossings, school crossings, stopbars,
and bike symbols.
B. Preformed Thermoplastic Pavement Marking Specifications
The prefabricated markings described shall be 125 mils in thickness unless
otherwise specified and consist of white or yellow pigmented plastic film with
imbedded reflective glass spheres, uniformly distributed throughout their
entire cross-sectional area. It shall be possible to affix the markings to
bituminous or Portland cement concrete pavements by either a pressure
sensitive precoated adhesive or a liquid contact cement and shall have a black
contrasting border 4" wide. Prefabricated legends and symbols shall conform
to the applicable shapes and sizes as outlined in the MUTCD.
C. Crosswalks
General. Crosswalks shall be used at all signalized intersections, approved
crossings, school routes, adjacent to schools, and as otherwise directed.
Standard Crosswalk. White 10 -feet long x 12 -inch wide bars with 48"
spacing shall be used for all crosswalks.
D. Stop Bars
All stop bars shall be white and a minimum of 12 inches wide. Stop bars are
required at signalized locations where the speed limit is 35 mph or higher and
other locations specified by the City Engineer.
E. Symbols
Preformed thermoplastic pavement marking standard material shall be a
minimum of 125 mils thick unless otherwise approved. This material shall be
used for all arrows, "only," bike symbols, bike diamonds, sharrows, railroad
crossing symbols, etc.
F. Roundabouts
Yield Line. The roundabout shall require a yield line at the point of entry
into the circulatory roadway unless otherwise approved by the City
Engineer.
Crosswalk. Generally, crosswalks do not need special markings on each
approach leg at a roundabout.
Lane use arrows shall be fish-hook type with circle.
7.4.3 Striping
A. General
Typical striping widths for lane lines are 4 inches, unless otherwise noted.
Double yellow centerline must have a 4 -inch minimum gap between
stripes.
Preformed thermoplastic shall be used on all striping. Thermoplastic as
specified in 7.4.2 shall be used.
All striping on sealcoats shall require a layout line. Prior to striping, tabs
are required for sealcoats (prior to the sealcoat process). All other
conditions require spot taping at an interval of 25 ft or closer.
B. Broken Line
All broken lines shall be 4 -inch wide using a 40 foot cycle (10' long with 30'
gap).
C. Dotted Line
All dotted lines shall be 4 -inch wide using a 6 foot cycle (2' long with 4' gap).
D. Turn Bay Line
All turn bay lines shall be created with a minimum 4 -inch wide line. However,
if a turn bay occurs on a horizontal curve, the bay taper from the start of the
double wide 4" may be marked with short 4 -inch wide dotted lines (2' long
with 4' gap).
E. Centerline
All centerline striping shall be double yellow, each a minimum of 4 inches
wide, with an 8 -inch minimum gap between the two.
F. Parking Stalls and Angle Parking
All striping for parking shall be white and 4 inches wide. All edge lines of
parking areas shall also be white and a minimum of 4 inches wide.
G. Bikeway
A 4 -inch minimum wide white stripe shall be used for Bike Lanes.
7.4.4 Temporary Striping
All temporary striping shall conform to "Standard Specifications for Highway
Construction," published by AHTD, the latest revision except as herein amended.
When approved, temporary striping shall be required prior to the opening of a
Roadway for travel where pavement and/or permanent striping cannot be
completed due to weather and/or time constraints or for staged construction.
A. Specifications
Temporary striping shall be the same color and width as for permanent
striping. Temporary striping shall consist of tabs, 4 x 4 -inch (min.) tape, or
paint depending on the pavement surface, spaced at 25 -foot intervals.
B. Time Duration Limit
Temporary striping is permitted for no more than 7 days unless for staged
construction or otherwise approved.
C. Extensions
Extensions must be requested in writing if weather does not allow installation
of permanent striping.
p '- 4-0' p 4L0".1 _____
CONTINUOUS WHITE THERMOPLASTIC I I I _____
MARKING, SPACING AS SHOWN, ACCESS
RAMP TO ACCESS RAMP
WHITE THERMOPLASTIC STOP BAR
z
IMI
I I I I I I I I I I I I
CITY CF
f
- MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS 'DATE.
FCURE.
ARKANSAS February 23 2415
RIPTION:
ENGINEERING DIVISION CROSSWALK AND STOPBAR 7-1
0
io
0
co
NOTE: ALL PAVEMENT MARKINGS TO BE
THERMOPLASTIC MATERIAL
CITY of nrLe. MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS ogre. ricURe.
October 7.2014
e e DESCRIPTION 7 2
KANSAS
TURN ARROW MARKING
ENGINEERINGDIVISION
6'
October 7. 2014
raycucvwc
ARKANSAS "ONLY" MARKING 7'
ENGINEERING DIVISION
10 30'
10'
30
RAISED PAVEMENT MARKER (TYP.)
10'
4"SKIP YELLOW CENTER LINE
ff__
STRIPE TO BE PAINTED ON
CENTER LINE
ASPHALT PAVEMENT
4" SKIP YELLOW
10' 30'
CENTER LINE -
10'
30'
RAISEDPAVEMENT MARKER (TYP.)
10'
•.j_
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
CITY OF
V
'�ttVtllARKANSAS
ENGINEERING DIVISION
TITLE:
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
°""'
February 23 2415
FCUFl
-
7 4
DESCRIPTION:
BROKEN LINE STRIPING
4" CONTINUOUS YELLOW
CENTER LINE
RAISED PAVEMENT MARKER (TYP.)
4" CONTINUOUS YELLOW
°'. OF
V
ARKANSAS
ENGINEERINGDIVISION
STREET STANDARDS
°""' ..
ves',v v
7-5
DESCRIPTION:
SOLID LINE STRIPING
jFIRUFlMINIMUM
0
0
D
z
~0
O
o
U w
(O
p
ao
NOTE:
THE PAIRS OF ARROWS
SHOULD BE INSTALLED
A MAX. OF 500APART
2"
O
0
J
W
>-
0
CITY OF
TIRE:
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
DATE:
0,5
FIGURE':
oescRlarloN:
CENTER TURN LANE STRIPING
�SDIVISION
7-6
ENGINEERING
4.7"
TYPE II
RED/CLEAR OR
YELLOW/YELLOW
TYPE I
CLEAR OR
YELLOWC-D _
f
NOTE:
THE RED LENS OF THE TYPE II
R.P.M. SHALL FACE THE INCORRECT
TRAFFIC MOVEMENT
CITY OF lUKE. DATE'. FIGURE.
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS October 7. 201
DESCRIPTION. 7 7
ENGINEERINGDIVISION
RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS
[a
Public Right of Way
RESERVED FOR
STREET EXTENSION
r"
1. SIGN SHALL HAVE ASTM TYPE III GRADE REFLECTIVITY.
2. SIGN SHALL BE WHITE WITH BLACK LETTERING.
3. INCLUDE FOUR 3/8" DIAMETER HOLES FOR MOUNTING.
4. SIGN SHALL BE MOUNTED ON A TYPE III BARRICADE.
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS 16.2015
ENGINEERING DIVISION FUTURE STREET EXTENSION SIGN 7-8
CHAPTER 8 - PEDESTRIAN FACILITIES DESIGN AND
TECHNICAL CRITERIA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
8.1
GENERAL..................................................................................................3
8.1.1
Reference Documents...............................................................................3
8.1.2
ADA Requirements....................................................................................3
8.1.3
Obstructions...............................................................................................3
8.1.4
Sidewalk Underdrains (Chases)...........................................................3
8.1.5
Pedestrian Crossings............................................................................3
8.1.6
Pedestrian Refuge Areas......................................................................4
8.1.7
Safety Railing (Handrails).....................................................................4
8.2
SIDEWALKS..............................................................................................4
8.2.1
General Layout and Design Criteria.........................................................4
A. Width......................................................................................................4
B. Shy Distance..........................................................................................4
C. Minimum Distance to Slope...................................................................4
D. Concrete Requirements.........................................................................5
E. Concrete Thickness...............................................................................
5
F. Sidewalk Crossings of Driveways and Alleys.........................................5
G. Sidewalk Elevation................................................................................5
H. Slope.....................................................................................................5
I. Joints.......................................................................................................
5
J. Finish......................................................................................................
6
K. Curing Compound..................................................................................6
L. Existing Sidewalks.................................................................................6
M. Storm Water Runoff at Curb Cuts.........................................................7
8.3
ACCESS RAMPS......................................................................................7
8.3.1
Ramp Requirements..................................................................................7
A. Locations...............................................................................................7
B. Width......................................................................................................
7
C. Slope.....................................................................................................7
D. Flared Sides..........................................................................................7
E. Finish.....................................................................................................7
F. Curing Compound..................................................................................8
G. Detectable Warnings.............................................................................8
8.4
MULTI -USE TRAILS..................................................................................8
8.4.1
General Layout and Design Criteria.........................................................8
A.
Width......................................................................................................
8
B.
Materials................................................................................................8
C.
Grades...................................................................................................
8
D.
Asphalt Trail Requirements (By approval of the Trail Coordinator Only)9
E.
Concrete Trail Requirements.................................................................9
F.
Trail Shoulders.....................................................................................10
G. Tie Back Slopes..................................................................................10
H. Trail Signage.......................................................................................10
I. Street Crosswalks.................................................................................10
J. Striping.................................................................................................10
K. Location Criteria...................................................................................11
L. Overhead Clearance............................................................................11
M. Drainage Design.................................................................................11
8.4.2 Design Speed...........................................................................................11
8.5 SIDEWALK UNDERDRAINS (CHASES)................................................11
8.6 PEDESTRIAN CROSSINGS....................................................................11
8.7 PEDESTRIAN REFUGE AREAS.............................................................11
LIST OF TABLES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Tables
LIST OF FIGURES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Figures
CHAPTER 8 - PEDESTRIAN FACILITIES DESIGN AND
TECHNICAL CRITERIA
8.1 GENERAL
This chapter sets forth the minimum criteria to be used in the design of all
sidewalks, access ramps, and other pedestrian facilities within the right-of-way, or
other public easements.
8.1.1 Reference Documents
Within this chapter, AASHTO's A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and
Streets, as published by the American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials, and the ITE Designing Walkable Urban Thoroughfares
were used as a reference.
8.1.2 ADA Requirements
All pedestrian facilities shall be designed in accordance with American
Disabilities Act (ADA) regulations and the requirements of these Standards. Any
variances from these requirements shall be in accordance with ADA requirements
and shall be approved by the City Engineer prior to construction.
8.1.3 Obstructions
Manholes, utility poles or other appurtenances or obstructions, should not be
located in sidewalks or trails unless specifically approved by the City Engineer.
A minimum ADA accessible path of 3 feet in width should be provided that is
free of such obstruction when feasible.
8.1.4 Sidewalk Underdrains (Chases)
Sidewalk underdrains shall not interfere with the pedestrian's use of the sidewalk.
Underdrains shall not be located within an access ramp, curb cut, or driveway.
8.1.5 Pedestrian Crossings
All crosswalks shall be marked in accordance with Chapter 7, Traffic Control
Devices. Crosswalks will be required at all signalized intersections, school areas,
and high pedestrian areas as designated by the City Engineer.
8.1.6 Pedestrian Refuge Areas
For Arterials with raised medians and on splitter islands for roundabouts, a
pedestrian refuge area shall be created in the median to increase pedestrian safety.
See Figure 5-8 and Figure 5- 9.
8.1.7 Safety Railing (Handrails)
Safety railings will be required on any drop adjacent to a sidewalk/trail greater
than 30" that has a slope of 1:1 or greater.
8.2 SIDEWALKS
8.2.1 General Layout and Design Criteria
A. Width
Minimum sidewalk widths for the various street classifications shall be as
specified in the City of Fayetteville Master Street Plan. The City Engineer
may require additional width for activity areas and routes leading to and from
these areas. The final sidewalk width shall be determined through additional
study of higher pedestrian traffic areas.
When a sidewalk is located adjacent to the back of curb where on street
parking is allowed, the sidewalk shall be widened by 1.5' to accommodate the
car doors opening onto the sidewalk area.
B. Shy Distance
A shy distance of 2 feet is required where vertical barriers (walls, fences,
signs, etc) greater than 3.5 feet in height are adjacent to the sidewalk and
extend more than 4 feet in length parallel to the sidewalk. A shy distance of
1.5' is required from the back of curb. A shy distance of 1 foot is required for
all other fixed obstacles. Shy distances shall be added to the minimum widths
of sidewalks specified in the Master Street Plan or required by the City
Engineer to determine the final sidewalk width.
C. Minimum Distance to Slope
There shall be a minimum of 1 foot between the sidewalk and the beginning
of a slope.
D. Concrete Requirements
All sidewalks, access ramps and driveway approaches shall be constructed of
a Portland Cement concrete mixture that includes at least 5.5 bags of cement
per cubic yard and contains 4 to 7 percent air entrainment and that will
produce a concrete of a compressive strength of 3,500 psi after 28 days set
under standard laboratory methods.
E. Concrete Thickness
All sidewalks not within driveways shall be a minimum of 4 inches thick
concrete. All sidewalks within a driveway shall be a minimum of 6 inches
thick.
F. Sidewalk Crossings of Driveways and Alleys
Sidewalks shall be continuous through driveways and alleys. Sidewalks shall
have an expansion joint at the edge of sidewalk opposite the street. The
sidewalk edge adjacent to the street shall have at least 1 inch deep grooved
joint mark (cannot be a saw cut) to clearly define the sidewalk through the
driveway or alley.
G. Sidewalk Elevation
The back of sidewalk elevation shall be such that the slope from the back of
sidewalk to the top of curb is 2% unless otherwise approved by the City
Engineer.
H. Slope
Cross Slope. Sidewalk cross slopes shall be a minimum of 1 percent and a
maximum of 2%. The cross slope shall be towards the street unless
otherwise approved.
Longitudinal Slope. Longitudinal slope of sidewalks shall be consistent
with the adjacent street slopes.
ADA Requirements for Steeper Slopes. Sidewalks with greater than 5
percent longitudinal slope or those not adjacent to a street, shall be
constructed to meet ADA requirements by use of ramps and landings,
construction of switchbacks, or other acceptable means.
I. Joints
Material. Expansion joint material shall be asphalt impregnated
fiberboard meeting the requirements of AASHTO M213, or other joint
material meeting the requirements of the latest edition of the AHTD
standard specifications.
Location. Full depth expansion joints shall be provided where sidewalks
abut drainage structures, retaining walls, building faces, and all other fixed
objects. Expansion joint material shall be provided at each cold joint.
One -quarter depth (1 inch) weakened plane joints, or saw -cut joints shall
be placed in sidewalks at regular intervals not greater than the width of the
sidewalk. 3. Saw Joints. Saw joints shall be filled with self leveling
sealant such as Sonneborn SLI or equivalent meeting the requirements of
ASTM C 920, Type S.
Joint Sealant. All expansion joints and saw joints shall be sealed with
joint sealant meeting the requirements of ASTM C 920, Type S. A self
leveling sealant shall be used for horizontal surfaces. A non -sag sealant
shall be used for vertical or nearly vertical surfaces.
J. Finish
All sidewalks shall have a broom finish.
K. Curing Compound
All sidewalks require the application of a concrete curing compound or the
concrete is to be kept moist for seven (7) days.
L. Existing Sidewalks
When redevelopment is proposed on properties with existing sidewalks, the
plans shall show the location of all existing and proposed sidewalk
improvements. In accordance with Chapter 166.04 of the UDC, each
development will be subject to review of the overall impact to the sidewalks
to evaluate the extent of the sidewalk replacement.
Widening of the existing sidewalks to meet current sidewalk width standards
is not allowed.
Removal and replacement of the existing sidewalks is required for all:
a. Segments of the sidewalk, including ramps, that do not meet all applicable
ADA standards, including cross slope and running slope.
b. Segments that have cracked and/or settled to the extent that they are out of
ADA compliance. This is defined as more than'/4 inch of vertical
displacement or cracks or joints more than''/ inch wide.
c. Segments that display surface spalling or other distress such that a trip
hazard (more than'/4 inch vertical displacement) is created.
d. Segments of sidewalk damaged during construction to the extent that any
of the items above apply.
M. Storm Water Runoff at Curb Cuts
Drainage shall meet the requirements specified in Chapter 4, in the
section/subsection titled Drainage Systems/Sidewalk Culvert (Chases).
8.3 ACCESS RAMPS
8.3.1 Ramp Requirements
Access ramps shall be installed at all sides of all intersections and at certain mid -
block locations for all new construction or reconstruction of curb and sidewalk.
Access ramps shall meet ADA requirements to the maximum extent feasible.
A. Locations
Intersections. Two access ramps shall be included at all intersection corners.
On T -intersections, corresponding access ramp are required opposite the
intersecting street. Access ramps shall not be placed in designated parking
areas nor in or across from driveways. Ramps shall be located to avoid
conflicts with the storm drain inlet depressions.
B. Width
The minimum width of an access ramp shall be 48 inches excluding the flared
sides.
C. Slope
The slope of the ramp shall not be greater than 8.33% (1:12) for all new
developments.
In existing developed rights -of -way, it may be necessary to install a steeper
ramp to provide access to street crossings. In an alteration, slopes as steep as
1:10 (10%) are permitted for the distance of a 6 -inch rise if it is not
technically feasible to provide a ramp at 1:12 (8.33%). For a 3 -inch rise, the
maximum slope maybe as steep as 1:8 (12.5%) where necessary.
D. Flared Sides
The slope of the flared sides shall not be greater than 10% (1:10).
E. Finish
Access ramps shall have a broom finish.
F. Curing Compound
All access ramps require the application of a concrete curing compound or the
concrete is to be kept moist for seven (7) days.
G. Detectable Warnings
Detectable warning devices (truncated domes) meeting ADA requirements
shall be installed on all access ramps.
8.4 MULTI -USE TRAILS
8.4.1 General Layout and Design Criteria
A. Width
The minimum width of trails shall be 12 feet and shall follow the trail cross-
section guidelines of the Master Transportation Plan.
B. Materials
Selection of trail surface materials depends upon site conditions. Final
determination of trail construction materials shall be made by the Trail
Coordinator.
1. Concrete. Trails shall be constructed of concrete when located in or near
floodprone areas, vehicular road crossings, access ramps and within street
right of way.
2. Asphalt. Trails may be constructed of asphalt in areas where the trail is
located above floodprone areas and away from vehicular traffic and street
right of way.
C. Grades
All trails shall be constructed with a 2% maximum cross slope in the same
direction as the existing grade unless otherwise designated to allow drainage
to sheet flow across the trail. Trails adjacent to streets shall have 2%
maximum cross slope towards the street. Longitudinal grade shall not exceed
5%. Longitudinal grade may be varied by the Trails Coordinator for sites with
difficult topography. In such cases, the AASHTO longitudinal grade
requirement for bicycles shall apply.
D. Asphalt Trail Requirements (By approval of the Trail Coordinator Only)
Asphalt trails shall be constructed of asphalt concrete hot mix surface course.
Type III surface course meeting the requirements of AHTD Specifications.
Asphalt trail sections shall be constructed to the following standards:
1. Surface. Asphalt trail sections shall have a minimum 3 inch thick surface.
2. Base Course. Base course for asphalt trails shall consist of a minimum 6
inch thickness of Class 7 aggregate compacted to 95% M.P.D.
3. Subgrade. The top 24 inches of subgrade shall meet the requirements of
Chapter 6, Section 6.3.5 for street construction. Existing material not
meeting these requirements shall be removed and replaced with approved
select fill and compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Density (S.P.D.).
Specific site conditions may require the additional undercut, placement of
stone backfill or other methods in order to create a solid base.
E. Concrete Trail Requirements
All concrete portions of trails shall be constructed of a portland cement
concrete mixture with a compressive strength of 3500 p.s.i. and with 4 to 7
percent air entrainment. Concrete trail sections shall be constructed to the
following standards:
1. Surface. Concrete trail portions shall have a minimum 4 inch thick
concrete surface reinforce with fibers or welded wire fabric with a
medium broom finish.
2. Base Course. Base course for concrete trails shall consist of a 4 inch
minimum thickness of class 7 aggregate compacted to 95% M.P.D.
3. Subgrade. The top 24 inches of subgrade shall meet the requirements of
Chapter 6, Section 6.3.5 for street construction. Existing material not
meeting these requirements shall be removed and replaced with approved
select fill and compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Density (S.P.D.).
Specific site conditions may require the additional undercut, placement of
stone backfill or other methods in order to create a solid base. This
requirement does not apply where trails are constructed within the right of
way adjacent to a street.
4. Expansion joints. Full depth expansion joints shall be provided where
trails abut drainage structures, retaining walls, building faces, and all other
fixed objects. Expansion joint material shall be provided at each cold
joint. Expansion joint material shall be asphalt impregnated fiberboard
meeting the requirements of AASHTO M213, or other joint material
meeting the requirements of the latest edition of the AHTD standard
specifications.
5. Contraction Joints. One inch depth weakened plane joints, or saw -cut
joints, shall be placed in trail at regular intervals matching the trail width,
but not greater than 12 feet apart.
6. Joint Sealant. All expansion joints and saw joints shall be sealed with
joint sealant such as Sonneborn SL! meeting the requirements of ASTM C
920, Type S. A self leveling sealant shall be used for horizontal surfaces.
A non -sag sealant shall be used for vertical or nearly vertical surfaces.
F. Trail Shoulders
A two foot shoulder adjacent to the trail shall be graded smooth and should
not exceed 2% cross -slope in the same direction as the trail. The Trail
Coordinator shall determine the appropriateness and maintenance
requirements of plants and grasses adjacent to trails.
G. Tie Back Slopes
The ground beyond the shoulder shall meet the existing grade with a
maximum slope of 3:1. A swale may be required on the uphill side of the trail
to direct stormwater runoff to a storm sewer system or culvert crossing. These
may be required where runoff is concentrated onto the trail.
H. Trail Signage
Trail signage shall comply with the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices, Part 9 — Traffic Controls for Bicycle Facilities.
I. Street Crosswalks
Trails that intersect and cross public streets shall have a red concrete
crosswalk with two foot wide white thermoplastic stripes on each side. Where
appropriate, this crosswalk may be raised 2.5 inches above pavement surface.
The concrete shall be colored with integral color mix (Soloman Dry Pigment
417 Apple Red with 4% loading) or with thermoplastic (Decomark
Herringbone Patter, Brick Red).
J. Striping
Striping shall conform to the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices,
Part 9 — Traffic Controls for Bicycle Facilities. Additional striping may be
required for increased safety.
K. Location Criteria
Multi -use trail locations shall be based on safety, circulation, and access
considerations.
L. Overhead Clearance
All multi -use trails shall have a minimum of 10 feet clear vertical distance
above the path.
M. Drainage Design
All culvert crossings shall be designed to carry the 10 -year storm event.
8.4.2 Design Speed
For paved surfaces a minimum design speed of 20 mph shall be used. Where
grades exceed 4 percent, a design speed of 30 mph shall be used.
8.5 SIDEWALK UNDERDRAINS (CHASES)
Sidewalk underdrains shall not interfere with the pedestrian's use of the sidewalk.
Underdrains shall not be located within an access ramp, curb cut, or driveway.
8.6 PEDESTRIAN CROSSINGS
All crosswalks shall be marked in accordance with Chapter 7, Traffic Control
Devices. Crosswalk markings will be required at all signalized intersections,
school areas, and high pedestrian areas as designated by the City Engineer.
8.7 PEDESTRIAN REFUGE AREAS
For Arterials with raised medians and on splitter islands for roundabouts, a
pedestrian refuge area shall be created in the median to increase pedestrian safety.
See Figure 5-8 and Figure 5- 9.
CHAPTER 9- ON -STREET BICYCLE FACILITIES DESIGN AND
TECHNICAL CRITERIA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
9.1 GENERAL..................................................................................................3
9.1.1 Reference Documents...............................................................................3
9.1.2 Bicycle Master Plan...................................................................................3
9.1.3 Obstructions...............................................................................................3
9.2 ON -STREET BIKE LANES DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ...........................3
9.2.1 On -Street Bike Routes...............................................................................3
9.2.2 Width and Cross Sections.........................................................................3
9.2.3 Signage and Striping.................................................................................4
9.2.4 Bike Lanes at Intersections.......................................................................4
LIST OF TABLES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Tables
LIST OF FIGURES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Figures
CHAPTER 9- ON -STREET BICYCLE FACILITIES DESIGN
AND TECHNICAL CRITERIA
9.1 GENERAL
This chapter sets forth the minimum criteria to be used in the design of all bike
lanes, bike paths, or other bicycles facilities within the City's rights -of -way.
9.1.1 Reference Documents
In this chapter, the AASHTO "Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities"
as published by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials, the National Association of City Transportation Officials Urban
Bikeway Design Guide and the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices were
used as references.
9.1.2 Bicycle Master Plan
This subsection was developed based on the City of Active Transportation Plan
(ATP). All projects shall optimize bicycle travel within the city by providing
bicycle facilities in all new developments in accordance with this plan.
9.1.3 Obstructions
Manholes, utility poles or other appurtenances or obstructions, should not be
located in bike lanes or bike paths.
9.2 ON -STREET BIKE LANES DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
9.2.1 On -Street Bike Routes
Specific streets are designated in the City of Fayetteville Alternative
Transportation and Trails Master Plan as on -street bicycle routes. Streets
designated as on -street bicycle routes shall be designed with additional width for
bike lanes in accordance with the master street plan.
9.2.2 Width and Cross Sections
The bike lane shall be designed with widths shown in standard street classification
sections. Bicycle lanes on one-way streets shall be on the right side of the street,
unless otherwise specified by the City Engineer. Bike lane width shall not be less
than 5 feet measured from the face of curb or edge of pavement if no curb exists.
9.2.3 Signage and Striping
All designated bike lanes shall be signed and striped, as required by MUTCD and
as required in Chapter 7, Traffic Control Devices.
9.2.4 Bike Lanes at Intersections
At the intersections where a separate right turn lane exists and is striped, the
bicycle lane shall transition and be placed between the through lane and the right
turn lane. The bike lane width shall remain the same as the approaching bike lane.
See Figures 5-8 and 5-9 in Chapter 5, Intersections.
CHAPTER 10- NEIGHBORHOOD TRAFFIC SAFETY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
10.1 GENERAL...............................................................................................5
10.1.1 Intended Use............................................................................................5
10.2 TRAFFIC SAFETY PROBLEMS.............................................................5
10.2.1 Speeding...................................................................................................5
10.2.2 Measuring Speed of Roadway................................................................5
10.2.3 Intrusion (Cut -Through Traffic)...............................................................6
10.2.4 Pedestrian Safety.....................................................................................6
10.3 TRAFFIC CALMING DESIGN CRITERIA...............................................6
10.3.1 Intersection Bulb-Outs............................................................................6
A. Appropriate Locations............................................................................ 6
B. Typical Uses..........................................................................................6
C. Signing and Markings............................................................................6
D. Other Considerations............................................................................. 7
E. Advantages............................................................................................ 7
F. Disadvantages.......................................................................................7
10.3.2 Center Island Narrowing..........................................................................7
A. Appropriate Locations............................................................................ 7
B. Typical Uses..........................................................................................7
C. Signing and Markings............................................................................7
D. Advantages............................................................................................ 7
E. Disadvantages....................................................................................... 7
10.3.3 Gateway Treatment..................................................................................8
A. Appropriate Locations............................................................................ 8
B. Typical Uses..........................................................................................8
C. Signing and Markings............................................................................8
D. Advantages............................................................................................ 8
E. Disadvantages....................................................................................... 8
10.3.4 Oval Median..............................................................................................8
A. Appropriate Locations............................................................................ 8
B. Typical Uses..........................................................................................8
C. Signing and Markings............................................................................8
D. Advantages............................................................................................ 9
E. Disadvantages....................................................................................... 9
10.3.5 Chokers.....................................................................................................9
A. Appropriate Locations............................................................................ 9
B. Typical Uses..........................................................................................9
C. Signing and Markings............................................................................9
D. Other Considerations.............................................................................
9
E. Advantages............................................................................................
9
F. Disadvantages.......................................................................................9
10.3.6 Chicanes.................................................................................................10
A. Appropriate Locations..........................................................................10
B. Typical Uses........................................................................................10
C. Signing and Markings..........................................................................10
D. Other Considerations...........................................................................10
E. Advantages..........................................................................................10
F. Disadvantages.....................................................................................10
10.3.7 Two -Lane Slow Point.............................................................................11
A. Appropriate Locations..........................................................................11
B. Typical Uses........................................................................................11
C. Signing and Markings..........................................................................11
D. Other Considerations...........................................................................11
E. Advantages..........................................................................................11
F. Disadvantages.....................................................................................11
10.3.8 Traffic Circles.........................................................................................12
A. Appropriate Locations..........................................................................12
B. Typical Uses........................................................................................12
C. Signing and Markings..........................................................................12
D. Other Considerations...........................................................................12
E. Advantages..........................................................................................12
F. Disadvantages.....................................................................................12
10.3.9 Textured Crosswalks.............................................................................13
A. Appropriate Locations..........................................................................13
B. Typical Uses........................................................................................13
C. Advantages..........................................................................................13
D. Disadvantages.....................................................................................13
10.3.10 Speed Tables........................................................................................13
A. Appropriate Locations..........................................................................13
B. Typical Uses........................................................................................13
C. Signing and Markings..........................................................................14
D. Other Considerations...........................................................................14
E. Advantages..........................................................................................14
F. Disadvantages.....................................................................................14
10.3.11 Raised Crosswalks..............................................................................14
A. Appropriate Locations..........................................................................14
B. Typical Uses........................................................................................14
C. Signing and Markings..........................................................................14
D. Other Considerations...........................................................................15
E. Advantages..........................................................................................15
F. Disadvantages.....................................................................................15
10.3.12 Raised Intersections............................................................................15
A. Appropriate Locations..........................................................................15
B. Typical Uses........................................................................................15
C. Signing and Markings..........................................................................15
D. Other Considerations...........................................................................15
E. Advantages..........................................................................................16
F. Disadvantages.....................................................................................16
10.3.12 On -Street Parking................................................................................16
A. Appropriate Locations..........................................................................16
B. Typical Uses........................................................................................16
C. Advantages..........................................................................................16
D. Disadvantages.....................................................................................16
LIST OF TABLES
This Chapter Does Not Contain Tables
LIST OF FIGURES
Figures are Located at End of Chapter
Figure 10-1 Intersection Bulb -Out
Figure 10-2 Center Island Narrowing
Figure 10-3 Gateway Treatment
Figure 10-4 Oval Median
Figure 10-5 Choker
Figure 10-6 Chicane
Figure 10-7 Two -Lane Slow Point
Figure 10-8 Traffic Circle
Figure 10-9 Speed Table
Figure 10-10 Elongated Speed Table
Figure 10-11 Raised Crosswalk
Figure 10-12 Raised Intersection
CHAPTER 10- NEIGHBORHOOD TRAFFIC SAFETY
10.1 GENERAL
This chapter presents acceptable methods of neighborhood traffic calming that are
determined by the City to be necessary for existing Local streets. This chapter
also provides for specific design criteria for a number of traffic calming methods.
10.1.1 Intended Use
The necessity or desire for traffic safety and calming stems from the perception
that local streets, particularly in residential areas, do not always function as
intended. These roadways should be low traffic volume roadways used for direct
access to residences on the street. They are also intended as a multi -modal system
that is shared by vehicular, bicycle, and pedestrian traffic in a manner that
minimally impacts residents in these areas.
10.2 TRAFFIC SAFETY PROBLEMS
The presence of too many vehicles traveling at high speeds through a
neighborhood diminishes that neighborhood's quality of life. Traffic calming
measures are intended to minimize these issues and return the quality of life to the
neighborhood. Care must be taken by the designer so that the installation of traffic
calming devices does not create unintended hazards that delay emergency
response or jeopardize the safety of bicyclists, pedestrians or motorists.
10.2.1 Speeding
Speeding may occur on roadways that allow the driver to feel safe while
exceeding the posted speed limit. Factors that contribute to this perception include
long, unbroken lines of sight, steep roadway grades, wide roadways, low density
developments, low pedestrian activity, and large building setbacks. In addition,
speeding may occur when the street functions as a higher classification street than
originally intended.
10.2.2 Measuring Speed of Roadway
The standard method of measuring speed on any street is the determination of the
85 percentile speed. The 85 percentile speed is the speed at which or below
which 85 percent of the vehicles travel. If the 85"' percentile speed is at or below
the posted speed limit, then speeding is not considered a problem. However, if the
85 percentile speed is over the posted speed limit by 5 miles per hour or greater,
either the posted speed limit may be inappropriate or a speeding problem may
exist.
10.2.3 Intrusion (Cut -Through Traffic)
Intrusion is increased volume or excessive non -local traffic along a neighborhood
street. This cut -through traffic is caused by drivers who use a local street to go
through a neighborhood and save time on their trip. These streets, which are less
impeded than others, will often invite cut -through traffic. Routes that are
perceived to be time -saving will attract more traffic. This increased cut -through
traffic can cause local streets to function more like a collector.
10.2.4 Pedestrian Safety
Pedestrian safety negatively impacted by speeding vehicles, cut -through traffic, or
a combination of these problems. The high concern areas are in the vicinity of
neighborhood schools and parks or mid -block pedestrian crossings, particularly
on streets with on -street parking. These areas require special consideration for the
mobility and safety of the pedestrian.
10.3 TRAFFIC CALMING DESIGN CRITERIA
10.3.1 Intersection Bulb -Outs
Bulb -outs are areas of expanded curbing, at intersections, that narrow the overall
street width and protect on street parking. See Figure 10-1.
A. Appropriate Locations
1. Appropriate for local streets.
2. Works well in downtown areas.
3. Primarily used at intersections.
B. Typical Uses
1. Reduce the crossing distance for pedestrians.
2. Improve the line of sight for pedestrians.
3. Make pedestrians more visible to oncoming traffic.
4. Slow traffic by funneling it through a narrower street opening.
C. Signing and Markings
Bulb -outs can be used with the standard intersection signage.
D. Other Considerations
Impact on roadway drainage must be addressed. Drainage may be
provided by devices such as inlets, concrete channels, valley gutters, etc...
E. Advantages
1. Improve pedestrian safety.
2. Reduce vehicle speeds.
3. May slow right -turning vehicles.
4. Prevent parking close to intersections.
5. Can improve neighborhood appearance with landscaping.
F. Disadvantages
1. Can result in loss of on -street parking space.
2. May make it difficult to accommodate bicycle lanes.
3. Challenging drainage patterns.
4. Landscaping maintenance.
10.3.2 Center Island Narrowing
Center Island Narrowing are areas of curbed or painted islands located before an
intersection or mid -block along the centerline of a street. See Figure 10-2.
A. Appropriate Locations
1. Appropriate for local streets.
B. Typical Uses
Slow traffic by narrowing the roadway with a median and to increase
pedestrian safety by providing a refuge halfway across the street, so that
only one direction of traffic need be crossed at a time.
C. Signing and Markings
Reflectors and street lighting are recommended to improve visibility.
D. Advantages
1. Improve pedestrian safety.
2. Reduce vehicle speeds.
3. Can improve neighborhood appearance with landscaping.
E. Disadvantages
Can result in loss of on -street parking space.
May make it difficult to accommodate bicycle lanes.
Landscaping maintenance.
May restrict access.
10.3.3 Gateway Treatment
Gateway Treatments are short medians at the entrance to a residential street. See
Figure 10-3.
A. Appropriate Locations
1. Appropriate for local streets.
B. Typical Uses
Slow traffic as they turn into the street and to limit the exit to a single lane.
C. Signing and Markings
Reflectors and street lighting are recommended to improve visibility.
D. Advantages
1. Reduce vehicle entry speeds.
2. Prevents drivers from forming a second lane.
3. Can improve neighborhood appearance with landscaping.
4. Does not restrict access for residents.
5. Improve pedestrian safety.
E. Disadvantages
1. Can result in loss of on -street parking space.
2. May make it difficult to accommodate bicycle lanes.
3. Landscaping maintenance.
10.3.4 Oval Median
Oval Medians are curbed oval shaped medians located mid -block See Figure 10-
4.
A. Appropriate Locations
Appropriate for local streets.
Appropriate on streets having volumes less than 3,500 vehicles per day.
B. Typical Uses
Slow traffic by narrowing the roadway with a median.
C. Signing and Markings
Reflectors and street lighting are recommended to improve visibility.
D. Advantages
1. Reduce vehicle speeds.
2. Can improve neighborhood appearance with landscaping.
3. Does not restrict access for residents.
E. Disadvantages
Can result in loss of on -street parking space.
May make it difficult to accommodate bicycle lanes.
Landscaping maintenance.
10.3.5 Chokers
Chokers are areas of curbing, typically mid -block, that narrow the overall street
width. See Figure 10-5.
A. Appropriate Locations
1. Appropriate for local streets.
2. Appropriate on streets having volumes less than 3,500 vehicles per day.
B. Typical Uses
Slow traffic by funneling it through a narrower street opening.
C. Signing and Markings
The "Road Narrows" Sign (W5-1) with an appropriate "Advisory Speed"
Sign (W 13-1) should be used at least 150 feet in advance of the choker.
Reflectors and street lighting are also recommended to improve visibility.
D. Other Considerations
Impact on roadway drainage must be addressed. Drainage may be
provided by devices such as inlets, concrete channels, valley gutters, etc...
E. Advantages
1. Improve pedestrian safety.
2. Reduce vehicle speeds.
3. Can improve neighborhood appearance with landscaping.
F. Disadvantages
1. Can result in loss of on -street parking space.
2. May make it difficult to accommodate bicycle lanes.
3. Challenging drainage patterns.
4. Landscaping maintenance.
10.3.6 Chicanes
A chicane is a series of three curb bulb -outs staggered on alternating sides of the
street, at a mid -block location, which forces vehicles to negotiate the narrowed
roadway in a snake -like fashion. See Figure 10-6.
A. Appropriate Locations
Appropriate on local streets having volumes less than 3,500 vehicles per
day.
Appropriate on two-lane, two-way streets or on one -lane, one-way streets.
B. Typical Uses
1. Slows vehicles by forcing motorists to weave through the bulb -outs.
C. Signing and Markings
1. The "Road Narrows Sign" (W5-1) with an appropriate "Advisory Speed
Sign" (W 13-1) should be used at least 150 feet in advance of the chicane.
Object Markers (OM -3R, OM -3L), may be installed within the Chicanes if
necessary. Reflectors, street lighting and landscaping are also
recommended to improve visibility.
D. Other Considerations
1. Traffic volumes should be balanced in each direction. Chicanes lose
effectiveness when volumes are significantly unbalanced.
2. Chicanes may not be appropriate in areas with high truck traffic.
3. Avoid locations where grades exceed 8 percent.
4. Placement of chicanes will depend on site conditions and driveway
locations.
E. Advantages
1. Reduce vehicle speeds.
2. Reduce traffic volume.
3. May reduce collisions.
4. Traffic noise may be reduced due to lower speeds and volume.
5. Can improve neighborhood appearance with landscaping.
F. Disadvantages
Can result in loss of on -street parking space.
With two-lane chicanes, motorists may cross the centerline to maintain a
straight line of travel.
Landscaping maintenance.
10.3.7 Two -Lane Slow Point
A Two -Lane Slow Point is a pair two islands with an angled median in between,
at a mid -block location, which forces vehicles to negotiate the narrowed roadway
in a snake -like fashion. See Figure 10-7.
A. Appropriate Locations
Appropriate on local streets having volumes less than 3,500 vehicles per
day.
Appropriate on two-lane, two-way streets or on one -lane, one-way streets.
B. Typical Uses
1. Slows vehicles by forcing motorists to weave through the Slow Point.
C. Signing and Markings
1. The "Road Narrows Sign" (W5-1) with an appropriate "Advisory Speed
Sign" (W 13-1) should be used at least 150 feet in advance of the Slow
Point. Object Markers (OM -3R, OM -3L), may be installed within the
Slow Point if necessary. Reflectors, street lighting and landscaping are
also recommended to improve visibility.
D. Other Considerations
1. Traffic volumes should be balanced in each direction. Slow Points lose
effectiveness when volumes are significantly unbalanced.
2. Slow Points may not be appropriate in areas with high truck traffic.
3. Avoid locations where grades exceed 8 percent.
4. Placement of Slow Points will depend on site conditions and driveway
locations.
E. Advantages
1. Reduce vehicle speeds.
2. Reduce traffic volume.
3. May reduce collisions.
4. Traffic noise may be reduced due to lower speeds and volume.
5. Can improve neighborhood appearance with landscaping.
F. Disadvantages
Can result in loss of on -street parking space.
Landscaping maintenance.
10.3.8 Traffic Circles
Traffic circles are raised islands located in the center of an unsignalized
intersection. All traffic must negotiate the circle and circulate in a
counterclockwise direction. See Figure 10-8.
A. Appropriate Locations
Appropriate on local streets having volumes less than 3,500 vehicles per
day.
Appropriate on streets without high pedestrian or left -turning volumes.
B. Typical Uses
1. Slows vehicles due to the horizontal deflection.
C. Signing and Markings
The use of the "Advance Traffic Circle Warning Sign" (W6-4) with an
appropriate "Advisory Speed Sign" (W 13-1) is recommended in advance
of the first traffic circle encountered on each street.
D. Other Considerations
Depending on the intersection configuration, the shape of the traffic circle
may not actually be round.
Turning analysis should be completed to ensure that the design vehicle can
negotiate the circle. A mountable concrete apron may be used to
accommodate emergency service vehicles, trucks and buses.
Traffic circles may require additional street lighting.
E. Advantages
Reduce vehicle speeds.
Reduces the number of potential conflict points at an intersection.
May reduce collisions.
Can improve neighborhood appearance with landscaping.
Creates a visual obstruction that deters through traffic.
F. Disadvantages
1. May make it difficult for emergency vehicles, buses, and trucks to turn
left.
2. May require removal of some on -street parking. The prohibition of
parking for 30 feet from the intersection is recommended.
3. Landscaping maintenance.
4. Additional right of way may be necessary.
10.3.9 Textured Crosswalks
Textured crosswalks are the use of pavers, imprinted concrete/asphalt, or other
materials to demarcate crosswalks and alert motorists that they are entering a
pedestrian -friendly area.
A. Appropriate Locations
1. Appropriate on all street classifications where high pedestrian volume
exists.
2. May be used on streets posted up to 45 mph.
B. Typical Uses
Often used in combination with raised crosswalks, raised intersections or
bulb -outs.
C. Advantages
1. Improved street appearance.
2. Alerts motorist to the possible presence of pedestrians.
D. Disadvantages
Virtually no effect on traffic speeds or volumes.
Extra noise may be produced from vehicles passing over the textured
surface.
3. Heavily textured surface may present a traction problem for bicyclists,
wheelchairs or disabled persons.
10.3.10 Speed Tables
A speed table is a raised surface on the roadway that is typically 3" in height and
12 to 22 feet in length. See Figure 10-9 and 10-10.
A. Appropriate Locations
1. Appropriate on local streets having volumes less than 3,500 vehicles per
day with posted speeds of 30 mph or less.
2. Primarily used in mid -block locations.
B. Typical Uses
1. Within typical residential travel speeds, speed tables encourage motorists
to slow to a safe speed at or below the speed limit.
C. Signing and Markings
The Speed Table Warning Sign (W16-1) is recommended to be installed
100 feet in advance of speed tables, at the table, or in both locations. For a
series of tables, the sign may be used at the first table in the series,
The pavement markings as shown in Figures 10-4 and 10-5 shall be used
for all speed tables.
D. Other Considerations
1. Speed tables should be placed 250 to 600 feet apart.
2. Typically, speed tables should not be placed within 150 feet of an
intersection.
3. Speed tables should not be used on curves.
4. Speed tables should not be used on streets with a grade of 8% or greater.
5. Speed tables should not be used on streets without curbing.
E. Advantages
Reduce vehicle speeds.
Relatively inexpensive to install and maintain.
F. Disadvantages
Drainage must be accommodated.
Should be avoided on emergency routes.
Rutting and pavement damage in retro-fit situations.
10.3.11 Raised Crosswalks
Raised crosswalks are marked and elevated pedestrian areas that are an extension
of the sidewalk at intersections or mid -block locations. Raised crosswalks are
typically 3 to 6 inches above street level. See Figure 10-11.
A. Appropriate Locations
1. Appropriate on local streets having volumes less than 3,500 vehicles per
day with posted speeds of 30 mph or less.
B. Typical Uses
Reduce vehicle speeds.
Improve visibility of pedestrians.
C. Signing and Markings
1. The "Raised Pedestrian Crossing Warning Sign" (W11A-3) is
recommended to be installed with each raised pedestrian crossing.
D. Other Considerations
1. Most appropriately used at areas with significant pedestrian crossings.
2. Most effective when combined with textured crosswalks and bulb -outs.
3. Drainage inlets should be installed on the uphill side of the raised
crosswalk.
4. All ADA requirements must be met.
E. Advantages
1. Reduce vehicle speeds.
2. Improves visibility of pedestrians.
F. Disadvantages
1. Drainage must be accommodated.
2. May slow emergency vehicles.
10.3.12 Raised Intersections
Raised Intersections are intersections, including crosswalks, which are raised 3 to
6 inches above street level. See Figure 10-12.
A. Appropriate Locations
Commonly found in commercial areas and business districts with high
pedestrian activity.
They are appropriate on local and collector streets.
They are appropriate on streets with volumes up to 10,000 ADT.
B. Typical Uses
1. Reduce vehicle speeds on all approaches.
2. Decrease conflicts between vehicles and pedestrians by better demarcating
crossing areas and elevating pedestrians above the street.
C. Signing and Markings
Advance warning signs should be posted. The "Raised Pedestrian
Crossing" sign (W11A-3) is recommended.
D. Other Considerations
If raised intersections are the same height as the surrounding curb, a slight
lip or other tactile measure should be used as a warning to the visually
impaired.
Textured pavement treatments and curb extensions are often used in
conjunction with raised intersections.
E. Advantages
1. Improves visibility of pedestrians.
2. Visual enhancement.
3. Reduction in vehicle speeds.
F. Disadvantages
1. Expensive to construct.
2. May slow emergency vehicles.
3. May disrupt drainage.
10.3.12 On -Street Parking
On -street parking creates the appearance of a narrower roadway. The proximity
of parked vehicles and opening doors tends to slows traffic.
A. Appropriate Locations
1. Commonly found in commercial areas and business districts, but may be
used on any street of adequate width.
B. Typical Uses
1. Reduce vehicle speeds.
2. Provide additional parking spaces for businesses and residents.
C. Advantages
1. Creates a buffer between pedestrians and moving vehicles.
2. Reduction in vehicle speeds.
D. Disadvantages
1. ROW Impacts
2. Disruption of traffic flow while motorist is parking.
3. May disrupt drainage.
ARKANSAS
ENGINEERING DIVISION
MINIMUM
INTERSECTION BULB -OUT
Otlabe, 1, Pura
10-1
I I I I I I
CITYOF
eoEs�R�Pr�°N
ENGINEERING °SDIVISION
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
°" `
�a,�n3,zos
"°°R`
10-2
CENTER ISLAND NARROWING
VIItIIIf
CITY OF
e
ARKANSAS
ENGINEERING DIVISION
T'T" MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS DATE:
March 3, 2015
"°°R`-
10-3
DESCRIPTION
Gateway Treatment
MINIMUM
March 2, 2015
rdyCgARCVlllC TWO-LANE SLOW POINT 1 0-4
ENGINEERING DIVISION
STREET
U)
°
W
N Q
28'
�>
(TYP')
R.P.M.'S TP 7
0
(WHITE) 8' C/C
16'
°
°
CHOKER DETAIL
28'ROAD WIDTH
6" RAISED CONC.
MEDIAN (ISLAND)
IR=1/4"
R=3"
20'
o
a a
°
12"
°
TYPE 'C' CONCRETE CURB
°
d
H
°
O
U,
ROAD
s NnRRows
(TYP)
CITY OF
TITLE; MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
DATE'
October 1, 2014
FIGURE'
e
ARKANSAS
10-5
UESGRPTIGN
CHOKER
ENGINEERING DIVISION
28'BC
(TYP.)
20
p,
OM -3L
(TYP)
W
OM -3R
(TYP)
24
28ROAD WIDTH
a
F
o
3
R=1/4"
R=3"
ro
" N
TYPE 'C' CONCRETE CURB
ROAD W5-1
NARROWS (TYP)
°' `°`TITLE
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
r en,"an zs, zaIFIGURE
rayeltevilie
ARKANSAS
1 0-6
DESCRIPTION
CHICANE
ENGINEERING DIVISION
CITY OF TITLE:
RKANs^s DESCRIPTION
ENGINEERING DIVISION
MINIMUM STREET STANDARDS
DATE:
March 2. 2015
FIGURE :
10-7
TWO-LANE SLOW POINT
6"CURB
11.7' DIAMETER
30' TYP.
28' TYP.
m
JL
6" CURB
�6. 8' DIAMETER
.�e
30' TYP.
21' TYP.
CITY OF
TITLE
MINIMUM
STREET STANDARDS
DATE:
F V-1 23. 2015
FIGURE:
Faye e
YARKANSAS
- Q
1 O Q
DESCRIPTION
TRAFFIC CIRCLE
ENGINEERING DIVISION
20' 16' 16 14' 12' 10' 6
1.,i
}I«-1--I-A1i
12" THERMOPLASTIC
W16-1
SPEED TABLE SIGN, _�
30" X 30" 6" SERIES C BREED
LETTERS TABLE
15 MPH ADVISORY -'-_� 15 -SEE NOTE 4
PLAQUE W13-1,
18"X18"
frii
I I I CENTER LANE0F
TRAVEL
U~ SEE NOTE4
SPEED TABLE MARKING AND SIGNING
Not to Scale
6'
MARKING DETAIL
SAWCUT &
NOTES: FULL DEPT
1. SAWCUT OR FEATHER GRIND TO KEY IN SPEED
TABLE. SEE SECTION A -A.
2. SIGN LOCATIONS SHALL BE VERIFIED BY THE
ENGINEER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.
3. SPEED TABLE CHEVRON MARKING SHALL BE WHITE
THERMOPLASTIC, HEAT FUSED PREFORMED, 125
MIL., OR EQUAL APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER.
4. FOR A SERIES OF SPEED TABLES, USE THE
ADVISORY SPEED PLAQUE AT ONLY THE FIRST
SPEED TABLE IN EACH DIRECTION OF TRAVEL.
5. SPEED TABLES SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 3500 PSI MIN.
ARKANSAS
6'
CHEVRON DETAIL
q
SECTION A -A
12"
TAPER
CURB DETAIL
CURB AND
GUTTER SECTION B -B
SPEED TABLE
cols
m
10-9
A
20 18' 18' 14' 12' 10' 8'
I \ 12' THERN0PLAS0C
SPEED TABLE SIGN,
30" X 30" 6" SERIES C SPEED
LETTERS TABLE
15 MPH ADVISORY -_,, 15 -SEE NOTE 4
PLAQUE W13-1,
18"X18" I
wil
1L1_'
CENTER OF
TRAVEL LANE
U~ SEE NOTE4
SPEED TABLE MARKING AND SIGNING
Not to Scale 6'
- T-'yj . °
0 el a
°
[ CENTERED ➢°
DRIVING LANE DRIVING LANE
MARKING DETAIL
SAWCUT OR FEATHER
GRIND 1y" DEEP TYP.
SAWCUT & REMOVE
FULL DEPTH PAVEMENT, I APPROACH ARC
6' 10 I
NOTES: -i
SECTION A -A
1. SAWCUT OR FEATHER GRIND TO KEY IN SPEED
TABLE. SEE SECTION A -A.
2. SIGN LOCATIONS SHALL BE VERIFIED BY THE
ENGINEER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.
3. SPEED TABLE CHEVRON MARKING SHALL BE WHITE
THERMOPLASTIC, HEAT FUSED PREFORMED, 125
MIL., OR EQUAL APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER.
4. FOR A SERIES OF SPEED TABLES, USE THE
ADVISORY SPEED PLAQUE AT ONLY THE FIRST
SPEED TABLE IN EACH DIRECTION OF TRAVEL.
5. SPEED TABLE TO BE INSTALLED USING CITY
PROVIDED TEMPLATE, 48 HOURS NOTICE
REQUIRED.
6. SPEED TABLES SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 3500 PSI MIN.
ARKANSAS
6'
6'
CHEVRON DETAIL
6'
APPROACH ARC DETAIL
12"
TAPER
CURB DETAIL
CURB AND
GUTTER
SECTION B -B
ELONGATED SPEED TABLE
2.11
10-10
MODIFIED SIDEWALK RAMP TYPE 1
DETECTABLE WARNING PATTERN
RAMP FLUSH WITH
_ RAISED CROSSWALK
CROSSWALK
I
0' 6'
MARKING DETAIL
NOTE: LOCATION SHOULD TAKE INTO
CONSIDERATION PROXIMITY TO DRAINAGE
STRUCTURES. SINCE THE FLOW IN THE GUTTER
WILL BE OBSTRUCTED BY THE CROSSWALK.
ADDITIONAL INLETS MAY NEED TO BE
CONSTRUCTED TO PREVENT PONDING.
ARKANSAS
RAISED CROSSWALK
MODIFIED SIDEWALK RAMP TYPE 2
GAP WIDTH MAY BE ADJUSTED
BETWEEN 12" AND 60" TO AVOID
WHEEL PATHS
1' TYPICAL
Q ROADWAY
1' TYPICAL AT EDGE
GUTTER
DEPRESS CONCRETE RAMP TO
MATCH RAISED CROSSWALK
SAWCUT & REMOVE EXIST.
PAVEMENT OR GRIND A MIN.
OF 11/2" DEEP (TYP.)
APPROACH ARC
2%MIN.
Cl
6' 10' 6'
SECTION A -A
SECTION B -B
APPROACH ARC DETAIL
RAISED CROSSWALK
2015
6RAMP
RPM
(TYP)
6'
APPROACH ARC DETAIL
NOTES:
I. MINIMUM IN SLOPE REQUIRED IN ALL AREAS FOR DRAINAGE.
2. A 30"X30" YELLOW WARNING SIGN "RAISED PEDESTRIAN
CROSSING' (WI IA -3) MAYBE REQUIRED ON ALL APPROACHES NOT
CONTROLLED BY A STOP SIGN.
3. INTERSECTION HUMP MAY BE CONSTRUCTED USING ASPHALT OR
CONCRETE, PER CITY ENGINEER
4. CONSTRUCT INTERSECTION HUMP USING 4000 PSI HIGH/EARLY
CONCRETE REINFORCED WITH 6 X 6' W2.9 X W2.9 WELDED WIRE
FABRIC.
5. CONCRETE WILL BE COLORED AND TOP STAMPED WITH TEXTURE
PER CITY ENGINEER.
6. CONSTRUCT INTERSECTION HUMP USING ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
IN ACCORDANCE WITII SECTION 402 OF TIIE AIL T D
SPECIFICATIONS, CURRENT EDITION.
7. APPLY PAVEMENT MARKINGS USING WIIITE TIIERMOPLASTIC,
125 MIL.. IN THICKNESS IN ACCORDANCE WITH A.H.T.D.
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS CURRENT EDITION_
8. APPLY RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS, TP II (YELLOW/YELLOW)
(CENTERLINE) ANDTP 13 (CLEAR RED) (EDGE OF PAVEMENT),
USING IIEATED BITUMINOUS ADIIESIVE IN ACCORDANCE WITII
A.H. T.D. SPECIFICATIONS, CURRENT EDITION.
I ARKANSAS
ENGINEERING DIVISION
6'
3"-6"
6.. 12"
o o.
SECT. B -B
SECT. A -A
RAISED INTERSECTION
2015
6'
10-12
CHAPTER 11 - STREET INSPECTION AND TESTING
PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
11.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE............................................................................3
A. City Observation................................................................................................
3
B. Inspection...........................................................................................................
3
C. Testing................................................................................................................
3
D. Pavement Design Report ....................................................................................
4
E. Mix Designs........................................................................................................
4
F. Test Reports........................................................................................................
4
11.2
PAVEMENT...............................................................................................4
11.2.1
Subgrade..................................................................................................4
A. Existing Material................................................................................................
5
B. Moisture and Density Requirements..................................................................
5
C. Final Proof-Rolling............................................................................................
5
D. Testing Frequency..............................................................................................
5
E. Finished Subgrade..............................................................................................
5
11.2.2
Base Course.............................................................................................5
A. Materials.............................................................................................................
6
B. Moisture and Density Requirements..................................................................
6
C. Thickness............................................................................................................
6
D. Testing Frequency..............................................................................................
6
E. Finished Grade....................................................................................................
6
11.2.3
Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA)............................................................................6
A. Materials.............................................................................................................
6
B. HMA Testing......................................................................................................
6
C. Density Requirements........................................................................................
7
D. Thickness...........................................................................................................
7
E. Surface Tolerance...............................................................................................
7
11.2.4
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement....................................................8
A. Materials.............................................................................................................
8
B. Concrete Testing................................................................................................
8
C. Concrete Roadway Inspection............................................................................
8
11.3
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE......................................................................11
11.3.1
Concrete Specifications........................................................................11
Materials...............................................................................................................
11
11.3.2
Concrete Testing and Inspections.......................................................11
A. Structural and Inspection Requirements..........................................................11
B. Foundation Testing and Inspection Requirements...........................................11
C. Inspection of Forms and False Work...............................................................
11
D. Inspection of Reinforcing Steel........................................................................
11
E. Concrete Testing and Inspections.....................................................................
12
F. Testing Frequency and Related Inspections.....................................................
13
G. Placement (Inspection).....................................................................................
13
11.4
NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.............................................................13
11.4.1
Concrete Specifications........................................................................13
A. Materials...........................................................................................................
13
B. General Specifications......................................................................................
14
11.4.2
Concrete Testing and Inspections.......................................................15
A. Concrete Tests..................................................................................................
15
B. Testing Frequency and Related Inspections.....................................................
15
C. Placement (Inspection).....................................................................................
16
11.5
MISCELLANEOUS.....................................................................................16
11.5.1
Traffic Signs, Striping, and Signals......................................................16
A. Installation/Application....................................................................................
16
LIST OF TABLES
Table 11-1 Materials Testing..............................................................................10
Table 11-2 Concrete Mix Designs........................................................................10
LIST OF FIGURES
This Chapter Contains No Figures
CHAPTER 11 - STREET INSPECTION AND TESTING
PROCEDURES
11.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. City Observation
A City Public Works Inspector will observe key steps of the construction
process to insure compliance with these standards and the approved plans and
specifications. Inspections will include but not be limited to: grading, erosion
control, storm sewer installation, structures, non-structural concrete, sub -
grade, base course, pavement and traffic control devices.
B. Inspection
The engineer of record shall provide inspection services for all work on the
approved construction plans. The inspector shall keep a daily log of all
construction activities and testing for the project. The logs shall be submitted
to the City in pdf format on a weekly basis, unless otherwise approved.
The inspector will be responsible for coordinating the required testing to make
sure that the contractor, testing lab and City representatives are present.
All inspection personnel shall be qualified to read and interpret the plans and
specifications and to observe the construction and testing procedures to ensure
compliance.
The costs of all inspections and oversight of the construction process shall be
paid for by the Developer.
C. Testing
During the construction process testing from an independent laboratory is
required on all infrastructure installation including soils, concrete, asphalt, and
other applicable tests. All testing laboratories engaged in testing for projects
shall be pre -qualified by the City Engineer.
These Standards state the minimum requirements for materials sampling,
testing, and inspection. All tests shall be made and certified by an approved
independent testing laboratory. All costs required and pertaining to testing, the
work performed, and materials supplied to verify compliance with these
Standards shall be the responsibility of the Developer.
The use of the testing laboratory's services does not relieve the Developer of
the responsibility to furnish the required materials and to perform the required
construction in full compliance with these Standards. Passing test results do
not constitute acceptance of the work or materials represented by the test. The
Developer is responsible for quality control of their work.
In various sections of these Standards, specific testing or other data is required
by the City to insure that the intent of these Standards is fulfilled. The costs of
such tests or other specific data where required by these Standards or on the
approved plans shall be borne by the Developer. When evidence indicates that
the work performed may not comply with these standards or the approved
plan, the City Engineer may require additional tests or data beyond that
required in these Standards or on the approved plans. The costs of such tests
shall be borne by the Developer. Should such tests or additional data show a
failure to meet these Standards or the approved plans, the Developer shall be
responsible for all costs associated with repair or replacement of said failure.
D. Pavement Design Report
The pavement design report required in these Standards shall be submitted for
review a minimum of 10 working days prior to any paving. Refer to Chapter
6, Pavement Structure and Materials.
E. Mix Designs
Pavement mix designs meeting the requirements of these Standards shall be
furnished to the City Engineer a minimum of 10 working days prior to
intended use of the mix. The mix design shall be reviewed and accepted by
the City Engineer prior to use. If a mix design not accepted by the City is
used, the City may require removal of all improvements placed with the
unaccepted material.
F. Test Reports
Test reports submitted to the City shall include all tests performed on the
project. All test reports shall show the location where the test was performed
or at which work or batch is represented by the test. Test reports shall include
all information specified in the AASHTO, ASTM, or local test procedure
used. Prior to acceptance of each phase of a project, all final reports shall be
submitted to the City indicating compliance with these specifications.
11.2 PAVEMENT
11.2.1 Subgrade
The subgrade will be evaluated by the City Public Works Inspector prior to the
placement of the next course. Any necessary reworking, compaction, or
replacement will be required prior to continuation. The approval is valid only to a
time when weather conditions may have changed the condition of the subgrade.
Changes in weather such as freezing or precipitation, which may cause changes in
the subgrade, will require re -approval of the subgrade.
A. Existing Material
Unsuitable material will be excavated to a depth as directed by the City
Engineer or the geotechnical engineer, disposed of, and replaced with fill
material meeting the requirements of Chapter 6, Pavement Structure and
Materials.
If the existing material is acceptable for use as subgrade material, or modified
to be suitable, the subgrade will be scarified to a depth of 8 inches and
recompacted to conform to the requirements of this chapter.
B. Moisture and Density Requirements
All lifts in embankment areas shall be compacted to not less than 95% of the
maximum density. The moisture content of the material shall be within 2% of
optimum moisture content before compaction.
Maximum density will be determined using AASHTO T-99 (Standard
Proctor). In -place field density measurements shall be determined using
AASHTO T-191, T-233 or T-310.
Density requirements do not apply to portions of embankments constructed of
materials such as rock that cannot be tested by approved testing methods.
C. Final Proof -Rolling
Final proof rolling of subgrade shall be required prior to taking density tests.
Proof rolling shall be done with a fully loaded tandem -axle dump truck.
D. Testing Frequency
Density tests shall be taken every 300 feet for each lane or portion thereof.
For streets less than 300 feet in length, a minimum of one test shall be taken
for each lane. The Public Works Inspector shall determine the location of the
tests.
E. Finished Subgrade
The subgrade shall be shaped for its full width to the required grade and cross
section. The finished subgrade shall not vary at any point by more than 1/2"
from the design elevation.
11.2.2 Base Course
The base course material shall be placed on a completed and approved subgrade
or existing base that conforms to the grade and cross section shown on the plans.
Base course shall not be placed on frozen subgrade.
A. Materials
Materials for aggregate base courses shall meet the requirements of Section
303 of the AHTD Standard Specifications (2014 Edition) for Class 7.
B. Moisture and Density Requirements
All lifts in embankment areas shall be compacted at substantially optimum
moisture content to not less than 98% of the maximum density.
Maximum density will be determined using AASHTO T-180 (Modified
Proctor). In -place field density measurements shall be determined using
AASHTO T-310.
C. Thickness
The compacted base course shall be tested for thickness in the same general
location of the density testing. The finished base course shall not vary at any
point by more than ¼" from the design thickness.
D. Testing Frequency
Density tests shall be taken every 300 feet for each lane or portion thereof.
For streets less than 300 feet in length, a minimum of one test shall be taken
for each lane. The Public Works Inspector shall determine the location of the
tests.
E. Finished Grade
The base course shall be shaped for its full width to the required grade and
cross section. The finished base course shall not vary at any point by more
than 1/2" from the design elevation.
11.2.3 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA)
A. Materials
Materials for Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete base, binder and surface courses shall
meet the requirements of the AHTD Standard Specifications (2014 Edition)
as referenced in Section 6.4.4 of these standards. No "Marshall Mixes" are
allowed within City right of way unless specifically authorized in writing by
the City Engineer.
B. HMA Testing
All testing shall be done in accordance with AASHTO or ASTM as
designated throughout this chapter.
Testing results for Asphalt Binder Content, VMA and Air Voids shall be
provided by the contractor upon request by the City Engineer.
The pavement shall be cored at 500 foot intervals for each lane, or fraction
thereof, in each lane. The core locations shall be chosen so as to accurately
represent the quality of the asphalt placed in a particular area.
C. Density Requirements
Minimum asphalt density shall be 92% of the maximum theoretical density.
No density of less than 90% shall be accepted. The asphalt where densities
are less than 92% and greater than 90% shall be left in place and a penalty of
2% of the in -place construction cost of the deficient asphalt shall be paid to
the City for each .10% deviation from the required density up to a maximum
of 40 %. Where densities are less than 90%, the paving shall be removed and
replaced.
When a deficient density is obtained, two additional cores shall be taken
within 10' either side of the deficient core location. If the density of both of
these cores is 92% or higher, then no additional cores are necessary and no
penalty will be applied. If insufficient density is reported with the new cores,
then additional cores shall be taken every 50 feet until the limits of the
deficient asphalt have been established.
The asphalt density used for the purpose of computing the penalty shall be the
average density over the deficient area. Only the deficient densities (from 90-
92%) shall be used to calculate the average.
D. Thickness
Thickness measurements shall be taken for each core sample. The thickness
measurement shall be averaged for each run of paving. A run shall be
considered a portion of paving constructed in one day on one section of street.
Multiple streets paved in one day will result in multiple runs.
Should any deviation be found, additional cores may be taken to define the
horizontal limits of the deviation. When measurement of the core is not
deficient by more than 1/4 inch from the design thickness, the pavement
thickness will be considered to be within acceptable tolerance. When such
measurement is deficient more than 1/4 inch from the design thickness, two
additional cores at intervals not less than 50 ft will be taken and used to
determine the average thickness for that area. When the average thickness of
cores is deficient by more than 1/4 inch the City Engineer may require that the
area be removed and replaced.
Maximum thickness used for averaging purposes shall be the specified
thickness plus 1/2 inch.
E. Surface Tolerance
The finished surface of the pavement, when tested with a 10 -foot straight edge
parallel to the centerline or perpendicular across joints, will show variations as
measured from the testing face of the straight edge to the surface of the
pavement, which shall not exceed 1/8 inch on surface course and 3/16 inch on
binder course. Areas that do not meet the required surface accuracy shall be
clearly marked and if the City Engineer requires repair, the contractor shall
repair the pavement.
11.2.4 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement
A. Materials
Materials for Portland Cement Concrete Pavement shall meet the
requirements of the latest edition of the AHTD Standard Specifications.
B. Concrete Testing
All testing shall be done in accordance with AASHTO or ASTM as
designated throughout this chapter.
C. Concrete Roadway Inspection
1. Tolerances.
a. Where the constructed surface varies from the design cross slope by
more than 1/2 inch in 10 feet, the pavement shall be removed and
replaced. This technique may not apply in areas with less than 2%
cross slope.
b. Areas showing high spots greater than 1/4 inch as measured with a 10 -
foot straight edge, but less than 1/2 inch, may be diamond ground to
within the specification of 1/4 inch.
c. Thickness Tolerance. The thickness of the pavement shall be
determined by average caliper measurement of cores tested. A
minimum of 1 core per 500 LF will be taken at random. Should any
deviation be found, additional cores may be taken to define the
horizontal limits of the deviation. When measurement of the core is
not deficient by more than 1/4 inch from the design thickness, the
pavement thickness will be considered to be within acceptable
tolerance. When such measurement is deficient more than 1/4 inch and
not more than 1 inch from the design thickness, two additional cores at
intervals not less than 50 ft will be taken and used to determine the
average thickness for that area. When the thickness of pavement is
deficient by more than 1/4 inch the City Engineer may require that the
area be removed and replaced.
2. Specifications.
a. All panels with cracks wider than 1/8 inch shall be repaired by total
removal of the panel and replacement as required by the criteria
herein.
b. All panel cracks 1/8 inch and narrower may be routed and sealed at the
discretion of the City Engineer.
c. There shall be no more than one structural crack per panel. Panels with
more than one structural crack shall be repaired by total panel removal
and replacement.
d. All sections removed shall have edges parallel to adjacent panel joints.
e. All saw cuts for removal of slabs shall be full depth cuts.
f. No panel shall be allowed that has a crack meeting an adjacent panel at
an angle more acute than 45 degrees to a finished edge or control joint.
g. All corner cracks to a panel shall be removed and replaced.
h. Any vertical differential movement across a crack greater than 3/16
inch shall be repaired by either partial or total panel removal and
replacement.
i. All panels with faulted joints resulting from settlement and/or
pumping of the edges shall be repaired by removal and replacement.
j. All manholes, water valves, range boxes, etc., shall be flush to 1/4 inch
below the final surface roadway grade.
k. When an entire panel is removed, the panel shall be secured to the
surrounding panels with 18" long '/z"diameter smooth dowel bars
placed at 12" centers.
Table 11-1
Materials Testing
Subgrade
AASHTO
ASTM
Frequency
Sampling
T87
D420
Per Soil Type
Encountered
Soil Classification
M145
D3282
D2488/D2487
Proctor
Standard
T991T310
D698
Modified
T180/T310
D1557
Density & Moisture
Content
T191/T233/T310
D2922/D3017
1 per 300LF lane
Min. I per lane
Hot Mix Asphalt
Sampling
T168
D979
Density
Nuclear
--
D2950
As Directed by City
Coring
T166
D2726
1 per 500LF lane
Min. I per lane
Concrete
Sampling
T141
C172
Mold and Cure
T23
C31
Cylinder Tranport.
T23
C31
Physical Properties
1 per 100 cy
Min. I per day
1 per 1000 LF Curb
Slump
T119
C143
See Table 11-2
Air Content
T152
C231
Camp. Strength
T22
C39
Coring
T24
C42
As Directed by City
Comp. Strength
T24
C42
Aggregate Base Course
Gradation
T27
C136
1 Per Source
Proctor
Modified
T180
D1557
Standard
T99
D698
Density & Moisture
Content
1 per 300LF lane
Min. I per lane
Table 11-2
Concrete Mix Designs
Concrete Class
Class A
Class B
28 -Day Camp. Strength (psi)
3500
4000
Portland Cement (bags)
5.5
6.5
Max. Water/Cement Ratio
.49
.44
Slump Range (inches)
1-4
1-4
Air Entrainment (%)
4-7
4-7
Maximum Fly Ash Content
20%
20%
11.3 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
This section delineates the testing, inspection, and related documentation
requirements for all structures, including retaining walls, cast -in -place box
culverts, and other concrete structures specified within.
11.3.1 Concrete Specifications
Materials
Class A or B concrete shall be used in drop inlets, junction boxes and others
as specified.
Class B concrete shall be used in box culverts, bridges, retaining walls and
other structures as specified.
11.3.2 Concrete Testing and Inspections
A. Structural and Inspection Requirements
The structural design Engineer or his representative, familiar with
assumptions inherent in the structure design, shall inspect the construction in
sufficient detail to confirm that the construction meets the requirements of the
plans and specifications.
B. Foundation Testing and Inspection Requirements
Unstable foundation material shall be removed to a depth approved by the
City Engineer below the finish grade elevation and be replaced with a material
and construction procedure as approved by the City.
C. Inspection of Forms and False Work
1. The forms shall be clean of all dirt, mortar, and all foreign material. Forms
that will later be removed shall be thoroughly coated with an approved
form oil.
2. The forms shall be mortar tight and of a quality (in addition to the bracing)
to withstand the pressures from deposited concrete.
3. Unless otherwise specified, forms for exposed surfaces shall be constructed
with triangular fillets 3/4 inch at all exterior corners.
D. Inspection of Reinforcing Steel
1. Material Grade and Size. The material grade and size shall be as specified
by the Designer on the certified construction plans.
2. Tying.
a. The intersections of all bars shall be tied in accordance with the
following requirements: Slab bars shall be tied at every intersection
around the periphery and at spacing according to bar sizes. Unless bar
spacing is less than 12" in which case every other intersection shall be
tied. However, in no case shall less than 30% of the intersections be
tied.
b. Wall bars should be tied sufficiently to prevent shifting, at least 3 times
in any bar length at every third or fourth intersection and at spaces
according to bar sizes, staggered:
#5 and smaller - 3'0"
#6 to #9 - 4'0" to 5'0"
#10 to #11 - 6'0" to 8'0"
Upper and lower mats shall be tied or otherwise fastened at 4 foot
maximum spacing in each direction. Minimum splice length shall be
24 bar diameters.
1) All reinforcing steel shall be supported with steel chair or precast
mortar.
2) Reinforcing steel shall be clean and free of all foreign material
before concrete is placed.
3) All clearances shall be in compliance with approved plans and
specifications.
E. Concrete Testing and Inspections
1. Materials Specifications. The class of concrete used shall be in accordance
with Table 11-2. Concrete that does not meet strength in 28 days is
subject to removal.
2. Concrete Tests.
a. All testing shall be done in accordance with AASHTO or ASTM as
designated in Table 11-1.
b. Maximum time allowed between sampling and casting cylinders shall
not exceed 15 minutes. Cylinders shall be transported to the laboratory
within 24 hours of casting but after the concrete has hardened, (see
AASHTO T23 or ASTM C-31).
c. The slump test shall be performed in accordance with AASHTO T119.
The air test shall be performed in accordance with AASHTO T196 or
T121. Slump and air test measurements shall be taken with each
cylinder series.
d. If compressive strength of cylinders does not meet the specified values,
the Design Engineer shall recommend and the City Engineer shall
approve the necessary mitigation measures needed.
F. Testing Frequency and Related Inspections
1. Testing frequency shall be in accordance with Table 11-1.
2. At least 4 compressive strength cylinders shall be taken from the same
concrete delivery truck to provide design compliance testing at the
laboratory. Two of the four specimens will be tested at 28 days for
acceptance and 1 shall be tested at 7 days for information. The fourth
cylinder shall only be necessary if the 28 -day fails. Additional cylinders
may be required, as directed by the City Engineer.
G. Placement (Inspection)
1. Concrete placement shall be done in a manner such that the concrete is not
segregated or altered before placing. It shall not be allowed to free fall
more than 5 feet. Concrete shall be placed in lifts not to exceed 18 inches.
2. A sufficient number of vibrators shall be used to properly consolidate the
concrete as required.
3. Weepholes and drainage systems should be installed in the structure at the
locations noted on the plans or specifications.
4. Construction joints and expansion joints shall be constructed in
conformance with approved plans and specifications.
11.4 NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Non-structural concrete includes curb, gutter, sidewalks, driveways, crosspans and ADA
ramps.
11.4.1 Concrete Specifications
A. Materials
Class A concrete shall be used in curb and gutter, sidewalks driveways,
crosspans, ADA ramps and miscellaneous concrete items as specified. See
Table 11-2.
B. General Specifications
1. Humps and Depressions. Any localized humps and/or depressions greater
than 1/4 inch (as measured with a 10 -foot straight edge) will require
removal and replacement of the work in question.
2. Water Ponding. No ponding of water shall greater than 1/4 inch be allowed.
3. Flowline Depth. Curb and gutter flowline depth shall not vary from adopted
standards by more than ± 1/4 inch, measured vertically from the top of
curb to the gutter invert.
4. Cross Slope in Pedestrian Walks. Pedestrian walks shall have a maximum
of 2.0 percent cross slope.
5. Joint Spacing. Contraction and construction joints shall be placed at a
maximum spacing of 10 feet in curb and gutter, crosspans, trickle
channels, etc. Refer to Chapter 8 for Sidewalk and Trail joint spacing.
6. Heave or Settlement of Sidewalk. Heave or settlement of sidewalk, relative
to separate curb pour, greater than 1/4" shalt be cause for corrective
action.
7. Utility Placement. No utility facilities shall be placed in curb and gutter,
sidewalk, crosspan, ADA ramp etc., unless specifically called out on the
approved construction plans. This includes meter boxes, manholes, power
poles, fire hydrants, water valves, etc.
8. Concrete Cracks.
a. At the time of final acceptance, the repair of all cracks will be
completed.
b. Any section of concrete with longitudinal cracks or with cracks greater
than 1/16" in width will require complete removal and replacement of
that section between joints.
Repair action for hairline cracks may be waived at the discretion of the
City Engineer. For the purpose of this section, a hairline crack is one
that is reasonably immeasurable and without separation as determined
by the City Engineer.
9. Concrete Chips and Gouges.
Chips and gouges in the concrete will be evaluated on an individual basis.
If determined by the City to be unacceptable, then the section shall be
removed and replaced.
10. Other Imperfections in Concrete Surface. Stress cracking, pop -outs,
spalling, rain damage, graffiti, and other surface defects will remain
discretionary and will usually require removal and replacement.
11. Final Grade.
a. A light broom finish shall be required.
b. All concrete work shall have the proper finished grade.
c. No abrupt changes in grade shall be allowed, i.e., curb returns from new
to existing, driveway entrances, etc.
11.4.2 Concrete Testing and Inspections
A. Concrete Tests
1. Concrete Tests.
a. All testing shall be done in accordance with AASHTO or ASTM as
designated in Table 11-1.
b. Maximum time allowed between sampling and casting cylinders shall
not exceed 15 minutes. Cylinders shall be transported to the laboratory
within 24 hours of casting but after the concrete has hardened, (see
AASHTO T23 or ASTM C-31).
c. The slump test shall be performed in accordance with AASHTO T119.
The air test shall be performed in accordance with AASHTO T196 or
T121. Slump and air test measurements shall be taken with each
cylinder series.
d. If compressive strength of cylinders does not meet the specified values,
the Design Engineer shall recommend and the City Engineer shall
approve the necessary mitigation measures needed.
2. Grade Verification of Gutter Flowline.
After completion of curb and gutter, including curb returns and crosspans,
and prior to installation of asphalt, the new installation must be flow -tested
with water in the presence of the Public Works Inspector to confirm that
there are no areas that hold water. The City Engineer will confirm the
results and accept or reject the work. The work will not be accepted if it
holds water more than 1/4 inch deep or for a distance greater than 5 feet.
Unacceptable work must be removed and replaced.
B. Testing Frequency and Related Inspections
1. Testing frequency shall be in accordance with Table 11-1.
2. At least 4 compressive strength cylinders shall be taken from the same
concrete delivery truck to provide design compliance testing at the
laboratory. Two of the four specimens will be tested at 28 days for
acceptance and 1 shall be tested at 7 days for information. The fourth
cylinder shall only be necessary if the 28 -day fails. Additional cylinders
may be required, as directed by the City Engineer.
C. Placement (Inspection)
1. Concrete placement shall be done in a manner such that the concrete is not
segregated or altered before placing. It shall not be allowed to free fall
more than 5 feet. Concrete shall be placed in lifts not to exceed 18 inches.
2. A sufficient number of vibrators shall be used to properly consolidate the
concrete as required.
3. Construction joints and expansion joints shall be constructed in
conformance with approved plans and specifications.
11.5 MISCELLANEOUS
11.5.1 Traffic Signs, Striping, and Signals
A. Installation/Application
The City Engineer shall verify that traffic control devices are installed or
applied at appropriate locations as shown on the approved signing and striping
plans.
All striping layouts will be reviewed by the City Engineer prior to any
installation of paint or markings. The City requires a 48 -hour notice before
any application for inspection or approval.
CHAPTER 12 - ACCEPTANCE/WARRANTY PROCEDURES AND
RECORD DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Pane
12.1 GENERAL...............................................................................................3
12.1.1 Developer's Process................................................................................3
A. Completion of Work...............................................................................3
B. Notification.............................................................................................3
C. Inspection — By Engineer of Record......................................................3
C. Joint Inspection......................................................................................3
D. Correction of Deficiencies......................................................................3
E. Submittal of Record Plans.....................................................................4
F. Initial Acceptance...................................................................................4
G. Start of Warranty Period........................................................................4
H. Warranty Inspection...............................................................................4
I. Written Notification of Release................................................................4
12.2 INITIAL ACCEPTANCE..........................................................................4
12.2.1 Recommendation for Initial Acceptance................................................4
12.2.2 Initial Acceptance Letter..........................................................................5
12.2.3 Submittal of Record Plans......................................................................5
12.2.4 Submittal of Warranty Guarantee...........................................................5
12.3 WARRANTY PERIOD.............................................................................6
12.3.1 Definition of the Warranty Period...........................................................6
12.3.2 The Warranty Guarantee.........................................................................6
12.3.3 Time Frames for Completing Repair......................................................6
12.3.4 Failure to Complete Repair.....................................................................6
12.3.5 Responsibility for Maintenance..............................................................6
12.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE............................................................................7
12.4.1 Request for Final Inspection...................................................................7
12.4.2 Preparation for Inspection......................................................................7
12.4.3 Inspection and Punchlist.........................................................................7
12.4.4 Damage Caused by City Crews..............................................................7
12.4.5 Re-Inspection...........................................................................................7
12.4.6 Release from Responsibility...................................................................7
12.4.7 Release of Warranty Guarantee..............................................................8
12.4.8 Failure to Complete Repair.....................................................................8
12.5 RECORD PLANS(AS-BUILTS)..............................................................8
12.5.1 Updating Plans with Design Changes....................................................8
A. Street..................................................................................................... 8
B. Drainage................................................................................................ 9
C. Utilities................................................................................................... 9
D. Other...................................................................................................... 9
12.5.2 Minor Design Changes............................................................................9
12.5.3 Submittal of Plans..................................................................................10
12.5.4 Form of Submittal..................................................................................10
LIST OF TABLES
This Chapter Does Not Include Tables
LIST OF FIGURES
This Chapter Does Not Include Figures
CHAPTER 12 - ACCEPTANCE/WARRANTY PROCEDURES
AND RECORD DRAWINGS
12.1 GENERAL
This chapter defines the requirements for approval and acceptance of the Public
Improvements installed within the rights -of -way and easements. This chapter also
covers warranty and record plan (as-builts) requirements.
12.1.1 Developer's Process
The Developer shall be required to meet the following process prior to the
acceptance of the public improvements and maintenance:
A. Completion of Work
Completion of all Public Improvements required in the approved Construction
Plans & Specifications in accordance with these Standards.
B. Notification
Developer notifies the Public Works Inspector and the Engineer of Record of
the Project Completion.
C. Inspection — By Engineer of Record
The Engineer of Record shall perform a site inspection to determine if the
project is substantially complete and ready for a joint inspection as described
below. The Engineer of Record shall generate a deficiency list (punch list)
and all items on the list shall be corrected before scheduling a joint inspection.
The City Engineer may deem some punch list items as incidental and allow
the scheduling of the joint inspection.
C. Joint Inspection
A joint inspection will be performed with City representatives, the Engineer of
Record, and the contractor. The public improvements will be inspected for
compliance to the plans, standards and specifications. The Engineer of
Record shall develop a final punchlist.
D. Correction of Deficiencies
The Contractor or Developer shall correct deficiencies. As -built survey may
identify additional deficiencies, which shall be addressed as stated below.
E. Submittal of Record Plans
The Engineer of Record shall submit signed and sealed Record Plans (As-
builts) in accordance with the description in Section 12.5. One hard copy, one
electronic copy in PDF format and one electronic copy in .dwg format shall be
submitted to the City Engineer's office. A review copy in PDF format will be
required for review purposes prior to the final submittal.
F. Initial Acceptance
After the Contractor has corrected the deficiencies identified on the punch list
and the Engineer of Record has inspected the site, the City may be contacted
by the Engineer of Record to inspect the corrections. Upon satisfactory
completion of the punch list items and submittal of the public improvement
construction costs, warranty guarantee, inspection reports, material testing
reports, engineer certifications, final as -built drainage report, as -built plans,
and any other project requirements per the approval letter, initial acceptance
shall be granted.
G. Start of Warranty Period
Upon written initial acceptance by the City, the warranty period shall
commence.
H. Warranty Inspection
No more than forty-five days prior to the completion of the warranty period,
the City Engineer may inspect all public improvements for defects in
workmanship or materials. A deficiency list shall be developed and provided
to the Developer. Normal wear and tear shall not be considered a deficiency.
I. Written Notification of Release
Once the Developer/Contractor has satisfactorily completed any necessary
repairs or replacements at the end of the warranty period, a written
notification from the City shall release the Developer of all future repairs for
the Public Improvements and the Warranty Guarantee shall be released to the
original provider.
12.2 INITIAL ACCEPTANCE
12.2.1 Recommendation for Initial Acceptance
After the Contractor has completed the punchlist, the Engineer of Record shall
inspect and notify the Public Works Inspector that the work has been complete.
The Public Works Inspector shall recommend granting or denial of initial
acceptance based on re -inspection for compliance with the joint inspection punch
list.
If new deficiencies are found, either in quality or extent of construction, the
Developer/Contractor shall be notified in writing of these deficiencies. These
deficiencies shall be also be corrected, and additional inspections shall be
performed until the work is acceptable.
12.2.2 Initial Acceptance Letter
The City Engineer shall issue written notice either granting or withholding Initial
Acceptance within ten working days of the acceptance re -inspection. The Initial
Acceptance letter shall specify the date on which the Developer is eligible to
request Final Acceptance.
12.2.3 Submittal of Record Plans
Prior to issuance of the Initial Acceptance, Record Plans shall be completed,
stamped, and signed by the Engineer of Record and submitted to the City
Engineer. The Record Plans shall be submitted in paper and electronic form (as
specified by the City Engineer). Refer to Section 12.5 for Record Drawing
requirements.
12.2.4 Submittal of Warranty Guarantee
Prior to issuance of the Initial Acceptance, a Warranty Guarantee in the amount of
25% of all Public Improvements associated with the project shall be submitted to
the City. The following items shall be included on the Guarantee:
• Identify guarantee as for MAINTENANCE.
• Name of project.
• Project description & location (address, subdivision, if applicable).
• Description of items guaranteed & total construction cost of public
infrastructure.
• Name the City of Fayetteville as Obligee or Duel Obligee.
• Contact information for the provider of guarantee — (who purchased the
guarantee).
12.3 WARRANTY PERIOD
12.3.1 Definition of the Warranty Period
The Warranty Period for all Public Improvements shall be two years. During the
Warranty Period, the Developer/Contractor shall guarantee the work to be free of
any damage or defects in workmanship and material. The Warranty Period shall
start the date that Initial Acceptance occurs. The Warranty Period shall end with
the Final Acceptance of the Public Improvements. If deficiencies are noted during
the City's warranty inspection, the Developer/Contractor shall repair the
deficiencies.
12.3.2 The Warranty Guarantee
A Warranty Guarantee shall be required for the entire Warranty Period. The
Warranty Guarantee shall be in the form of a letter of credit, maintenance bond, or
cash deposit in accordance with the Unified Development Code Chapter 158. The
Guarantee shall be in the amount of 25% of the total value of the public
improvements for the project. (Including Water/Sewer/Drainage/ Sidewalk/etc.)
12.3.3 Time Frames for Completing Repair
At any time before the completion of the Warranty Period, the City may notify the
Developer of needed repairs. If repair areas are considered to be an imminent
danger to the public health, safety, and welfare, the Contractor shall act within 24
hours to complete the repair. If the work is not considered a safety issue, the
Developer has 10 working days to schedule the work, and 30 calendar days to
complete the work. Extensions of time may be considered when necessary due to
weather constraints.
12.3.4 Failure to Complete Repair
If the Developer has not completed the warranty repairs in the time frame
specified, the City may choose to affect the necessary repairs. The City will either
invoice the Developer for all costs for the related work plus a $500.00
administrative fee or it will collect from the guarantee.
12.3.5 Responsibility for Maintenance
The Developer is responsible for maintaining all public improvements throughout
the Warranty Period.
12.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
12.4.1 Request for Final Inspection
Within 45 days of the end of the Warranty Period, the Developer shall request a
final inspection and acceptance, in writing, to the City Engineer.
12.4.2 Preparation for Inspection
The Developer is responsible for sweeping and cleaning public improvements for
inspection. If the Developer does not provide a clean site, including having curb
flowlines clear of debris and dirt, then the inspection may be postponed until the
site is sufficiently clean.
12.4.3 Inspection and Punchlist
The City Engineer shall inspect all Public Improvements related to the Project. If
applicable, a written final punchlist shall be compiled listing any necessary repair
or replacement of materials or workmanship. The punchlist shall be sent to the
Developer and Contractor.
12.4.4 Damage Caused by City Crews
If the Developer can demonstrate that the City maintenance crews caused damage
to certain improvements, the Developer will not be held responsible for the
replacement.
12.4.5 Re -Inspection
If repair or replacement of Public Improvements is required, the
Developer/Contractor shall complete repair or replacement within thirty calendar
days of receipt of the final punchlist, unless otherwise agreed upon. Upon
completion, the Developer/Contractor shall contact the City Engineer for a re -
inspection.
12.4.6 Release from Responsibility
Once all repairs or replacements are satisfactorily completed, the
Developer/Contractor shall receive written notice from the City that all Public
Improvements are complete and the City releases the Developer/Contractor from
responsibility for all future maintenance and repairs for the Public Improvements
on this project.
12.4.7 Release of Warranty Guarantee
Upon the satisfactory completion of the final punchlist the City will release the
Warranty guarantee.
12.4.8 Failure to Complete Repair
If the Developer has not completed the warranty repairs in the time frame
specified, the City may choose to affect the necessary repairs. The City will either
invoice the Developer for all costs for the related work plus a $500.00
administrative fee or it will collect from the guarantee.
12.5 RECORD PLANS (AS-BUILTS)
12.5.1 Updating Plans with Design Changes
The Construction Plans shall be updated with all design changes that occurred
after plan approval. The final installation of all public infrastructure shall be
surveyed prior to submittal of record drawings. The Professional surveyor shall
provide stamped drawings specifically identifying the limits of as -built survey
performed. Field changes not previously approved by City Engineer, discovered
during the as -built process are at the Contractor's risk and may not be accepted.
A. Street
Street Record Drawings shall identify the actual pavement type and grade or mix
type used; if the subgrade was treated or additional undercut: location of any
under drains added; and document all changes to widths and lengths for streets,
sidewalks, and curbs.
• At 100 ft interval or as necessary to reflect actual placement of roadway, the
back of curb shall be located in reference to the existing/or proposed right-of-
way.
o Deviations more than 6 inches shall be identified on the plans and
included in a transmittal letter to the City Engineer.
o Additional Right of Way or Reconstruction may be required.
• At grade breaks, no more than 500 ft intervals, profile and cross slope
verification will be performed and shown on plans.
o Deviations more than 0.5% profile or cross slope shall be identified on
the plans and included in a transmittal letter to the City Engineer.
o Geometric K values no longer meeting city criteria shall be evaluated.
o Additional Calculations or Reconstruction may be required.
• Record drawings shall identify all signage and striping locations as actually
placed in the project.
B. Drainage
Record storm drainage drawings shall document the location, size, rim elevation
and invert elevation of all pipes (including pipe class), inlets, riprap, headwalls,
detention pond volumes, swale cross -sections and all other storm drainage
infrastructure shown on the construction plans, including those improvements
located in areas outside of the public right-of-way, if appropriate. Record
drawings shall also show all pipe and/or drainage way/swale grade percentages.
o More than 2 ft deviation of design alignment shall require new easement
dedication or adjustment of the storm drain.
o More than 0.1 ft deviation of design elevation shall require revisions in the
drainage report. Any field changes, that no longer meets drainage design
criteria, shall be removed and replaced.
o Any field changes, that creates an adverse slope, shall be removed and
replaced to original design.
o Change in specified material shall require revisions to the drainage report.
C. Utilities
Water and Sanitary Sewer Record drawings shall document the location, size,
invert elevations and rim elevation of all pipes and manholes, location of all
valves, changes in direction, encasements, meters, services, hydrants, etc.
o Professional surveyor shall provide stamp drawings specifically identifying
the limits of as -built survey performed.
o More than 2 ft deviation of design alignment shall require new easement
dedication or adjustment of the utility drain.
o See Water & Sewer Specifications for additional criteria.
D. Other
Record drawings shall verify other information as specifically requested by the
City Engineer or outlined in the project's conditional approval letter.
12.5.2 Minor Design Changes
Minor changes are not required to be included on the Record Plans. Minor
changes include incorrect references and grade changes less than 0.1 foot.
12.5.3 Submittal of Plans
A Licensed Arkansas Professional Engineer shall update and stamp the As -Built
Construction Plans. The Engineer shall submit the plans to the City and receive
approval prior to the Initial Acceptance.
The Engineer must also certify that the streets, sidewalk, storm sewer, water, fire
line, and sewer lines, etc., were installed per approved plans and City of
Fayetteville requirements.
12.5.4 Form of Submittal
All Record Documents shall be submitted in the following formats as required by
the City Engineer:
• Plans shall be submitted in electronic format as specified by the City
Engineer, in PDF format, in .dwg format and one full size paper copy.
• Warranty Guarantee shall be original documents.
• All other documents shall be submitted in electronic PDF format.
o Public improvement construction costs
o Inspection reports
o Submittals & material testing reports
o Engineer certifications
o Final as -built drainage report
P.O. BOX 1607, FAYETTEVILLE, AR, 72702 • 479-442-1700 • FAX: 479-695-1118 • WWW.NWADG.COM
RECEIVED
AFFIDAVIT OF PUBLICATION SEP 0 2 2015
I, Cathy Wiles, do solemnly swear that I am the Legal Clerk of the CITY OF FAYETTEVILIE
Northwest Arkansas Democrat Gazette, printed and published in CITY CLERKS OFFICE
Washington and Benton County, Arkansas, and of bona fide circulation,
that from my own personal knowledge and reference to the files
of said publication, the advertisement of:
CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE
Ord. 5789
Was inserted in the Northwest Arkansas Democrat
Gazette on:
August 13, 2015
Publication Charges: $ 90.79
Cathy Wiles
Subscribed and sworn to before me
This26 day of4%+ , 2015.
tt E11 .,
No— teary Public ;��'
My Commission Expires: «}TRry `pro
**NOTE** :Tp '.Q�?a �zo?'
Please do not pay from Affidavit. IIvE} cQ®ti11 ®e Ali.
''lit n''